Foreword: Warranty Information For North America Booklet, and

Foreword
Introduction The type and amount of data recorded varies de-

pending on how the vehicle is equipped (such as the
This manual provides information needed to operate brand of engine, if an air bag is installed, or if the
and understand the vehicle and its components. vehicle features a collision avoidance system, etc.).
More detailed information is contained in the Owner’s GPS location data, fault codes, and other technical
Warranty Information for North America booklet, and data may be recorded.
in the vehicle’s workshop and maintenance manuals. This data may help provide a better understanding of
Custom-built Freightliner vehicles are equipped with the circumstances of a crash.
various chassis and cab components. Not all of the Personal data such as name, gender, and age are
information contained in this manual applies to every not recorded. However, other parties such as law
vehicle. For details about components in your ve- enforcement, could combine the data logger’s con-
hicle, refer to the chassis specification pages in- tents with the type of personally identifying data rou-
cluded in all new vehicles and to the vehicle specifi- tinely acquired during a crash investigation.
cation decal, located inside the vehicle.
For your reference, keep this manual in the vehicle Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
at all times.
Compliance
IMPORTANT: Descriptions and specifications in
this manual were in effect at the time of printing. This vehicle must be regularly inspected and main-
For the most up-to-date information visit https:// tained as indicated in the New Cascadia Mainte-
freightliner.com/ for the latest version of the nance Manual, and in the Pre- and Post-Trip Inspec-
driver’s and maintenance manuals. tions and Maintenance chapter in this manual, in
order to continue satisfactory performance and en-
Freightliner reserves the right to discontinue sure coverage of the vehicle under the manufactur-
models and to change specifications or design er’s warranty.
at any time without notice and without incurring Many maintenance procedures ensure that the ve-
obligation. Descriptions and specifications con- hicle and engine continue to comply with applicable
tained in this publication provide no warranty, emissions standards. Maintenance procedures, using
expressed or implied, and are subject to revi- components engineered to comply with greenhouse
sions and editions without notice. gas emissions and fuel efficiency regulations, may be
performed by an authorized Daimler Truck North
Environmental Concerns and America dealer, an independent outlet, or the vehicle
owner or operator.
Recommendations The vehicle owner is responsible for determining the
Whenever you see instructions in this manual to dis- suitability of replacement components to maintain
card materials, you should first attempt to reclaim compliance with federal and local jurisdictional regu-
and recycle them. To preserve our environment, fol- lations. Components including, but not limited to,
low appropriate environmental rules and regulations tires, cab/sleeper side extenders, chassis fairings,
when disposing of materials. bumper, hood, vehicle speed limiters, and idle reduc-
tion timers are specifically designed and manufac-
tured to exacting standards for regulatory fuel effi-
Data Logging ciency and greenhouse gas emissions compliance. It
This vehicle is equipped with a control module that is important that these components are always re-
performs data logging capabilities. placed with components that meet or exceed the per-
formance of the originally installed components.
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices
that record specific vehicle data and may perform
some of the same functionality as a regulated Event
Data Recorder but the device(s) are not subject to,
nor designed pursuant to, 49 C.F.R. Part 563.
STI-500-10 (04/20/2022)
Part Number STI-500
Printed in U.S.A.
Foreword
Customer Assistance Center Vehicles domiciled in Canada thought to have a

defect that could cause a crash, injury, or death,
Having trouble finding service? Call the Customer should immediately be reported to Transport
Assistance Center at 1-800-385-4357 or 1-800-FTL- Canada and Daimler Truck North America LLC.
HELP. For dealer referrals and breakdown support,
call night or day, weekdays or weekends. For specifi- If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it
cation requests and all other concerns and inquiries, may open an investigation; if it finds that a safety
the Customer Assistance Center is available 6:00 defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a
A.M. to 3:30 P.M. PST Monday through Friday. Our recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport
people are knowledgeable, professional, and commit- Canada cannot become involved in individual
ted to following through to help you keep your truck problems between you, your dealer, or Daimler
moving. Truck North America LLC.
To contact Freightliner about a concern about a
Reporting Safety Defects specific vehicle call the Customer Assistance Cen-
Vehicles domiciled in the USA thought to have a ter at 1-800-385-4357 or complete a Product
defect that could cause a crash, injury, or death, Concern Form.
should immediately be reported to the National To contact Transport Canada, call the Defect In-
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) vestigations and Recalls Division toll-free in
and Daimler Truck North America LLC. Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328 in the
If the NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may Gatinuau-Ottawa area or internationally.
open an investigation; if it finds that a safety de- You can also contact Transport Canada by mail at:
fect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a Transport Canada, 330 Sparks Street, Ottawa, On-
recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA tario, K1A 0N5 Canada.
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Daimler Truck North The following websites contain more information
America LLC. on Canadian recalls:
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline English: www.tc.gc.ca/recalls.
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153).
French: www.tc.gc.ca/rappels.
To e-mail NHTSA, go to www.safertruck.gov/.
For additional road safety information, please visit
You can contact NHTSA by mail at: Administrator, the Road Transportation website:
NHTSA Headquarters, 1200 New Jersey Avenue
SE, West Building, Washington, DC 20590. English: www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road
For more information about motor vehicle safety, French: www.tc.gc.ca/fr/services/routier

go to www.safertruck.gov/.
To contact Freightliner about a concern about a
specific vehicle call the Customer Assistance Cen-
ter at 1-800-385-4357 or complete a Product
Concern Form.
© 2016–2022 Daimler Truck North America LLC. All rights reserved. Daimler Truck North America LLC is a Daimler
company.
No part of this publication, in whole or part, may be translated, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written per-
mission of Daimler Truck North America LLC. For additional information, please contact Daimler Truck North America
LLC, Service Systems and Documentation, P.O. Box 3849, Portland OR 97208–3849 U.S.A. or refer to https://
northamerica.daimlertruck.com/ and https://freightliner.com/.
STI-500-10 (04/20/2022)
Part Number STI-500
Printed in U.S.A.
Contents
Chapter Page
Introduction, Environmental Concerns and Recommendations,
Data Logging, Emissions and Fuel Efficiency Compliance,
Customer Assistance Center, Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foreword
1 Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
2 Vehicle Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
3 Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
4 Driver Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
5 Detroit Assurance 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
6 Detroit Assurance 5.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
7 Driver Assistance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
8 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
9 Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
10 Cab and Sleeper Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
11 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
12 Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
13 Optional Engine Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
14 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
15 Brake Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
16 Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
17 Automated and Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
18 Manual Transmissions and Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
19 Drive Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
20 Fifth Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
21 Trailer Couplings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
22 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
23 Vehicle Appearance and Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
24 Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
25 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1
26 In An Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
27 Telematics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I.1
1
Vehicle Identification
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Component GWR Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Canada Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Mexico Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Customer Assistance Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Component Information Label

NOTE: Labels shown in this chapter are ex-
amples only. Actual specifications may vary from
vehicle to vehicle.
The component information label lists the vehicle
model, identification number, and major component
models and serial numbers.
For vehicles domiciled in Mexico, this label will be in
Spanish as shown in Fig. 1.1. Otherwise it will be
printed in English as shown in Fig. 1.2. 1
INFORMACION DE COMPONENTES
USE EL NUMERO DE IDENTIFICACION
DE VEHICULO CUANDO ORDENE PARTES.
FABRICADO POR: DAIMLER VEHICULOS COMERCIALES MEXICO
MODELO: MM106064S MODELO BASE: M2106 FECHA DE FABRIC: 06/20
NO. DE SERIE VEH: 3ALHCYD28MDMN5409 CLIENTE: V83361 DIST. ENTRE EJE: 230
MOTOR: DD8 7.7L 6 CYL SINGLE STAGE 280 HP / 220 MOTOR: 936913S0010863
TRANS PRINCIPAL: ALLISON 3000 RDS AUTOMATIC TRANSMISION: 6511714361
PTO: TRANSMISSION PTO:
EJE DELANTERO: DETROIT DA-F-12.0-3 12,000# FF1 71.5 KPI EJE DELANTERO: 739912B0165864
EJE INT. 1RO: MT-40-14X 40,000# R-SERIES TANDEM REAR A EJE INT. 1RO: DRA21199653
EJE INT. 2DO: EJE INT. 2DO:
EJE INT. 3RO: EJE INT. 3RO:
EJE INT. 4TO: EJE INT. 4TO:
EJE TRASERO: MT-40-14X 40,000# R-SERIES TANDEM REAR A EJE TRASERO: DRA21199652
PROVEEDOR RELACION: 6.14
DE PINTURA: ELITE EY PAINT C
NO. DE PINTURA: CAB COLOR A: L0006EY PARA INFORMACION COMPLETA DE
PINTURA, VER HOJA DE
09/29/2020 f080212
ESPECIFICACIONES DE L VEHICULO.
09/29/2020 f080196s Fig. 1.3, Component Information Label Location
Fig. 1.1, Component Information Label (Spanish) The component GWR label (see Fig. 1.4) provides
maximum GWR ratings for each component. For ve-
COMPONENT INFORMATION
hicles domiciled in Mexico, this label will be in Span-
SEE VEHICLE ID NO.
WHEN ORDERING PARTS ish as shown in Fig. 1.5.
MANUFACTURED BY: DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC
MODEL: PX113064S T BASE MODEL: CA113DC DATE OF MFR: 07/15 The component GWR label is located on the right-
VEHICLE ID NO: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999 CUSTOMER: N00000 WHEELBASE: 164
hand B-pillar as shown in Fig. 1.6.
ENGINE MOD: DETROIT DD13 12.8L 410 HP / 1800 RPM, 20 ENGINE NO: 999999S9999999
MAIN TRANS MOD: DT12-DB-1450 HEAVY DUTY 12-SPEED DIRECT TRANS NO: 99999999999999
PTO. NO:
PTO. MOD:
FRONT AXLE MOD:
1ST INT AXLE MOD:
MFS-12-143A 12,000# FF1 SINGLE FRONT AXL
MT-40-14X 40,000# R-SERIES DUALTRAC 74-7
FRONT AXLE NO: MON99999999
1ST INT AXLE NO: FOR99999999
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
2ND INT AXLE MOD:
3RD INT AXLE MOD:
4TH INT AXLE MOD:
2ND INT AXLE NO:
3RD INT AXLE NO:
4TH INT AXLE NO:
Standard Label
5TH INT AXLE MOD: 5TH INT AXLE NO:
6TH INT AXLE MOD:
REAR AXLE MOD: MT-40-14X 40,000# R-SERIES DUALTRAC 74-7
6TH INT AXLE NO:
REAR AXLE NO: FOR99999999
Tractors with or without fifth wheels manufactured for
PAINT MFR: ELITE BC PAINT C
RATIO: 2.47
the U.S. are marked as certified by means of an
PAINT CODE: CAB COLOR A: L0306EB
FOR COMPLETE PAINT INFORMATION
SEE VEHICLE SPECIFICATION SHEET.
FMVSS certification label which also lists suitable tire
06/21/2016 f080196
and rim combinations. See Fig. 1.8 for an example
of a FMVSS vehicle certification label.
Fig. 1.2, Component Information Label (English) This label is attached to the left-hand B-pillar. It is
The component information label is attached to the applied on the interior edge for vehicles domiciled in
outside of the ziplock document bag and the right- the United States or manufactured for U.S./Canada
hand door. See Fig. 1.3. operation. See Fig. 1.6.
Tractors built without a fifth wheel for U.S. operations
Component GWR Label will have an incomplete FMVSS vehicle certification
label. The incomplete vehicle documentation included
NOTE: Vehicles manufactured for the Canada with the vehicle will certify the vehicle conforms to all
market will have a Canada Certification label applicable regulations in effect on the date of
instead of a component GWR label.
1.1
COMPONENT (KG)LBS COMPONENT FRONT AXLE 1ST INT AXLE 2ND INT AXLE 3RD INT AXLE 4TH INT AXLE 5TH INT AXLE 6TH INT AXLE REAR AXLE COMPONENT GVWR
MAXIMUM GWR BY
AXLES: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 CHASSIS:

SUSPENSION: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 ENG/TRANS:
TIRES: ( 5601) 12350 ( 9253) 20400 ( 9253) 20400 5TH WHEEL:
RIMS: ( 6713) 14800 (11612) 25600 (11612) 25600 PARK BRAKE:
HUBS/SPOKES: ( 6032) 13300 (10432) 23000 (10432) 23000 AXLE:
BRAKES: ( 6032) 13300 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000
STEERING: ( 6032) 13300 VIN: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999
06/21/2016 f080200
Fig. 1.4, Component GWR Label (English)
COMPONENTE DELANTERO PRIMERO 1RO 2DO 3RO 4TO 5TO 6TO EJE TRASERO PESO BRUTO DEL COMPONENTE
POR COMPONENTE
EJE: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 LARGUERO:

PESO MAXIMO
SUSPENSION: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 MOTOR/TRANS: (36288) 80000
NEUMATICOS: ( 5996) 13220 (10596) 23360 (10596) 23360
(KG)LB
QUINTA RUEDA:
RIM/AROS: ( 6713) 14800 (13426) 29600 (13426) 29600 FRENO ESTAC:
CUBOS/RADIOS: ( 6032) 13300 (11793) 26000 (11793) 26000 EJE:
FRENOS: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9525) 21000 ( 9525) 21000
DIRECCION: ( 6032) 13300 VIN: 3ALHCYD28MDMN5409
09/29/2020 f080200s
Fig. 1.5, Component GWR Label (Spanish)
completion. The final certification label must be at- See Fig. 1.10 for an example of a Canada certifica-
tached by the final-stage manufacturer. tion label.
The FMVSS label is applied to the exterior edge of Trucks built without a cargo body and tractors built
the B-pillar if paired with a Spanish weights and without a fifth wheel that are intended for service in
measurements label. See Fig. 1.6. Vehicles domi- Canada will have an incomplete Canada vehicle cer-
ciled in Mexico are labeled with a Spanish weights tification label attached to the left-hand B-pillar. After
and measurement label that lists suitable tire and rim completion of the vehicle, a complete Canada certifi-
combinations. See Fig. 1.9. cation label must be attached by the final-stage
manufacturer to certify that the vehicle conforms to
The tire and rim combinations listed on these labels
all applicable vehicle safety regulations in effect on
are those that can be installed on the vehicle for the
the date of completion.
given gross axle weight rating. Tires and rims in-
stalled on the vehicle at the time of manufacture may
have a higher load capacity than that certified by the Mexico Labeling
tire and rim label. If the tires and rims currently on
the vehicle have a lower load capacity than that Mexico Certification Label
shown on the tire and rim label, then the tires and The Mexico certification label states that the vehicle
rims determine the load limitations on each of the complies with the Normas Oficiales Mexicanas
axles. (NOMs) standards in effect on the date the vehicle
was manufactured. See Fig. 1.11.
Canada Certification Label Vehicles domiciled in Mexico will have a Mexico cer-
Complete tractors with fifth wheels manufactured for tification label applied to the right-hand B-pillar as
Canada are marked with a Canada certification label show in Fig. 1.6.
attached to the left-hand B-pillar.
Spanish Weights and Measures Label
Complete tractors with fifth wheels manufactured for
dual Canada/United States operations will have both Vehicles with a Mexico certification label will also
a FMVSS certification label and Canada certification have a Spanish weights and measures label. See
label. In this case the FMVSS certification label will Fig. 1.9 for an example.
be applied on the interior edge of the B-pillar and the When both a United States Federal Motor Vehicle
Canada certification label will be applied on the exte- Safety Standard (FMVSS) label and a Spanish
rior edge as show in Fig. 1.6.
1.2
1 8
6 9
3 7
4
5
A B C
09/29/2020 f720776f
A. Left-Hand B-Pillar B. Left-Hand Door C. Right-Hand B-Pillar
1. Primary Noise Emission Control 4. Canada Certification Label or 8. Mexico Certification Label
Label (Mexico or United States) FMVSS Certification Label 9. Component GWR Label (Spanish
2. Customer Assistance Label 5. Entry/Exit Warning Decal or English)
(United States or Mexico) 6. Vehicle Emission Control
3. FMVSS Certification Label or Information Label
Spanish Weights and 7. Secondary Noise Emission
Measurement Label Control Label (English)
Fig. 1.6, Label Locations
COMPONENT FRONT AXLE 1ST INT AXLE 2ND INT AXLE 3RD INT AXLE 4TH INT AXLE 5TH INT AXLE 6TH INT AXLE REAR AXLE COMPONENT GVWR
COMPONENT (KG)LBS
MAXIMUM GWR BY
AXLES: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 CHASSIS:

SUSPENSION: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 ENG/TRANS:
TIRES: ( 5601) 12350 ( 9253) 20400 ( 9253) 20400 5TH WHEEL:
RIMS: ( 6713) 14800 (11612) 25600 (11612) 25600 PARK BRAKE:
HUBS/SPOKES: ( 6032) 13300 (10432) 23000 (10432) 23000 AXLE:
BRAKES: ( 6032) 13300 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000
STEERING: ( 6032) 13300 VIN: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999
06/21/2016 f080200
Fig. 1.7, Component GWR Label
1.3
MANUFACTURED BY: DAIMLER TRUCKS N.A. LLC GAWR/PNBE GAWR/PNBE TIRES RIMS KPA PSI "S"
KGS LBS COLD COLD
DATE OF MFR: 07/15
GVWR/PNBV-KG: 23,587 FRONT AXLE: 5,443 12,000 275/80R22.5(G) 22.5X8.25 758 110 S
GVWR/PNBV-LBS: 52,000 1ST INT AXLE: 9,072 20,000 445/50R22.5(L) 22.5X14.0 827 120 S
THIS VEHICLE COMPLIES WITH ALL 2ND INT AXLE:
APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE 3RD INT AXLE:
SAFETY STANDARDS IN EFFECT AT THE DATE
OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE. 4 TH INT AXLE:
VEHICLE ID NO: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999 5TH INT AXLE:
TYPE: TRUCK/TRACTOR TT/CT 6TH INT AXLE:
COUNTRY OF ORIGIN: U.S.A. REAR AXLE: 9,072 20,000 445/50R22.5(L) 22.5X14.0 827 120 S
08/31/2020 f080199
Fig. 1.8, FMVSS Vehicle Certification Label (complete vehicle)
FABRICADO POR: DAIMLER VEHICULOS COMERCIALES MEXICO PV-KGS PV-LBS NEUMATICOS RIM/AROS KPA PSI "S"ENCILLA/
FECHA DE FABRICACION: 06/20 FRIO FRIO "D"OBLE
PBV (GVWR)-KG: 23,587 EJE DELANTERO: 5,443 12,000 11R22.5(H) 22.5X8.25 827 120 S
9,072 20,000 11R22.5(G) 22.5X8.25 724 105 D
PBV (GVWR)-LBS: 52,000 1RO:
2DO:
3RO:
4TO:
NO. SERIE VEHICULO: 3ALHCYD28MDMN5409 5TO:
CHASIS-CABINA 6TO:
EJE TRASERO: 9,072 20,000 11R22.5(G) 22.5X8.25 724 105 D
FABRIC. DE MEX.
09/29/2020 f080199s
Fig. 1.9, Spanish Weights and Measures Label
VIN/NIV: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CANADA CERTIFICATION DATE OF MFR: 01/20
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS PRESCRIBED UNDER THE CANADIAN MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY REGULATIONS IN
EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE / CE VEHICULE EST CONFORME A TOUTES LES NORMES QUI LUI SONT APPLICABLES EN VERTU DU
REGLEMENT SUR LA SECURITE DES VEHICULES AUTOMOBILES DU CANADA EN VIGUEUR A LA DATE DE SA FABRICATION.
08/31/2020 f080218a
Fig. 1.10, Canada Certification Label
INFORMACION CONTROL DE ESPECIFICACIONES DE SEGURIDAD DEL VEHICULO

all EPA exhaust gas emission regulations effective as
DAIMLER VEHICULOS COMERCIALES MEXICO S. DE R.L. DE C.V. FECHA DE FABRICACION: 06/20
ESTE VEHICULO CUMPLE CON LA NORMA OFICIAL MEXICANA: NOM-068-SCT-2-2014 AL MOMENTO DE SER ENAJENADO. per the applicable emission model year, and are
equipped with an emission aftertreatment system
(ATS).
09/29/2020 f080228s
Vehicles domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada
Fig. 1.11, Mexico Certification Label may not have aftertreatment equipment, depending
upon local statutory emissions guidelines.
weights and measures label are applied to the left-
hand B-pillar, the Spanish label will be applied on the See Table 1.1 and Table 1.2 for additional informa-
interior edge of the B-pillar and the FMVSS label will tion on what EPA and GHG regulations apply to dif-
be applied on the exterior edge. See Fig. 1.6. ferent model years.
See Fig. 1.12 for information on the driver’s visor
Emissions Labels warning label for important warning indicators in the
instrument cluster that pertain to the ATS.
Aftertreatment System Indicators
Label
Model year 2007 and later diesel engines in vehicles
domiciled in the U.S. or Canada are required to meet
1.4
EPA Regulations
Regulation Emissions Components
EPA07 (Reduction of nitrogen
oxides (NOx) emissions to 1.1 Aftertreatment device (ATD) containing a diesel particulate filter that traps soot and
g/bhp-hr, and particulate matter ash.*
emissions to 0.01 g/bhp-hr)
EPA10 (Reduction of NOx EPA07-type ATD, with additional selective catalyst reduction (SCR) technology that
emissions to 0.2 g/bhp-hr) utilizes diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) to convert NOx to nitrogen and water vapor.
Fuel efficiency components including, but not limited to, engines, tires, aerodynamic
GHG14 (Reduction of greenhouse
components, vehicle speed limiters, and idle reduction timers specifically designed to
gas emissions)
meet regulatory fuel efficiency and greenhouse gas emissions standards.
GHG17 components, vehicle speed limiters, and idle reduction timers specifically designed to
GHG14/17 components plus additional components including, but not limited to,
GHG21 transmissions, axles, predictive technologies, idle reduction technologies for
vocational vehicles, and tire pressure monitoring systems.
* Cummins and Detroit ATD’s are also equipped with a diesel oxidation catalyst to break down pollutants.
Table 1.1, EPA Regulations
Emission Regulations by Model Year

Model Year Engine Regulation Vehicle Regulation
2007–2009 EPA07 N/A
2010–2012 EPA10 N/A
2013–2015 EPA10, GHG14 GHG14
2016 EPA10, GHG17 GHG14
2017–2020 EPA10, GHG17 GHG17
2021–and later EPA10, GHG21 GHG21
Table 1.2, Emission Regulations by Model Year
A Vehicle Emission Control Information Label is lo-

It is a violation of U.S. federal law to alter exhaust cated on the left-hand door. See Fig. 1.6. Among
plumbing, ATS, or other components in any way that other GHG relevant information the label indicates
would bring the engine/vehicle out of compliance with the emission model year of the vehicle. As this label
certification requirements [Ref: 42 U.S.C. S7522(a) is about meeting United States federal requirements,
(3)]. It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the it is printed in English.
vehicle so that it conforms to EPA regulations.
It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle
Vehicle Emission Control Information so that it conforms to U.S. EPA and NHTSA
regulations.
Label
Model year 2013 and later vehicles meet require- Noise Emission Control Labels
ments as specified by GHG14, GHG17 and GHG21 For vehicles manufactured for operation in the United
regulations, respectively. These vehicles are States, an English language EPA noise emission
equipped with components that increase fuel effi- control label is applied to attest that the vehicle con-
ciency and reduce greenhouse gas (GHG) emis- forms to United States EPA regulations for noise.
sions. Components may include, but are not limited See Fig. 1.14.
to, low-rolling resistance tires; aerodynamic devices
such as hood, cab side extenders, and fuel tank fair- For vehicles manufactured for operation in Mexico, a
ings; vehicle speed limiters; and idle shutdown tim- Spanish language Normas Oficiales Mexicanas
ers. (NOM) vehicle noise emission control label attesting
1.5
10/23/2020 f080234
Fig. 1.12, ATS Indicators, EPA10 and Newer
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION EPA noise emission control label will be applied to
Manufactured By: DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC
VIN/NIV: 1FUJGBDV4GLZZ9999
Date of Manufacture: 07/15
REGULATORY CLASS: High-roof day cab tractors above 33,000
the left-hand door as shown in Fig. 1.6.
VEH FAMILY CD: GDTN2TRAC13C pounds GVWR.
GVWR-PNBV-KG: 23,587 It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the vehicle
GVWR-PNBV-LBS: 52,000 EMISSION CONTROL IDENTIFIERS: LRRA, ARF, TGR
so it conforms to all applicable regulations (EPA,
NOM).
THIS VEHICLE COMPLIES WITH U.S. EPA AND CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS FOR 2016
HEAVY DUTY VEHICLES. See owner's manual for proper maintenance of this vehicle. VEHICLE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC DATE OF MANUFACTURE: 07/15
06/21/2016 f080198 THIS COMPLETE VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR NOISE EMISSIONS
APPLICABLE TO MEDIUM AND HEAVY TRUCKS. THE FOLLOWING ACTS, OR THE CAUSING
THEREOF BY ANY PERSON ARE PROHIBITED BY THE NOISE CONTROL ACT OF 1972.
Fig. 1.13, Vehicle Emission Control Information Label A. THE REMOVAL OR RENDERING INOPERABLE OF, OTHER THAN FOR PURPOSES OF
MAINTENANCE, REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY NOISE CONTROL DEVICE OR
ELEMENT OF DESIGN (LISTED IN THE OWNER'S MANUAL) INCORPORATED INTO THIS
VEHICLE IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE NOISE CONTROL ACT.
that the vehicle conforms to Mexican NOM regula- B. THE USE OF THIS VEHICLE AFTER SUCH DEVICE OR ELEMENT OF DESIGN HAS BEEN
REMOVED OR RENDERED INOPERABLE.
tions for noise is applied. See Fig. 1.15.
If only a single noise emission control label is ap- 06/21/2016 f080197
plied, it will be located in the primary location on the
Fig. 1.14, EPA Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label
left-hand B-pillar as show in Fig. 1.6. (complete vehicle)
For vehicles manufactured for dual Mexico/United
States operation, both labels are applied. The NOM IMPORTANT: Certain Freightliner incomplete
vehicle noise emission control label will be located in vehicles may be produced for the United States
the primary location on the left-hand B-pillar and the market with incomplete noise control hardware.
Such vehicles will have an incomplete vehicle
1.6
INFORMACION CONTROL DE EMISION DE RUIDO DEL VEHICULO

DAIMLER VEHICULOS COMERCIALES MEXICO FECHA DE FABRICACION: 06/20
ESTE VEHICULO CUMPLE CON LA NORMA OFICIAL MEXICANA: NOM-079-ECOL-1994 QUE
ESTABLIECE LIMITES MAXIMOS PERMISIBLES DE LA EMISION DE RUIDO DE LOS VEHICULOS
AUTOMTORES NUEVOS EN PLANTA Y SU METODO DE MEDICION PUBLICADA EN EL D.O.F. DEL
12 DE ENERO DE 1995.
CERTIFIED
09/29/2020 f080197s CLEAN IDLE
Fig. 1.15, NOM Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label
(complete vehicle)
noise emission control information label. See

02/20/2012 f080179
Fig. 1.16. For such vehicles, it is the final-stage
manufacturer’s responsibility to complete the Fig. 1.17, CARB Clean Idle Label
vehicle in conformity to the applicable regula-
tions and label it for compliance.
CENTRO DE ASISTENCIA
VEHICLE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION AL CLIENTE LLAMA COSTO AL
DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC DATE OF MANUFACTURE: 01/16
THIS INCOMPLETE VEHICLE AS DELIVERED BY DAIMLER TRUCKS NORTH AMERICA LLC 01-800-590-2000
CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA REGULATIONS FOR NOISE EMISSIONS APPLICABLE TO MEDIUM
AND HEAVY TRUCKS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE FINAL STAGE MANUFACTURER
TO COMPLETE THIS VEHICLE WHILE MAINTAINING CONFORMANCE TO 40 CFR PART 205,
INCLUDING LABELING FOR COMPLIANCE (SEC. 205.55-41). 24 HRS/DIA
7 DIAS/SEMANA
10/17/2016 f080201a 09/29/2020 f080207s
Fig. 1.16, EPA Vehicle Noise Emission Control Label Fig. 1.18, Customer Assistance Label, Spanish
(incomplete vehicle)
Certified Clean Idle Label FOR CUSTOMER
The California Air Resources Board (CARB) requires ASSISTANCE CENTER:

model year 2008 and newer heavy-duty diesel en- 1-800-FTL-HELP
gines to meet CARB’s Heavy-Duty Diesel Engine 1-800-385-4357
Idling Requirement in order to limit emissions of par- 24 HRS/DAY

ticulate matter and NOx. 7 DAYS/WEEK
Certified vehicles are equipped with a label placed

09/28/2020 f080207
near the bottom exterior edge of the left-hand door.
See Fig. 1.17. Fig. 1.19, Customer Assistance Label, English
Customer Assistance Label

The customer assistance center telephone number is
printed on the customer assistance label. The label
also includes a QR code encoded with the VIN, read-
able by dealer apps, to bring up information about
the vehicle.
For vehicles domiciled in Mexico this label will be in
Spanish as shown in Fig. 1.18. For vehicles domi-
ciled in the United States it will printed in English as
shown in Fig. 1.19.
The customer assistance label is located on the left-
hand B-pillar, as shown in Fig. 1.6.
1.7
2
Vehicle Access
Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Grab Handles and Access Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Cab-to-Sleeper Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Sleeper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Sleeper Luggage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
External Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Hood Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Vehicle Access
Door Locks and Handles 1 2 3 4

One common key operates the ignition switch and all
of the door locks.
IMPORTANT: Each key is numbered. Record
the number so a duplicate key can be made, if
needed.
To unlock the driver’s door from outside the cab, in-
sert the key in the lockset and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise. See Fig. 2.1. To remove the key, turn it
counterclockwise to the original position. Pull out on
the door pull handle to open the door.
01/31/2022 f720769
2 1. Lock Button
1 2. Integral Door Upper Grab Handle
3. Door Lever
4. Door Control Panel
Fig. 2.2, Door Interior
3
Remote Keyless Entry
Key Fob Use
02/02/2017 f720397
DANGER
1. Key 3. Door Pull Handle
2. Lockset Do not ingest the key fob battery. The button cell
Fig. 2.1, Exterior Door Handle
battery in this key fob is a chemical burn hazard.
Always keep the key fob and button cell batteries
To unlock the passenger’s door from outside the cab, away from children.
insert the key in the lockset and turn it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise. Turn the key clockwise to the Always safely dispose of used batteries.
original position to remove it. If the button cell battery in this key fob is swal-
NOTE: The cab door locks can be operated lowed, it can cause severe internal burns within
when the doors are open. two hours and can lead to death. If you think a
battery might have been swallowed or otherwise
To lock a door from outside the cab, insert the key in placed inside any part of the body, seek immedi-
the lockset and turn it in the direction opposite to the ate medical attention.
unlocking direction (counterclockwise for the driver’s
door, clockwise for the passenger’s door). Close the If the battery compartment does not close se-
door if it is open. curely, stop using the key fob.
To lock either door from inside the cab, push the lock
button downwards. See Fig. 2.2.
CAUTION
To open the door from the inside, lift up on the door Failure to observe the following safety instruc-
lever. This will unlatch the door whether or not it is tions can result in an explosion, fire, damage to
locked. the key fob, electric shock and other injuries, as
well as property damage:
To unlock the door without unlatching it, pull the lock
button upwards.
2.1
Vehicle Access
• Do not pierce, break, crush, or cut the key fob • To lock both doors, press the lock button.
or the battery.
• To unlock both doors, press the unlock button.
• Do not expose the key fob or the battery to an
• To open the door windows, press the unlock
open flame or extremely high temperatures.
button for three seconds.
• Do not expose the key fob or the battery to
• To start or end the pre-trip light check, press
liquids or extremely low air pressure.
the lamp check button.
• Do not try to charge the key fob battery. It is
not rechargeable. Key Fob Programming
• The key fob housing is made of plastic with A maximum of four fobs can be programmed to work
sensitive electronic components and a CR2450 on one vehicle. Whenever a new fob is needed, all
button cell battery. There is a risk of explosion existing fobs must be reprogrammed at the same
if the battery is replaced with a battery other time. Any existing fobs that were previously pro-
than a CR2450. grammed will no longer work on the vehicle unless
• The button cell battery that powers this device they are all reprogrammed at the same time.
is considered hazardous and must be recycled To have the key fobs programmed, take the vehicle
or disposed of separately from household to an authorized Freightliner dealer or service facility.
waste. Store the old battery in a safe place
until it can be disposed of safely. Specifications
This system consists of a key fob that uses a radio
NOTICE frequency link for communication between the fob
and the vehicle.
Do not drop the key fob. Doing so could damage
the fob, including damage to the battery compart-
ment allowing the button cell battery to fall out. Grab Handles and Access
Keyless entry is optional on New Cascadia vehicles. Steps
The key fob can be used to transmit a signal to re-
motely lock and unlock the doors, start and end the For ease of entry and exit, there is a handle on both
pre-trip light check, and open the door windows. See the A-pillar and the B-pillar. In addition, the steering
Fig. 2.3. wheel and door grab handle may be used to provide
a secure handhold. There are at least two access
steps to provide secure footholds.
2 1
3
CAUTION
Slipping or falling from the vehicle can result in
personal injury or property damage.
Wet or dirty shoes greatly increase the chance of
slipping or falling. If your shoes are wet or dirty,
be especially careful when entering or exiting the
vehicle.
Always maintain three-point contact with the ve-
hicle when entering or exiting the cab. Three-
point contact means both feet and one hand, or
both hands and one foot.
When steps are mounted on battery box covers,
10/23/2019 f546880a make sure that the cover is latched and secure
1. Lock Button 3. Lamp Check Button before using the steps.
2. Unlock Button
Fig. 2.3, Key Fob
2.2
Vehicle Access
Do not step on the fuel tank, battery box, frame, way as you exit, then retrieve them after you
etc. unless adequate slip resistant surfaces and have exited the cab.
handholds are provided.
Do not jump from the vehicle. CAUTION
Do not use parts of the vehicle as hand holds Always face in when exiting the cab. Do not at-
that are not designed for this purpose. tempt to exit with your back to the cab, as you
would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to
Entering the Driver Side slip or lose your balance. If you slip when exiting
1. Open the driver-side door and place anything in this way, there is a greater likelihood of per-
that you are carrying in the cab. sonal injury.
2. Facing the cab, grasp the B-pillar and A-pillar 1. Grasp the steering wheel with your right hand
grab handles with your hands. See Fig. 2.4. and the A-pillar grab handle with your left hand,
and place your left foot on the top step. See
Fig. 2.4.
3 2. Face into the cab, and grasp the B-pillar grab
handle with your right hand.
3. Step down on the bottom step with your right
foot, grasping the grab handles lower as you
move down.
4. Step to the ground with your left foot first.
Entering the Passenger Side

1. Open the passenger-side door and place any-
thing that you are carrying in the cab.
2. Facing the cab, grasp the B-pillar and A-pillar
grab handles with your hands. See Fig. 2.5.
3. Step up on the bottom step with your left foot.
4. Step up on the top step with your right foot,
grasping the grab handles higher as you move
2
1 up.
03/28/2016 f720770
1. B-Pillar Grab Handle 3. Steering Wheel 5. Step into the cab with your left foot first, while
2. A-Pillar Grab Handle holding on to the grab handle with your right
hand.
Fig. 2.4, Driver-Side Cab Access
3. Step up on the bottom step with your right foot. Exiting the Passenger Side
4. Step up on the top step with your left foot, grasp- IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab
ing the grab handles higher as you move up. while carrying any items in your hands. Place
them in an accessible location on the seat or
5. Step into the cab with your right foot first, and cab floor and make sure they will not get in your
grasp the steering wheel with your left hand.
way as you exit, then retrieve them after you
Exiting the Driver Side have exited the cab.
IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab CAUTION

while carrying any items in your hands. Place
them in an accessible location on the seat or Always face in when exiting the cab. Do not at-
cab floor and make sure they will not get in your tempt to exit with your back to the cab, as you
2.3
Vehicle Access
Sleeper Door
2 The sleeper door (Fig. 2.6, Ref. 1) is not intended for
entry or exit. The door is intended only as a conve-
nient means to stow or remove personal belongings
1 in and from the sleeper area. To open the sleeper
door from the inside, push down on the lever handle
located inside the sleeper compartment aft of the
door, or pull out on the upper lever located inside the
cab door opening; see Fig. 2.7. To open the sleeper
door from outside, open the cab door, then pull out
on the upper lever located inside the cab door open-
ing. To close the door, pull on the strap attached to
the inside of the door, or push it closed from the out-
side, until it latches.
IMPORTANT: The sleeper doors have two-stage
latching. When closing the doors, ensure that
they are completely latched to prevent wind
noise and water intrusion.
08/26/2021 f720771
1. B-Pillar Grab Handle
2. A-Pillar Grab Handle
Fig. 2.5, Passenger-Side Cab Access
would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to

slip or lose your balance. If you slip when exiting 1
in this way, there is a greater likelihood of per-
sonal injury.
2
1. Grasp the A-pillar grab handle with both hands,
and place your right foot on the top step. See
Fig. 2.5.
2. Face into the cab, and grasp the B-pillar grab
handle with your left hand.
08/29/2016 f602302a
3. Step down on the bottom step with your right
1. Sleeper Door
foot, grasping the grab handles lower as you
2. Luggage Compartment Door
move down.
4. Step to the ground with your left foot first. Fig. 2.6, Sleeper Doors
Cab-to-Sleeper Access Sleeper Luggage Door

To open the sleeper luggage door (Fig. 2.6, Ref. 2),
To open the sleeper access on vehicles with vinyl pull out on the lower lever located inside the cab
sleeper curtains, unzip the sleeper curtains. If de- door opening; see Fig. 2.7. To close the sleeper lug-
sired, unsnap the curtains all the way around the gage door, push it closed until it latches.
sides and top, and remove the curtains.
To open the sleeper access on vehicles with velour Back-of-Cab Access
sleeper curtains, unfasten the snaps at one side,
then push the curtain to the opposite side. When trailer air and electrical connections cannot be
reached conveniently from the ground, Federal Motor
2.4
Vehicle Access
Always follow safety procedures for back-of-cab

access, maintaining three-point contact—both
hands and one foot, or both feet and one hand—
whenever moving around, and always face in to-
ward the deck plate when climbing up or down.
Wet or dirty shoes, steps, or grab rails greatly
1 increase the chance of slipping or falling. If your
shoes or the contact areas are wet or dirty, clean
A
C and dry them as much as possible before ac-
C
E
S
cessing the back of cab area, and be especially
S
careful when climbing or standing on the vehicle.
Never jump onto, or off of, a vehicle; doing so
creates a very high likelihood of a fall and per-
B
sonal injury.
A
G
G
A
IMPORTANT: Climb onto, and down from, back-
G
E of-cab access facing in toward the vehicle, as
you would on a ladder. Do not climb up or down
2
facing out away from the vehicle.
1
03/31/2016 f720773
1. Sleeper Door Lever
2. Luggage Door Lever
Fig. 2.7, Sleeper Door Levers
Carrier Safety Regulations require commercial carri-

ers to provide back-of-cab access.
A grab handle is typically located on the back wall of
the sleeper or cab. Steps are mounted on the frame
rail, and a deck plate is mounted across the top of
the frame rails. See Fig. 2.8.
CAUTION
Follow these rules for back-of-cab access. Failing
to follow these rules could lead to a fall, and pos- 2
sible personal injury. 03/30/2016 f720772
1. Deck Plate 3. Grab Handle
Never step on any exterior part unless it has a
2. Steps
slip-resistant surface meant for safe stepping. If
the surface is movable, such as a battery box Fig. 2.8, Back-of-Cab Access
cover with a slip-resistant surface, be certain it is
firmly secured.
Be careful not to trip on items such as chains or
air lines in the back-of-cab area.
2.5
Vehicle Access
Accessing Back-of-Cab Area 1
WARNING
External surfaces of the exhaust system remain 2
hot after the engine has been shut down. When
accessing the back of the cab or sleeper, do not
touch any part of the exhaust system other than
the exhaust-mounted grab handle, if equipped, or
severe burns could occur.
1. Facing the deckplate, grasp the grab handle with
both hands. Reach up as far as is comfortable.
2. Place one foot on the bottom step and pull your-
self up.
3. Place your other foot on the top step.
09/13/2021 f720829
4. Move your lower hand to a higher position on the 1. A-Pillar Turning Vane
grab handle. 2. "Not a Handhold"
5. Step onto the deck plate. Symbol
Fig. 2.9, A-Pillar Turning Vane
Exiting Back-of-Cab Area
1. Facing toward the center of the vehicle, grasp Hood Opening and Closing
the grab handle with both hands.
The hood can be raised to a full-open position. Tilt-
2. Step one foot at a time onto the top step. assist struts help to both raise the hood and lower it
into the vehicle operating position.
3. Move your upper hand to a lower position on the
grab handle. In the vehicle operating position, the hood is secured
to the cab-mounted cowl by a hold-down latch on
4. Move one foot to the bottom step. each side.
5. Step to the ground with your upper foot first. Newer vehicles may be equipped with a right-hand
locking hood strut. This strut locks automatically
External Cab Access when the hood is fully opened. See Fig. 2.10.
A-Pillar Turning Vane To unlock the strut and lower the hood, flip the lever
located midway on the strut downwards.
WARNING Opening the Hood
When accessing the outside of the cab to clean 1. Release both hood hold-down latches by pulling
the door’s windows or windshield, do not grab or the handles outward.
hold onto the A-pillar turning vane. This feature
is not designed as a steadying device or hand- 2. Slowly tilt the hood with both hands on the grab
hold. handle.
Misuse of the turning vane may result in injury to 3. As the hood starts to open, walk backwards as
the operator or damage to the truck. you pull. The hood will stop in the full-open posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT: If equipped, check that the auto-
matic locking hood strut is fully engaged before
working on the vehicle.
2.6
Vehicle Access
02/09/2021 f880967
A. Locking Lever
Fig. 2.10, Locking Right-Hand Hood Strut
Closing the Hood

1. If the vehicle is equipped with a locking hood-
strut, disengage it by pushing the lever down.
2. Push on the top center of the hood, tilting it to-
ward the closed position.
3. As the hood goes over center, allow it to settle
on the rear supports.
4. Make sure the hood is flush with the cowl, then
secure the hood by engaging both hood hold-
down latches.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that both hood hold-
down latches are fully engaged before operating
the vehicle.
2.7
3
Instruments
Instrumentation Control Unit: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Driver Display Overview: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Digital Gauges and System Monitors: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Infotainment: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Analog Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Instrumentation Control Unit: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Driver Display Overview: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Digital Gauges and System Monitors: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Infotainment: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Warnings, Indicators, and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Instruments
Instrumentation Control Unit: The driver display screen provides information on

various vehicle systems as well as warnings, cau-
ICUC tions, and notifications on systems status.
The instrumentation control unit (ICU) provides the Ignition Sequence
driver with engine and vehicle information. A New
Cascadia vehicle can be equipped with either an When the ignition is turned on, the ICU runs a self-
ICUC or ICC5. See Fig. 3.1 for a typical ICUC check. Observing the ignition sequence is a good
layout. way to ensure the ICU is functioning properly.
This section provides general system and operating IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the
instructions for ICUC components. Following sections ICU self-check is complete.
provide more detailed information.
7
6
A B C D E F
5 4 3
06/28/2018 f611362
1. Speedometer 5. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge C. Vehicle Operations

2. Coolant Temperature Gauge 6. Tachometer D. Maintenance
3. Primary and Secondary Air 7. Driver Display E. Infotainment
Pressure Gauge A. Home F. User Settings
4. Fuel and DEF Level Gauge B. Drive Time Systems
Fig. 3.1, Instrument Cluster Overview - ICUC
ICUC ICUC
The instrument cluster unit (common), or ICUC, is NOTE: Air gauges in the ICUC do not complete
comprised of six physical gauges, indicator lamps a sweep of their dials during the ignition se-
(telltales), a six inch portrait driver display screen, quence.
steering wheel mounted switches, and audible warn-
ing systems. Warning and indicator lamps illuminate When the ignition is turned on, the following actions
in red (warning), amber (caution), green (status on), should occur in the ICUC:
or blue (high-beam headlights active). • Freightliner and engine logo displays on the
driver display until startup is complete
3.1
Instruments
• Speedometer and tachometer complete a full

sweep of their dials
• Warning and indicator lamps illuminate, then 1
are extinguished (if not active)
• Audible alert sounds for any active faults
• Active alerts are displayed on the ICUC
screen. 3
If the ICUC receives active fault codes, it displays

them one after the other until the ignition is turned
off. The alerts are displayed until they are acknowl-
edged. If there are no active faults, the ICUC dis-
plays the home screen after the self-check com-
pletes.
IMPORTANT: If any red or amber warning and
indicator lamps do not illuminate during the
ICUC self-check or do not go out (if not active)
after the self-check completes, take the vehicle
2
to an authorized Freightliner service facility as
soon as possible.
If active faults are present, take the action out-
04/21/2016 f611363
lined in "Warnings, Indicators, and Messages"
tables in this chapter, then take the vehicle to 1. Top Level Menu Categories
2. Static Menu
an authorized Freightliner service facility as 3. Current Screen Indicator
soon as possible.
Fig. 3.2, ICUC Driver Display
ICUC Screen Navigation If present, the screen indicator dashes communicate
In the ICUC, the driver display screen is broken up how many display screens are available in the cur-
into three areas: a navigable menu at the top of the rent menu category. See Fig. 3.2.
screen, the display area (with a screen indicator if To navigate the ICUC menus, use the Menu Right
there is more than one page), and a static display at and Menu Left switches on the steering wheel to
the bottom of the screen. See Fig. 3.2. move between the top-level menus.
NOTE: To adjust the brightness of ICUC screen Use the Menu Up and Menu Down buttons to move
go to User Settings. from screen to screen within the selected category.
The ICUC top level menu categories allows a driver See Fig. 3.4 for an overview of steering wheel
to quickly carry out common actions. Top level menu mounted switches.
categories include Home, Drive Time Systems, Ve-
hicle Operations, Maintenance, Infotainment, and For Quick Access Systems menus press the Quick
Access System Settings button in the right-hand
User Settings. See Fig. 3.1.
switch pod. If Quick Access Systems menus are not
The static menu display shows vehicle speed, trans- available, the button will bring up the home screen.
mission gear indicators, cruise control settings, and a
clock. Soft telltales are also displayed in this area. Time and Date
See Fig. 3.3.
Time and date are set automatically when the
NOTE: Some optional features have icons in the vehicle is equipped with a tachograph. When a
static display area, for example, Optimized Idle vehicle is equipped with a tachograph only the
status and Descent Control Mode. time zone can be changed.
3.2
Instruments
7 8 9 The correct time and date is required for the follow-

ing ICU functions to work:
• Alarm clock
6 1
• Maintenance
5 2 • Prognostics
3
Software Updates
4 A software update consists of three steps:
06/13/2016 f611364
1. Downloading the software.
1. Gear Indicator
2. Gear Mode 2. Installing the software.
3. Clock
4. Soft Telltales 3. Activating the software by restarting the system.
5. Adaptive Cruise Control and Tracked Vehicle
A popup message will appear when an update is
Distance
6. Cruise Control Symbol (adaptive cruise control available. In addition, the software update option in
shown) the diagnostics menu will be active.
7. Cruise Control Set Speed The vehicle must be in neutral gear, the parking
8. Cruise Control Overspeed brake set, and the engine off before a software up-
9. Cruise Control Underspeed
date can start. Once started, a software update can-
Fig. 3.3, ICUC Static Display not be cancelled.
15 8
16 7
9 6
14 1
10 5
13 11 4
2
12 3
09/28/2016 f611352a
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume 7. Headlamp Interrupt** 13. Back Button

2. Quick Access System Settings 8. Cruise Cancel 14. Menu Left
3. Cruise Decelerate/Set 9. Volume Increment Up 15. Menu Accept (OK)
4. Phone Hang-Up/Reject 10. Menu Right 16. Menu Up
5. Marker Interrupt** 11. Volume Increment Down ** Not available in all markets
6. Phone Pick-Up 12. Menu Down
Fig. 3.4, ICUC Steering-Wheel-Mounted Switches
ICUC time and alarm clock settings are found under During the software update process, progress mes-
User Settings. See "Driver Display: ICUC" in this sages will be provided. See Fig. 3.5 for typical ICUC
chapter for details. software update screens.
3.3
Instruments
If a software update is interrupted, the system will

ask if you want to restart the process or inform you
that the vehicle cannot be driven until the update is
complete. If a software update fails, the system will
attempt to revert to the previous version. A notifica-
tion will appear when a software update has been
successfully installed.
Failure to install software updates may make data
less secure and/or mean vehicle systems are not
operating at their best.
NOTE: An estimation of installation time will be
given before the software update starts. Installa-
tion can take several minutes. During installation
individual functions and controls will not be
available or only available to a limited degree.
Driver Display Overview: ICUC

Below is an overview of ICUC driver display screens
and functions.
ICUC Alert Messages

Alert messages are displayed when certain condi-
tions occur. They include warnings, cautions, and
notices that require the driver’s attention. Not all alert
messages are critical to the operation of the vehicle.
More important messages take priority over less im-
portant messages. The header text and color indi-
cates the priority of the on-screen message, listed
from the highest to the lowest:
• Warning (red)
• Caution (amber)
• Status/Informational (blue, green, white, and
grey)
Warnings alert the driver to situations or conditions
that may pose a threat to control of the vehicle. Fol-
low all instructions given in the message.
Cautions alert the driver to situations or conditions
that may result in damage to vehicle components, or
derating of engine power.
Status notices alert the driver to situations or condi-
tions that may improve fuel efficiency or improve ve-
hicle drivability.
See Fig. 3.6 for typical alert messages.
ICUC Watch for Ice Popup

When ambient air temperature drops below 34°F
04/29/2019 f611643 (1°C), a Watch For ICE popup message will appear.
Fig. 3.5, Example ICUC Software Update Screens
3.4
Instruments
10/31/2016 f611444
Fig. 3.6, Sample Alert Messages
See Fig. 3.7. Acknowledge and dismiss this mes- In the ICUC, time can be displayed in 12 or 24 hour
sage by pressing the back button in the left hand format. Time format is set under Time Settings under
steering wheel switch pod. User Settings.
1. Select the gear icon to open the User Settings
menu. The last settings menu accessed will
open.
2. If not on the Settings Options List Screen, use
the Up arrow in the left-hand steering wheel
switch pod to move to this screen.
3. Press OK to access the settings menus.
4. Use the Down arrow in the left-hand steering
wheel switch pod to get to Time.
5. Press OK to access Time.
6. Use the Right arrow to navigate from 12h to 24h
or 24h to 12h.
7. Press OK on the left-hand steering wheel switch
05/21/2019 f611753 pod to choose an option.
Fig. 3.7, ICUC Watch for Ice Popup Setting An Alarm
An ambient air temperature below 34°F (1°C) will In the ICUC, one alarm can be set under Alarms
also cause a snowflake icon to appear next to the under the User Settings. See Fig. 3.8.
display temperature. The snowflake icon will display
The alarm triggers a repeated chirping sound as well
until the ambient air temperature rises to 37°F (3°C).
as a alarm pop-up. Both can be dismissed by press-
If the temperature drops below 34°F (1°C) after rising ing the back button on the left hand steering wheel
above 37°F (3°C), the Watch For ICE popup and switch pod.
snowflake will reappear. 1. Select the gear icon to open the User Settings
menu. The last settings menu accessed will
ICUC Time and Alarm Settings open.
Time Settings: Display Format 2. If not on the Alarms screen, use the Down arrow
NOTE: Local Time Offsets can also be viewed in the left-hand steering wheel switch pod to
under this menu. move to this screen.
3. Press OK to access the alarm clock options.
3.5
Instruments
Basic Information Screens
04/25/2019 f611636
Fig. 3.8, ICUC Alarm Clock Screens
4. Use the Up and Down arrow to choose hour, There are currently three top-level menu options
minute, and am/pm and alarm status. under Basic Information:
5. Press OK to set the alarm. • Home
• Trip
ICUC Driver Display Screens
• Leg
The six ICUC top-level menu categories are:
The Home screen displays a fuel consumption bar
• Basic Information graph, the current outside temperature, the vehicle
• Drive Time Systems charging system voltage, compass direction of travel,
and odometer. See Fig. 3.9.
• Vehicle Operations
The Trip report screen displays calculations based on
• Maintenance the engine run time such as trip mpg. See Fig. 3.10.
• Infotainment The trip Leg report screen which displays calcula-
• User Settings tions based on engine run time such as length of trip
leg, average speed, hours. See Fig. 3.11.
Quick Access Systems are also available via the
right-hand steering wheel Quick Access System Set- Drive Time Systems Screens
tings button.
There are currently four menu options under Drive
NOTE: Screens will vary depending on vehicle Time Systems:
options. Some screens are accessible only
• Speed
when the vehicle is parked and the parking
brake is on. • Driving Assistance
• Eco Driver Feedback
• Video
3.6
Instruments
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
06/29/2016 f611355
NOTE: Navigate the top-level menu by using the Menu right and Menu left buttons on the steering wheel. Navigate to
Quick Access Systems using the Quick Access Systems switch. When navigating the categories, the last-used menu
screen in each category is displayed, which is not necessarily the screen shown in this illustration.
1. Startup 4. Vehicle Operations 7. User Settings
2. Basic Information 5. Maintenance 8. Quick Access Systems (if
3. Drive Time Systems 6. Infotainment available)
Fig. 3.9, ICUC Top-Level Menu Categories and Navigation
The Speed screen shows the current vehicle speed • Gauges

as well as temperature, odometer and PasSmart in-
• Diesel Particulate Filter
formation. See Fig. 3.9
• Tire Pressure Monitoring
The Driving Assistance screens, depending on sys-
tems installed, show lane departure warnings, adap- • Locks
tive cruise control, active lane assist, traffic sign dis-
play, and/or side guard assist. See Fig. 3.12. • Vehicle Settings
The Eco Driver Feedback screens display bar graphs For information on gauge screens and Tire Pressure
measuring cruise control usage, smooth acceleration, Monitoring see "Instruments and Systems: ICUC" in
and gentle braking. For fuller explanation, see the this chapter. Information on diesel particulate filter
Digital Instruments: ICUC section. monitoring is covered in chapter Chapter 14 Emis-
sions and Fuel Efficiency. Information on Transmis-
Depending on systems installed, video is recorded sion Prognostics is covered in Chapter 17 Auto-
when active safety systems are engaged or unsafe mated and Automatic Transmissions. For information
driving conditions are detected. on Locks see Chapter 19 Drive Axles.
Vehicle Operations Screens The Vehicle Settings screen provides access to ve-
hicle system settings such as cruise control, trans-
There are currently five top-level menu options under mission, attention assist, and idle adjust. See
Vehicle Operations: Fig. 3.13
3.7
Instruments
04/25/2019 f611608 05/18/2020 f611611
Fig. 3.10, Basic Information: Trip Report Fig. 3.12, Drive Time Systems: Driver Assistance
04/25/2019 f611609 04/25/2019 f611621
Fig. 3.11, Basic Information: Trip Leg Report Fig. 3.13, Vehicle Operations: Vehicle Settings
3.8
Instruments
ICUC Maintenance Screens

There are currently five top-level menu options under
Maintenance:
• Alerts
• Diagnostics
• Engine Maintenance
• Trans Prognostics
• Maintenance System
The maintenance screens are used to retrieve fault
codes and other diagnostic and service information
pertaining to the vehicle.
The Alerts screens show all active notices, cautions,
and warnings. See Fig. 3.14.
Fault codes are color-coded to indicate the severity
of the fault. Red indicates a condition that may pose
a threat to control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a
condition that may result in damage to vehicle com-
ponents or derating of engine power. Blue, grey, and 04/25/2019 f611623
green are used to indicate component status.
Fig. 3.15, Maintenance: Diagnostics
The Engine Maintenance screen shows engine

hours. See Fig. 3.16.
The Maintenance System screens give information
about when maintenance is required. See "Instru-
ments and Systems: ICUC" in this chapter for more
details.
ICUC User Settings Screens

The ICUC Setting Options List screens (see
Fig. 3.17) allow the driver to choose the following:
• Dash Brightness
• Lighting Settings
• Units Settings
• Time Settings
• Gauge Settings
• Key Alert Settings
04/25/2019 f611622
• Language Settings
• Safety System Settings
Fig. 3.14, Maintenance: Alerts
Dash Brightness allows for setting the brightness of
The Diagnostics screens show active diagnostic the dashboard display.
trouble codes and if a software update is available.
See Fig. 3.15. Lighting Settings controls if the courtesy and en-
trance lights are on and how long they stay on.
3.9
Instruments
Unit Settings controls the measurement values for

speed, distance traveled, temperature, pressure, and
following distance.
Time Settings controls the time display format (12h/
24h) and local time zone offsets.
Gauge Settings allow the driver to change the order
in which gauges are displayed on the gauge screens.
Key Alert Settings control if the key alerts is on or off.
Language Settings allow the driver to set the ICU
language to be in either English (American), Spanish
(Mexican), or French (Canadian).
Safety System Settings allow the driver to turn safety
features such as Attention Assist, Traffic Sign Dis-
play, Side Guard Assist, and Side Guard Trailer on or
off.
ICUC Quick Access Systems Screens

Quick Access Screens are activated by a button on
the right hand steering wheel pod. There are up to
04/25/2019 f611624 six top-level menu options:
Fig. 3.16, Maintenance: Engine Maintenance • Hysteresis
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
04/25/2019 f611635
1. Dash Brightness 3. Unit Settings 6. Key Alert
2. Courtesy and Entrance Light 4. Time 7. Language
Timing 5. Gauge Positioning 8. Safety Systems
Fig. 3.17, ICUC User Settings Screens
3.10
Instruments
• Cruise Control
• Transmission
• Engine Idle Adjust
• Power Take Off
• Optimized Idle
Hysteresis allows the driver to set the overspeed and
underspeed in mph (km/h). See Fig. 3.18.
04/29/2019 f611638
Fig. 3.19, Quick Access Screen: Cruise Control
04/29/2019 f611637
Fig. 3.18, Quick Access Screen: Hysteresis
Cruise Control allows the driver to control such fea-

tures as active lane assist, lane position, and follow-
ing distance. See Fig. 3.19. For more information
see "Instruments and Systems: ICUC" in this chapter.
Transmission allows the driver to turn the creep
mode or eCoast feature on or off. See Fig. 3.20. See
"Instruments and Systems: ICUC" in this chapter for
more information.
Engine Idle Adjust allows the driver to adjust or deac-
tivate the engine idle. It is not available when the ve-
hicle is in motion. See Fig. 3.21. For more informa-
04/29/2019 f611639
tion see "Instruments and Systems: ICUC" in this
chapter. Fig. 3.20, Quick Access Screen: Transmission
Power Take Off allows the driver to customize the
amount of power being transferred. See Fig. 3.22.
3.11
Instruments
able the feature. For more information see "Instru-

ments and Systems: ICUC" in this chapter
Digital Gauges and System

Monitors: ICUC
ICUC Gauges
In the ICUC there are six digital gauges and three
sets of system screens for the Diesel Particulate Fil-
ter (DPF), Eco Driver Feedback (EDF), and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).
The six digital gauges under the Vehicle Operations
menu of the driver display are:
• Engine Oil Temperature
• Turbo Boost Pressure
• Transmission Oil Temperature
• Front Axle Oil Temperature
• Rear Axle Oil Temperature
04/29/2019 f611640
• Application Air Pressure
Fig. 3.21, Quick Access Screen: Engine Idle Adjust
In the ICUC, if a value measured by a digital gauge
exceeds the normal range, an amber caution or red
danger popup message will appear. However the bar
graph color will remain green and the bar graph
icons will remain white.
NOTE: The order of ICUC digital gauges and
therefore the screen on which they display can
be changed under Gauge Settings under Set-
tings.
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge

NOTICE
A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the engine until the cause has
been determined and corrected.
During normal operation, the optional engine oil tem-
perature gauge (Fig. 3.23) should read in the follow-
04/29/2019 f611641
ing temperature range:
Fig. 3.22, Quick Access Screen: Power Take Off (PTO) • 200 to 260°F (93 to 126°C) for Detroit and
Cummins engines
The Optimized Idle screens allow the driver to
choose the optimized idle mode and enable or dis-
3.12
Instruments
safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent

further damage. Do not operate the vehicle until
the cause has been determined and corrected.
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem.
1
2 3
2 3
04/30/2019 f611615
1. Engine Oil 3. Transmission Oil
Temperature Temperature
2. Turbo Boost Pressure
Fig. 3.23, Digital Oil and Pressure Gauges - ICUC

04/25/2019 f611616
creases, there is no problem. 1. Front Axle Oil 3. Application Air
Temperature Pressure
Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge 2. Rear Axle Oil
Temperature
The turbocharger boost pressure gauge (Fig. 3.23)
Fig. 3.24, Digital Oil and Pressure Gauges - ICUC
indicates the pressure in the intake manifold, in ex-
cess of atmospheric pressure, being created by the
turbocharger. Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauges
Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge NOTICE
The transmission oil temperature gauge, (Fig. 3.23) A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
measures the transmission lubricant operating tem- caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
perature. Temperatures vary by application, but the cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
transmission fluid temperature gauge reading should investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
not exceed 250°F (121°C). Do not operate the vehicle until the cause has
NOTICE During normal operation, drive axle oil temperature
gauges (see Fig. 3.24) should read as follows:
A sudden increase in transmission fluid tempera-
ture that is not caused by a load increase may • 160 to 220°F (71 to 104°C) for Detroit® Clas-
indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a sic Model 2, 4, and 6 axles.
3.13
Instruments
• 160 to 329°F (71 to 165°C) for Detroit® New

Final Drive (NFD) axles.
• 160 to 329°F (71 to 165°C) for Detroit® Adap-
tive Tandem 6 X 4 axles.
• 160 to 275°F (71 to 135°C) for Meritor™ drive
axles.
• 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) for Dana Spicer®
drive axles. 1 4
2 3
Application Air Pressure Gauge

The application air pressure gauge (Fig. 3.24) regis-
ters the air pressure being used to apply the brakes.
The gauge will not register air pressure until the foot
brake pedal is depressed or the trailer hand brake is
applied. 05/04/2020 f611612b
DEF and Diesel Particulate Filter 1. Cruise Control Usage 3. Gentle Braking
2. Smooth Acceleration
Monitoring
Fig. 3.25, Eco Driver Feedback Screen - ICUC
See Chapter 14 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for
details of Diesel Particulate Filter and DEF level • Failure to engage cruise control after the Use
monitoring. Cruise Control popup appears decreases the
Cruise Control Usage value
Eco Driver Feedback • Pumping the accelerator pedal decreases the
Eco Driver Feedback encourages a driver to make Smooth Acceleration value.
economical driving a habit with the goal of saving • Keeping the speed steady with cruise control
fuel and reducing wear. off increases the Smooth Acceleration value.
Eco Driver Feedback gauges, located under the • Sudden braking outside of an urban environ-
Drive Time Systems menu, display a driver’s perfor- ment decreases the Gentle Braking value.
mance in four categories: gentle braking, smooth ac-
celeration, cruise control usage, and time spent • No incidences of sudden breaking over time
idling. increases the Gentle Braking value.
The ICU bar graphs display driver performance since
the start of the vehicle. Performance values are
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
newly calculated with each vehicle start. See The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Fig. 3.25. screens display tire pressure, temperature, and sen-
Examples of driving behavior that increases or de- sor battery status. See Fig. 3.26. Maintaining correct
creases the amount of green in each column are as tire pressure increases fuel economy. Sustained high
follows: tire temperature can cause a tire to deteriorate, lead-
ing to tread separation and blowouts.
• Time in cruise control increases the Cruise
Control Usage value. Tire pressure can be displayed in psi or bar units.
Temperature can be displayed in °F or °C. Units of
3.14
Instruments
Alerts are color-coded to indicate severity. Red indi-

cates a condition that may pose a threat to control of
the vehicle. Amber indicates a condition that may
result in damage to vehicle components or derating
of engine power. Grey is used for notices.
Battery Voltage
The Home screen in the ICU displays the vehicle
charging system voltage in the bottom left. By moni-
toring this number, the driver can stay aware of po-
tential battery charging problems and have them
fixed before the batteries discharge enough to create
starting difficulties.
The Home screen will normally show approximately
13.7 to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The
voltage of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts
when the engine is off. Battery voltage under 12.0
volts is considered a low battery, and a completely
discharged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts.
If the Home screen shows an undercharged or over-
charged condition for an extended period, have the
05/30/2019 f611460a
charging system and batteries checked at an autho-
Fig. 3.26, Vehicle Operations: TPMS Axle Tire Pressure, rized Freightliner service facility.
Temperature, and Sensor Status
Diagnostics
measure are set under Settings. Sensor battery sta-
tus is displayed as a bar chart inside the outline of a The Diagnostics screen communicates fault codes
battery. and other diagnostic information about the vehicle.
The TPMS will change the color of the tire on the Fault codes are color-coded to indicate the severity
ICUC screen if the tire pressure or temperature is of the fault. Red indicates a condition that may pose
either too high or too low. See Fig. 3.26. It will also a threat to control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a
change the color of the sensor battery icon if the condition that may result in damage to vehicle com-
power levels are too low. Amber indicates a condition ponents or derating of engine power. Grey indicates
that may result in damage. Red indicates a condition a condition that may affect fuel efficiency or vehicle
that may pose a threat to the vehicle. handling.
Tire pressure monitoring settings are part of the Engine Maintenance
TPMS. Threshold temperatures and what triggers
alerts can be set on this screen. Shows the number of hours the engine has been op-
erating.
Other ICUC Gauges and
Measurements Maintenance System
In addition to the two screens of gauges displayed NOTE: the wrench icon is indicative of service,
under the Vehicle Operations menu described above, not of something that needs to be fixed.
the ICUC driver display communicates a number of Standard messaging is based on the number of
values related to vehicle operations. They are listed miles (km) driven or time passed since the last ser-
in alphabetical order below. vice.
Alerts Predictive maintenance information is calculated

based on these factors as well as engine and trans-
The Alerts screen stores the current active alerts. mission load and oil temperature.
3.15
Instruments
Currently, predictive maintenance information is given NOTE: For a valid oil level measurement, the
for engine oil, transmission oil, and axle oil changes. vehicle must be stopped on a level surface with
By taking driving conditions into account, predictive the transmission in neutral (N).
maintenance provides more accurate intervals for
fluid changes. Suspension Air Pressure
Just before the service interval ends, a message that
The ICUC may display four vehicle air suspension
maintenance is due will appear. See Fig. 3.27.
yellow caution alerts.
These include Suspension Lowered (Fig. 3.28) and
Suspension Raised (Fig. 3.29) alerts indicating that
the current rear suspension height is either below or
above the normal ride height.
05/19/2020 f611627 06/29/2016 f611434
Fig. 3.27, Maintenance System Status - ICUC Fig. 3.28, Suspension Lowered Alert - ICUC
When the service interval is reached, a pop-up notice

that maintenance is due will appear with every key
cycle.
When the service interval is overdue, the color of the
wrench icon on the maintenance screen will change
from white to amber and the message will change to
Maintenance Overdue. This cautionary pop-up will
continue to appear with every key cycle.
11/09/2016 f611471
Each service interval must be reset in the mainte-
Fig. 3.29, Suspension Raised Alert - ICUC
nance system when service is performed to provide
for accurate future service intervals and to turn off ECAS Problem Detected alert (Fig. 3.30) indicates
pop-up messaging. the electronically controlled air suspension system
The reset button for maintenance system screens will has an active fault.
not appear until the vehicle has been driven 6.2 A flashing Load Transfer alert (Fig. 3.31) indicates
miles and the engine has run for fifteen minutes. the ECAS system is applying the maximum available
Maintenance system information and service recom- vehicle load on the drive axle up to the maximum
mendations can also be viewed in the Detroit Con- allowable limit determined by the gross axle weight
nect portal. Information on the portal is updated rating (GAWR). Load transfer mode automatically
every seven days. deactivates when the vehicle reaches 45 mph (72
kmh).
Transmission Prognostics
ICUC Vehicle Operations: Vehicle
The transmission prognostics screen is only available
for Allison transmissions. It displays information on Settings
the transmission health status (oil filter status, oil The ICUC Vehicle Operations menu has a submenu
level, and oil life). If transmission health falls below called Vehicle Settings. Settings and controls for fea-
acceptable limits, a message will pop-up on the tures installed on the vehicle can be found here.
driver display. These may include:
3.16
Instruments
cause the vehicle to exit Creep Mode. While in

Creep Mode, a lower gear may be selected and the
transmission can be upshifted or downshifted with
the shifter stalk.
The eCoast feature is standard on DT12 engines. On
a downslope the clutch will momentarily disengage
so the vehicle maintains momentum while the engine
idles. Engine rpms will drop to 600 in eCoast mode.
04/22/2016 f611367 Input from the driver will cause the vehicle to exit
Fig. 3.30, ECAS Problem Detected Alert- ICUC eCoast mode.
For a fuller coverage of Creep and eCoast mode see
Chapter 17 Automated and Automatic Transmis-
sions.
Attention Assist
The Attention Assist feature is intended to support
the driver by calling attention to drowsy driving be-
havior and thereby encouraging rest.
11/09/2016 f611472
Fig. 3.31, Load Transfer Alert - ICUC

The Attention Assist feature estimates the driver’s
attention level based on lane keeping and steering
• Cruise Control behavior and activity levels in using turn signals, re-
tarder, and kick down operations.
• Transmission
When attention levels drop below a certain threshold,
• Attention Assist an audible warning will sound, a visual warning will
• Engine Idle Adjust appear on the ICU, and lane departure warnings will
be activated if previously disabled.
• Optimized Idle
Many of these may also be accessible under the Engine Idle Adjust
Quick Access Systems menu. This feature allows the increase or decrease of the
base engine idle speed. Increasing the base engine
Cruise Control idle might be necessary to generate enough power to
Settings for cruise control include setting the over- operate accessories.
speed and underspeed in mph or kph and setting the The following conditions must be met to the engine
following distance in seconds. For full instructions on idle speed to be adjusted:
standard Cruise Control, see Chapter 7 Driver Assis-
• Engine is running
tance Features.
• Vehicle is at a standstill
Transmission • Transmission is in neutral
The Transmission vehicle settings menu allows the
driver to turn Creep Mode and eCoast on or off. Optimized Idle
Creep mode is a DT12 Transmission feature that Optimized Idle reduces idle time by automatically
helps the driver move the vehicle at slow speeds by stopping and restarting the engine. Besides saving
slipping the clutch to reduce torque to the wheels. It fuel, it helps keep the batteries charged while main-
is designed to improve maneuverability in situations taining engine and cab temperature.
like parking, docking, and slow traffic.
The following conditions must be met for the opti-
To activate Creep mode for the first time within the mized idle to function:
current driving cycle, press the accelerator pedal to
launch the vehicle, thereby fully engaging the clutch. • Vehicle in neutral gear
Stopping the vehicle with the service brake will not • Park brake set
3.17
Instruments
• Hood latched Navigation and Infotainment

• Sleeper fan on Reception
Optimized idle can be started with the engine running Features of both the navigation and infotainment sys-
or the engine off. tem depend on cellular and satellite reception. In cer-
With the key on, go to Vehicle Settings and scroll tain situations, such as driving through tunnels,
down to Optimized Idle. Press OK. mountains, or parked in multistory parking lots, re-
ception may be impaired due to interference or there
To enable optimized idle, press okay again. A screen may be no reception at all.
will appear saying the default battery mode is on and
interior comfort mode is off. General ICUC Infotainment
If you want to optimize the environment of the Information
sleeper section, turn on comfort mode. Press the
right hand arrow in the left hand switch pod to turn The ICUC infotainment system options consist of:
interior comfort mode on and then press OK.
• AM/FM Radio
The vehicle will go into standby mode, an under
hood alarm will briefly sound, and the engine will • Satellite Radio: SiriusXM®
crank and achieve 900 rpm. The ICUC screen will • Weather Radio
then state that it is in interior comfort mode and the
engine and air conditioning/fan will run until it • CD player
achieves the temperature requested by the driver. • USB & AUX input
The engine will then shut down.
• Smart phone Integration
Optimized idle can be shut off by ICUC controls or
pressing the brake. If the sleeper fan is turned off, ICUC Infotainment Screens
optimized idle will not shut down but the engine will.
Use the Menu Up and Menu Down to navigate the
For a fuller description of Optimized Idle, see Chap- infotainment screens:
ter 13 Optional Engine Systems.
1. Audio (AM/FM/Weather, SiriusXM, CD, USB,
Infotainment: ICUC AUX). See Fig. 3.32.
2. Telephone, showing signal strength, battery level,
Safety Information phone number, and active call length. See
Fig. 3.33.
WARNING
ICUC Audio Features
There is a risk of distraction from operating inte-
grated communication equipment while the ve- Radio and Other Audio Sources
hicle is in motion. NOTE: It is a standard safety feature for the
A driver can be distracted from the traffic situation if radio to mute during safety related events; start-
operating communication equipment integrated in the ing in June 2021 Pana-Pacific/Aptiv radios in-
vehicle when driving, possibly causing loss of control stalled in Freightliner vehicles will automatically
of the vehicle. mute when the vehicle is in reverse gear.
Only operate this equipment when the road and traf- Radio stations, presets, and other audio sources can
fic situation permits, otherwise stop and operate the be accessed under Audio.
equipment with the vehicle stationary.
1. Select the single bar note icon to open the info-
The driver must observe the legal requirements of tainment menu. The last infotainment menu ac-
the country the vehicle is driving through when oper- cessed will open.
ating the system.
2. If not on the Audio screen, press the Up arrow in
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair or limit the left-hand steering wheel switch pod to move
your ability to read the display. to this screen.
3.18
Instruments
ries, forecasts and other non-weather related hazard

information including news on natural disasters
(earthquakes, avalanches, floods), environmental
hazards (oil spills, chemical releases), and public
safety messages (AMBER alerts, network outages).
All services operate 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The average range for reception from a transmitter is
approximately 40 miles (60 km). The National
Weather Service operates more than 1000 transmit-
ters.
Adjusting the Volume

Volume can be adjusted up using the VOL+ and
down using the —VOL switches in the left-hand
steering wheel switch pod.
ICUC Telephone Features

Telephone is the second screen under infotainment.
The main telephone screen shows the connected
phones current signal and battery strength. If a call is
04/25/2019 f611630
in progress it will show the phone number and call
length.
Fig. 3.32, Infotainment: Radio
Telephone Settings
pod to access Audio Settings.
4. Use the Right and Left arrows to navigate from
one audio source to another—from radio to USB
for example.
5. Use the Up and Down arrows to navigate
through an audio options list of choices. Choices
can vary depending on the number of audio
sources available and saved presets.
pod to select an audio source. The audio source
is selected.
7. Press the Back button to return to the main
Audio screen.
Weather Radio (WX)

Weather Radio is an option under Audio.
Weather radio channels WX1 through WX7, corre-
sponding to frequencies 162.400 MHz though
162.550 MHz, are the standard weather radio chan-
04/25/2019 f611632
nels used by NOAA Weather Radio in the United
States, Weatheradio Canada/Radiométéo Canada in Fig. 3.33, Infotainment: Active Call
Canada, and SARMEX in Mexico. Each system con-
sists of a nationwide network of radio stations broad- Telephone settings displays the phone’s call history,
casting official weather warnings, watches, adviso- contacts, and any contact presets.
3.19
Instruments
1. Select the single bar note icon to open the info-

tainment menu. The last infotainment menu ac-
cessed will open.
2. If not on the Telephone Screen, use the Down
arrow in the left-hand steering wheel switch pod
to move to this screen.
3. When on the Telephone screen, select OK on
the left-hand steering wheel switch pod to access
Telephone Settings.
4. Use the Right and Left arrows to navigate from
one telephone setting to another—from contacts 04/08/2005 f090431
to missed calls for example.
5. Fig. 3.34, Manual-Reset Air Restriction Indicator, Go/
Use the Up and Down arrows in the left-hand
No-Go
steering wheel switch pod to navigate through
the current Telephone Settings list of choices.
pod to choose an option.
7. Press the Back left-hand steering wheel switch
pod to return to the main screen.
Analog Instruments
Physical instruments are listed here in alphabetical
order. Some are optional and therefore not found in
every vehicle. Digital instruments and gauges are
described in their ICU section.
02/12/2015 f090514
Air Intake Restriction Gauge
Fig. 3.35, Air Intake Restriction Indicator, Graduated
The air intake restriction gauge indicates the vacuum
on the engine side of the air cleaner. On standard
Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values (inH2O)
installations, it is mounted on the air intake duct in
the engine compartment, and has a go/no-go restric- GHG14, GHG17, and
Engine Make
GHG21 Engines
tion indicator without graduations. See Fig. 3.34. As
an option, a graduated indicator (Fig. 3.35) on the air Cummins 25
intake duct or, for easier viewing, a dash-mounted Detroit 18
restriction gauge may be installed. Table 3.1, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values
Air intake restriction vacuum is measured in inches
of water (inH2O). For vehicles equipped with a NOTE: Rain or snow can wet the filter and
graduated indicator or a restriction gauge on the cause a temporary high reading.
dash, check the gauge with the engine off. If the yel-
low signal stays locked in the red zone once the en- Application Air Pressure Gauge
gine is shut down, or is at or above the values
shown in Table 3.1, the air cleaner element needs to An application air pressure gauge (Fig. 3.36) regis-
be replaced. ters the air pressure being used to apply the brakes,
and should be used for reference only. The gauge
will not register air pressure until the foot brake pedal
is depressed or the trailer hand brake is applied.
3.20
Instruments
08/16/2019 f611780
10/31/2016 f611380
Fig. 3.37, Analog Coolant Temperature Gauge - ICUC

Fig. 3.36, Application Air Pressure Gauge
Coolant Temperature Gauge Maximum Coolant Temperature

Engine Make Temperature: °F (°C)
Cummins 221 (105)
NOTICE Detroit DD13/DD15/
234 (112)
DD16
A sudden increase in coolant temperature may
indicate engine or cooling system failure. Bring Table 3.2, Maximum Coolant Temperature
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the
cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate
the engine until the cause has been determined Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauges
and corrected.
During normal engine operation, the coolant tem- NOTICE
perature gauge should read 175 to 195°F (79 to
91°C). If the temperature remains below 160°F A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
(71°C), inspect the cooling system to determine the caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
cause. See Fig. 3.37. cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
For Detroit engines, if coolant temperature rises Do not operate the vehicle until the cause has
above the maximum temperature listed in Table 3.2, been determined and corrected.
the CHECK engine lamp will illuminate. If the condi-
tion does not improve, the STOP engine lamp will During normal operation, the drive axle oil tempera-
also illuminate and an audible warning will sound. ture gauges should read as follows:
The engine will then derate or shut down, depending • 160 to 220°F (71 to 104°C) for Detroit® Clas-
on the type of engine protection system installed. sic Model 2, 4, and 6 axles.
For Cummins engines, the fan will come on when the • 160 to 329°F (71 to 165°C) for Detroit® New
coolant temperature reaches 215°F (101°C) and the Final Drive (NFD) axles.
check engine light will illuminate when coolant tem-
perature rises above the maximum temperature listed • 160 to 329°F (71 to 165°C) for Detroit® Adap-
in Table 3.2 tive Tandem 6 X 4 axles.
• 160 to 275°F (71 to 135°C) for Meritor™ drive
axles.
• 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) for Dana Spicer®
drive axles.
3.21
Instruments

creases, there is no problem. See Fig. 3.38.
06/03/2020 f611781a
Fig. 3.39, Analog Engine Oil Pressure Gauge - ICUC

10/31/2016 f611384
Minimum Engine Oil Pressure*
Fig. 3.38, Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauge (rear drive
axle gauge shown) At Idle Speed:† At Rated RPM:‡
Engine Model
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge Cummins 15 (103) 35 (241)
Detroit Gen 5
50 (344) 50 (344)
DD13/DD15
NOTICE All Other Detroit
14 (97) 55 (350)
Engines
A sudden decrease or absence of oil pressure * Oil pressures are given with the engine at operating temperature. With
may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle the engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Individual engines may vary
to a safe stop and investigate the cause to pre- from the listed pressures; observe and record pressures when the engine
is new to create a guide for checking engine condition.
vent further damage. Do not operate the engine † Standard idle speed is 600 RPM. Actual engine idle speed can vary
until the cause has been determined and ±100 RPM depending on transmission type.
corrected. ‡ All Detroit heavy-duty engines are rated at 1800 RPM.
Except for Detroit Gen 5 DD13 and DD15 engines, Table 3.3, Minimum Engine Oil Pressure
the engine oil pressure gauge displays the current
engine oil pressure. If engine oil pressure falls below For Detroit Gen 5 DD13 and DD15 engines, the
the minimum levels shown in Table 3.3, the CHECK gauge will read a steady 50 psi (344 kPa) with nor-
engine lamp will illuminate. If the condition does not mal engine oil pressure. If the engine oil pressure is
improve, the STOP engine lamp will also illuminate low, the CHECK lamp will illuminate and the oil pres-
and an audible warning will sound. The engine will sure gauge will read 25 psi (172 kPa). If the condi-
then derate or shut down, depending on the type of tion does not improve, the STOP lamp will illuminate,
engine protection system installed. an audible warning will sound, and the gauge will
read 0 psi. The engine will then derate or shut down,
depending on the type of engine protection system
installed.
3.22
Instruments
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge

1
NOTICE
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
investigate the cause to prevent further damage. 2
perature gauge should read in the following tempera- 3 4
ture range:
• 200 to 260°F (93 to 126°C) for Detroit and
Cummins engines
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep 06/28/2016 f611409
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem- 1. Fuel Gauge Pointer 4. Low DEF Warning
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If 2. DEF Gauge Pointer Lamp
the temperature returns to normal when the load de- 3. Low Fuel Warning
creases, there is no problem. See Fig. 3.40. Lamp
Fig. 3.41, Fuel/DEF Gauge
ter 14 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for details of

the DEF gauge functions.
Primary and Secondary Air Pressure

Gauges
WARNING
If air pressure falls below minimum pressure, the
braking ability of the vehicle will be limited. Slow
the vehicle down and bring it to a gradual stop.
Do not attempt to move the vehicle until air pres-
sure has risen above the minimum level. Moving
a vehicle without adequate braking power could
10/31/2016 f611381 cause an accident resulting in property damage,
personal injury, or death.
Fig. 3.40, Engine Oil Temperature Gauge
Air pressure gauges register the pressure in the pri-
Fuel/Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) mary and secondary air systems. See Fig. 3.42. Nor-
mal pressure, with the engine running, is 100 to 120
Gauge psi (689 to 827 kPa) in both systems.
The fuel and DEF levels can be measured in a dual NOTE: The low-air warning buzzer only works
purpose fuel/DEF level gauge. See Fig. 3.41. when the park brake is released. The low-air
The diesel fuel and DEF levels are indicated on the warning buzzer is silenced when the park brake
gauge. A low fuel warning lamp illuminates amber is set.
when the diesel fuel level registers 1/8th of capacity.
The low DEF warning lamp illuminates amber when If air pressure drops below approximately 70 psi (483
the DEF level reaches 10% of capacity. See Chap- kPa), a warning light illuminates and the driver dis-
play shows a warning. A low-air warning buzzer also
sounds if the park brake is not set.
3.23
Instruments
Suspension Air Pressure Gauge

A suspension air pressure gauge (Fig. 3.44) registers
the air pressure applied to the vehicle air
suspension.
08/16/2019 f611779
Fig. 3.42, Analog Combined Application Air Pressure

Gauge - ICUC
NOTE: If the pressure in both air systems drops

below 70 psi, the parking brakes will drag or 10/31/2016 f611468
apply.
Fig. 3.44, Suspension Air Pressure Gauge
Speedometer
Two physical speedometer options are available. The
Tachometer
U.S. version of the speedometer (Fig. 3.43) registers The tachometer or rev counter indicates engine
speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers speed in revolutions per minute (rpm) and serves as
per hour (km/h), with mph in larger numbers. The a guide for shifting the transmission and keeping the
metric version of the speedometer face reverses this engine in the appropriate rpm range. The tachometer
arrangement, with km/h in larger numbers. has only one unit of measurement, 0-2500 rpm. For
low idle and rated rpm, consult your vehicle’s engine
identification plate. See Fig. 3.45.
08/16/2019 f611782
Fig. 3.43, Analog Speedometer - ICUC 01/02/2020 f611783
Fig. 3.45, Analog Tachometer - ICUC
3.24
Instruments
Transmission Fluid Temperature

Gauge
The transmission fluid temperature gauge, (Fig. 3.46)
measures the transmission lubricant operating tem-
perature. Temperatures vary by application, but the
transmission fluid temperature gauge reading should
not exceed 250°F (121°C).
10/31/2016 f611382
Fig. 3.47, Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge
voltage when the engine is off. By monitoring the

voltmeter, the driver can stay aware of potential bat-
tery charging problems and have them fixed before
the batteries discharge enough to create starting diffi-
culties.
10/31/2016 f611383 The voltmeter will normally show approximately 13.7
to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The voltage
Fig. 3.46, Transmission Fluid Temperature Gauge of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts when
the engine is off. Battery voltage under 12.0 volts is
NOTICE considered a low battery, and a completely dis-
charged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts.
A sudden increase in transmission fluid tempera- If the voltmeter shows an undercharged or over-
ture that is not caused by a load increase may charged condition for an extended period, have the
indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a charging system and batteries checked at an autho-
safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent rized Freightliner service facility.
the cause has been determined and corrected. On a vehicle equipped with a battery isolator system,
the voltmeter measures the average voltage of all the
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep batteries when the engine is running. When the en-
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem- gine is off, the voltmeter shows only the isolated bat-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If tery voltage and does not indicate the voltage of the
the temperature returns to normal when the load de- engine-starting batteries.
Turbocharger Boost Pressure Gauge Instrumentation Control Unit:

A turbocharger boost pressure gauge (Fig. 3.47) indi-
ICC5
cates the pressure in the intake manifold, in excess The instrumentation control unit (ICU) provides the
of atmospheric pressure, being created by the driver with engine and vehicle information. A New
turbocharger. Cascadia vehicle can be equipped with either an
ICUC or ICC5. See Fig. 3.48 for a typical ICC5
Voltmeter layout.
The voltmeter indicates the vehicle charging system
voltage when the engine is running and the battery
3.25
Instruments
This section provides general system and operating Ignition Sequence

instructions for ICC5 components. Following sections
provide more detailed information. When the ignition is turned on, the ICU runs a self-
2
1
3
06/28/2019 f611580b
1. A-Panel: Driver Display 2. B-Panel: Infotainment Display 3. USB2 Ports
Fig. 3.48, ICC5 Dual Display Screens and USB2 ports
ICC5 check. Observing the ignition sequence is a good

way to ensure the ICU is functioning properly.
The Instrument Cluster Connect 5, or ICC5, has a
driver display screen, an infotainment touch screen, IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the
a multimedia connection unit with two USB2 ports, ICU self-check is complete.
optical finger navigation control (OFN) buttons on the
steering wheel, and visual and audible warning ICC5
systems. NOTE: There is no Lane Departure Warning
The driver display, or A-panel, provides the driver audible self-test.
with information about the vehicle status and vehicle When the ignition is turned on, the following actions
systems. The infotainment display, or B-panel, pro- should occur in the ICC5:
vides access to phone, radio, navigation, and other
controls. See "Driver Display: ICC5" in this chapter • The logos for the engine and transmission dis-
for details on the A-panel display features. See "Info- play on the infotainment screen.
tainment: ICC5" in this chapter for details on the • If installed, an Active Brake Assist (ABA) popup
B-panel display and multimedia connection unit. disclaimer appears on the driver display
screen.
• If ignition status is set to Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (ACC), the tripmeter and odometer values
are shown on the driver display screen.
3.26
Instruments
• If the ignition is set to ON, all ICC5 screens The pilot screen moves the speedometer and ta-
and options are available. chometer to the bottom of the screen to provide driv-
ing assistance information in the screen’s center. See
IMPORTANT: If any red or amber warnings do Fig. 3.50.
not go out after the self-check completes, take
the action outlined in the Warnings, Indicators,
and Messages section in this chapter, then take
the vehicle to an authorized Freightliner service
facility as soon as possible.
ICC5 Screen Navigation

NOTE: The brightness of the ICC5 display
screens can be adjusted in Settings. 08/07/2019 f611703
The ICC5 is equipped with two screens. The driver Fig. 3.50, Driver Display Pilot Screen - ICC5
display screen in the dashboard in front of the driver
and the infotainment screen. The infotainment screen is a touch screen and dis-
plays the standard gauges as well as information
The driver display screen provides basic vehicle and
about the cab and chassis. It also serves as the
environmental information. Battery voltage, outside
navigation systems screen, provides access to light-
ambient air temperature, current time, and current
ing and radio controls, and manages the integration
compass direction are displayed across the top of
of phone, smart phone and media sources. Each cor-
the screen. Information such as fuel gauge, current
ner of the ICC5 infotainment display is a quick ac-
speed, gear, odometer reading, and primary and sec-
cess icon for commonly used features. For an over-
ondary air pressure gauges display on the bottom of
view of menu category icons on the infotainment
the screen. Telltales are displayed at both the top
screen as well as infotainment quick access icons,
and bottom of the screen.
see Fig. 3.51.
The driver display screen provides information in two
different modes: a base screen layout and a pilot NOTE: Screens may vary depending on vehicle
screen layout. options. Some screens are accessible only
when the vehicle is parked.
The base screen consists of a digital tachometer/
speedometer in the center of the screen. See
Fig. 3.49.
05/08/2019 f611704
Fig. 3.49, Driver Display Base Screen - ICC5
3.27
Instruments
1 2 3
5 4
06/278/2019 f611757
1. Home 3. Digital Switches 5. Settings
2. Status Line 4. Saved Favorites
Fig. 3.51, Infotainment Menu Options, Icons, Status Line - ICC5
ICC5 Steering Wheel Buttons • Scroll through screens.
To navigate features and screens, use the Optical • Select a menu item, icon, or entry.
Finger Navigation Control (OFN) buttons on the
steering wheel. See Fig. 3.52. Touching, Holding and Moving
The buttons in the left-hand pod control the driver Touch, hold, and move the finger to:
display features. The buttons in the right-hand pod • Select the value on a slider control.
provide access to infotainment features and menus.
Time and Date
ICC5 Touch Screen Operation
Time and date are set automatically when the
IMPORTANT: All keyboard entries are locked vehicle is equipped with a tachograph. When a
when the parking brake is disengaged. Other vehicle is equipped with a tachograph only the
touch screen options still function. time zone can be changed.
Tapping ICC5 time and alarm clock settings can be found
under the Settings menu. See the appropriate Driver
Tap the touch screen to: Display section for details.
• Select a menu item, icon, or entry The correct time and date is required for the follow-
• Enter characters with keyboard by tapping on a ing ICC5 functions to work:
character buttons. • Alarm clock
Single-Finger Swipe • Navigation guidance with time-dependent traffic

routing
Use a single-finger swipe to:
• Calculation of the expected time of arrival
• Navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or
right. • Maintenance
3.28
Instruments
3 7 8
2
9
1
6 5 A 4 12 11 A 10
10/25/2018 f611531
A. Menu Buttons—The left Menu button accesses the driver display. The right Menu button accesses the infotainment
screen.
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume 6. Cruise Decelerate/Set 10. Volume Increment Down
2. Back Button 7. Phone Pick-Up 11. Mute Button
3. Quick Access System Settings 8. Back Button 12. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
4. Marker Interrupt** 9. Volume Increment Up ** Not available in all markets.
5. Cruise Cancel
Fig. 3.52, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Optical Finger Navigation Control (OFN) buttons - ICC5
• Prognostics that the vehicle cannot be driven until the update is

complete. If a software update fails, the system will
Software Updates attempt to revert to the previous version. A notifica-
tion will appear when a software update has been
A software update consists of three steps: successfully installed.
1. Downloading the software. Failure to install software updates may make data
2. Installing the software. less secure and/or mean vehicle systems are not
operating at their best.
3. Activating the software by restarting the system.
NOTE: An estimation of installation time will be
A popup message and a blue folder will appear in given before the software update starts. Installa-
one of the dynamic telltale locations on the driver tion can take several minutes. During installation
display when an update is available. In addition the
individual functions and controls will not be
software update option in the diagnostics menu will
be active. available or only available to a limited degree.
The vehicle must be in neutral gear, the parking
brake set, and the engine off before a software up-
Driver Display Overview: ICC5
date can start. Once started, a software update can- The ICC5 driver display (or A-panel display) is used
not be cancelled. to communicate information about the current ve-
During the software update process, progress mes- hicles status and environmental information. The bat-
sages will be provided. tery voltage, outside ambient air temperature, current
time, and current compass direction are displayed
If a software update is interrupted, the system will across the top of the screen. Information such as fuel
ask if you want to restart the process or inform you gauge, current speed, odometer reading, current
3.29
Instruments
gear, and primary and secondary air pressure ICC5 Steering Wheel Buttons
gauges display on the bottom of the screen.
To navigate features and screens, use the Optical
The driver display provides information in two differ- Finger Navigation Control (OFN) buttons on the
ent modes: a base screen layout (see Fig. 3.49) and steering wheel.
a pilot screen layout (see Fig. 3.50). What screen
displays depends on safety features installed and if The buttons in the left-hand pod control the driver
the vehicle is in motion. display features. See Fig. 3.54. The buttons in the
right-hand pod provide access to infotainment fea-
ICC5 Driver Display Screen tures and menus. See Fig. 3.55.
8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 11 12 13 14 15 16
7 10
17 18 19 20 28 29 30 31
23 24 25
21 26 27
22
04/29/2019 f611644
1. Check Transmission 13. Electronically Controlled Air 21.Water in Fuel
2. High Exhaust Temperature Suspension (ECAS) Problem 22.Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Low
3. DPF Status Approaching Full 14. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) 23.Lane Keep Assist (LKA) Active
4. Engine Malfunction Lamp 24.Descent Control Mode Active
5. Check Engine 15. Lane Departure Warning (LDW) 25.Gear Teach Mode In Process
6. Stop Engine 16. Unfastened Seat Belt 26.Low Brake Air Pressure
7. Turn Indicator Left 17. Dynamic:Low Engine Oil Pressure 27.Park Brake Applied
8. Blue = High Beams On 18. Dynamic: Software Update 28.Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
9. Tire Pressure: Yellow = Low Available 29.ABS Trailer
10. Turn Indicator Right 19. Dynamic: Supplementary Restraint 30.Active Brake Assist (ABA) Not
11. Engine Brake Engaged System (SRS) Error Available
12. Automatic Traction Control (ATC) 20. Dynamic: Aerodynamic Height 31 Hill Start Aid Active
Active Control Active
Fig. 3.53, ICC5 Driver Display Telltale Locations
Each telltale has its screen location except for dy- Basic ICC5 Functions
namic telltales which are displayed in positions 17-20
and sorted in priority order from right to left— ICC5 Alert Messages
meaning position 20 has the highest priority. See
Fig. 3.53. If there are more that four dynamic tell- Alert messages appear on the driver display when
tales active, only the four highest priority ones are certain conditions occur. They include warnings, cau-
displayed. tions, and notices that require the driver’s attention.
Not all alert messages are critical to the operation of
For a full list of telltales and their meanings, see the vehicle. More important messages take priority
Warnings, Indicators, and Messages in this over less important messages. The header text and
chapter.
3.30
Instruments
3 1
2 2
3
1
6 5 A 4 A
6 5 4
10/25/2018 f611531a 10/25/2018 f611531b
A. Menu Button—Press the button to access A. Menu Button—Press the button to access
instrument panel menus. When the button is instrument panel menus. When the button is
pressed, information appears on the driver display pressed, information appears on the 10-inch head
screen. unit screen.
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume 1. Phone Pick-Up
2. Back Button 2. Back Button
3. Quick Access System Settings 3. Volume Increment Up
4. Marker Interrupt 4. Volume Increment Down
5. Cruise Cancel 5. Mute Button
6. Cruise Decelerate/Set 6. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
Fig. 3.54, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Left-Hand Switch Fig. 3.55, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Right-Hand Pod -
Pod - ICC5 ICC5
color indicates the priority of the on-screen message, Summer Time on or off, turning Summer Time on or
listed from the highest to the lowest: off, and setting the date and time format.
• Warning (red) Automatic Summer Time is another name for auto-
matic daylight saving time. If this is set to on then the
• Caution (amber)
controls for Summer Time are unavailable.
• Status/Informational (blue, green, white, and
Dates can be displayed as: DD.MM.YYYY, MM/DD/
grey) YYYY, or YYYY/MM/DD. Selection is made using
Warnings alert the driver to situations or conditions either/or radio buttons.
that may pose a threat to control of the vehicle. Fol- Time can be displayed in 12 AM/PM or 24 hour for-
low all instructions given in the message. mat.
Cautions alert the driver to situations or conditions
that may result in damage to vehicle components, or ICC5 Alarm Settings
derating of engine power.
NOTE: The ability to set the alarm clock and
Status notices alert the driver to situations or condi- timers is only available when the parking brake
tions that may improve fuel efficiency or vehicle han- is engaged.
dling.
Alarm Clock Controls and Features:
ICC5 Time and Date Settings • Time of Day
The following settings can be controlled under Time • Repeat
and Date: selecting a time zone, turning Automatic
3.31
Instruments
• Audio Source temperature. The snowflake icon will display until the
ambient air temperature rises to 37°F (3°C).
• Light Alarm
If the temperature drops below 34°F (1°C) after rising
Tapping on a bar at the bottom of the screen in the above 37°F (3°C), the snowflake will reappear.
alarm clock menu switches between alarm clocks
and the sleep timers. If alarms have been set, the
corresponding icon in the bar indicates this with the Digital Gauges and System
number of active alarms shown inside a circle. Monitors: ICC5
Up to fifteen alarms can be shown in a carousel view
on the screen. They are sorted from the beginning of ICC5 Gauges
the day on the left and the end of the day on the
right. If less than fifteen alarms have been set, a Add There are thirteen digital gauges under the Gauges
Alarm icon will be available in carousel display at the menu on the B-panel or infotainment display. See
far right. If fifteen alarms have been created, the Add Fig. 3.56 for an example screen overview. Twelve
Alarm icon is not available. are informational only; if active, Soot Level includes a
button to start a regeneration.
New alarms are set to be On when created. Alarms
can be toggled off and on by pressing on an alarm 1
tile. An active alarm has a red line at the top of the 3
alarm tile. 2 4
If an alarm has been set to repeat, the selected days
of the week will be listed below the time.
The audio of an alarm can be set under Audio
Source. Options include up to 15 preset alarm
sounds and any available radio station. 08/07/2019 f611763
If an alarm includes turning on lights, a light icon is 1. Gauge Screen Name 3. Gauge Name
2. Gauge Icon 4. Gauge Value
shown on the alarm tile at the bottom right. Wake up
lighting can be set to be turned on at 10% to 100% Fig. 3.56, Example Gauge Screen - ICC5
brightness.
The default display order of gauges is as follows:
Alarms can be edited by pressing on the pencil icon
below the alarm tile. To delete an alarm, press on the • Coolant Temperature
edit pencil icon and choose Delete.
• Engine Oil Pressure
ICC5 Sleep Timer Settings • Engine Oil Temperature
The sleep timer’s function is to turn off the light(s) • Transmission Oil Temperature
and/or music after a certain period of time. The de-
• Front Axle Oil Temperature
fault value is 30 minutes but the sleep timer can be
set anywhere from 1 minute to 3 hours and 59 min- • Rear Axle Oil Temperature
utes.
• Lift Axle Pressure
ICCC5 Temperature • Soot Level
NOTE: Pay attention to road conditions when air • Application Air Pressure
temperatures are near freezing.
• Suspension Air Pressure
In the ICC5 the ambient air temperature displays at
• Trailer Application Air Pressure
the top and slightly to the right on the driver display
screen. See Fig. 3.49. The temperature can be set • Trailer Suspension Air Pressure
to display in °F or °C in Settings.
• Turbo Boost Pressure
When ambient air temperature drops below 34°F
(1°C), a snowflake icon will appear below the display The default can be changed. Pressing on an existing
gauge will cause a popup window to appear with the
3.32
Instruments
option to either Remove or Replace the gauge. (71°C), inspect the cooling system to determine the
Choosing Replace will bring up a radio button list of cause.
all available gauges from which to choose; replacing For Detroit engines, if coolant temperature rises
a gauge will move the first gauge into a different above the maximum temperature listed in Table 3.4,
screen placement. Removing a gauge removes the the CHECK engine lamp will illuminate. If the condi-
gauge from the gauge screens. A removed gauge tion does not improve, the STOP engine lamp will
can be added back by pressing the Add or plus sign also illuminate and an audible warning will sound.
button. Doing so will cause a radio button list to ap- The engine will then derate or shut down, depending
pear listing the gauges available to be added. on the type of engine protection system installed.
Gauge units of measurements are controlled under For Cummins engines, the fan will come on when
Settings which can be accessed under the Cab coolant the temperature reaches 215°F (101°C) and
menu or by pressing the star menu icon in the lower the check engine light will illuminate when coolant
left corner. temperature rises above the maximum temperature
Moving between gauge screens can be accom- listed in Table 3.4.
plished by pressing the gauge screen name at the
top of the screen. Maximum Coolant Temperature
In the ICC5, if a value measured by a digital gauge Engine Make Temperature: °F (°C)
exceeds the normal range, the gauge icon, display Cummins 221 (105)
bar graph color, and gauge value will change color to Detroit DD13/DD15/
234 (112)
amber to indicate caution or red to indicate danger. DD16
See Fig. 3.57. Table 3.4, Maximum Coolant Temperature
1 2 3 Engine Oil Pressure Gauge

NOTICE
A sudden decrease or absence of oil pressure
may indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle
08/07/2019 f611764 to a safe stop and investigate the cause to pre-
vent further damage. Do not operate the engine
1. Red Gauge Icon 3. Red Gauge Value
2. Red Gauge Bar Graph until the cause has been determined and cor-
rected.
Fig. 3.57, Gauge Caution & Warning Indicator Display -
Except for Detroit Gen 5 DD13 and DD15 engines,
ICC5
the engine oil pressure gauge displays the current
Gauge information can also be viewed on the driver engine oil pressure. If engine oil pressure falls below
display. See Fig. 3.60. the minimum levels shown in Table 3.5, the CHECK
engine lamp on the driver display will illuminate. If
Coolant Temperature Gauge the condition does not improve, the STOP engine
lamp will also illuminate and an audible warning will
sound. The engine will then derate or shut down, de-
NOTICE pending on the type of engine protection system in-
stalled.
A sudden increase in coolant temperature may
indicate engine or cooling system failure. Bring Minimum Engine Oil Pressure*
the vehicle to a safe stop and investigate the At Idle Speed:† At Rated RPM:‡
cause to prevent further damage. Do not operate Engine Model
psi (kPa) psi (kPa)
the engine until the cause has been determined
Cummins 15 (103) 35 (241)
and corrected.
Detroit Gen 5
During normal engine operation, the coolant tem- 50 (344) 50 (344)
DD13/DD15
perature gauge should read 175 to 195°F (79 to
91°C). If the temperature remains below 160°F
3.33
Instruments
Minimum Engine Oil Pressure*

At Idle Speed:† At Rated RPM:‡
NOTICE
Engine Model
psi (kPa) psi (kPa) A sudden increase in transmission fluid tempera-
All Other Detroit ture that is not caused by a load increase may
14 (97) 55 (350)
Engines indicate mechanical failure. Bring the vehicle to a
* Oil pressures are given with the engine at operating temperature. With safe stop and investigate the cause to prevent
the engine cold, oil pressure may be higher. Individual engines may vary
from the listed pressures; observe and record pressures when the engine
is new to create a guide for checking engine condition. the cause has been determined and corrected.
† Standard idle speed is 600 RPM. Actual engine idle speed can vary
±100 RPM depending on transmission type. Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
‡ All Detroit heavy-duty engines are rated at 1800 RPM. grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
Table 3.5, Minimum Engine Oil Pressure perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
For Detroit Gen 5 DD13 and DD15 engines, the
gauge will read a steady 50 psi (344 kPa) with nor-
mal engine oil pressure. If the engine oil pressure is
Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauges
low, the CHECK lamp will illuminate and the oil pres-
sure gauge will read 25 psi (172 kPa). If the condi- NOTICE
tion does not improve, the STOP lamp will illuminate,
an audible warning will sound, and the gauge will A sudden increase in oil temperature that is not
read 0 psi. The engine will then derate or shut down, caused by a load increase may indicate mechani-
depending on the type of engine protection system cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and
installed. investigate the cause to prevent further damage.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause has
Engine Oil Temperature Gauge been determined and corrected.
During normal operation, drive axle oil temperature
NOTICE gauges should read as follows:
• 160 to 220°F (71 to 104°C) for Detroit® Clas-
sic Model 2, 4, and 6 axles.
cal failure. Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and • 160 to 329°F (71 to 165°C) for Detroit® New
investigate the cause to prevent further damage. Final Drive (NFD) axles.
• 160 to 329°F (71 to 165°C) for Detroit® Adap-
tive Tandem 6 X 4 axles.
perature gauge should read in the following tempera- • 160 to 275°F (71 to 135°C) for Meritor™ drive
ture range: axles.
• 200 to 260°F (93 to 126°C) for Detroit and • 180 to 200°F (82 to 93°C) for Dana Spicer®
Cummins engines drive axles.
Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep Under heavy loads, such as when climbing steep
grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem- grades, temperatures that exceed the normal oil tem-
perature range for a short period are not unusual. If perature range for a short period are not unusual. If
the temperature returns to normal when the load de- the temperature returns to normal when the load de-
creases, there is no problem. creases, there is no problem.
Transmission Oil Temperature Gauge Lift Axle Pressure Gauge

The transmission fluid temperature gauge measures The lift axle pressure gauge registers the air pres-
the transmission lubricant operating temperature. sure applied to the lift axles.
Temperatures vary by application, but the transmis-
sion fluid temperature gauge reading should not ex-
ceed 250°F (121°C).
3.34
Instruments
DPF Soot Level Gauge If the driver display screen shows an undercharged
or overcharged condition for an extended period,
See Chapter 14 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for have the charging system and batteries checked at
details of Diesel Particulate Filter and DEF level an authorized Freightliner service facility.
monitoring.
Speedometer and Tachometer
Application Air Pressure Gauge
In the ICC5 the speedometer and tachometer are
An application air pressure gauge registers the air combined. On the driver display base screen the in-
pressure being used to apply the brakes. The gauge formation is presented as a centered arch (see
will not register air pressure until the foot brake pedal Fig. 3.59). On the driver display pilot screen, it be-
is depressed or the trailer hand brake is applied. comes a split band near the bottom of the screen
(see Fig. 3.58).
Suspension Air Pressure Gauge The speedometer registers the speed of the vehicle.
The suspension air pressure gauge registers the air The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions
pressure applied to the vehicle air suspension. per minute (rpm) and serves as a guide for shifting
the transmission and keeping the engine in the ap-
Trailer Application Air Pressure Gauge propriate rpm range. The tachometer has an over-
The trailer application air pressure registers the ap- speed zone, marked in red, from 2300 to 2500 rpms.
plied air pressure in the brake circuit. The speedometer and tachometer and measure
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour (km/h),
Trailer Suspension Air Pressure depending on the option selected in the system
Gauge settings.
The trailer suspension air pressure gauge registers Fuel Level Gauge
the air pressure applied to the trailer air suspension.
Fuel levels are indicated on a gauge in the lower left
Turbo Boost Pressure Gauge corner of the driver display screen above the DEF
level gauge. The fuel pump icon to the right of the
The turbo boost pressure gauge registers the pres- gauge will illuminate amber when the diesel fuel level
sure in the intake manifold, in excess of atmospheric registers 1/8th of capacity and stay amber until the
pressure, being created by the turbocharger. fuel tank is refilled.
Base ICC5 A-Panel Gauges Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Level

Outside of the gauges screen, the ICC5 offers a Gauge
number of other digital gauges and instruments. The driver display screen shows a DEF level gauge
in the lower left hand corner below the fuel gauge.
Battery Voltage When the DEF level reaches 1/8th of capacity, the
The ICC5 A-panel displays the vehicle charging sys- low DEF icon and the remaining measurement bar
tem voltage in the upper left corner. By monitoring illuminate amber. The bar will continue to remain
this number, the driver can stay aware of potential amber as it decreases until the DEF tank is empty, at
battery charging problems and have them fixed be- which point only the low DEF icon will remain lit. See
Chapter 14 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for more
fore the batteries discharge enough to create starting
details on the DEF level gauge.
difficulties.
The driver display will normally show approximately Odometer
13.7 to 14.1 volts when the engine is running. The
voltage of a fully charged battery is 12.7 to 12.8 volts The odometer is located below the speed indicator at
when the engine is off. Battery voltage under 12.0 the bottom center of the screen. See Fig. 3.58. De-
volts is considered a low battery, and a completely pending on what values are chosen in the Settings
discharged battery will produce only about 11.0 volts. menu, the odometer will display engine miles driven
in mph or km. The display units can be changed at
any time.
3.35
Instruments
2 8
3
4
5 7
6
07/26/2019 f611703a
1. Battery Voltage 4. DEF Fluid Level Gauge 7. Primary Air Pressure Gauge
2. Speedometer 5. Odometer 8. Tachometer
3. Fuel Gauge 6. Secondary Air Pressure Gauge
Fig. 3.58, Driver Display in Pilot Screen Mode - ICC5
Floating ICC5 A-Panel Gauges

1
Vehicle information can also be accessed on the
2 driver display or A-panel screen by moving through
versions of the base layout.
The gauge information available on the infotainment
or B-panel screen shows up on the left side of the
speedometer/tachometer. See Fig. 3.60.
01/02/2020 f546895a
1. Speedometer 2. Tachometer
Fig. 3.59, Speedometer and Tachometer Base Driver
Display Screen - ICC5
Primary and Secondary Air Gauges

Primary and secondary air gauges are stacked in the
lower right corner of the A-panel display. See
Fig. 3.58. When the air pressure drops too low, both
the air pressure measurement and the air pressure
icon will change color. A complete lack of air pres-
sure will result in only the icon being either amber 07/30/2019 f611770
(caution) or red (danger).
Fig. 3.60, Coolant Temperature & Engine Oil Pressure
on Driver Display - ICC5
3.36
Instruments
Safety feature graphics and pop-up screens appear • Keeping the speed steady with cruise control
in the center and feature related icons appear at bot- off increases the Smooth Acceleration value.
tom center of the screen.
• Sudden braking outside of an urban environ-
Data such as trip information, fuel consumption, and ment decreases the Gentle Braking value.
eco driver feedback appear to the right of the
speedometer/tachometer. See Fig. 3.61. • No incidences of sudden breaking over time
increases the Gentle Braking value.
Eco Driver Feedback
ICC5 B-Panel Chassis Status
Information
In addition to controls and gauges, the ICC5 B-panel
provides access to chassis status information:
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System
• Axles
• Maintenance System
• Diagnostics
• Active Driver Alerts
Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)
The tire pressure monitoring system displays tire
pressure, temperature, and sensor status. Maintain-
ing correct tire pressure increases fuel economy.
07/30/2019 f611771
Sustained high tire temperature can cause a tire to
Fig. 3.61, Eco Driver Feedback on the Driver Display -
deteriorate, leading to tread separation and blowouts.
ICC5 Tire Pressure has three submenu options: tire pres-
sure, tire temperature, and sensor status. Selecting
Eco Driver Feedback encourages a driver to make the tire icon image will display a vehicle image on
economical driving a habit with the goal of saving the screen showing the tire pressure for each tire.
fuel and reducing wear. See Fig. 3.61. Tire pressure can be displayed in psi or bar units.
Eco Driver Feedback gauges, displayed on the right- The unit of measure is displayed behind the rear left
hand side of the driver display, show a driver’s per- tire on the vehicle image. See Fig. 3.62. Units of
formance in three categories: gentle braking, smooth measure are set under Settings.
acceleration, and cruise control usage. Performance
is newly calculated with each vehicle start.
Examples of driving behavior that increases or de- 2
1
creases the amount of green in each column are as
follows:
3
• Time in cruise control increases the Cruise
Control Usage value. 4
• Failure to engage cruise control after the Use 08/07/2019 f611760
Cruise Control popup appears decreases the 1. Set Pressure button 4. Submenu Screen
Cruise Control Usage value 2. Tire Pressure Value Indicator
• Pumping the accelerator pedal decreases the 3. Units of Measurement
Smooth Acceleration value. Fig. 3.62, TPMS: Tire Pressure - ICC5
3.37
Instruments
Tires on the truck image will change color if tire pres- Axles
sure is too high or too low based on factory settings.
Red indicates a condition that may pose a threat to This menu provides access to the axle locks status
the control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a condi- screen showing engaged locks.
tion that may result in damage. See Fig. 3.63, For more information see Chapter 19 Drive Axles.
The option to Set Pressure is available on the tire
pressure screen. Selecting this option allows you to Maintenance System
change default settings.
NOTE: the wrench icon indicates a need for
maintenance, not something broken that needs
to be fixed.
1
Standard messaging is based on the number of
miles (km) driven or time passed since the last ser-
2 vice.
3
Predictive maintenance information is calculated
based on these factors as well as engine and trans-
08/07/2019 f611761 mission load and oil temperature.
1. Tire Temperature 3. Screen Indicator Currently, predictive maintenance information is given
2. Unit of Measurement for engine oil, transmission oil, and axle oil changes.
Fig. 3.63, TPMS: Tire Temperature- ICC5 By taking driving conditions into account, predictive
maintenance provides more accurate intervals for
Selecting the temperature icon will show an image of fluid changes.
the vehicle on the screen showing the temperature of Just before the service interval ends, a message that
each tire. Tire temperature can be displayed in Fahr- maintenance is due will appear. See Fig. 3.65.
enheit or Celsius. The unit of measure is displayed
behind the rear left tire on the vehicle image. Units of
measure are set under Settings.
Tires on the truck image will change color if tire tem-
perature is too high. Red indicates a condition that 1
may pose a threat to the vehicle. Amber indicates a
condition that may result in damage. 2
Selecting the battery icon will show the battery
strength of each tire sensor. 08/07/2019 f611759
If a sensor’s battery life is low, both the tire and the 1. Amber Wrench Indicating Maintenance is Overdue
sensor icon on the truck image will change color to 2. Reset Button
amber. If sensor battery status is critically low they
Fig. 3.65, Example ICC5 Maintenance Screen - ICC5
will become red. See Fig. 3.64.
When the service interval is reached, a pop-up notice
that maintenance is due will appear with every key
1 cycle.
When the service interval is overdue, the color of the
wrench icon on the maintenance screen will change
from white to amber and the message will change to
2 Maintenance Overdue. This cautionary pop-up will
continue to appear with every key cycle.
08/07/2019 f611762
The color of the wrench icon on the maintenance
1. Sensor Battery Icon 2. Screen Indicator screen will change from white to amber when a
Fig. 3.64, TPMS: Sensor Status - ICC5
maintenance service is overdue.
3.38
Instruments
A service interval countdown can be reset by press- Active Driver Alerts

ing the reset button which will cause a confirmation
pop-up message to appear. If the required mainte- The Active Driver Alerts screen stores the current
nance has been carried out, click Yes. Resetting the active alerts.
maintenance system when service is performed cre- Alerts are color-coded to indicate severity. Red indi-
ates accurate future service intervals. cates a condition that may pose a threat to control of
The reset button for maintenance system screens will the vehicle. Amber indicates a condition that may
not appear until the vehicle has been driven 6.2 result in damage to vehicle components or derating
miles and the engine has run for fifteen minutes. of engine power. Grey is used for notices.
Maintenance system information and service recom-
mendations can also be viewed in the Detroit Con-
ICC5 B-Panel Controls
nect portal. Information on the portal is updated In addition to the features described above, the ICC5
every seven days. B-panel provides a number of digital controls and
environmental information. Under the Cab menu this
Diagnostics includes:
The Diagnostics screen communicates fault codes • Digital Switches
and other diagnostic information about the vehicle.
• Optimized Idle
Fault codes are color-coded to indicate the severity
of the fault. Red indicates a condition that may pose • Settings
a threat to control of the vehicle. Amber indicates a
condition that may result in damage to vehicle com- Digital Switches
ponents or derating of engine power. Grey indicates
a condition that may affect fuel efficiency or vehicle
handling.
Example of Digital Switch Icons and Layout
Lane Departure Air Suspension Level

Inhibit Regeneration Active Traction Control Power Takeoff 1
Warning Up
Lane Keep Assist Regeneration Air Suspension Level

Power Takeoff 2
Active Activation Down
Table 3.6, Example of Digital Switch Icons and Layout
Digital switches can be used to turn different vehicle the arrangement of the switches depends on the fea-
functions on or off. An indicator at the top of the digi- tures of the vehicle. In general switches are grouped
tal button shows the status of the switch with a red into pairs stacked on top of each other. If a feature
line indicating On.
3.39
Instruments
only has one switch or only one switch is available it Optimized idle can be shut off by ICUC controls or
will be displayed at the top of the two switch column. pressing the brake. If the sleeper fan is turned off,
optimized idle will not shut down but the engine will.
Optimized Idle
Settings
Optimized Idle reduces idle time by automatically
stopping and restarting the engine. Besides saving The settings menu allows you to choose system fea-
fuel, it helps keep the batteries charged while main- tures such as display language, units of measure-
taining engine and cab temperature. ment, and sound levels.
The following conditions must be met for the opti- Tap on the settings (gear) icon in the lower left hand
mized idle to function: corner of the infotainment screen to access Settings.
Settings can also be accessed under the Cab menu.
• Vehicle in neutral gear
• Parking brake set
NOTE: Settings options will change based on
the features installed on the vehicle.
• Hood latched
• Sleeper fan on
Settings: Display Style
Optimized idle has four unique operating modes: bat- Adaptive Cruise Display is the only current feature
tery, cold startability (engine oil temperature), interior for which display options are available.
comfort mode, keyless.
Settings: Language
• Battery mode: starts the engine when battery
voltage is below a certain threshold. Language options currently include English (Ameri-
can), Francçais (Canadian), and Español (Mexican).
• Engine oil temperature mode: starts the engine
when the engine oil temperature is below a Settings: Units
certain threshold.
NOTE: Setting a Distance unit to either imperial
• Comfort mode: starts the engine to maintain (miles) or metric (kilometers) will auto-populate
the driver’s selected interior temperature the Consumption to the same system of mea-
• Keyless mode: maintains any of the modes surement.
above without the key in the ignition switch. Units refers to units of measurement and are se-
Optimized idle can be started with the engine running lected using an either/or radio buttons in each cat-
or the engine off. egory.
1. With the key on, go to the Cab menu and select Units are set for Speed (km/h or mph), Fuel Con-
Optimized Idle. A caution notice will popup. sumption (1/100km or mpg), and Distance (kilome-
ters or miles). Other units include:
2. Read the caution and press Enable.
• Following Distance: either distance or time
3. A screen may appear to start Standby or another
mode. If this is the only option, press Enable. • Pressure: either kPa or PSI
4. Otherwise a screen will appear with an Enable • Temperature: either Celsius or Fahrenheit
with Comfort button as an option. If you want to
optimize the environment of the sleeper section, Settings: Brightness
select the Enable with Comfort button.
Brightness levels for the instrument display, infotain-
5. The vehicle will go into standby mode, an under ment display, and the dash can be adjusted here
hood alarm will briefly sound, and the engine will using touch-screen slider controls.
crank and achieve 900 rpm. The screen will
change to the selected mode. A Disable button Settings: Key Alert
will be present.
This setting turns the audible lock alert on or off.
6. The engine and fan/air conditioning will run until
it achieves the temperature requested by the
driver. The engine will then shut down.
3.40
Instruments
Settings: Display Off and On Lighting

Selecting this setting turns the display off. Touching The lighting menu provides controls for a set of inte-
anywhere on the display screen turns it on again. rior and exterior lights using the touch screen.
Settings: Controls Exterior lighting
Controls provides the ability to change keyboards to The exterior lighting screen presents an image of the
accommodate different languages and scripts as well front of a New Cascadia vehicle showing lights and
as change the sensitivity levels of touch controls. digital switches for those lights. Touching a switch
Touch control settings include slow, medium, and lights up the switch, activates the lights on the image
fast. of the truck, and turns on that light on the truck itself;
Audible system feedback controls can also be ac- touching the switch again turns all these lights off.
cessed here as well as under audio settings. Touching the intelligent high-beam headlights control
at the bottom of the screen will change its status. For
Settings: Audio this switch the status of On is indicated by a lighted
Audio Settings control the volume of navigation and bar at the top of the icon.
traffic announcements, audible system feedback, and When intelligent high-beam headlights are on, the
phone ringtone and speech volume. high-beam headlights will switch to low-beam head-
Audible system feedback setting choices include nor- lights when a vehicle approaches from the opposite
mal, loud, and off. All other audio settings provide direction. They will switch back to high-beam head-
touch-screen slider controls to set volume. lights when no vehicles are approaching from the
opposite direction.
Settings: Licence Activation The intelligent headlights can also be controlled by
License Activation lists all activated software licences using the headlight switch and turn signal lever; see
with activation and expiration dates. Chapter 4 Driver Controls for more information.
Touching the courtesy lighting icon will open a popup
Settings: Reset showing the current lighting duration and allowing the
The Reset option under Settings allows you to delete lighting duration to be adjusted.
all data from the system. Exterior lighting controlled by the rotary dial cannot
be controlled through the exterior light screen.
Driving Assistance Settings
If the fog lamp is turned on via the rotary dial, the fog
The Driving Assistance menu is only available if at lamp on the truck graphic will be shown as on.
least one driving assistant setting is available.
The Driving Assistance menu in Settings allows you Interior Lighting
to turn available features on or off and/or change set- The interior lighting menu shows an image of an inte-
ting parameters. rior of a New Cascadia truck. The digital switches for
Possible Driving Assistance menu options include: interior lighting allow for the control of overhead, foot
well, and sleeper lights.
• Side Guard Assist
Touching any of the light icons on the screen will
• Active Lane Assist lights up the digital switch, activate the lights on the
• Traffic Sign Display interior image of the truck, and turn on those lights in
the truck itself.
• eCoast
All interior lights can be dimmed using the slider next
• Attention Assist to the light icon.
• Creep Mode All available lights in the cab can be turned off and
on by touching the Off button.
Driving assistance features are described in Chap-
ter 7 Driver Assistance Features and Chapter 13 Entrance lighting can be controlled by the settings
Optional Engine Systems. icon. Touching the settings icon will open a popup
3.41
Instruments
window where the entrance lighting can be toggled

off or on and entrance light timing controls can be
Infotainment: ICC5
accessed. Choosing entrance light timing will be General ICC5 Infotainment
open a slider that allows modification of the length of
time the entrance light is on.
Information
All sleeper lights can be dimmed using the slider Information and controls available on the ICC5 info-
next to the light icon. tainment (B-panel) display:
• Shortcut icons, statusline, and climate bar
Climate Control Information • Gauges
NOTE: See Chapter 8 Climate Controls for de- • Cab
tailed climate control panel operating
instructions. • Chassis
1
4
2 3 5 6
07/30/2019 f611769
1. Recirculation Status 3. Air Conditioning Status 5. Blower Selection
2. Fan Speed 4. Temperature Settings 6. Sleeper Override
Fig. 3.66, Informational Climate Bar
On vehicles equipped with the ICC5, climate control • Lighting

information will briefly appear on the B-panel display
• Navigation
when physical climate controls are adjusted. The fol-
lowing controls should cause the climate bar to ap- • Phone
pear: recirculation settings, fan speed, air condition-
ing status, temperature setting, and blower selection. • Radio
If the cab is equipped with a sleeper and the sleeper • Media

override button is pressed, the sleeper override icon • Smartphone
will also appear in the climate bar. In addition,
changes to the climate control of the sleeper area System Settings
will appear in a pop-up message.
Select the gear icon to open the Settings menu. Set-
tings is also available within the Cab menu.
System Settings lets you choose settings for driving
assistance features, the system itself (language,
units of measurement, etc.), and connectivity.
3.42
Instruments
For more information see Driver Display: ICC5 in NOTE: The Smartphone menu is for connecting
this chapter. a device via MirrorLink®, Android Auto™ or
Apple CarPlay™.
Connectivity
Requirements:
Connectivity settings control the on or off status of
the following features: • Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone.
• Bluetooth • The phone is visible to Bluetooth®.
• NFC (Near Field Communication) • Bluetooth® is activated on the infotainment

system.
• Wi-Fi
Active and authorized devices will have an options Activating Bluetooth®
menu (opened by selecting the three dots to the right NOTE: An iPhone may be connected to the info-
of a device name) to manage device call logs, con- tainment system via Apple CarPlay.
tacts, and deauthorization.
1. Open Settings by selecting the gear shortcut icon
Up to two phones can be active and connected via in the lefthand corner of the screen.
Bluetooth.
2. Select Connectivity.
Bluetooth 3. Make sure Bluetooth is turned on.
Bluetooth is a wireless technology standard for ex- 4. Make sure Bluetooth is active on the phone and
changing data over short distances, typically less the phone is visible via Bluetooth.
than 33 feet (10 m).
A phone connected via Bluetooth will disconnect from Connecting a Phone Using Bluetooth®
the system when taken far enough away from the
Older phones may require that an authorization
vehicle or turned off. It will automatically reconnect
when in range of an active system if it has not been code be manually entered on the mobile phone
deauthorized. and into the infotainment system.
1. Open the Device Manager.
Device Manager
2. Select Connect Device.
Under the Device Manager menu you can:
3. Select Connect New Device. The vehicle
• Connect a new device searches for the device.
• See a list of active and authorized devices 4. If the connection fails, the message My Device
• Control transmission volume Was Not Found will appear. Verify the Activating
Bluetooth requirements have been met.
• Control reception volume
5. Select the My Device Was Not Found message
• Deauthorize a device or press the reload icon at the top right to have
The last three options can be accessed by selecting the vehicle rescan for devices.
the three dots to right of the device name. Both the 6. When a device is found, the name of that device
reception and transmission volume consist of a slider will appear on the screen in addition to the mes-
control with a range of -2 to 2. sage My Device Was Not Found. Select the de-
vice name.
Connecting and Disconnecting a 7. A pop-up will appear asking for verification of a
Phone Using Bluetooth® passkey on the phone. Verify the passkey. The
One can connect or authorize a mobile device such device is authorized and connected.
as a smartphone to interact with the ICC5 infotain- NOTE: The phone will automatically reconnect
ment system through the Phone menu. to the system when in range until deauthorized
Up to fifteen mobile phones can be authorized at a either in the ICC5 infotainment system or on the
time. phone itself.
3.43
Instruments
The Phone Menu 2. Select the icon showing two phones. The primary
and secondary phone are switched.
Once a phone is authorized and connected, a mobile
phone menu for that phone is available. Changing Phone Specific Settings
In addition, the call list and contacts of the primary NOTE: You can only change phone functions on
phone are loaded and accessible. the primary mobile phone.
The phone menu provides a search function for the 1. Open the Phone menu. The primary active
primary phone’s contacts, a number pad for calling phone’s name should display in the upper left.
people not in the contact list, and access to Blu-
etooth and phone specific settings. 2. Select the gear icon to access the setting for the
phone. The Options screen appears.
Connecting a Second Phone
3. Choose which of the following options to change:
Connecting a second phone follows the same pro-
• Synchronize Contacts Automatically
cess as connecting the initial phone, however the call
list and contacts of the second phone are not loaded. • Synchronize contacts: this options is only
1. Open the Device Manager. available if Synchronize Contacts Automati-
cally is turned off.
2. Select Connect Device.
• Delete Contacts: deletes all contacts down-
3. Select Connect New Device. The vehicle loaded from the active phone. Only avail-
searches for the device. able if Synchronize Contacts Automatically
is turned off.
4. When a device is found, the name of that device
will appear on the screen in addition to the mes- • Delete Call List: deletes the call list down-
sage My Device Was Not Found. Select the de- loaded from the active phone.
vice name.
• Name Format: names may be displayed as
5. A pop up will appear asking for verification of a Last, First; Last First; or First Last.
passkey on the phone. Verify the passkey. The
• Bluetooth: Access Device Manager to con-
device is authorized and connected.
nect a new phone, deauthorize a phone,
NOTE: The phone will now automatically recon- and control a phone’s transmission and
nect to the system when in range until deautho- reception volume.
rized either in the ICC5 infotainment system or
on the phone itself. Disconnecting a Phone
A phone may disconnect from the system for the fol-
Two Phone Mode lowing reasons:
In two phone mode, the primary mobile phone can • It moves out of range
access the phone’s contact and call list on the info-
tainment system and make outgoing calls and re- • It is shut off or otherwise loses power
ceive incoming calls; the secondary mobile phone The phone should automatically reconnect when
can receive incoming calls. on and in range of an active system it is autho-
Switching Primary and Secondary rized to connect to. To cancel this automatic
pairing, the phone must be deauthorized either
Phones
on the system or on the phone.
NOTE: When the secondary phone becomes
the primary phone, that phone’s contacts and Reconnecting a Phone
call list are loaded into the system. The previous If a phone does not automatically reconnect to an
primary phone, now the secondary phone, has authorized vehicle, do the following:
no data accessible on the system.
1. Open the Phone menu.
3.44
Instruments
2. Select Connect Device or, if this is not available, 3. Select Device Manager. The Bluetooth Devices
select the Bluetooth icon. The Bluetooth Devices menu opens showing a list of active and autho-
menu opens. rized phones.
3. Find the phone under Authorized Devices and 4. Select the three dots to the right of the phone to
select the phone name. The vehicle will connect deauthorize. The list of options available for that
with the phone. phone opens.
NOTE: if the connection fails, double check that 5. Select Deauthorize. The system asks for verifica-
Bluetooth is active on the phone and the phone tion.
is visible to Bluetooth. 6. Select Yes. The phone is deauthorized.
Replacing a Phone Using a Mobile Phone
Replacing a mobile phone is the same process as General Phone Information
connecting a phone.
Calls may disconnect in the following situations:
To deauthorize the mobile phone being replaced, see
Deauthorizing a Phone Through the Phone Menu • Insufficient network coverage
in this chapter.
• Lack of free voice channels when you travel
Deauthorizing a Phone Through the into a new transmitter/receiver area (cell)
Phone Menu • Phone SIM card is not compatible with the
available network
Deauthorizing a mobile phone, either the primary or
secondary phone, can be done in via the Phone • The second SIM card of a Twincard mobile
menu or through system Settings. phone is already logged onto the network
1. Open the Phone menu. In addition, voice quality may fluctuate. The infotain-
ment system supports high quality calls in HD
2. Select the Bluetooth icon at the bottom of the Voice®, but this depends on HD Voice® being sup-
screen. The Bluetooth Devices menu opens ported by both the mobile phone in use and the net-
showing a list of active and authorized phones. work.
3. If necessary, swipe down the screen to see a list
of all authorized devices. Setting Reception and Transmission
Volume
4. Select the three dots to the right of the phone to
deauthorize. The list of options available for that NOTE: A phone must be active to access these
phone displays. settings.
5. Select Deauthorize. The system asks for verifica- This setting helps ensure optimal speech reception
tion. and transmission quality.
6. Select Yes. The phone is deauthorized. 1. Open the Phone menu.
Deauthorizing a Phone Through Settings 2. Select the Bluetooth icon. The Bluetooth Devices
menu opens.
Deauthorizing a mobile phone, either the primary or
secondary phone, can be done in via the Phone 3. Select the three dots to the right of the phone to
menu or through Settings. access that phone’s options.
1. Open the Settings menu by selecting the short- 4. Select Reception Volume and set the volume.
cut icon of a gear in the lower left corner. The 5. Select the back arrow.
system settings menu opens.
6. Select Transmission Volume and set the volume.
2. Select Connectivity. The Wi-Fi & Bluetooth menu
opens. 7. Return to the main phone screen by pressing the
back arrow or selecting the physical phone but-
ton at the bottom of the infotainment screen.
3.45
Instruments
Searching for a Contact and Making a 2.3 If using the Call List menu, select the
Call phone number. The call is made.
NOTE: A phone must be active to access these Accepting a Call

settings.
There are two ways to accept a call:
1. Open the Phone menu. • Press the Accept Call button on the right-hand
2. Select the magnifying glass icon for Search. A OFN steering wheel pod.
keyboard opens. • Select the accept call button on the infotain-
3. Start entering the first or last name of a contact ment screen.
or a partial or full phone number. As you type a
number will appear next to the icon for the re- Ending or Rejecting a Call
sults list showing how many phone contacts There are two ways to end or reject a call:
have that series of characters.
• Press the End Call button on the right-hand
4. When the number is small enough, select the
OFN steering wheel pod.
results list icon to the right of the search box. A
results list appears. • Press the end call button on the infotainment
screen.
5. Select the desired contact. The contact card ap-
pears. Putting an Active Call on Hold and
6. Select the desired contact phone number. A call Taking if Off Hold
is placed.
NOTE: The function and behavior of taking calls on
Starting Phone Voice Recognition and off hold and accepting and rejecting waiting calls
can vary depending on the phone, phone plan, and
NOTE: When in two phone mode, the phone network provider. If functions and behavior vary from
voice recognition is only available on the pri- these directions, consult the manufacturer’s operating
mary phone. instructions and provider information.
Press and hold the Voice button on the right-hand A call on hold can be ended by selecting the
OFN steering wheel pod for at least one second. End Call button on either the right-hand OFN
Phone voice recognition is now available. steering wheel pod or the infotainment screen.
Ending Phone Voice Recognition 1. Select the active call number. The call is put on
hold.
Press either the Mute Volume or End Call button on
the right-hand OFN steering wheel pod. Mobile 2. Select the active call number. The call is taken
phone voice recognition has ended. off hold.
Making a Call Accepting a Waiting Call in Single Phone

Mode
1. Open the Phone menu. The primary phone menu
appears. If there is an incoming call while a call is being con-
ducted, a screen notification is shown. Depending on
2. Select the number pad icon or select Contacts or the mobile phone and network provider, you may
Call List menu. also hear a sound.
2.1 If using the number pad, enter a number. Tap on the Accept Call button on either the right-
Select the green phone receiver icon. The hand OFN steering wheel pod or the infotainment
call is made. screen. The waiting call is now active. The previous
2.2 If using the Contact’s menu, select a con- call has been put on hold.
tact. The contacts information is shown.
Select a phone number. The call is made.
3.46
Instruments
Accepting a Waiting Call in Two Phone phone will cause the phone to reconnect to the
Mode system without re-importing the contacts list.
If two phone mode is active and the second call is Changing the Format of Contacts’ Names
incoming on the secondary phone, you may hear a
signal in addition to getting a screen notification and This does not change the format of contacts’
hearing a sound. names on the phone.
NOTE: Accepting a incoming waiting call on the 1. Open the Phone menu.
secondary phone while in two phone mode with 2. Select the gear icon on the bottom of the primary
a call on hold on the primary phone, will end the phone’s screen. The Options menu opens.
active call on the secondary phone.
3. Select Name Format. Three name formats ap-
Tap on the Accept Call button on either the right- pear: Last Name, First Name; Last Name First
hand OFN steering wheel pod or the infotainment Name; First Name Last Name.
screen. The waiting call is now active. The previous
call has been on hold 4. Select the radio button for your choice of name
format. The format of the names in the phone
Switching Between Calls contact list is changed.
If there is an active call and another call connection Turning Off Synchronizing Phone
has been established, there are two ways to switch Contacts
back and forth between calls:
Default system behavior is to have contacts on the
• Select the Switch Calls icon of two arrows primary phone automatically synchronize.
pointed in opposite directions on the infotain-
ment screen. 1. Open the Phone menu.
• Select the waiting call. The active call is put on 2. If in two phone mode, make sure the phone you
hold. The chosen call is active. want to synchronize is the primary phone.
NOTE: On some mobile phones, ending the ac- 3. Select the gear icon at the bottom of the phone
tive call will automatically take the call waiting screen. The Options menu opens.
off hold. 4. Move the radio button to turn off Synchronize
Contacts Automatically. Contacts will no longer
Functions Available During a Call be synchronized for this phone.
The following functions are available during an active
call: Deleting All Contacts for the Primary
Phone
• The microphone: selecting the microphone
turns it on or off. NOTE: A phone must be connected to the info-
tainment system to access these settings.
• The number pad: can be used to send Dual
Tone Multiple Frequency (DTMF) tones. Deleting all contacts for the primary phone does not
delete the contacts off the phone nor does it delete
• The Transfer to Phone icon: transfers an active
any of the contacts saved to Favorites. The contacts
hands-free call over to the phone.
saved to Favorites can still be accessed and used
from the Favorites menu as long as the phone is
Phone Contacts and Call List connected to the infotainment system.
Importing Phone Contacts Deauthorizing the phone also does not delete any
contacts saved to the Favorites menu. They do, how-
Phone contacts of the primary phone are automati- ever, become unavailable for use.
cally imported when a phone is initially connected to
the system.
Deleting all contacts and turning off Synchronize
Contacts Automatically without deauthorizing the
3.47
Instruments
Synchronize Contacts Automatically must be turned 5. Select Create new favorite. A favorite is created.
off to delete contacts. As long as Synchronize Con-
tacts Automatically remains off, the phone can dis- Saving a Call List Number as a Favorite
connect and reconnect to the system without con-
1. Open the Phone menu. The screen for the pri-
tacts being reloaded.
mary phone appears.
2. Open the Call List. The phone’s call list appears.
2. Select the gear icon on the bottom of the screen
3. Press and hold the phone number you want to
for the connected phone. The Options menu
opens. add to the Favorites menu. The Options menu
for the number appears.
3. Turn off Synchronize Contacts Automatically.
4. Select Create new favorite. A favorite is created.
4. Select Delete Contacts. A message asking for
verification appears. Renaming a Phone Favorite
5. Select Yes. All contact data for the primary Favorites
phone is deleted off the infotainment system ex-
1. Select the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
cept for contacts saved to Favorites.
ites menu.
Deleting a Phone’s Call List 2. Press and hold on an individual favorite. The Op-
tions menu for the favorite will open.
NOTE: A phone must be connected to the info-
tainment system to access these settings. 3. Select Rename. A keyboard will appear.
Deleting the call list from the infotainment system 4. Type in the new name for the favorite. Select
does not delete the call list off the phone. OK. The favorite has been renamed.
If a phone disconnects and then reconnects to the Moving a Phone Favorite
infotainment system, the phone call list will be re-
loaded. The order of the favorites menu can be changed to
place frequently accessed favorites on the first
1. Open the Phone menu. screen.
2. Select the gear icon on the bottom of the screen 1. Select the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
for the connected phone. The Options menu ites menu.
opens.
2. Press and hold on an individual favorite. The Op-
3. Select Delete Call List. A message asking for tions menu for the favorite will open.
verification appears.
3. Select Move. The favorites screen will change
4. Select Yes. The call list for the primary phone is appearance. A check mark will appear over the
deleted. chosen favorite and arrows will appear on each
side of it.
Saving a Contact as a Favorite
4. Press on the arrows to move the favorite to ei-
NOTE: A phone must be connected to the info- ther the left or right until it’s in the chosen posi-
tainment system to access these settings. tion.
1. Open the Phone menu. The screen for the pri- 5. Select the check mark on top of the favorite. The
mary phone appears. favorite’s new position is saved.
2. Open the Contacts. The phone’s list of contacts
appears. Deleting a Phone Favorite
3. Select the contact you want to add to the Favor- 1. Select the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
ites menu. ites menu.
4. Press and hold on the phone number. The Op- 2. Press and hold on an individual favorite. The Op-
tions menu for the contact appears. tions menu for the favorite will open.
3. Select Delete. The favorite is deleted.
3.48
Instruments
Deleting All Phone Favorites Searching for a SiriusXM® Satellite

If you delete the phone’s contact list, none of Radio Stations by Name
the contacts saved to the Favorites menu will be 1. Select SiriusXM at the top of the Radio menu.
deleted. The only way to delete all phone con- 2. Select the magnifying glass icon. A keyboard
tacts saved to the Favorites menu is to delete with a search bar appears.
each phone contact favorite individually or reset
the Favorites menu. 3. Start typing the name of a known station. The
number of stations with that word appears to the
Radio right next the results list icon.
4. Select the results list icon. The list of results ap-
NOTE: It is a standard safety feature for the
pears.
radio to mute during safety related events; start-
ing in June 2021 Pana-Pacific/Aptiv radios in- 5. Select a station. The station starts playing.
stalled in Freightliner vehicles will automatically
mute when the vehicle is in reverse gear. Searching for a SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio Station by Category
Opening the Radio icon opens the radio home
screen with four options across the top: SiriusXM, 1. Select SiriusXM at the top of the Radio menu.
FM, AM, and WX. 2. Select the list icon at the bottom of the screen.
The SiriusXM menu opens.
Searching for an AM/FM Radio Station
3. Select Category. A list of station categories ap-
Searching for an AM/FM radio stations by name pears.
is not currently available.
4. Select the desired category. The Category list of
1. Select either FM or AM at the top of the Radio stations in that category appears.
menu.
5. Select a station. The station starts playing.
2. Select the magnifying glass icon. A keyboard
with a search bar opens. Browsing SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
3. Press the 123 to access the number pad. The Stations
keyboard changes to numbers and symbols. 1. Select SiriusXM at the top of the Radio menu.
4. Enter the first two or three digits of the desired 2. Select with the list icon at the bottom of the
station frequency ID. The number of results
screen. The SiriusXM menu opens.
shows next to the results list icon to the right.
3. Select SiriusXM. A current station/channel list
5. Select the results list icon. A list of radio frequen-
appears.
cies displays, i.e. 89.0 MHz, 89.1 MHz, 89.2
MHz, etc. 4. Select the desired station. The station starts
playing.
6. Select the desired frequency. The radio is set to
that frequency. Adding a Radio Channel to Favorites
NOTE: Selecting the arrows to the left of the Up to twenty different items can be saved to the Fa-
station icon identification or album artwork will vorites menu.
page through the different stations available, in
any, at this frequency. 1. Open the Radio icon.
2. Navigate to the desired radio station.
SiriusXM® Radio
3. Press and hold on the station icon or current
Search options include searching for a station by album artwork. The Options menu will open.
name, category, or browsing the complete list of
available stations. 4. Select Save as Favorite. The station is now a fa-
vorite.
3.49
Instruments
Deleting a Radio Station Favorite Deleting a Radio Preset

While Global Favorites are created inside indi- 1. Open the Radio icon.
vidual applications, they are deleted, moved, or 2. Use the arrows to the right and left of the screen
renamed inside the Global Favorites menu. For to navigate to the desired preset.
directions, please see the Favorites section in
this chapter. 3. Press and hold on the preset. The Options menu
opens.
Setting a Radio Station Preset 4. Select Delete. The preset is now deleted.
The infotainment system can save up to 12 radio
presets. Weather Radio (WX)
1. Open the Radio icon. Weather Radio displays as WX in the top radio
menu.
2. Navigate to the desired radio station.
Weather radio channels WX1 through WX7, corre-
3. Press and hold on the station icon or current sponding to frequencies 162.400 MHz though
album artwork. The Options menu will open. 162.550 MHz, are the standard weather radio chan-
4. Select Add to presets. The station is now a pre- nels used by NOAA Weather Radio in the United
set. States, Weatheradio Canada/Radiométéo Canada in
Canada, and SARMEX in Mexico. Each system con-
Saving a Radio Station Preset as a sists of a nationwide network of radio stations broad-
casting official weather warnings, watches, adviso-
Favorite ries, forecasts and other non-weather related hazard
A radio station can be saved as both a preset and a information including news on natural disasters
favorite. (earthquakes, avalanches, floods), environmental
hazards (oil spills, chemical releases), and public
1. Open the Radio icon. safety messages (AMBER alerts, network outages).
2. Use the arrows to the right and left of the screen All services operate 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
to navigate to the desired preset. The average range for reception from a transmitter is
3. Press and hold on the preset. The Options menu approximately 40 miles (60 km). The National
opens. Weather Service operates more than 1000 transmit-
ters.
4. Select Save as Favorite. The preset is now also
saved under the Favorites menu. Displaying AM/FM/WX Emergency
Warnings
Moving a Radio Preset
1. Select the gear icon at the bottom of the AM,
Radio station presets can be reordered to move FM, or WX radio screen. The Options menu for
those more frequently accessed to the first screen. that application opens.
1. Open the Radio icon. 2. Turn on or off Display Emergency Warnings.
2. Use the arrows to the right and left of the screen
to navigate to the desired preset. Sound System Settings
3. Press and hold on the preset. The Options menu Adjusting the Volume
opens.
Volume can be increased or decreased by pressing
4. Select Move. A checkmark appears over the pre-
the —VOL or +VOL buttons below the infotainment
set with arrows to each side.
screen or by using the VOL+ or VOL— buttons on
5. Press the arrows to move the preset into the de- the OFN steering wheel switch pod.
sired order.
Muting and Unmuting the Radio
6. Select the checkmark over the preset. The pre-
set is now saved in its new location. The global Radio menu has an icon of a speaker
with a line through it. Press this icon to mute the
3.50
Instruments
radio. The radio mutes. The icon image changes to a Renaming Favorites
speaker playing music.
1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
To unmute the radio select the icon of the speaker ites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
playing music. The radio starts playing. The icon
image changes to a speaker with a line through it. 2. Press and hold on the icon for a favorite. The
Options menu appears.
Muting and Unmuting Media Devices 3. Select Rename. A keyboard appears.
To mute or unmute audio playback from media de- 4. Enter the new name. Select OK. The favorite has
vices you can increase or decrease the volume or been renamed.
halt media playback.
Play of media devices can me halted via the Media Moving Favorites
menu by selecting the pause button. Restarting Favorites can be reordered to move the most popular
media playback may be done by selecting the play to the first screen of the Favorites menu.
button the Media menu.
1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
Bluetooth streaming may require restarting playback ites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
on the connected device.
2. Press and hold on the icon for a favorite. The
Accessing Sound Settings Options menu appears.
Sound settings are global settings for all audio 3. Select Move. The selected favorite now has a
sources and provide access to the equalizer and bal- checkmark over it and arrows at each side.
ance controls as well as the on/off controls for auto- 4. Press on either the right or left arrow to move
matic volume amplification. the favorite into the desired position.
1. Select the gear icon at the bottom of the screen 5. Select the checkmark. The favorite has been
in an audio application. The Options menu for saved in its new position.
that application opens.
2. Select Sound. The Sound menu opens. Deleting Favorites
3. Select the sound setting to manipulate. The 1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
Equalizer menu or Balance menu opens. ites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
4. Select and move the control along the slider(s) 2. Press and hold on the icon for a favorite. The
available. The sound settings have been Options menu appears.
changed. 3. Select Delete. The favorite is now deleted.
Favorites Deleting All Favorites
The Favorites menu offers quick access to frequently 1. Tap on the star shortcut icon to open the Favor-
used phone numbers and radio stations. It can be ites menu. Saved favorites are displayed.
accessed by selecting the star shortcut icon at the
bottom right of the infotainment screen. 2. Select the word Reset at the bottom of the Fa-
vorites screen. The Reset verification pop-up will
Favorites are created from inside different applica- appear.
tions. For directions on saving a phone contact to the
Favorites menu, see Saving a Contact as a Favor- 3. Select Yes. All favorites are deleted.
ite in this chapter. For directions on saving a radio
station to the Favorites menu, see Adding a Radio Media
Channel to Favorites in this chapter.
The vehicle infotainment system is capable of playing
It is possible to create up to twenty favorites. music from a phone, USB drive, or other device. The
vehicle has two USB2 ports to connect devices. De-
vices can also be connected to the system via Blu-
etooth.
3.51
Instruments
If an authorized phone is connected to the system

via Bluetooth when the Media menu is opened, the
Warnings, Indicators, and
infotainment system should automatically start Messages
streaming that music.
Audible Alerts: ICUC
Playing Audio Off a Phone or Other
Device An audible alert sounds whenever one of the follow-
ing conditions exists:
Selecting a different audio source than the one active
turns off the music. You may need to restart the • Engine oil pressure falls below the minimum
music on the device when returning to the original preset value.
audio source to get the music to play. • Coolant temperature rises above the maximum
Bluetooth audio functions are not available if an preset value.
Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, or MirrorLink ses- • Air pressure falls below approximately 70 psi
sion is active. (483 kPa).
1. Open the Media menu. • Parking brake is set with the vehicle moving
faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
2. Select the audio source: Bluetooth, USB1, or
USB2. • System voltage falls below 11.9 volts.
3. If necessary, select the music to play. Music • Door is unlatched with the parking brake off.
starts playing through the vehicle speakers. Optional audible alert sounds whenever one of the
following conditions exists:
Smartphone
• Driver seat occupancy sensor reads someone
NOTE: Apple CarPlay, Android Auto, and Mirror- in the seat with the seat belt not fastened and
Link should not be used for navigation for a the parking brake off.
truck or bus as both lack the ability to take • Key is in the ignition and the door is unlatched.
vehicle-based route restrictions into account.
Apple CarPlay™ Audible Alerts: ICC5
An audible alert sounds whenever one of the follow-
Apple CarPlay allows a driver to use an iPhone to
ing conditions exists:
make calls, send and receive messages, listen to
music, and get directions. • Engine oil pressure falls below the minimum
preset value.
Apple CarPlay can connect to the system via a
USB2 cable or Bluetooth. • Coolant temperature rises above the maximum
preset value.
Android Auto™
• Air pressure falls below approximately 70 psi
Android Auto allows the driver to use an Android (483 kPa).
phone to make calls, send and receive messages,
get information, listen to music, and get directions. • Parking brake is set with the vehicle moving
faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Android Auto requires that a smartphone be con-
nected to the system via a USB2 cable. • System voltage falls below 11.9 volts.
• Door is unlatched and the vehicle speed ex-
MirrorLink® ceeds 5 mph (8 km/h).
MirrorLink allows a driver to use any MirrorLink en- Optional audible alert sounds whenever one of the
abled smart phone to get directions, listen to music, following conditions exists:
and use smart phone applications.
• Driver seat occupancy sensor reads someone
MirrorLink uses huge icons that allow for the control in the seat with the seat belt not fastened and
of smart phone features without getting distracted the parking brake off.
from the task of driving.
3.52
Instruments
• Key is in the ignition and the door is unlatched. blue (active status), grey (passive status), white (in-
formational). Blue is currently used to indicate an ac-
Warnings, Indicators, and Messages tive phone call, that a software download is available,
and that utility lamps and high beams are on.
Warning and indicator lights (telltales) with icon sym-
bols are displayed on the physical dashboard and on IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdic-
ICU screens. The positions of the telltales and warn- tional emissions guidelines, vehicles and/or en-
ings vary, but most telltale symbols are standard. gines that are domiciled outside of the U.S. and
See the below tables for a listing of different warn- Canada may not be compliant with EPA10 or
ings and telltales in addition to messages and popup GHG21 regulations. Noncompliant vehicles may
screens. not be equipped with all of the telltales shown in
The colors of telltales and warnings indicate the haz- the below tables.
ard level: red (warning), amber (caution), green and
Warnings, Indicators, and Messages

Engine System
Telltale Color Description Related Messages
Indicates a serious fault that requires engine
shutdown immediately. The engine protection
system will reduce the maximum engine torque
and speed, and, if the condition does not
improve, will shut down the engine within 30 to
60 seconds.
Red Stop Engine* Safely bring the vehicle to a stop on the side of Various
the road and shut down the engine as soon as
the red light is seen. If the engine shuts
down while the vehicle is in a hazardous
location, turn the key to the OFF position
for a few seconds, then restart the engine
and move the vehicle to a safer location.
Engine Oil Level

Red
Warning
Low Engine Oil Indicates the engine oil pressure is below the
Red
Pressure minimum allowable pressure.
04/22/2016 f611368
ICUC Warning
Engine Oil
Red Temperature
Warning
Red Low Coolant Level
3.53
Instruments

Engine System
High Coolant Indicates the coolant temperature is above the

Red
Temperature maximum allowable temperature.
04/22/2016 f611371
ICUC Warning
Indicates an engine condition (low oil pressure,
low coolant level, high coolant temperature,
high DPF soot level, uncontrolled DPF
regeneration, or battery voltage 11.9 volts or
Amber Check Engine* less) that requires correction. Various
Correct the condition as soon as possible.

If the condition worsens, the STOP engine
lamp will illuminate.
Engine Malfunction
A steadily illuminated amber MIL lamp
Amber Indicator Lamp
indicates an engine fault that effects emissions.
(MIL)*
Engine Malfunction Alternate Engine Malfunction Indicator lamp.

Amber Indicator Lamp A steadily illuminated amber MIL lamp
(MIL)* indicates an engine fault that effects emissions.
Engine Oil Level

Amber
Caution
Engine Oil
Amber
Pressure Caution
Low Coolant Level

Amber
Caution
High Coolant
Amber Temperature
Caution
3.54
Instruments

Engine System
Indicates that the system is preventing the
starter from cranking. This can occur when the
ignition switch is turned to START before the
gauge sweep has completed.
NOTE: Display of the Start Blocked screen
Amber Start Blocked does not indicate a problem with the starter.
Turn the ignition switch back to ON, wait for
the message to turn off, then turn the ignition
switch to START again. 04/22/2016 f611369
ICUC Notice
Amber Start Blocked Alternative Telltale for Start Blocked.
Green Start Engine
Optimized Idle
Green Indicates optimized idle is active.
Active
Table 3.7, Engine Related Indicators
*See Chapter 14 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for warning indicators, and actions required to avoid fur-
an explanation of the after treatment system (ATS) ther engine protection steps.
Telltales, Indicator Icons, and Messages

Transmission
Indicates low transmission fluid level.
Transmission Fluid
Red Safely bring the vehicle to a stop as
Level Warning
soon as possible.
Caution Check Indicates an undesirable transmission

Amber
Transmission condition.
Low Transmission
Amber Indicates low transmission fluid level.
Fluid Level Caution
3.55
Instruments

Transmission
High Transmission
Amber Indicates transmission is overheating.
Temperature
04/22/2016 f611377
ICUC Caution
Table 3.8, Transmission Related Indicators

Brakes
Low Brake Air Indicates air pressure in the primary or
Red Pressure (EPA10 secondary reservoir has dropped below
and Newer) approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
Alternate low brake air pressure telltale.

Low Brake Air
Indicates air pressure in the primary or
Red Pressure (EPA10
secondary reservoir has dropped below
and Newer)
approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
06/30/2016 f611429
ICUC Warning
Parking Brake
Red Engaged Indicates the parking brake is engaged.
(EPA10 and Newer)
Parking Brake
Engaged Alternative icon indicating the parking brake
Red
is engaged.
(EPA10 and Newer)
Hill Holder Assist

Amber
Off
Hill Start Aid

Amber
Engaged
3.56
Instruments

Brakes
Winch Brake
Amber
Caution
Amber Work Brake Caution
Descent Control
Green
Mode Engaged
Engine Brake
Green Indicates the engine brake is enabled.
Engaged
Table 3.9, Brake Related Indicators

Driving Safety
Flashing indicates a stability event has been
detected, and the ESC system is active.
Electronic Stability
Amber Control (ESC) Solid illumination indicates a problem
Active with the stability system. Repair the ESC
system immediately to ensure full
stability capability.
Electronic Stability
Amber
Program Off
Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle

ABS is engaged.
Tractor Anti-Lock
Solid illumination indicates a problem with
Amber Braking System
the vehicle ABS.
(ABS)
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure
full braking capability.
Momentary illumination indicates the trailer
ABS is engaged.
Trailer Anti-Lock
Solid illumination indicates a problem with
Amber Braking System
the trailer ABS.
(ABS)
Repair the ABS immediately to ensure
full braking capability.
Active Brake Assist

Amber Indicates Active Brake Assist is engaged.
Active
3.57
Instruments

Driving Safety
Active Brake Assist

Indicates the Active Brake Assist system is
Amber Unavailable
not available.
(GHG14 and newer)
04/22/2016 f611353
ICUC Caution
Indicates that lane departure warning is
disabled due to minimum speed, lack of
Lane Departure lane markings, or system not being
Amber available.
Unavailable
ICC5 NOTE: Only on vehicles equipped with
Telltale Detroit Assurance radar.
Indicates that lane departure warning is

disabled due to minimum speed, lack of
Lane Departure lane markings, or system not being
Amber available.
Unavailable
ICUC
NOTE: Only on vehicles equipped with
Telltale
Detroit Assurance radar.
06/28/2016 f611372
ICUC Caution
Indicates that Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise is not available
Amber Control Not NOTE: Only on vehicles equipped with a
Available radar-based collision warning and mitigation
ICC5
Telltale system (CWS/CMS).
Indicates that Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

Adaptive Cruise is not available
Amber Control Not NOTE: Only on vehicles equipped with a
ICUC Available radar-based collision warning and mitigation
Telltale system (CWS/CMS). 04/22/2016 f611354
ICUC Caution
If ACC is not available,
Active Lane Assist (ALA)
will not be available.
Amber IPPC Error
3.58
Instruments

Driving Safety
Adaptive Cruise
Green
Control Active
Adaptive Power An error with APS

Red Steering (APS) deactivates Active Lane
Error Assist (ALA).
LKA is a component of Active Lane Assist
(ALA) along with Lane Departure Protection
Lane Keep Assist (LDP). This is also the Switch
Blue
(LKA) Active icon
If Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not
available, ALA will not be available.
Lane Keep Assist When LKA is OFF there is

Grey
(LKA) on Standby no steering wheel icon
Gear Teach Mode in

Amber
Progress
Indicates that aerodynamic height control

Green AERO active
(AERO) is active.
Table 3.10, Driving Safety Related Icons

Suspension
Telltale Color Description Related Message
Suspension Higher
Indicates the current rear suspension height
Amber than Normal Ride
is above the normal ride height.
Height / Axle Lifted
11/09/2016 f611471
ICUC Caution
3.59
Instruments

Suspension
Suspension Lower
Than Normal Ride Indicates the current rear suspension height
Amber
Height / Axle is below the normal ride height.
Dropped
06/29/2016 f611434
ICUC Caution
Amber Suspension Height
Electronically
Controlled Air Indicates Electronically Controlled Air
Amber
Suspension (ECAS) Suspension (ECAS) active fault.
Error
04/22/2016 f611367
ICUC Caution
Indicates the ECAS system is applying the

maximum available vehicle load on the drive
Amber Load Transfer
axle up to the maximum gross axle weight
rating (GAWR).
11/09/2016 f611472
ICUC Caution
Amber 5th Wheel Adjust
Table 3.11, Suspension Related Indicators

Battery
Red Battery Critical
3.60
Instruments

Battery
Red Battery Failure
Amber Battery Failure
Table 3.12, Battery Related Indicators

Tire Related Indicators
If a tire monitoring system
Low Tire Pressure Indicates a notable loss of tire pressure in at is available, the tire(s)
Red
Warning least one tire. with low pressure will be
highlighted red.
If a tire monitoring system
Low Tire Pressure is available, the tire(s)
Amber Indicates low tire pressure in at least one tire.
Warning with low pressure will be
highlighted amber.
Automatic Traction
Flashing indicates a wheel spin event has
Amber Control (ATC)
been detected, and the ATC system is active.
Active
Automatic Traction
Indicates the ATC SPIN button has been
Amber Control (ATC)
pressed to allow wheel slip.
Deactivated
ICUC Caution
Table 3.13, Tire Related Indicators

Fuel
Indicates low fuel level.

Amber Low Fuel
Refill the main fuel tank.
3.61
Instruments

Fuel
Indicates the fuel may contain water.
Water in Fuel
Amber Drain any water collected in the fuel/water
Warning
separators.
Table 3.14, Fuel Related Indicators

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Diesel Particulate Indicates a parked regen is required

Red
Filter Critical immediately.
06/10/2016 f611403
ICUC Warning
Solid illumination indicates a regen is

required. Change to a more challenging duty
cycle (such as highway driving) to raise
Diesel Particulate exhaust temperatures for at least twenty
Amber minutes, or perform a parked regen.
Filter (DPF) Status
Blinking indicates that a parked regen is
required immediately. An engine derate and
shutdown will occur.
06/10/2016 f611401
ICUC Caution
Diesel Particulate
Amber
Filter Inhibited
Diesel Particulate
Green Filter Regeneration Indicates a regen is in progress.
in Progress
3.62
Instruments

Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF)
Slow (10-second) flashing indicates a
regeneration (regen) is in progress.
IMPORTANT: When the HEST lamp is
High Exhaust illuminated, do not park the vehicle near
System objects that can be harmed by high
Amber temperatures or flammable materials.
Temperature
(HEST)* Solid illumination indicates high exhaust
temperatures at the outlet of the tail pipe
when speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
See Chapter 14 for an

explanation of the after
Low Diesel Exhaust Indicates low diesel exhaust fluid. treatment system (ATS)
Amber
Fluid Fill the DEF tank. warnings, and actions
required to avoid further
engine protection steps.
See Chapter 14 for an
Alternative icon to indicate Low Diesel explanation of the after
Low Diesel Exhaust Exhaust Fluid. treatment system (ATS)
Amber
Fluid warnings, and actions
Fill the DEF tank. required to avoid further
engine protection steps.
Table 3.15, Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) and Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) Related Icons

Lamps
Telltale Color Description Related Information
Right-Turn Flashing indicates the outside right-turn signal

Green
Indicator On lamps are activated.
Left-Turn Indicator Flashing indicates the outside left-turn signal

Green
On lamps are activated.
Blue High-Beams On Indicates the high-beam headlights are on.
Green Low-Beams On Indicates the low-beam headlights are on.
Automatic High- Indicates the high-beam headlights have been

Blue
Beams On set to automatic and are on.
3.63
Instruments

Lamps
Automatic High- Indicates the high-beam headlights have been

Grey
Beams Off set to automatic and are off.
Automatic Low- Indicates the low-beam headlights have been

Green
Beams On set to automatic and are on.
Automatic Low- Indicates the low-beam headlights have been

Grey
Beams Off set to automatic and are off.
Daytime Running
Green Indicates the daytime running lamps are on.
Lamps On
Auxiliary Drive
Blue Indicates the auxiliary drive lamps are on.
Lamps On
Blue Utility Lamps On Indicates the utility lamps are on.
Taillights / Marker Indicates the taillights, aka marker lamps, are

Green
Lamps On on.
Table 3.16, Lamp Indicators

Passenger Safety
On some vehicles, activates with an audible
alert when the system detects that the
parking brake is off and the driver seat belt
is not fastened.
On vehicles with a seat occupancy sensor,
Unfastened Seat
Red the seat being occupied, seat belt not
Belt
fastened, and parking brake off will cause
this warning to activate.
On other vehicles, this lamp illuminates for
15 seconds when the ignition is first turned
on.
3.64
Instruments

Passenger Safety
Indicates a malfunction has occurred in the
restraint system and restraint system
Supplemental components may be triggered
Amber Restraint System unintentionally or may not deploy as
(SRS) Error intended during an accident.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired immediately.
Table 3.17, Passenger Safety Indicators

Weather
Related Pop-Up
Telltale Color Description
Message
Indicates ambient air temperature has

dropped below 34°F (1°C).
White Snowflake
Pay attention to road conditions and watch
for ice.
05/29/2019 f611753a
ICUC Caution
Table 3.18, Weather Related Indicator

ICU Application Icons
The phone screen in the
infotainment section of
Indicates a phone is connected to the ICU and the ICU will also show an
Blue Active Phone Call
a call is active. active call, including the
number being called and
call length.
Indicates a software download is available.
Software Download For reasons of security and optimal vehicle A pop-up message will
Blue
Available functioning, software updates should be also appear.
quickly installed.
Table 3.19, ICU Application Icons
3.65
Instruments

Air Gauge Indicators
Primary Air
Red
Warning
Secondary Air
Red
Warning
Application Air
Red
Warning
Amber Primary Air Caution
Table 3.20, Air Gauge Indicators
Engine Protection System On other engines, the engine protection system will
shut down the engine. It will first derate the engine,
then shut it down completely 30 to 60 seconds after
WARNING the indicator illuminates (depending on the critical
fault type) if the condition does not improve. Bring
When the red STOP engine lamp illuminates, the vehicle to a stop on the side of the road before
most engines are programmed to shut down au- the engine shuts down.
tomatically within 30 seconds. The driver must
immediately move the vehicle to a safe location Some vehicles may have a shutdown-override
at the side of the road to prevent causing a haz- switch, which may be used to momentarily override
ardous situation that could cause bodily injury, the shutdown sequence. See Chapter 12 Engine
property damage, or severe damage to the en- Starting, Operation, and Shutdown for detailed infor-
gine. mation regarding the shutdown process.
See Chapter 14 Emissions and Fuel Efficiency for IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to restart the en-
an explanation of the aftertreatment system (ATS) gine while the vehicle is moving. Bring the ve-
warning indicators, and actions required to avoid fur- hicle to a safe stop, then restart the engine.
ther engine protection steps.
To restart the engine, turn the ignition to OFF, leave
The STOP engine lamp illuminates when the engine it there a few seconds, then turn the ignition to
protection system is activated in one of two ways. On START. The engine will run for a short period and
some engines, the engine protection system will der- shut down again if the condition does not improve.
ate the engine, allowing it to run at lower rpm and
slower vehicle speed. Drive the vehicle to a safe lo-
cation or to a service facility.
IMPORTANT: Safely bring the vehicle to a stop
on the side of the road and shut down the en-
gine as soon as the red light is seen. If the en-
gine shuts down while the vehicle is in a haz-
ardous location, turn the key to the OFF position
for a few seconds, then restart the engine and
move the vehicle to a safer location.
3.66
4
Driver Controls
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Windshield Wiper and Washer Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Suspension Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Fifth Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Adjustable Steering Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Radio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18
Driver Controls
Ignition Switch • power receptacle

• fuel heater
The ignition switch is located on the left-hand dash,
below the headlight switch. • electric oil pan heater
The ignition switch has four positions: OFF, ACC (ac- • electric or diesel-fired engine coolant pre-
cessory), ON, and START. See Fig. 4.1. heater
Turn the key counterclockwise to reach the ACC po-
sition. In addition to all the functions that are oper-
able in the OFF position, the following functions are
operable when the switch is in the ACC position:
• radio/stereo system
• heater and A/C fan
• mirror defog
• windshield fan
• ether start system
• air dryer
02/03/2017 f610805
• backup lights
Fig. 4.1, Ignition Switch
Turn the key clockwise past the OFF position to
In the OFF position, the ignition switch is vertical. reach the ON position. With the switch in the ON po-
The key can be inserted and removed only in the sition, all electrical systems become operable and
OFF position. the warning and indicator lamps illuminate. Wait for
three seconds before starting the engine.
The following functions are operable when the igni-
tion switch is in the OFF position (regardless of IMPORTANT: Do not crank the engine until the
whether the key is inserted): ICU self-check is complete.
• low-beam headlights Turn the key clockwise past the ON position to reach
the START position to start the engine. Release the
• taillights key the moment the engine starts. Do not operate
• brake lights the starter longer than thirty seconds, then allow the
starter to cool between attempts. If the starter over-
• road lights heats, the starter protection system will prevent op-
• dome lights eration of the starter until it has cooled.
• clearance lights The ignition key also locks and unlocks the cab
doors.
• hazard warning lights
• utility lights Lighting Controls
• baggage compartment lights Unless otherwise noted below, press the upper half
• spotlights of the switch to turn the desired light(s) on or off.
• electric horn Exterior Lighting Controls

• clock Exterior light controls are listed here in alphabetical
• refrigerator order. The ICC5 also provides some exterior light
controls.
• CB radio
• power mirrors
4.1
Driver Controls
Automatic Headlights nition is switched on and the parking brake is re-

leased. The DRL turn off when the engine falls below
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain-light sensor and 400 rpm, the parking brake is applied, or the head-
the headlight switch is in the ’A’ position, the low lights are turned on.
beam headlights and all exterior lights activate when
the outside light decreases to a pre-set level. See Daytime running lights are mandatory for vehicles
Fig. 4.2. domiciled in Canada. Vehicles domiciled in any other
location may have an optional override switch
3 (Fig. 4.3, ref. 3). This is a momentary switch that en-
2 4 ables the driver to deactivate the DRL.
5
Fog Lights
Fog lights are designed to reduce glare in foggy con-
ditions. The marker lights or headlights must be on in
order to turn the fog lights on. Pull the headlight
switch outward to activate the fog lights.
Hazard Warning Lights

The hazard warning light switch is located on the
dash switch panel. See Fig. 4.4. The hazard lights
1 can be activated regardless of the ignition switch
position.
To activate the hazard lights, press the center of the
08/28/2018 f611525
switch once. The switch will blink at the same rate
that the hazard lights flash. Press the switch again to
1. Fog Lights (optional)—Activate by pulling the switch turn them off. All the turn signals on the vehicle and
out when the marker lights or headlights are on.
2. Automatic Headlights
trailer, as well as the turn signal indicators in the
3. Off ICU, flash simultaneously when the hazard lights are
4. Marker Lights activated.
5. Headlights
Headlights & Follow Me Home Feature
Fig. 4.2, Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is a rotary switch located to the
Auxiliary High Beam Lights left of the steering column, above the ignition switch.
See Fig. 4.2.
If present, auxiliary high-beam lights are located in
the front bumper. To activate the auxiliary high beam If the Follow Me Home feature is activated, the low-
lights, press the upper part of the dash switch. The beam headlights will remain on for nine seconds
auxiliary high beam lights will illuminate only when after the vehicle is parked, if the headlights were on
the high-beam headlights are on. They will switch off prior to engine shutdown. This feature provides tem-
temporarily when the low-beam headlights are on, porary lighting in the path of the headlights while
until the high beams are on again. Press the upper walking to a building or other destination. If a vehicle
half of the switch to deactivate the auxiliary high door is opened or closed while this feature is active,
beam lights. See Fig. 4.3. the timer will add an additional 10 seconds of light-
ing. This feature can be temporarily disabled by turn-
Backup Lights ing the ignition switch on, or by cycling the headlight
switch from the off position to one of the other two
Backup lights activate only when the vehicle is in re- positions.
verse, and are designed to be used while backing up
at night. Some vehicles may have a feature that automatically
turns on the headlights if the windshield wipers are
Daytime Running Lights on and the vehicle is moving faster than 10 mph (16
km/h). At speeds between 10 and 40 mph (16 to 64
If the vehicle is equipped with daytime running lights km/h), cycling the headlight switch will turn the head-
(DRL), they are automatically activated when the ig- lights off.
4.2
Driver Controls
1 2 3 4 5 6
UTLY DASH DRL SLPR AUX DOME

LIGHT LIGHT OFF DOME HIGH LIGHT
AMBT ALL TRLR WORK FOOT

LIGHT DOME LIGHT LIGHT WELL
04/18/2016 7 8 9 10 11 f611404
1. Utility Light Switch 5. Auxiliary High Beam Light Switch 9. Trailer Utility Light Switch
2. Dash Light Switch (optional) 6. Cab Dome Light Switch 10. Utility Light Switch
3. DRL Override Switch 7. Sleeper Ambient Light Switch 11. Foot Well Light Switch
4. Sleeper Dome Light Switch 8. All Dome Lights Switch
Fig. 4.3, Dash-Mounted and Sleeper-Control Light Switches
With the low-beam headlights on, pull the lever to-

wards you to flash the high-beam headlights momen-
tarily.
When the high-beam headlights are on, a blue tell-
tale illuminates on the instrument cluster.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be on for the
high beams to work.
Intelligent High-Beam Headlights
The intelligent high-beam headlight feature activates
when the headlight switch is in the ’A’ position and
the turn signal lever is pushed away from the driver
in the high-beam position. See Fig. 4.2 and Fig. 4.5.
03/09/2016 f611340
When a vehicle approaches from the opposite direc-
Fig. 4.4, Hazard Warning Switch tion, the high-beam headlights deactivate and the
low-beam headlights activate. The high-beam head-
High-Beam Headlights lights activate again when there are no vehicles ap-
proaching from the opposite direction.
With the low-beam headlights on, push the turn-
signal lever away from you to turn on the high-beam Marker Lights
headlights. See Fig. 4.5. To turn off the high-beam
headlights, pull the lever to the middle position. To turn the marker lights on, turn the headlight switch
clockwise past the off position. See Fig. 4.2.
4.3
Driver Controls
8
4 7
1 6
1
5
4
2
3
08/14/2019 f611352e
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume
3 2. Quick Access System Settings
2 3. Cruise Decelerate/Set
4. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
5. Marker Interrupt**
02/17/2017 f611264 6. Phone Pick-Up
7. Headlamp Interrupt**
1. Headlight Control 3. Windshield Washer
8. Cancel Cruise Control
Symbols Switch ** Not available in all markets
2. Windshield Wiper 4. Turn Signal Symbol
Switch Fig. 4.6, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Right-Hand Switch
Pod - ICUC
Fig. 4.5, Steering Column-Mounted Turn Signal Lever
Marker Interrupt 3
2
NOTE: This switch may not be available in all
export markets. 1
The marker interrupt switch is located in the right-
hand switch pod of the steering wheel for the ICUC
system (see Fig. 4.6), and the left-hand button pod
of the steering wheel for the ICC5 button (see
Fig. 4.7). Pressing it temporarily flashes the marker
lights.
Pretrip Light Test Switch

When the driver presses the pretrip light test switch,
shown in Fig. 4.8, all exterior lights are activated so
the driver can exit the vehicle and verify they are 6 5 A 4
working properly. For additional information see
Chapter 25 Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and 10/25/2018 f611531a
Maintenance. A. Menu Button—Press the button to access
instrument panel menus. When the button is
Spotlight pressed, information appears on the driver display
screen.
The spotlight switch is located on the pivoting handle 1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume
of the spotlight. There may be a single spotlight as- 2. Back Button
sembly mounted above the driver’s door, or one 3. Quick Access System Settings
above each door. 4. Marker Interrupt
Turn Signals 6. Cruise Decelerate/Set
The turn-signal lever is mounted on the left-hand Fig. 4.7, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Left-Hand Pod - ICC5
side of the steering column. Pulling the turn-signal
4.4
Driver Controls
The ICC5 provides some digital interior light controls.

See Chapter 3 Instruments for more information.
Baggage Compartment Lights

Baggage compartment lights are located on the un-
derside of the lower bunk, on both sides. Both lights
LIGHT turn on when either baggage compartment door is
TEST opened to illuminate the baggage compartment. The
lights also come on when the lower bunk is raised.
08/04/2016 f611436
Foot Well Lights
Fig. 4.8, Pretrip Light Test Switch
When the driver or passenger doors are opened,
lever up activates the right-turn signal; pushing it amber lights illuminate both foot wells. These lights
down activates the left-turn signal. The lever is typi- can also be activated with the foot well light switch.
cally a non-canceling combination turn-signal, wind- See Fig. 4.3. Press the upper half of the switch to
shield wiper/washer switch, and high beam headlight turn the foot well lights on or off.
control unit. See Fig. 4.5.
Overhead Console Lights
When a turn signal is activated, a green telltale light
flashes on the instrument panel. The overhead console lights consist of two dome
lights, two reading lights, and an amber lamp that
On a self-canceling turn signal lever, the lever auto- provides ambient light for the center dash panel and
matically returns to the neutral position when the the cup holders. The dome lights illuminate when a
steering wheel returns to the straight-ahead position door opens, then stay on for a short time after both
after a turn. doors are closed. Press the lens of the reading light
or dome light to activate each one independently of
Utility Lights the others.
Utility lights can be swivel-mounted on upper half of
the cab, mounted on the exhaust support, or flush- Dash Lights
mounted on the back of the cab or sleeper. Press the The dash lighting illuminates independently of the
upper half of the switch to turn the utility lights on or headlights. The brightness can be set to adjust auto-
off. matically based on ambient lighting.
When activated, a red indicator light in the switch is The brightness can also be adjusted in either the
illuminated. ICUC or ICC5 under the Settings menu or through
the use of an optional dash switch.
Interior Lighting Controls
When using the dash switch, the panel lights
Interior light controls are listed here in alphabetical brighten and dim in 10% increments, depending on
order. whether the upper half or the lower half of the switch
The interior lights include panel lights, dome lights, is pressed. When the panel lights are turned on with
reading lights, and courtesy lights. the switch, they will default to the intensity that was
last set.
Vehicles come pre-set from the factory with theater
lighting, which ramps up lights from low power to full Cab Dome Light
power when activated. See Fig. 4.9.
A rear cab dome light is located on the headliner,
Sleepers have rear dome lights, ambient lights, read- between the bunk and the cab on sleeper vehicles.
ing lights, task lights, foot well lights, and baggage The rear cab dome light will activate with the dome
compartment lights. lights when a door is opened, then stay on for a
Many interior lights have a dimming function. By short time after both doors are closed. The length of
holding down the switch, the lights can be cycled be- time this courtesy lighting stays on can be controlled
tween bright and dim. via the settings menu in any ICU system as can the
time the entrance light stays on.
4.5
Driver Controls
9
7
10
5
1
3
04/18/2016 f602577
1. Foot Well Lights 6. Sleeper Reading Lamp (lower 8. Sleeper Dome Light
2. Door Entry Courtesy Lights bunk) 9. Cab Dome Light
3. Sleeper Floor Lights 7. Sleeper Reading Lamp (upper 10. Overhead Console Lights
4. Baggage Compartment Lights bunk)
5. Sleeper Work Light
Fig. 4.9, Cab and Sleeper Interior Lighting
Use the dash-mounted switch or the switch in the Sleeper Foot Well Lights
sleeper panel to activate the rear cab dome light.
See Fig. 4.3. The sleeper foot well switch activates two lights that
illuminate the sleeper floor.
Sleeper Dome Light
Sleeper Reading Lights
The sleeper dome light has both direct and ambient
lights, controlled by separate switches. Reading lights are mounted above bunks in the
sleeper. To turn a reading light on or off, press the
switch on the lamp.
4.6
Driver Controls
Theater Lighting Powertrain Controls

Some vehicles come pre-set with theater lighting. Aftertreatment System Regen
Theater lighting gradually illuminates the overhead
and reading lights when they are turned on and a Switches
gradually dims these lights when they are turned off. NOTE: See Chapter 14 Emissions and Fuel
Efficiency for detailed information about the op-
Horn Controls eration of the regeneration (regen) switches and
the aftertreatment system (ATS).
Air Horn
Regen may be started manually with the optional
Air horn(s) may be mounted on the roof of day cabs, digital switch in the ICU. See Fig. 4.11.
or under the driver-side floor for sleeper cabs. The
air horn is controlled by a wire lanyard that hangs
down inboard by the driver’s door. See Fig. 4.10.
Pull downward on the lanyard to sound the air horn.
1
10/28/2016 f611467
Fig. 4.11, Regen Start Digital Switch - ICUC
Some vehicles may be equipped with a regen inhibit

switch. See Fig. 4.12. To stop a regen in progress or
06/13/2007 f602322
prevent the start of a regen, press the upper half of
the switch. Regen will be delayed until the switch is
1. Lanyard
no longer active.
Fig. 4.10, Air Horn Control
Electric Horn
The electric horn is activated by pressing down on
the top of the steering wheel center pad.
The horn will sound for the duration that the button is
pressed, up to 60 seconds. The electric horn will op- REGEN
erate regardless of the position of the ignition key. OFF
04/18/2016 f611395
Fig. 4.12, Regen Inhibit Switch
4.7
Driver Controls
Axle Switches tions, the brake is on and the intensity (low, medium,
high) increases with each step down. See Fig. 4.14
Some vehicles are equipped with an interaxle differ-
ential lock switch and/or a switch for each driver- NOTE: Cruise control and safety systems may
controlled differential lock (DCDL). See Fig. 4.13. activate the engine brake regardless of the lever
position.
For more information about differential locks and
using them for traction control, see Chapter 19 Drive
Axles.
0
1 2 3
LOCK LOCK LOCK
2
INTR FWD REAR
AXLE DIFF DIFF
UNLOCK UNLOCK UNLOCK 3

LOCK LOCK LOWER
02/17/2017 f270164a
0. Off 2. Medium
1. Low 3. High
Fig. 4.14, Engine Brake Positions
DIFF DIFF LIFT
LOCK LOCK AXLE Engine Fan Switch
UNLOCK UNLOCK RAISE
The engine cooling fan can be turned on by the en-
gine fan switch.
4 5 6
09/15/2016 f611344 To turn the engine fan on, press the upper half of the
1. Interaxle Lock Switch switch. The fan will continue to operate for a set
2. Forward Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch amount of time and then turn off unless the coolant
3. Rear Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch temperature is high enough to continue fan opera-
4. Differential Lock Switch, 6X4 tion. To turn the fan off before the set time period
5. Differential Lock Switch, 4X2 ends, press the lower half of the switch. See
6. Lift Axle Switch Fig. 4.15.
Fig. 4.13, Axle Switches
Engine Brake Switches

NOTE: See Chapter 15 Brake Systems for de-
tailed information about engine brake operation.
Whenever vehicle braking is required on good road ENG
conditions, the engine brake may be used in con- FAN
junction with the service brakes. There is no time
limit for operation of the engine brake. However, an 04/18/2016 f611405
engine brake does not provide the precise control of,
and is not a substitute for, service brakes. Fig. 4.15, Engine Fan Switch
The engine brake control is located on the right-hand
steering-column-mounted lever. At the top position,
the engine brake is off, and at the three lower posi-
4.8
Driver Controls
Hill Start Aid Override Switch

Some vehicles are equipped with a Hill Start Aid
(HSA) feature to prevent the vehicle from rolling
while on steep grades and to allow for a controlled
launch. HSA delays the release of the service brakes
until enough torque is available to begin moving the
vehicle forward, for a maximum of 3 seconds. HSA is PTO
"on" by default. It can be turned off by pressing and
releasing the HSA override switch on the dash (see
Fig. 4.16). 04/18/2016 f611407
Fig. 4.17, PTO Switch
shift mode, set engine brake levels, and control spe-

cialty engine brake functions.
Manual Transmissions
HSA NOTE: See Chapter 18 Manual Transmissions
OFF and Clutch for manual transmission operating
instructions.
04/18/2016 f611406
If so equipped, the transmission range control and
Fig. 4.16, Hill Start Aid Override Switch
splitter valves are attached to the gear shift knob.
The range-preselection lever allows the selection of
Power Take-Off (PTO) Switch the low or high range for each transmission ratio. It is
used once during an upshift sequence and once dur-
To activate the PTO function, press the upper half of ing a downshift sequence.
the switch. Press the lower half of the switch to de-
activate the PTO function. See Fig. 4.17. Dependent on the transmission model, some ratios
can be split using the splitter-control button.
Power Take-Off may also be activated using the digi-
tal switch in the ICU.
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls
WARNING NOTE: See Chapter 15 Brake Systems for de-
tailed information about brake systems.
To avoid injury, do not install a PTO that is not
Detroit Diesel approved onto a Detroit™ Trans- Parking Brake Control Valve
mission. Use of a non-Detroit Diesel approved
PTO with a Detroit Transmission could result in The yellow diamond-shaped knob operates the park-
unintended operation which could lead to severe ing brake valve. See Fig. 4.19. Pull the knob out to
personal injury. apply both the tractor and the trailer spring parking
brakes. Push both the parking brake and the trailer
Transmission Controls air supply knobs in to release the tractor and trailer
spring parking brakes. Before the spring parking
Detroit™ Automated Transmissions brakes can be released, the air pressure in either air
NOTE: See Chapter 17 Automated and Auto- brake system must be at least 65 psi (447 kPa).
matic Transmissions for automated transmission If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
operating instructions. brakes, pull the parking brake valve out to apply the
tractor parking brakes and the trailer service brakes.
Vehicles with automated and automatic transmissions
use the multifunction control shown in Fig. 4.18. This
control moves in two directions and has two
switches. It is used to request manual shifts, change
4.9
Driver Controls
4 1
2
02/02/2017 f610291
A 1 2 1. Trailer Air Supply Valve (red knob)

2. Parking Brake Control Valve (yellow knob)
Fig. 4.19, Brake Valve Control Knobs
Trailer Air Supply Valve

The red octagonal-shaped knob operates the trailer
air supply valve, which charges the trailer air supply
system and releases the trailer spring parking
(−) brakes. See Fig. 4.19.
After the vehicle and its air hoses are connected to a
(+) trailer and the pressure in the air system is at least
B
65 psi (447 kPa), push the trailer air supply valve
knob in (and leave it in) to charge the trailer air sup-
ply system and release the trailer spring parking
brakes. Pull the trailer air supply valve out before
disconnecting a trailer or when operating a vehicle
without a trailer.
Trailer Brake Lever

The trailer brake lever is used to apply the trailer ser-
vice brakes without applying the truck or tractor ser-
vice brakes. It is usually mounted on the right-hand
control panel. Move the lever down to apply the
trailer brakes; move the lever up to release the trailer
brakes. The lever will automatically return to the up
position when it is released. See Fig. 4.20. The lever
can be partially or fully applied, but in any partially on
C position it will be overridden by a full application of
05/30/2012 f270163a the service brake pedal.
A. Front View
B. Shift Up/Down Requests Antilock Braking System
C. Four positions for engine brake settings
The Meritor™ WABCO® Antilock Braking System
1. Engine Brake Symbol
2. Drive/Neutral/Reverse Switch (ABS) passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at all
3. Shift Mode Switch (Economy/Performance/Manual) times, and controls wheel speed during emergency
4. Gear Shift Symbol stops or wheel lock situations.
Fig. 4.18, Automated/Automatic Transmission During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully

Multifunction Control depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a
safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all
wheels to provide steering control and a reduced
braking distance.
4.10
Driver Controls
Windshield Wiper and Washer

Controls
NOTICE
Do not attempt to manually move the windshield
wiper arms. Wiper motor damage will occur if the
arms are forcibly moved.
The windshield wipers and washer controls are on
the multi-function turn signal lever on the left-hand
side of the steering column. See Fig. 4.22.
02/03/2017 f610591
Fig. 4.20, Trailer Brake Lever

4
The ABS is designed to communicate with a trailer
ABS, if they are compatible. Compatibility will result 1
in the illumination of the trailer ABS lamp during ve-
hicle start-up and fault detection. The trailer ABS
lamp will not illuminate unless a compatible trailer is
connected to the tractor.
Vehicles with ABS may have Automatic Traction Con-
trol (ATC). On these vehicles, the ATC system auto-
matically limits wheel spin during reduced-traction
situations. In normal braking applications, the stan-
dard air brake system is in effect.
3 2
Pressing the ATC SPIN switch (Fig. 4.21) shuts ATC
off and allows drive wheel spin. Pressing the switch
again, or cycling the ignition key, will cycle the sys-
02/17/2017 f611264
tem back to normal operation.
1. Headlight Control 3. Windshield Washer
Symbols Switch
NOTICE 2. Windshield Wiper 4. Turn Signal Symbol
Switch
The ATC spin feature is intended to be used
under specific slippery conditions that require Fig. 4.22, Windshield Wiper/Washer Controls
momentary increased wheel spin. Using this op-
tion for an extended period of time may damage Wiper Controls
the vehicle brake system.
The wipers are operated by a rotary switch on the
turn signal lever. There are five settings: off, two in-
termittent settings, and two continuous speeds. Sym-
bols mark each setting on the dial.
Turn the wipers on by rotating the rotary switch up.
Rotate the switch further to increase the speed of the
wipers through the two intermittent settings, then to
ATC continuous low and high speeds. Rotate the switch
SPIN
down to slow the wipers down. Rotate the switch as
far down as it will go to turn the wipers off.
03/02/2016 f611333 The default speeds for the two intermittent settings
Fig. 4.21, ATC SPIN Switch are 6 seconds and 1 second.
4.11
Driver Controls
The first intermittent setting of 6 seconds is program- The behavior of the wipers based on the rain/light
mable from 1 to 25 seconds. To program the interval, sensor input is independent of the headlamp switch
rotate the switch from the first intermittent position to position.
the OFF position, wait for the desired interval be-
tween wipes to lapse (between 1 and 25 seconds), NOTE: If a rain/light sensor is installed in the
and then move the switch back to the first intermit- MPC2 bracket, the lens area of the camera will
tent position. If the switch is kept in the OFF position appear shiny when viewed through the wind-
for more than 50 seconds, the interval changes back shield because of the silicone gel between the
to the default of 6 seconds. lens and the windshield. If no rain/light sensor is
The second intermittent setting has an interval of 1 installed, the plastic plug placed in the bracket
second, and is not programmable. will appear as a flat black circle.
NOTE: Some vehicles may have a feature that A vehicle equipped with automatic headlights
automatically turns on the headlights if the wind- and an A option on the headlight switch (see
shield wipers are on and the vehicle is moving Fig. 4.2) should be equipped with a rain/light
faster than 10 mph (16 km/h). At speeds be- sensor.
tween 10 and 40 mph (16 to 64 km/h), cycling
the headlight switch will turn the headlights off. Windshield Washers
The windshield washer button is located at the end
Wipers and the Rain/Light Sensor of the turn signal lever. Momentarily press the wind-
shield washer button to initiate a single wipe without
activating the washer pump. The wipers will swipe
one full cycle and return to the inactive position.
To operate the windshield washers, press and hold
the button in. After a short delay, the washer will
pump windshield washer fluid onto the windshield for
as long as the washer button is pressed. The wind-
shield wipers will turn on at low speed while the
washer button is pressed. After the button is re-
leased, the wipers will continue to operate for one to
several wipe cycles, depending on how long the
1
3 wash button was pressed initially.
2 Suspension Controls
04/15/2020 f546894a
1. Driver Facing Camera 3. Rain/Light Sensor
Air Suspension Height Control Switch
2. Multipurpose Camera
2 (MPC2) NOTICE
Fig. 4.23, MPC2 Cameras and Rain/Light Sensor Do not operate the vehicle over uneven ground
such as ramps, speed bumps, curbs, etc. with
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain/light sensor (see
the air springs deflated. Doing this may lead to
Fig. 4.23) and the wiper switch is in set to an inter-
air bag separation from the piston, preventing the
mittent setting, the wipers will start when the sensor
suspension air springs from re-inflating.
detects rain or snow.
The air suspension height control switch is used to
If the vehicle is moving faster than 40 mph (64 km/h)
adjust the vehicle height to aid in coupling or uncou-
the wiper speed will automatically increase and de-
pling from a trailer. See Fig. 4.24. Setting the switch
crease, dependent upon how much moisture builds
to LOWER deflates the air springs to lower the rear
up on the windshield between wipes.
of the vehicle. In the NORMAL position, the air
If the wiper switch is set to a continuous speed (low springs inflate to raise the rear of the vehicle to nor-
or high), input from the rain/light sensor is ignored. mal ride height.
4.12
Driver Controls
LOWER
SUSP
HGT
NORMAL AERO
09/15/2016 f611342 OFF
Fig. 4.24, Air Suspension Height Control Switch 09/11/2018 f611527
Fig. 4.25, Aerodynamic Height Control Switch

NOTICE
Never exhaust air from the suspension while
driving. When the air is exhausted, the suspen-
sion will not absorb road shocks, and compo-
nents may be damaged.
A red LED in the switch is illuminated when the sus- 2
pension is deflated. 1
Aerodynamic Height Control LOAD

XFER
NOTICE
11/16/2016 f611473
The aerodynamic height control (AHC) switch 1. Load Transfer 2. Suspension Height
should not be used to raise the vehicle in an at-
tempt to drive over objects in the road, as doing Fig. 4.26, ECAS Dash Switches
so will result in vehicle damage.
The ECAS load transfer feature applies the maxi-
AHC reduces ground clearance by approximately 1 mum available vehicle load on the drive axle, up to
inch (2.5 cm) at highway speed. If this reduction of the maximum allowable limit, determined by the
ground clearance is determined to be problematic, gross axle weight rating (GAWR). In bobtail or with a
such as a construction zone or poor road conditions, loaded trailer less than the GAWR, the tag axle sup-
AHC may be disabled. Pressing the AHC switch, ports a negligible load while the drive axle supports
shown in Fig. 4.25, disables aerodynamic lowering of nearly the full weight. Above the GAWR, the drive
the vehicle. The switch should be activated well in axle is loaded with approximately the maximum al-
advance in order to avoid potential vehicle damage lowable load and the tag supports the remainder.
in these types of road conditions.
Load transfer mode can be deactivated by holding up
ECAS Dash Switches on the dash switch for 4 seconds. Load transfer
mode will automatically deactivate when the vehicle
Vehicles with Electronically Controlled Air Suspension reaches 45 mph (72 km/h).
(ECAS) may be equipped with either dash switches
or a remote control unit, not both. See Figure 4.26 For vehicles equipped with the ICU, when load trans-
and Table 4.1. fer mode is active, "Load Transfer" will display in the
message field of the driver display. See Figure 4.27.
LOAD XFER (Load Transfer)
This switch controls the ECAS manual load transfer
function by adjusting suspension air pressure. Use
this function to minimize wheel slippage in road con-
ditions where traction may be a concern.
4.13
Driver Controls
11/09/2016 f611472
06/29/2016 f611434
Fig. 4.27, Load Transfer Notification - ICUC
Fig. 4.28, Example of Ride Height Message - ICUC
Suspension Height
If the suspension is at normal height:
ECAS Remote Control Unit
• each up press increases the suspension height Some vehicles equipped with Electronically Con-
trolled Air Suspension (ECAS) have a remote control
an increment, unless the suspension is at
unit to lower and raise the rear suspension. See
maximum height
Table 4.1 for keys and functions.
• a down press lowers the suspension to its low-
If the suspension is outside normal ride height
est set-point (usually axle stops)
(amber lamp on), the ECAS system will automatically
If the suspension is below normal height: return the suspension to normal ride height when
vehicle speed reaches or exceeds a set speed (usu-
• an up press increases the suspension height to ally set to 5 mph).
normal ride height
Messages about the ride height status will display in
• a down press does nothing; the suspension is the ICU driver display.
already at its lowest point
If the suspension is above normal height: ECAS Standby Mode, Remote Control
• each up press increases the suspension height Once the key is turned off, the ECAS will enter
an increment, unless the suspension is at standby mode, remaining powered and adjusting to
maximum height level and load changes for 1 hour. To cancel standby
mode on vehicles with a remote control, turn on the
• a down press lowers the suspension to normal remote control then hold the STOP key on the re-
ride height mote for 2 seconds. Confirm the deactivation of
On vehicles equipped with the ICU, messages about standby mode by attempting to turn the remote on
the ride height status will display in the driver display. and adjust the suspension, which should not be pos-
See Figure 4.28. sible.
If the suspension is outside normal ride height

(amber lamp on), the ECAS system will automatically
return the suspension to normal ride height when
vehicle speed reaches or exceeds a set speed (usu-
ally set to 5 mph).
ECAS Standby Mode, Dash Switch

Once the key is turned off, the ECAS will enter
standby mode, remaining powered and adjusting to
level and load changes for 1 hour. To cancel standby
mode on vehicles with ECAS dash switches, turn the
key from OFF to ON to OFF in less than 1.5 sec-
onds. Confirm the deactivation of standby mode by
pressing the suspension height switch, which should
not adjust the suspension.
4.14
Driver Controls
ECAS Remote Control Keys and Functions cause damage to the fifth wheel member, the
kingpin, the cab or trailer, and ultimately to the
drivetrain.
The fifth wheel air slide switch permits repositioning
of the sliding fifth wheel from inside the cab. See
Fig. 4.29. Moving the air slide control valve switch to
the lock position deactivates the control valve and
locks the fifth wheel to the baseplate. Moving the
switch to the SLIDE position activates the control
valve and unlocks the fifth wheel slide mechanism,
allowing changes to the total length of the tractor-
trailer and changes to axle loads to comply with vary-
ing jurisdictional laws. For detailed operating instruc-
tions for fifth wheel slide, coupling, and uncoupling
procedures, refer to Chapter 20.
SLIDE
02/03/2017 f611211
Key Function
Remote Control On/Off. The middle
light will remain lit while the remote is AIR
SLIDE
active.
Memory keys. Pressing the STOP LOCK
key and a memory key 09/28/2016 f611343
simultaneously will store the current
height. Once stored, pressing the key Fig. 4.29, Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch
will adjust the vehicle to the stored
height.
Trailer Auxiliary Switch
Normal height key. This key will
return the vehicle to normal ride The trailer auxiliary switch energizes an optional cir-
height. cuit that allows the trailer electrical system to draw
power for functions such as internal lights and bat-
Lift and lower keys. These keys will tery charging for lift gates.
raise or lower the rear suspension
height. Press the top of the switch to activate the trailer aux-
The STOP key. Pressing the STOP
iliary function. Press the bottom of the switch to turn
key will interrupt and stop all trailer auxiliary function off. See Fig. 4.30.
adjustments being made by the
remote control. When the key is off,
holding the Stop key for 2 seconds
will cancel the 1 hour Standby mode.
Table 4.1, ECAS Remote Control Keys and Functions
Fifth Wheel Controls TRLR

AUX
Fifth Wheel Slide Control Switch
04/18/2016 f611408
NOTICE Fig. 4.30, Trailer Auxiliary Switch
Do not activate the fifth wheel slide control valve
while the vehicle is in motion. To do so could
4.15
Driver Controls
Adjustable Steering Column are on the left-hand switch pod. ICC5 volume up and
down buttons are on the right-hand switch pod. See
Controls Fig. 4.32.
To unlock the steering column to adjust it, pull the Other radio controls--muting the volume, choosing an
steering column locking lever out and away from the audio source or radio station, or saving a station as a
column. See Fig. 4.31. With the column unlocked, favorite can be done via the vehicle ICU.
the steering wheel can be adjusted up-and-down and
For additional radio operating instructions, see the
tilted fore-and-aft. Once the wheel is in the desired
infotainment section in Chapter 3 Instruments.
position, lock the position by pushing the lever in to-
ward the column until it goes no further and is paral-
lel to the column itself. 1
2
WARNING 3
Make sure that the steering column is locked be-

fore driving the vehicle. Never attempt to adjust
the column while driving the vehicle. Doing so
could cause loss of vehicle control, personal in-
jury, and property damage.
6 5 A 4
10/25/2018 f611531b
A. Menu Button—Press the button to access
instrument panel menus. When the button is
pressed, information appears on the 10-inch head
unit screen.
1. Phone Pick-Up
2. Back Button
3. Volume Increment Up
4. Volume Increment Down
A 5. Mute Button
Fig. 4.32, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Right-Hand Pod -

ICC5
Climate Controls
09/14/2016 f462301
NOTE: See Chapter 8 Climate Controls for de-
A. Pull the steering column locking lever out and away tailed climate control panel operating instruc-
from the column.
tions.
Fig. 4.31, Unlocking the Steering Column
Cab Climate Control
Radio Controls NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the ICC5, the
Vehicle radio controls are a mix of both physical and fan speed, set temperature, and ventilation
electronic. mode temporarily appear on infotainment screen
Physical radio volume controls are located on the when these items are adjusted.
steering wheel. ICUC volume up and down switches
4.16
Driver Controls
The climate control panel allows you to control the 3

heating, ventilating, defrosting, and air conditioning
(A/C) functions. The cab climate control panel has
three knobs to control the functions of the cab tem- 4
perature system; see Fig. 4.33: 2
• fan knob with recirculation button

• temperature control knob with A/C button
• mode control knob (with bunk-override button
on sleeper cab only) 1 5
1 2 3
7 6
01/15/2016 f611327
NOTE: There are intermediate modes between each
knob position.
1. Face Mode
2. Bi-Level Mode
09/09/2016 f611324 3. Floor Mode
1. Fan Knob 4. Floor/Defrost Mode
2. Temperature Control Knob 5. Defrost Mode
3. Mode Control Knob 6. All Mode
7. Bunk Override Button (on sleeper-cabs only)
Fig. 4.33, Cab Climate Controls
Fig. 4.34, Mode Control Knob With Bunk Override
The fan knob controls the fan speed, and forces Button
fresh or recirculated air through the air outlets. To
increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise to a higher Bunk-Override Button
number. To decrease airflow, turn the knob counter- The bunk-override button is located in the center of
clockwise to a lower number. the cab air-selection knob (sleeper-cabs only). See
Recirculation mode limits the amount of outside air Fig. 4.34. The bunk override button allows the driver
that enters the cab. Press the recirculation button to to make the sleeper temperature and fan settings the
prevent dusty or smoky air from entering the cab. same as the cab’s.
NOTE: To prevent the buildup of odors and/or Press the bunk override button to copy the current
oxygen depletion inside the cab, the system cab HVAC temperature and fan settings to the
switches from full recirculation mode to partial sleeper HVAC. An amber indicator will illuminate
recirculation mode after 20 minutes. when bunk override mode is activated. When in over-
ride mode, the sleeper climate control panel auto-
The temperature control knob is used to select the matically conforms to the fan speed and temperature
desired temperature. Turn the knob clockwise to the settings on the cab climate panel at the time the
red area for warm air. Turn the knob counterclock- override mode is activated. Further changes of the
wise to the blue area for cool air. cab climate control settings will not alter the settings
The A/C cools and dehumidifies the air inside the of the sleeper climate control panel.
cab. Press the A/C button, located in the center of The override mode is disabled when the fan knob or
the temperature control knob, to turn the A/C on and temperature control knob on the sleeper climate con-
off. trol panel is manually set to a different setting. The
The mode control knob allows the control of air flow override mode is also disabled when the bunk over-
through the face outlets, the floor outlets, the defrost ride button is pressed to the off position.
(windshield) outlets, or a combination of these out-
lets. See Fig. 4.34.
4.17
Driver Controls
Sleeper Climate Control 1. Backrest Tilt: This adjustment enables the back-
rest to pivot forward or backward.
The sleeper temperature can be controlled from the
sleeper climate control panel or from the cab climate 2. Lumbar Support: Lumbar support changes the
control panel if the bunk-override button is activated. shape of the seat back to give more or less sup-
port to the occupant’s lumbar (lower back) area.
The fan knob controls the sleeper temperature fan This adjustment is either mechanical or air con-
speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob clockwise to trolled, depending on make and model of the
a higher number. To decrease the airflow, turn the seat.
knob counterclockwise to a lower number. See
Fig. 4.35. 3. Isolator: This feature reduces the amount of road
shock by isolating the occupant from the motion
1 2 of the vehicle, and allowing the upper seat to
move in a simple pendulum motion. A lockout
feature is used whenever the isolator is not de-
sired.
4. Height Adjustment: This adjustment moves the
entire seat up or down. The adjustment is either
manually- or air-controlled, depending on the
make of the seat.
3
09/09/2016 f611328 5. Bottom Cushion Angle, or Fore-and-Aft Bottom
1. Fan Knob Cushion Height: This adjustment enables the oc-
2. Temperature Control Knob cupant to raise or lower the front or back of the
3. Air Conditioning Button bottom cushion. This adjustment is easier to per-
form when all weight is removed from the seat.
Fig. 4.35, Sleeper Climate Control Panel
6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide, or Seat Track Adjust-
The temperature control knob is used to select the ment: This adjustment moves the entire seat for-
desired temperature in the sleeper. Turn the knob ward or backward on its track.
clockwise to the red area for warm air. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to the blue area for cool air. 7. Seat Tilt: This adjustment allows the seat assem-
bly (back and bottom cushions) to tilt forward or
Press the button in the center of the temperature backward.
control knob to activate the A/C.
8. Headrest Adjustment: This adjustment changes
Cancel the bunk-override mode, if activated, by the angle of the upper part of the backrest to
changing the sleeper fan speed or temperature set- provide head and upper back support.
ting. The system will then operate from the sleeper
controls.
Seat Controls
NOTE: See Chapter 9 for detailed information
about seat controls and adjustments.
WARNING
Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from
the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do
so could cause personal injury.
The following is a description of adjustments that can
be made to various Freightliner seats. Not all seats
have all of the adjustments listed below. See
Fig. 4.36.
4.18
Driver Controls
1
3 4
2
8
6 7
5
02/03/2017 f910149a
1. Backrest Tilt 5. Bottom Cushion Angle (fore-and- 7. Seat Tilt
2. Lumbar Support aft cushion height) 8. Headrest Adjustment
3. Isolator Feature 6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide (seat
4. Height Adjustment track adjustment)
Fig. 4.36, General Seat Adjustments
4.19
5
Detroit Assurance 4.0
Detroit Assurance 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
DA 4.0 Collision Mitigation System (CMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
DA 4.0 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
Detroit Assurance 4.0 If the area of the windshield used by Lane Departure
Warning is damaged, the windshield must be re-
Detroit Assurance 4.0 (DA 4.0) is a driver safety sys- placed.
tem that uses a bumper-mounted radar and an op-
tional windshield mounted camera to communicate Multipurpose Camera 1 (MPC1)
information to the vehicles’s brakes, engine, and
transmission. The camera detects the raised reflectors and reflec-
tive paint in lane markings.
The system can track vehicles up to 820 feet (250
If the vehicle is equipped with Bendix SafetyDirect,
meters) ahead, and, if necessary, will sound a warn-
this camera records video of the trucks activity during
ing and apply the brakes.
severe collision mitigation events. In such situations
IMPORTANT: Do not mount any attachments in a total of 20-30 seconds of recording is transmitted
front of the radar distance sensor. See Fig. 5.1. to the SafetyDirect web portal.
Do not paint or affix items over the distance
sensor cover. If attachments are mounted in
front of the distance sensor, such as a crash
guard, they can impair the operation of the dis- 3
tance sensor.
11/11/2019 f547056 07/23/2019 f547011

1. Camera Mounting 2. Camera
Fig. 5.1, Forward Radar Location Bracket 3. Camera Cable
To avoid malfunctions, clean the cover of the dis- Fig. 5.2, Multipurpose Camera 1 Components
tance sensor regularly.
The windshield mounted forward-facing camera is DA 4.0 Collision Mitigation
required for DA 4.0 Lane Departure Warning (LDW). System (CMS)
See Fig. 5.2.
The windshield must be clean, unobstructed, and
Driver Display
without damage for proper operation of the camera. The driver display presents warnings and the status
Regularly clean the area of the windshield used by of adaptive cruise control (ACC) and/or lane depar-
the camera to avoid incorrect lane detection by LDW. ture warning. Refer to "Adaptive Cruise Control
The driver should switch on the windshield wiper to (ACC)" and "Lane Departure Warning (LDW)" in this
clean the windshield and remove snow and ice from chapter for more information.
the windshield.
To show distance, speed, and lane markings, navi-
gate to the Quick Access menus using the steering
5.1
wheel switches. Refer to Chapter 3 for more infor- to operate a vehicle. Use the system in conjunc-
mation on instruments and driver display controls. tion with rearview mirrors and other instruments
to safely operate the vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) The Detroit Assurance system is not a substitute
Overview for safe, normal driving procedures, nor will it
compensate for any driver impairment such as
Adaptive cruise control controls speed and the dis- drugs, alcohol, or fatigue.
tance from a detected vehicle in front to maintain a
safe following distance. Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-
erly could result in personal injury and/or death
When the vehicle is traveling above 10 mph (15 and severe property damage.
km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, ACC operates
in the same way as standard cruise control by accel- Operate a vehicle equipped with the Detroit As-
erating to the set speed. surance system as if the vehicle were not
equipped with a collision warning system.
The default following speed of adaptive cruise control
is 3.6 seconds but can be adjusted in the range of Adaptive cruise control (ACC) may not detect narrow
2.4 and 3.6 seconds. vehicles, like motorcycles, driving in front of the ve-
hicle, or vehicles driving in a different lane.
When a vehicle in front is detected, the driver display
shows the speed of the detected vehicle and the dis- In particular, be aware of the following situations:
tance to the detected vehicle. See Fig. 5.3. • cornering, entering, and exiting bends;
• vehicles driving in a different lane;
• vehicles changing lanes;
• vehicles exiting the road;
• overtaking;
• winding stretches of road; and
• obstacles and stationary vehicles.
Adaptive cruise control does not compensate for inat-
tentive driving, weather, or traffic conditions. Adaptive
cruise control is only an aid. The driver is responsible
for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in
front, maintaining a safe vehicle speed, braking, and
remaining in a lane.
ACC Controls
See Fig. 5.4 and Table 5.1 for a description of
cruise control steering wheel switches.
Steering Wheel Controls

09/14/2016 f611392 Description Function
Sets the cruise speed while the vehicle
Fig. 5.3, Adaptive Cruise Control Screen is traveling at the desired speed.
–/SET
Pressing and and holding decreases the
Safety Information set cruise speed.
Resumes the set speed. Pressing and
+/RES
WARNING holding increases the set cruise speed.
The Detroit Assurance system is intended solely

as an aid for an alert and conscientious profes-
sional driver. It is not intended to be relied upon
5.2
Steering Wheel Controls • ABS is deactivated;

Description Function • there is a malfunction in the brake system or
Deactivates cruise control, but retains the electronic management system; or
CNCL
the set speed in memory.
• the distance sensor initialization is not yet com-
Table 5.1, Steering Wheel Controls plete.
15 8
16 7
9 6
14 1
10 5
13 11 4
2
12 3
09/28/2016 f611352a
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume 7. Headlamp Interrupt 12. Menu Down

2. Quick Access System Settings 8. Cruise Cancel 13. Back Button
3. Cruise Decelerate/Set 9. Volume Increment Up 14. Menu Left
4. Phone Hang-Up/Reject 10. Menu Right 15. Menu Accept (OK)
5. Marker Interrupt 11. Volume Increment Down 16. Menu Up
6. Phone Pick-Up
Fig. 5.4, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Switches
Functions and Activation Conditions Activating Adaptive Cruise Control and

If ACC detects a vehicle in front driving at a speed Setting the Speed
slower than the set cruise speed, the engine is der- Activate ACC by setting the cruise speed, using the
ated, the engine brakes are activated, and the ser- controls on the steering wheel. See Table 5.1 .
vice brakes are applied, slowing the vehicle to main-
tain the minimum following distance. If the vehicle in Drive at the desired speed, then press the –/SET
front is no longer detected, the vehicle will accelerate switch. Adaptive cruise control will be activated and
to the set speed. The ACC will also slow the vehicle the set speed stored.
if it exceeds the set speed (on a downhill grade, for If the brake pedal is pressed, ACC is automatically
example). deactivated.
Adaptive cruise control cannot be activated, or is au- If ACC is deactivated, the stored speed can be acti-
tomatically deactivated, if: vated again by pressing the +/RES switch. The driver
• the vehicle is traveling slower than 10 mph (15 display will show the adaptive cruise control symbol
km/h); and the set speed. Adaptive cruise control will auto-
matically brake or accelerate the vehicle to maintain
• the transmission is in neutral for more than 5 the set speed.
seconds;
• reverse gear is selected;
5.3
If ACC is, or becomes, unavailable, a message will Overtaking

be displayed that allows the driver to choose to use
standard cruise control. See Fig. 5.5. NOTE: It is possible to exceed the set speed
when overtaking.
The set speed can be exceeded using the accelera-
tor pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released,
the set speed will be resumed.
Deactivating the System

Press the CNCL switch, or, press the brake pedal to
deactivate cruise control.
NOTE: The set speed remains stored when
ACC is deactivated.
Tail Gate Warning

09/15/2016 f611455
Tale Gate Warning uses the vehicle’s bumper
Fig. 5.5, ACC Unavailable mounted radar to calculate a safe following distance
at speeds greater than 20 mph (32 kp/h). The sys-
Increasing or Reducing Speed tem will present a visual alert if the driver is following
the vehicle in front too closely. The system warns the
The speed setting can only be set when driving.
driver when:
Press –/SET to set the cruise speed while the ve- • ACC is not activated;
hicle is traveling at the desired speed. Press and
hold to decrease the set cruise speed. • the vehicle is moving faster than 20 mph (32
kp/h); and
Setting the Distance to the Vehicle in Front
• the driver follows a vehicle for longer than 10
The ACC settings menu can be used to set the dis- seconds at a distance that will be traversed in
tance to the vehicle in front. less than 2.6 seconds.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the minimum dis- The system will not give warning when:
tance is maintained to the vehicle in front re- • the vehicle is moving slower than 20 mph (32
quired by law. Adjust the specified minimum dis- km/h);
tance to the vehicle in front if necessary.
• another vehicle cuts in front;
Collision Warning • the vehicle in front is moving away: or
NOTE: If the accelerator pedal is pressed, or a • ACC is activated.
turn is indicated, the collision avoidance system
is suppressed. After the initial warning, the system will continue to
warn the driver every 20 seconds if the gap between
In the event of a potential collision, a warning ap- the vehicles does not increase.
pears on the driver display screen and a double
Tail gate warning operates independently from active
warning tone sounds. The warning screen is dis-
brake assist (ABA).
played for as long as the hazardous situation per-
sists. Once activated, Tailgate Warning will deactivate only
at speeds less than 20mph (32 km/h).
If a collision warning appears on the driver display
screen, pay attention to the traffic situation and re-
duce the vehicle speed using the service brake.
5.4
Active Brake Assist (ABA) • react more quickly to an object in your path of
travel;
Overview
• perform emergency braking; and
Active Brake Assist is always on, automatically track-
ing the distance from the front of the tractor to other • react to moving people with a warning and par-
vehicles in its path using bumper-mounted radar. tial braking.
The radar tracks stationary objects in the vehicle’s Active brake assist can minimize the risk of a front-
path and has the capacity to engage full braking on end collision with a moving or stationary vehicle. If
these objects, such as a parked vehicle or stopped ABA detects the risk of a front-end collision, it issues
traffic. an audible and visual warning. If the risk persists,
ABA automatically initiates partial braking of the ve-
The radar system can detect most pedestrians mov- hicle. If the driver does not react to the warnings and
ing within the vehicle’s path as long as they stay in partial brake application, ABA automatically initiates a
motion; the system can act to help mitigate a colli- full brake application.
sion at vehicle speeds below 25mph (40 km/h). If the
system detects a pedestrian in motion within the Active brake assist may detect moving people within
radar system’s parameters for potential danger, the the vehicle’s path and along the edge of the lane and
vehicle will give a visual and auditory warning, and, if can act to help mitigate a collision at speeds below
the driver doesn’t respond, engage in partial braking. 25mph (40 km/h).
The radar may not detect pedestrians in every pos- Active brake assist may not detect narrow vehicles,
sible situation, nor is it a substitute for cautious driv- like motorcycle, driving in front, or vehicles driving on
ing. a different lane.
Active brake assist does not automatically adapt to
Safety Information road and traffic conditions. Brake the vehicle using
the service brake if:
WARNING • an event window with the warning symbol ap-
pears on the driver display screen;
Active Brake Assist (ABA) is intended only as an
aid for a conscientious and alert driver. The • an intermittent warning tone sounds; or
driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance
• an intermittent warning tone sounds and auto-
from the vehicle in front, for the vehicle speed,
matic partial braking was initiated.
braking in good time, and remaining in lane.
If no visual and/or acoustic warning is issued in a
ABA does not take road and weather conditions
critical situation:
into account, nor the prevailing traffic situation.
The driver should always adapt driving style to • Active brake assist has not recognized the
suit prevailing road and weather conditions. danger of the situation; or
ABA is not a substitute for safe driving proce- • Active brake assist is suppressed; or
dures.
• Active brake assist has failed.
Operate a vehicle equipped with Detroit Assur-
ance Collision Mitigation System as if the vehicle Active brake assist-triggered emergency braking can
were not equipped with a collision mitigation sys- be deactivated if the driver presses the accelerator
tem. pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown).
The Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation Sys- IMPORTANT: If there is risk of a collision, adap-
tem will not warn of hazards such as animals, tive cruise control (ACC) may warn the driver
oncoming vehicles, or cross traffic. before active brake assist (ABA).
Failure to drive safely and use the system prop-
and severe property damage.
If your vehicle is equipped with ABA, it can (within
system limitations):
5.5
Collision Warning and Emergency

Braking
If there is a risk of collision, ABA issues alerts on the CHECK STOP
driver display, sounds an audible warning, and illumi-
nates the ABA indicator lamp on the dash. See
Fig. 5.6. In addition, the radio and/or hands-free sys-
tems like Detroit Connect are muted. The ABA series 03/20/2008
1 2 3 f611000
of warnings is as follows:
• Warning (ABA): An alert appears on the driver Fig. 5.6, ABA Indicator Lamp
display and an intermittent warning tone After an emergency braking maneuver has been
sounds. performed, retake control of the vehicle as soon
• Partial Braking (ABA): If the driver does not as possible and, paying attention to the traffic
respond, the system pulses the brakes while situation, remove the vehicle from the area of
presenting a visual alert on the dash and danger. Stop the engine and apply the parking
sounding a solid warning tone. At this point brake. Inspect the vehicle to ensure it is in
ABA brakes the vehicle with around 50% of the proper operating order and confirm the load is
vehicle’s maximum braking power. secured before resuming driving.
• Emergency braking (ABA): If the driver does Always apply the parking brake upon shutting
not react to the collision warnings or partial the engine off or prior to exiting the vehicle.
brake application, ABA automatically initiates The driver can interrupt emergency braking by press-
emergency braking (full brake application). The ing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resis-
warning message appears on the driver distance (kickdown).
play, and a continuous warning tone sounds.
Driving Situations
CAUTION See Table 5.2 for a description of adaptive cruise
control and active brake assist limitations in specific
After emergency braking, the vehicle is held by driving conditions.
the service brake for up to 5 seconds to prevent
it from rolling away.
Active Brake Assist Limitations

Condition Visual Description
The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles on bends is

limited.
Cornering, entering
ABA and ACC may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake
and exiting bends
the vehicle.
12/18/2014 f040840a ACC may also accelerate the vehicle unexpectedly.
The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles driving in a

different lane is limited.
Driving in a different the vehicle.
lane, and stationary ACC may also accelerate the vehicle unexpectedly.
vehicles
12/18/2014 f040835a
With Active Brake Assist 4.0, the radar tracks stationary
objects and has the capacity to engage full braking on
these objects, such as a parked vehicle or stopped traffic in
the vehicle’s path.
5.6

The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles pulling into

your lane without maintaining a safe distance is limited. The
distance to the vehicle in front entering your lane may be
too short.
12/18/2014 f040836a ABA may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake the vehicle.
Other vehicles
changing lane The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles pulling into
your lane without maintaining a safe distance is limited.
They do not detect vehicles until they are within the radar’s
detection range.
If the vehicle is too narrow, ACC may accelerate
unexpectedly. Brake the vehicle to increase the distance to
12/18/2014 f040841a
the vehicle in front.
The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles turning off is

limited.
Vehicles turning off
your vehicle.
12/18/2014 f040843a
When passing, ABA and ACC may unexpectedly issue

Overtaking warnings or brake your vehicle if your vehicle is too close to
the vehicle in front and is in the same lane.
12/18/2014 f040838a
On winding stretches of road, ABA and ACC cannot detect

which lane the vehicle in front is driving in.
Winding stretches of
road
your vehicle.
ABA and ACC cannot detect obstacles or stationary

Obstacles and vehicles in front of the detected vehicle.
stationary vehicles in
front of the tracked
your vehicle.
vehicle
ABA may unexpectedly issue warnings and brake the

vehicle if it detects stationary objects like:
• vehicles which have broken down
Stationary objects
• parked or stopped vehicles
• signs
12/18/2014 f040842a
• bridges
5.7

ABA can react incorrectly to the following conditions:
• stationary people
• people or objects that quickly enter the field of
Stationary people detection of the sensor
• people in a tunnel
09/14/2016 f040847 ABA can also react unexpectedly to people who are
standing on the roadside in a curve.
Table 5.2, Active Brake Assist Limitations
Activating/Deactivating Active Brake

Assist
The ABA system cannot be turned off. However, ABA
is suppressed when the driver:
• uses the turn signal during an audible warning;
• rapidly presses the accelerator; or
• presses the accelerator pedal beyond the pres-
sure point (kickdown).
If there is a system error, the indicator lamp will illu-
minate and an alert will be shown on the driver dis-
09/15/2016 f611454
play. See Fig. 5.7 and Fig. 5.8.
Fig. 5.8, ABA Alert Popup
ally and audibly warns the driver if it thinks the ve-

hicle may be leaving the lane unintentionally. Lane
departure warning only needs one identifiable lane
A line to function.
WARNING
The lane departure warning system is intended
09/14/2016 f611453
only as an aid for a conscientious and alert
Fig. 5.7, ABA Unavailable Indicator Lamp
driver. Do not rely on the system to safely oper-
ate the vehicle.
DA 4.0 Lane Departure The system may not indicate lane departures
under certain conditions. Read the information in
Warning (LDW) this manual to understand the circumstances
NOTE: Lane departure warning is optional with under which this system may not provide ad-
Detroit Assurance 4.0. equate lane departure warnings.
The system does not warn of all possible haz-
Overview ards. For example, the system cannot prevent an
accident if the driver is impaired or not driving
Lane departure warning monitors the area in front of
safely.
the vehicle with a camera on the top of the wind-
shield. When lane departure warning is active and The lane departure warning system is not a sub-
detecting lane markings on the road surface, it visu- stitute for safe driving procedures.
5.8
Failure to drive safely and use the system prop- signed. If the warning does not occur, or occurs after
erly could result in personal injury and/or death an excessive lane departure, the system may not be
and severe property damage. operating properly.
In addition to acting as a warning, lane markings on
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) the driver display screen show the status of lane de-
Safety Notes parture warning. No lane markings or outlined lane
markings indicate that LDW is off. Solid white or red
The system may be impaired or may not operate in lane markings indicate LDW is active.
the following situations:
Lane departure warning only issues warnings if the
• when there is low visibility due to insufficient speed is above approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).
road illumination, or due to snow, rain, fog or
heavy spray When driving over lane markings unintentionally, the
volume of audio equipment like the radio and/or
• when there is glare due to oncoming traffic, hands-free systems is muted and a direction-related
direct sunlight, or reflections from wet road sur- "rumble-strip noise" sounds from either the left or
faces right door speaker.
• when the windshield in the area of the camera NOTE: While the LDW audio alert is expected
is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered by a to sound through the radio speakers on any unit
sticker with a properly installed system, the LDW alert
• when no lane markings or several varied lane will only mute the radio output if the radio is
markings are present, such as in a construc- both capable of supporting a mute feature and
tion zone is properly configured.
• when the lane markings are worn, dark, or cov- Lane departure warning does not issue a warning if:
ered, such as by sand, dirt, or snow
• the turn signals are switched on;
• when the distance from the vehicle in front is
too small and this prevents the lane markings • there is braking or acceleration; or
from being detected • a driving safety system such as Active Brake
• when the lane markings change rapidly, when Assist (ABA), Stability Control, or Adaptive
lanes branch off, or when they cross or merge Cruise Control (ACC) intervenes.
• when lanes are very narrow or winding Activating or Deactivating Lane

• when shade conditions on the road surface Departure Warning (LDW)
change greatly
NOTE: There is no audible self-test of the
The driver must adapt their driving style to current "rumble-strip noise" of the LDW when the key is
conditions. Lane departure warning cannot take the turned on.
road and weather conditions into account, nor the
prevailing traffic situation. The driver is responsible When the engine is turned on, LDW is automatically
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle activated.
speed, braking in good time and remaining in the Pressing the LDW OFF switch will deactivate lane
lane. departure warning temporarily. See Fig. 5.9.
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) Lane departure warning is not active if:
Functions and Activation Conditions • the driver presses the LDW OFF switch; or
The Detroit Assurance LDW system is designed to • the system is searching for a lane.
warn the driver as the vehicle crosses the outer If there is a system error, the LDW telltale will illumi-
boundary of the lane marking. This may differ from nate in the driver display. See Fig. 5.10.
other LDW systems which issue a warning as the
driver approaches the inside of the lane marking. If
the system warns at, or just beyond the outer edge
of the lane marking, the system is performing as de-
5.9
LDW
OFF
05/12/2016 f611413
Fig. 5.9, LDW Switch
03/10/2022 f611394
Fig. 5.10, LDW Telltale - ICUC
5.10
6
DA 5.0 Vehicle Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
DA 5.0 Collision Mitigation System (CMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
DA 5.0 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
DA 5.0 Side Guard Assist (SGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
DA 5.0 Traffic Sign Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
DA 5.0 Active Lane Assist (ALA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15
DA 5.0 Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19
DA 5.0 Vehicle Camera the headlight switch is set to the ’A’ position, the low
beam headlights and all exterior lights turn on.
IMPORTANT: The windshield must be clean, For additional windshield wiper and headlight infor-
unobstructed, and without damage for proper mation, see Chapter 4.
operation of the multipurpose camera and rain/
light sensor.
DA 5.0 Collision Mitigation
Multipurpose Camera 2 (MPC2) System (CMS)
The camera bracket that comes with Detroit Assur- The Detroit Assurance 5.0 Collision Mitigation Sys-
ance 5.0 can hold a driver facing camera (DFC), tem is a driver safety system that uses radar
multipurpose camera 2 (MPC2), and rain light sensor mounted on the front frame crossmember (see
(RLS). The unit is mounted against the windshield. Fig. 6.2) and a windshield-mounted multipurpose
See Fig. 6.1 . camera to communicate information to the vehicles’s
brakes, engine, and transmission.
The system can track vehicles up to 820 feet (250
meters) ahead, and, if necessary, will sound a warn-
ing and apply the brakes.
1
3
2
04/15/2020 f546894a
1. Driver Facing Camera 3. Rain Light Sensor
2. Multipurpose Camera
2
Fig. 6.1, Multipurpose Camera 2 Components
The MPC2 works with the radar system to support 11/11/2019 f547056
multiple features within DA 5.0. It is important for the
Fig. 6.2, Forward Radar Location
driver to keep the windshield clean and unobstructed
in order for the MPC2 to operate properly. IMPORTANT: Do not mount any attachments in
front of the radar distance sensor. Do not paint
Driver Facing Camera or affix items over the distance sensor cover. If
The DFC is in a self-contained housing of the main attachments are mounted in front of the dis-
camera unit; it records the interior view with a video tance sensor, such as a crash guard, they can
capture feature in the case of a safety critical event. impair the operation of the distance sensor.
Rain Light Sensor Driver Display
This sensor is used to detect rain, snow, or other The driver display presents warnings and the status
precipitation on the windshield and determine the of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), Active Brake As-
amount of ambient light. When precipitation is de- sist (ABA), Tailgate Warning, and/or Lane Departure
tected, wipers set to intermittent operation start clear- Warning (LDW). Refer to Adaptive Cruise Control
ing the windshield. When ambient light decreases to (ACC), Active Brake Assist (ABA), Tailgate Warning,
a preset level due to sunset, fog, or other event, and
6.1
and Lane Departure Warning (LDW) in this chapter the vehicle in front, maintaining a safe vehicle speed,
for more information. braking, and remaining in a lane.
To show distance, speed, and lane markings, navi- If adaptive cruise control does not detect a vehicle
gate to the Driver Assistance screen in the ICUC driving in front, the system will accelerate to the set
using the Quick Access System Settings switch on speed.
the right-hand steering wheel switch pod. See
Fig. 6.3. Overview
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) See Table 6.1 and Fig. 6.3 for a description of cruise
control steering wheel switches.
WARNING Steering Wheel Controls

Description Function
The Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation Sys-
Sets the cruise speed while the vehicle
tem is intended solely as an aid for an alert and is traveling at the desired speed.
conscientious professional driver. It is not in- –/SET
Pressing and holding decreases the set
tended to be relied upon to operate a vehicle. cruise speed.
Use the system in conjunction with rearview mir- Resumes the set speed. Pressing and
rors and other instruments to safely operate the +/RES
holding increases the set cruise speed.
vehicle. Deactivates cruise control, but retains
CNCL
The Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation Sys- the set speed in memory.
tem is not a substitute for safe, normal driving Table 6.1, Steering Wheel Controls
procedures, nor will it compensate for any driver
impairment such as drugs, alcohol, or fatigue.
Failure to drive safely and use the system prop- 8
erly could result in personal injury and/or death 7
6
Adaptive Cruise Control Safety 1
Information 5
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) may not detect ve- 4

hicles driving in a different lane or narrow vehicles, 2
3
like motorcycles, driving in front.
In particular, stay aware in the following situations: 08/14/2019 f611352e
• when cornering, entering, and exiting bends; 1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume

2. Quick Access System Settings
• when driving winding stretches of road; 3. Cruise Decelerate/Set
• when overtaking; 5. Marker Interrupt**
• when there are vehicles driving in a different 6. Phone Pick-Up
lane; 8. Cancel Cruise Control
• when vehicles are changing lanes; ** Not available in all markets
• when vehicles are exiting the road; Fig. 6.3, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Right-Hand Switch
Pod - ICUC
• when there are obstacles and stationary ve-
hicles. When a vehicle in front is detected, the driver display
shows the speed of the detected vehicle and the dis-
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) does not compensate tance and time to the detected vehicle. See Fig. 6.4.
for inattentive driving, weather, or traffic conditions.
The adaptive cruise control is only an aid. The driver
is responsible for maintaining a safe distance from
6.2
The ACC will also slow the vehicle if it exceeds the

set speed (on a downhill grade, for example).
When a slower vehicle in front is no longer detected,
the ACC will accelerate the vehicle to the set speed.
IMPORTANT: Nothing should be put between
the driver and the seat, such as a heating pad,
massage pad, or similar items. Doing so may
keep the seat occupancy sensor from function-
ing correctly.
Adaptive Cruise Control cannot be activated, or is
automatically deactivated, if:
• the driver is not in their seat to activate the
seat occupancy sensor;
• the vehicle is traveling slower than 10 mph (15
km/h);
• the transmission is in neutral for more than 5
seconds;
• reverse gear is selected;
09/14/2016 f611392
• the Anti-Lock Braking System (ABS) is deacti-
Fig. 6.4, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Screen - ICUC vated;
• there is a malfunction in the brake system or
Functions and Activation Conditions the electronic management system; or
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) controls speed and
• the distance sensor initialization is not yet com-
the distance from a vehicle detected in front.
plete.
If there is no vehicle in front, ACC operates in the
same way as cruise control when the vehicle is trav- Activating Adaptive Cruise Control and
eling above 10 mph (15 km/h). Setting the Speed
If ACC detects a vehicle in front driving at a slower Activate Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) by setting the
speed, the engine is defueled, the engine brakes are cruise speed, using the controls on the steering
activated, and the service brakes are applied, slow- wheel. See Table 6.1.
ing the vehicle to maintain the set following distance.
When driving at the desired speed, press the –/SET
The standard factory set following distance is 3.6
switch on the steering wheel switch pod. ACC will be
seconds; this can be adjusted under the Cruise Con-
activated and the set speed stored.
trol menu under Vehicle Settings.
If cruise control is deactivated, the stored speed can
ACC allows the vehicle to operate in cruise all the
be activated again by pressing the +/RES switch on
way down to 0 mph (0km/h); as traffic in front of the
the steering wheel switch pod. When activated, the
vehicle slows and eventually stops, the vehicle will
driver display will show the adaptive cruise control
adjust with the traffic all the way to 0 mph (0km/h).
symbol and the set speed. ACC will automatically
If the vehicle ahead is stopped for two seconds or brake or accelerate the vehicle to maintain the set
less, ACC will resume when the vehicle ahead speed.
moves. If the vehicle ahead is stopped for more than
If the brake pedal is pressed, ACC is deactivated au-
two seconds, the driver—after carefully checking sur-
tomatically.
rounding traffic—will need to press the resume but-
ton or tap the accelerator pedal to resume moving If Adaptive Cruise Control becomes unavailable in
forward. vehicles equipped with Detroit Assurance 5.0, a
pop-up message will inform the driver. If the vehicle
is programmed to allow for standard cruise control, a
6.3
message will be displayed that allows the driver to Deactivating Adaptive Cruise Control
choose to use Standard Cruise Control. See Fig. 6.5.
To deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC), press
the CNCL switch on the steering wheel switch pod or
press the brake pedal.
NOTE: The set speed remains stored when
ACC is deactivated.
Tailgate Warning
Tailgate Warning provides alerts when the vehicle in
front is being followed too closely. The system gives
warning when:
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is not active;
and
09/15/2016 f611455
• the vehicle is moving faster than 20 mph (32
Fig. 6.5, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Unavailable - km/h); and
ICUC • the driver follows a vehicle for longer than 10
seconds at a distance that will be traversed in
Increasing or Reducing Adaptive Cruise less than 2.6 seconds.
Control Speed
The system will not give warning when:
The Adaptive Cruise Control speed setting can only
be set when driving. • the vehicle is moving slower than 20 mph (32
km/h);
Press the –/SET switch on the steering wheel switch
pod to set the cruise speed when the vehicle is trav- • another vehicle cuts in front;
eling at the desired speed. To decrease the set • the vehicle in front is moving away; or
cruise speed, press and hold –/SET.
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is activated.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Control The system will continue to give warning every 20
Distance to the Vehicle in Front seconds if the gap between the vehicles does not
The Adaptive Cruise Control settings menu under increase.
Vehicle Settings can be used to set the distance to
the vehicle in front. Adjust the specified minimum dis- Active Brake Assist (ABA)
tance to the vehicle in front if necessary. Overview
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the minimum dis- Active Brake Assist (ABA) is always on. ABA in DA
tance required by law is maintained. 5.0 uses fused camera and radar signals for im-
proved object recognition, enabling it, in some cases,
Overtaking When Using Adaptive Cruise to recognize potential hazardous situations faster
Control than a driver. If the camera system becomes dis-
abled, radar signals alone are used.
NOTE: It is possible to exceed the set speed
when overtaking. Active Brake Assist tracks both moving and station-
ary objects in the vehicle’s path and engages in a
The set speed of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) can cascade of actions: visual and auditory warnings,
be exceeded using the accelerator pedal. When the partial braking, and full braking. ABA has the capacity
accelerator pedal is released, the ACC set speed will to engage full braking on moving pedestrians, parked
be resumed. vehicles, and stopped traffic.
The system may not detect pedestrians or objects in
every situation, nor is it a substitute for cautious driv-
ing.
6.4
Safety Information • an event window with the warning symbol ap-

pears on the driver display screen;
WARNING • an intermittent warning tone sounds; or
Active Brake Assist (ABA) is intended only as an • an intermittent warning tone sounds and auto-
aid for a conscientious and alert driver. The matic partial braking is initiated.
driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance ABA does not automatically adapt to road and traffic
from the vehicle in front, for the vehicle speed, conditions. If no visual and/or acoustic warning is
braking in good time, and remaining in lane. issued in a critical situation:
ABA does not take road and weather conditions • ABA has not recognized the danger of the situ-
into account, nor the prevailing traffic situation. ation;
The driver should always adapt driving style to
suit prevailing road and weather conditions. • ABA is suppressed; or
ABA is not a substitute for safe driving proce- • ABA has failed.
dures. ABA-triggered emergency braking can be deactivated
Operate a vehicle equipped with Detroit Assur- if the driver presses the accelerator pedal beyond the
ance Collision Mitigation System as if the vehicle pressure point (kickdown).
were not equipped with a collision mitigation sys-
tem. Activating/Deactivating Active Brake
Assist (ABA)
The Detroit Assurance Collision Mitigation Sys-
tem will not warn of hazards such as animals, The Active Brake Assist (ABA) system cannot be
oncoming vehicles, or cross traffic. turned off. However, ABA is suppressed when the
driver:
erly could result in personal injury and/or death • uses the turn signal during an audible warning;
and severe property damage. • rapidly presses the accelerator; or
If your vehicle is equipped with Active Brake Assist • presses the accelerator pedal beyond the pres-
(ABA) 5.0, it can: sure point (kickdown).
• react more quickly than a driver to an object in
If there is a system error, the indicator lamp will illu-
the vehicle’s path of travel; minate and an alert will be shown on the driver dis-
• perform emergency braking; and play. See Fig. 6.6 and Fig. 6.7.
• react to moving people with a warning and full
braking.
The Detroit Assurance 5.0 version of ABA can mini-
mize the risk of a front-end collision with a moving or
stationary vehicle and pedestrians. If ABA detects the
risk of a front-end collision, it issues an audible and
visual warning. If the risk persists, ABA automatically
A
initiates partial braking of the vehicle. If the driver
does not react to the warnings and partial brake ap-
plication, ABA automatically initiates a full brake ap- 09/14/2016 f611453
plication.
Fig. 6.6, Active Brake Assist (ABA) Indicator Lamp
ABA may also detect people who are moving along
the edge of the lane. Active Brake Assist (ABA) Collision
ABA may not detect vehicles driving in a different Warning and Emergency Braking
lane or narrow vehicles, like motorcycles, driving in If there is a risk of collision, Active Brake Assist
front of the vehicle. (ABA) issues alerts on the driver display, illuminates
Brake the vehicle using the service brake if:
6.5
Warning messages continue to appear on the

driver display, the radio stays muted, a continu-
ous warning tone sounds, and ABA brakes the
vehicle with 100% of the vehicle’s maximum
braking power.
CAUTION
After emergency braking, the "Emergency Brak-
ing Complete Brakes Releasing Soon" message
appears in the event window on the driver dis-
play.
09/15/2016 f611454 After an emergency braking maneuver has been
performed, retake control of the vehicle as soon
Fig. 6.7, Active Brake Assist (ABA) Alert - ICUC
as possible and, paying attention to the traffic
the ABA indicator lamp, and sounds an audible warn- situation, remove the vehicle from the area of
ing. In addition, the radio and/or hands-free systems danger. Stop the engine and apply the parking
like Detroit Connect are automatically muted. brake.
Active Brake Assist (ABA) engages in the following Inspect the vehicle to ensure it is in proper oper-
warning sequence: ating order and confirm the load is secured prop-
erly before resuming driving.
• Warning: An alert appears on the driver dis-
play, the radio is muted, and an intermittent Always apply the parking brake upon shutting
warning tone sounds. the engine off or prior to exiting the vehicle.
• Partial Braking: ABA slows the vehicle with The driver can interrupt emergency braking by press-
automatic partial braking. ABA brakes the ve- ing the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resis-
hicle with around 50% of the vehicle’s maxi- tance (kickdown).
mum braking power.
ACC & ABA Driving Condition Limitations
• Emergency Braking (ABA): If the driver does
See Table 6.2 for a description of Adaptive Cruise
not react to the collision warnings or partial
Control (ACC) and Active Brake Assist (ABA) limita-
brake application, ABA automatically initiates
tions in specific driving conditions.
emergency braking (full brake application).

The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles on bends is

limited.
Cornering, entering
and exiting bends ABA and ACC may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake
the vehicle. ACC may also accelerate the vehicle
12/18/2014 f040840a
unexpectedly.
The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles driving in a

Driving in a different different lane, or stationary vehicles is limited.
lane, and stationary
vehicles ABA and ACC may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake
the vehicle. ACC may accelerate unexpectedly.
12/18/2014 f040835a
6.6

your lane is without maintaining a safe distance is limited.
When a vehicle enters your lane the distance to it may be
too short.
Brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the vehicle in
12/18/2014 f040836a front.
Other vehicles
changing lane
your lane is limited. They do not detect vehicles until they
are within the system’s detection range.
Brake the vehicle to increase the distance to the vehicle in
front.
12/18/2014 f040841a
The ability of ABA and ACC to detect vehicles turning off is

limited.
Vehicles turning off
your vehicle.
12/18/2014 f040843a
While passing, ABA and ACC may unexpectedly issue

Overtaking warnings or brake your vehicle if the vehicle in front is too
close and is in the same lane.
12/18/2014 f040838a
On winding stretches of road, ABA and ACC cannot detect

which lane the vehicle in front is driving in.
Winding stretches of
road ABA and ACC may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake
your vehicle. ACC may also accelerate the vehicle
unexpectedly.
12/18/2014 f040844a
ABA and ACC cannot detect obstacles or stationary

vehicles in front of the detected vehicle.
Obstacles and
stationary vehicles If the detected vehicle turns off, ABA and ACC may
unexpectedly issue warnings or brake your vehicle. ACC
may also accelerate the vehicle unexpectedly.
12/18/2014 f040837a
ABA can unexpectedly issue warnings and brake the

vehicle if it detects stationary objects like:
Stationary objects • vehicles which have broken down
• signs
12/18/2014 f040842a • bridges
6.7

ABA can react incorrectly to the following conditions:
• stationary people
• people or objects that quickly enter the field of
Stationary people detection of the sensor
• people in a tunnel
09/14/2016 f040847 ABA can also react unexpectedly to people who are
standing on the roadside in a curve.
Table 6.2, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) and Active Brake Assist (ABA) Limitations
DA 5.0 Lane Departure • when the windshield in the area of the camera
is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered by a
Warning (LDW) sticker
• when no lane markings or several varied lane
WARNING markings are present, such as in a construc-
tion zone
The Lane Departure Warning system is intended
only as an aid for a conscientious and alert • when the lane markings are worn, dark, or cov-
driver. Do not rely solely on the system to safely ered, such as by sand, dirt, or snow
operate the vehicle. • when the distance from the vehicle in front is
The system may not indicate lane departures too small and this prevents the lane markings
under certain conditions. Read the information in from being detected
this manual to understand the circumstances • when the lane markings change rapidly, when
under which this system may not provide ad- lanes branch off, or when they cross or merge
equate lane departure warnings.
• when lanes are very narrow or winding
ards. The system cannot prevent an accident if • when shade conditions on the road surface
the driver is impaired or not driving safely. change greatly
The Lane Departure Warning system is not a sub- The driver must adapt their driving style to current
stitute for safe driving procedures. conditions. Lane Departure Warning cannot take the
Failure to drive safely and use the system prop- prevailing traffic situation. The driver is responsible
erly could result in personal injury and/or death for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
and severe property damage. speed, braking in good time and remaining in the
lane.
Safety Notes on Lane Departure
Warning (LDW) Overview
The system may be impaired or may not operate in Detroit Assurance 5.0 Lane Departure Warning
the following situations: (LDW) monitors the area in front of the vehicle using
the multipurpose camera mounted on the top of the
• when there is low visibility due to insufficient windshield. When lane departure warning is active
road illumination, or due to snow, rain, fog, and detecting lane markings, it visually and audibly
heavy spray, or other circumstances that limit warns the driver if it thinks the vehicle may be leav-
visiblity. ing the lane unintentionally. Lane Departure Warning
• when there is glare due to oncoming traffic, only needs one identifiable lane line to function.
direct sunlight, or reflections from wet road sur-
faces
6.8
Functions and Activation Conditions NOTE: Vehicles equipped with D.A. 5.0 and an
for Lane Departure Warning (LDW) MPC2 camera, but no LDW system may have a
permanently illuminated LDW OFF switch as
The Detroit Assurance LDW system is designed to LDW has been disabled.
warn the driver as the vehicle crosses the outer
boundary of the lane marking. This may differ from
other LDW systems which issue a warning as the
driver approaches the inside of the lane marking. If
the system warns at, or just beyond the outer edge
of the lane marking, the system is performing as de-
signed. If the warning does not occur, or occurs after
an excessive lane departure, the system may not be LDW
operating properly. OFF
In addition to acting as a warning, lane markings on
the driver display screen show the status of Lane 05/12/2016 f611413
Departure Warning. No lane markings or outlined
lane markings indicate the Lane Departure Warning Fig. 6.8, Lane Departure Warning Alert Switch
is off. Solid white or red lane markings indicate Lane
LDW is not active if:
Departure Warning is active.
• the driver presses the LDW OFF switch; or
LDW only issues warnings if the speed is above ap-
proximately 37 mph (60 km/h). • the system is searching for a lane.
When driving over lane markings unintentionally, the If there is a system error, the LDW telltale will illumi-
volume of audio equipment like the radio and/or nate in the driver display. See Fig. 6.9.
hands-free systems is muted and a direction-related
"rumble-strip noise" sounds from either the left or
right door speaker.
Lane Departure Warning does not issue a warning if:
• there is braking or acceleration; or
• a driving safety system such as Active Brake
Assist (ABA), Stability Control, or Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) intervenes. 03/10/2022 f611394
Activating or Deactivating Lane Fig. 6.9, LDW Telltale - ICUC
Departure Warning (LDW) Cleaning the Windshield in the Area

When the engine is turned on, Lane Departure Warn- of the Camera
ing (LDW) is automatically activated.
Make sure that the windshield is always kept clean
NOTE: There is no audible self-test of the and unobstructed in the area of the camera. The
"rumble-strip noise" of the LDW when the key is driver should switch on the windshield wiper to clean
turned on. the windshield and remove snow and ice to avoid
incorrect lane detection.
Pressing the physical LDW OFF switch will deacti-
vate Lane Departure Warning for fifteen minutes. If the area of the windshield is damaged, Lane De-
See Fig. 6.8. When the LDW is deactivated, the parture Warning may not work as intended. If this
switch will illuminate. happens, the windshield must be replaced.
A driver might want to turn off Lane Departure Warn-
ing on winding roads or when driving through con-
struction zones or other areas where lane markings
are not clear.
6.9
DA 5.0 Side Guard Assist • vehicles not driving in the middle of their
lane;
(SGA) • barriers or other road boundaries.
General Information There is a risk of an accident in these situations.
IMPORTANT: Side guard assist (SGA) is de- The driver must pay attention to the traffic situa-
signed for use with one trailer attached to the tion and maintain a safe distance at the side of
tractor. SGA detects if a trailer is attached to the the vehicle.
tractor, but it cannot detect whether or not mul-
Side Guard Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect
tiple trailers are attached. If used with more than
some objects and is not a substitute for attentive
one trailer, SGA only considers objects or sta- driving. Always ensure there is sufficient distance to
tionary obstacles in the range of the tractor and the side for other vehicles, pedestrians, and ob-
the first trailer. False-positive indications and stacles.
warnings may occur with multiple trailers.
IMPORTANT: If the sensors are dirty or Side
IMPORTANT: Side Guard Assist is not currently Guard Assist malfunctions, an alert icon will dis-
designed to work with non-ABS trailers or on play in the instrument panel. See the third icon
trucks with lift axles. in Table 6.3. Objects in the monitoring range
In a left-hand drive vehicle, Detroit Assurance 5.0 are not tracked when this occurs.
Side Guard Assist (SGA) monitors the area to the If the sensors are dirty, pull off in a safe location
right of the vehicle and trailer using two short range
to clean the SGA sensors.
radar sensors. The radar sensors are mounted close
to the rear of the right-hand footsteps. SGA provides If SGA malfunctions, have the function of the
assistance when turning right and changing lanes to radar sensors checked at an authorized Freight-
the right. A yellow triangular warning lamp in the liner dealer.
A-pillar lights up to inform the driver that an object
has been detected in the monitored area. An addi- Before driving the vehicle, ensure the radar sensor
tional warning tone sounds if there is a risk of colli- cover is free from dirt, ice, or slush. See Fig. 6.10.
sion. The radar sensors must not be painted or covered by
items such as stickers.
SGA is not active while reversing.
If the vehicle is involved in a severe accident or there
The trailer monitoring of SGA is not active shortly is damage to the right-hand footsteps, have the func-
after reversing or shortly after coupling up. It is not tion of the radar sensors checked at an authorized
possible to switch SGA trailer monitoring on or off Freightliner dealer.
shortly after reversing or shortly after coupling up.
For a right-hand drive vehicle, SGA monitors the Monitoring Range of the Sensors
area to the left of the vehicle and trailer. The location
of sensors and warning lamps on the ICU all shift to There is an angle of approximately 6 degrees be-
the left in this case. All other features remain the tween the vehicle and the area monitored by the
same. sensor. See Fig. 6.11. Objects within this area are
not detected.
Safety Information Due to the nature of the system, warnings may be
issued in error when driving close to barriers or other
WARNING solid boundaries. Warnings may also be interrupted
when driving alongside particularly long vehicles for a
When detection is restricted, Side Guard Assist prolonged time.
may issue a warning too late or not at all. The Depending on the situation and on the trailer, Side
detection of obstacles can be impaired by the Guard Assist may issue a warning prematurely or not
following situations: issue a warning at all.
• dirty, icy or obscured sensors;
• very wide lanes;
6.10
Name Indicator Color
Side Guard Assist Trailer

Grey
Monitoring Active
Side Guard Assist Trailer

Grey
Monitoring Deactivated
Caution, Side Guard Assist Amber

1
04/16/2020 f547172 Caution, Side Guard Assist

Amber
Note: RH shown, LH similar. Trailer
Fig. 6.10, Radar Sensors with Covers

Caution, Side Guard Assist
Trailer Monitoring Amber
Deactivated
Warning, Side Guard Assist Red
Warning, Side Guard Assist

Red
Trailer
10/11/2018 f611532
Fig. 6.11, Sensor Monitoring Area Warning, Side Guard Assist

Trailer Monitoring Red
SGA Indicator Lamps Deactivated
NOTE: Depending on the type of instrument
Table 6.3, Side Guard Assist (SGA) Lamps
panel installed in the vehicle, the indicators de-
scribed as grey may be white.
Activation Conditions of Side Guard
Name Indicator Color
Assist
Side Guard Assist SGA is active when the ignition is turned on.
Grey
Initializing
If a trailer is attached to the vehicle, a grey or white
indicator lamp (a triangle and trailer) activates in the
instrument panel display screen. See the fourth icon
Side Guard Assist Active Grey
in Table 6.3.
If a trailer is not attached to the vehicle, a grey or
white indicator lamp (triangle) activates in the instru-
ment panel display screen. See the second icon in
Side Guard Assist Error or Table 6.3.
Grey
Deactivation
6.11
If the SGA trailer monitoring is turned off or in an

error state the representative grey or white indicator
lamp will appear on the instrument panel display
screen. See the third and fifth icon in Table 6.3.
Warning When Turning Right

If there is a moving object in the SGA monitoring
range, as shown in Fig. 6.12, a triangular yellow
warning lamp lights up in the A-pillar and the instru-
ment panel display screen will display an amber
Caution, Side Guard Assist Trailer indicator. 10/11/2018 f611534
Fig. 6.13, A Moving Object in the SGA Monitoring

Range When Turning Right
10/11/2018 f611533
Fig. 6.12, A Moving Object in the SGA Monitoring

Range 10/11/2018 f611535
Side Guard Assist recognizes when the driver signals Fig. 6.14, A Moving Object in the SGA Monitoring
or steers to the right and there is a risk of collision. Range When Changing Lanes
See Fig. 6.13. In this case the red warning lamp in
the A-pillar will flash for approximately two seconds of a collision, the red warning lamp will stay on. In
and a warning tone will sound. After two seconds, as addition, the Warning, Side Guard Assist Trailer indi-
long as there is a risk of a collision, the red warning cator will display in red on the instrument panel dis-
lamp will stay on. In addition, the Warning, Side play screen.
Guard Assist Trailer indicator will display in red on If the vehicle is equipped with an ICC5 driver display
the instrument panel display screen. screen, the side of the screen behind the Warning,
If the vehicle is equipped with an ICC5 driver display Side Guard Assist Trailer indicator will change to red.
screen, the side of the screen behind the Warning,
Side Guard Assist Trailer indicator will change to red.
Warning When Changing Lanes

If there is a moving object in the SGA monitoring
range when changing lanes, as shown in Fig. 6.14, a
yellow warning lamp lights up in the A-pillar, and an
amber Caution, Side Guard Assist Trailer indicator
lights up on the instrument panel display screen.
When changing lanes and a moving object is located
10/11/2018 f611536
in the danger zone, as shown in Fig. 6.15, there is a
risk of collision. If the driver signals or steers to the
Fig. 6.15, A Moving Object in the Danger Zone When
right, a red warning lamp in the A-pillar flashes for Changing Lanes
approximately two seconds and a warning tone
sounds. After two seconds, as long as there is a risk
6.12
Right-Turn Warning for Stationary system may not operate as designed under the fol-
lowing conditions:
Obstacles
• there is low visibility, due to insufficient road
IMPORTANT: Side Guard Assist is only an aid. illumination or due to snow, rain, fog, or heavy
It may fail to detect some objects and is not a spray;
substitute for attentive driving. Always ensure
• there is glare from oncoming traffic, the sun, or
that there is sufficient distance to the side for
reflection from other vehicles when the road
vehicles, pedestrians, and obstacles. surface is wet;
Side Guard Assist warns the driver about stationary • the windshield is dirty, misted up, damaged, or
obstacles in the vehicle’s range of movement up to a covered, for instance by a sticker in the vicinity
maximum speed of 22 mph (35 km/h). of the camera;
If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle
• the traffic signs are partly or fully covered by
when turning right, the red warning lamp in the
other vehicles, bushes, or trees;
A-pillar flashes for approximately two seconds and a
warning tone sounds. After two seconds, as long as • the traffic signs are designed in a non-
there is a risk of a collision, the red warning lamp will standardized form, with additional text, or as
stay on. In addition, the red Warning, Side Guard LED panels;
Assist Trailer indicator shown in Table 6.3, will dis-
play on instrument panel display screen. • the traffic signs are damaged, bent, twisted,
stained, or scratched;
If the vehicle is equipped with an ICC5 driver display
screen, the side of the screen behind the Warning, • the distance from the vehicle in front is too
Side Guard Assist Trailer indicator will change to red. small and prevents the traffic signs from being
detected in time;
Activating or Deactivating Side Guard • the traffic signs are posted on the far side of
Assist the road or very high above the road;
SGA is automatically activated when the engine is • the road is very wide, winding, or has sharp
turned on. The driver can deactivate/activate SGA in turns;
the instrument panel Drive Time Systems menu. • there are variable shade conditions on the road
surface;
DA 5.0 Traffic Sign Display • GPS satellite reception is limited for some rea-
General Information son, such geographical location;
NOTE: the ICU will display up to two traffic • onboard map data is outdated due to recent
signs at a time. If more than two signs are rec- changes in local traffic regulations or new road
layout.
ognized by the system, the most safety critical
signs will be displayed. The traffic sign recognition system cannot take the
The Detroit Assurance 5.0 traffic sign recognition and current traffic situation. The driver is responsible for
display system increases road safety by making the the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,
driver aware of posted traffic signs. Traffic sign dis- braking in good time and remaining in the lane.
play uses video data from the multipurpose camera
in combination with GPS map data to recognize USA Traffic Sign Display Functionality
and Canadian traffic signs and display them in the
instrument panel. GPS information dictates the lan- NOTE: Only three types of USA and Canadian
guage and style of the ICU sign display. traffic signs are currently detected:
Safety Information • Speed Limit signs (from speeds 5 to 140)
Traffic sign recognition and display is only intended • Passing signs

as an aid for a conscientious and alert driver. The • Exclusion signs
6.13
See Fig. 6.16 for currently recognized USA signs 3. Go to "Sign Recognition."
and Fig. 6.17. for Canadian signs.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
04/15/2019 f001220
1. General Speed Limit 4. School Speed Limit 6. Pass With Care
2. Truck Speed Limit 5. Do Not Pass 7. No Trucks
3. Night Speed Limit (only at night)
Fig. 6.16, Recognized Traffic Signs, USA
1 2 3 4 5
04/15/2019 f001221
1. General Speed Limit 3. No Overtaking 5. No Trucks
2. Speed Limit Ends 4. Overtaking Permitted
Fig. 6.17, Recognized Traffic Signs, Canada
When a traffic sign is recognized by the system, an 4. Select "On."

image representing it appears in the instrument Select ’Off’ to deactivate traffic sign display.
panel. See Fig. 6.18 and Fig. 6.19. In order to oper-
ate, the traffic sign display feature must be activated Activating traffic sign recognition in the ICC5:
in the instrument panel menu. 1. Press the center button in either of the steering
wheel OFN control buttons
Activating or Deactivating
2. Select the "Settings" (gear) icon.
NOTE: When the ignition is turned on, traffic
sign display restores the state of the system 3. Select "Driving Assistance."
(either activated or deactivated) from the last 4. Go to "Traffic Sign Recognition."
ignition cycle.
5. Move the selector switch icon to the "On" posi-
Activating traffic sign display in the ICUC instru- tion (a blue line will appear to the left).
ment panel:
Move the selector switch icon to the ’Off’ position to
1. Navigate to "Drive Time Systems." deactivate traffic sign recognition and display
2. Go to "Safety System Settings."
6.14
DA 5.0 Active Lane Assist

(ALA)
WARNING
The optional Active Lane Assist system is in-
tended only as an aid for a conscientious and
alert driver. Do not rely on the system to safely
A operate the vehicle.
The driver is responsible for keeping their hands
on the wheel 100% of the time when ALA is ac-
tive. ALA is intended only as an aid.
The system may not indicate lane departures
under certain conditions. Read the information in
this manual to understand the circumstances
under which this system may not provide ad-
equate lane departure warnings.
ards.
10/30/2018 f611558
Active Lane Assist cannot substitute for safe
A. Detected Speed Limit and Do Not Pass signs driving procedures.
displayed.
Fig. 6.18, Traffic Sign Display - ICUC
10/30/2018 f546895
A. Detected Speed Limit and Do Not Pass signs displayed.
Fig. 6.19, Traffic Sign Display - ICC5

6.15
Active Lane Assist Safety Information Detroit Assurance 5.0 Active Lane Assist consists of
Lane Departure Protection (LDP), a feature that
Active Lane Assist (ALA) cannot always clearly iden- builds on Lane Departure Warning (LDW), and Lane
tify lane markings. In such cases, ALA may go into Keep Assist (LKA).
passive mode.
When Active Lane Assist is on, it monitors the area
Active Lane Assist may go into passive mode under in front of the vehicle with the multipurpose camera
the following conditions: mounted at the top of the windshield. The LDW/LDP
• there is low visibility, due to insufficient road function of ALA detects lane markings on the road
illumination or due to snow, rain, fog, or heavy surface, warns the driver they may be leaving their
spray; lane unintentionally, and, if a driver does not respond
to these warnings, moves the vehicle back to the
• there is glare from oncoming traffic, the sun, or center of the lane. The Lane Keep Assist (LKA) func-
reflection from other vehicles when the road tion of ALA monitors the driver’s steering behavior
surface is wet; and uses micro-steering adjustments to keep the ve-
hicle in the driver’s preferred lane position.
• the windshield is dirty, misted up, damaged, or
covered in the vicinity of the camera;
Active Lane Assist (ALA) Activation
• there are unclear lane markings present, such Conditions and Functions
as a construction area;
Active Lane Assist is turned on each time the engine
• the lane markings are worn away, dark, or cov-
is turned on.
ered by dirt, sand, water, or snow;
Lane Departure Protection (LDP) builds on Lane De-
• the distance to the vehicle in front is too small parture Warning (LDW). As soon as the vehicle
and the lane markings cannot be detected; reaches 37 mph (60 km/h), both Lane Departure
• the lane markings change quickly—for example Warning (LDW) and Lane Departure Protection
lanes branch off, cross one another or merge; (LDP) are on.
• the road is narrow and winding; Lane Departure Protection (LDP) requires both lane
lines to be identifiable to function.
• there are variable shade conditions on the road
surface; Active Lane Assist is ready to issue warnings:
• an attachment (such as a snow plow) restricts • when the vehicle is moving above approxi-
the camera’s view of the lane markings; mately 37 mph (60 km/h); and
• there has been a significant change in load • the driver display shows solid lane markings;
with the ignition switched on. Start the engine and
again after a significant change in load to have • when the blue steering wheel indicator appears
ALA be available without restrictions. in the instrument panel.
Active Lane Assist cannot take the road and weather When driving over the lane marking unintentionally:
conditions into account, nor the current traffic situa-
tion. The driver is responsible for the distance to the • the relevant lane marking is shown in red on
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, braking in good the driver display screen;
time and remaining in the lane. • the volume of the audio equipment and/or
Keep the windshield clean and unobstructed in the hands-free system is muted and a warning
area of the camera. tone sounds from the loudspeaker on the cor-
responding side of the vehicle.
Active Lane Assist Overview If a driver takes their hands off the steering wheel for
IMPORTANT: Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) fifteen seconds:
must be active for Active Lane Assist (ALA) to • a "Hands On" caution pop-up screen will ap-
be active. Deactivation of ACC also deactivates pear.
ALA. Active Lane Assist does not issue a warning about
going over lane markings if:
6.16

• the driver clearly and actively steers, brakes or
accelerates;
• a driving safety system, such as Active Brake
Assist intervenes.
Active Lane Assist will warn the driver when chang-
ing lanes if the turn signal is not used.
Lane Departure Protection will steer a vehicle back
into the center lane position three times before going 1
into a passive state and requiring a key cycle to re-
activate.
2
Lane Keep Assist is in a passive state while the
driver actively steers the vehicle.
The status of Lane Keep Assist—shown with the
steering wheel indicator—is shown by the color of in-
dicator:
• Blue steering wheel: LKA is active.
• Grey steering wheel: LKA is in passive mode.
• Red steering wheel: there is an error with the 08/15/2019 f611798
adaptive power steering (APS) which deacti- 1. Active Lane Keep 2. Active Adaptive Cruise
vates Active Lane Assist. Assist Indicator Control Indicator
• When the LKA is off, no steering wheel icon Fig. 6.20, Active Lane Assist - ICUC
shows on the driver display screen.
While the driver’s hands are on the steering wheel,
See Fig. 6.20 and Fig. 6.21 for examples of the LKA Lane Keep Assist engages in micro-steering adjust-
status in the driver display. ments to keep the vehicle in the driver’s preferred
If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel lane position. The preferred lane position can be set
for fifteen seconds with Lane Keep Assist (LKA) ac- under the Drive Time Systems menu, under Driving
tive, an amber caution pop-up screen will appear Systems, under Settings. Options include: offset to
(see Fig. 6.22) telling the driver to return their hands the right, offset to the left, or center.
to the steering wheel. Doing so will cause the pop-up
to disappear. Active Lane Assist (ALA) Switches
If the driver does not return their hands to the steer- There are three possible switches related to Active
ing wheel within the next fifteen seconds, a red warn- Lane Assist (ALA): one digital and two physical:
ing pop-up screen will appear and an acoustical
warning will start to sound every five seconds. The • A digital Active Lane Assist (ALA) switch in the
warning pop-up will disappear and the acoustical ICU (see Fig. 6.23).
warning will cease when the driver returns their • A physical Lane Keep Assist (LKA) switch (see
hands to the wheel. Fig. 6.24).
If the driver does not return their hands to the steer- • A physical Lane Departure Warning (LDW)
ing wheel, the warning pop-up remains. Starting at switch (see Fig. 6.8)
fifty-five seconds the acoustical warning will start to
sound every second. At sixty-seconds this become a Selecting the ALA OFF switch turns off the Lane
continuous audible warning and Lane Keep Assist Keep Assist functionality of Active Lane Assist. The
will drop into passive mode. The warning pop-up will switch light will illuminated on the screen to show
remain on the driver display screen until the driver ALA is off. When ALA is off there will be no steering
places their hands on the steering wheel. wheel icon on the screen. To turn ALA on again, se-
lect the ALA OFF switch or restart the vehicle.
6.17
2
1
10/16/2018 f611544
The LKA status indicator can appear as blue (active), grey (in passive mode; not shown), or red (an error with the adap-
tive power steering (APS) which deactivates ALA; not shown). The green Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) indicator ap-
pears when the ALA feature is on.
1. Active Lane Keep Assist Indicator 2. Active Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator
Fig. 6.21, Active Lane Assist - ICC5
02/25/2022 f611543
Fig. 6.23, Active Lane Assist Switch
01/24/2020 f611805
Fig. 6.22, LKA Caution Popup Screen
Pressing the LKA OFF switch turns off the Lane

Keep Assist (LKA) functionality of Active Lane Assist
for the key cycle. The switch light will come on to
show that Lane Keep Assist is off. Pressing the 08/20/2019 f611799
switch or restarting the vehicle will turn Lane Keep
Assist on. Fig. 6.24, Lane Keep Assist Switch
Pressing the LDW OFF switch will turn off Lane De- Departure Warning is off, the light on the lane depar-
parture Warning and, by extension, Lane Departure ture warning alert switch will come on. A driver might
Protection (LDP) for fifteen minutes. When the Lane want to turn off Lane Departure Warning on winding
6.18
roads or when driving through construction zones or • when attachments, such as a snow plough,
other areas where lane markings are not clear. restrict the camera’s view of the road lane
markings;
DA 5.0 Attention Assist • after a significant change in load with the igni-
tion turned on. Therefore, start the engine
General Information again after a significant change in load for At-
Detroit Assurance 5.0 Attention Assist helps a driver tention Assist to be available without any re-
by detecting typical indicators of fatigue or increasing strictions.
lapses in concentration and suggesting taking a Attention Assist is restricted and a warning does not
break. occur or is delayed:
Attention Assist is active at speeds above approxi- • if the driver is predominantly driving slower
mately 37 mph (60 km/h). When it detects indicators than 37 mph (60 km/h);
of fatigue, Attention Assist sounds a warning tone
and displays a warning lamp on the instrument • if the markings on the road are missing or diffi-
panel. cult to distinguish;
The Attention Assist warning is shown regardless of • on winding roads.
legally prescribed driving and rest periods.
Keep the windshield clean and unobstructed in the
Function and Activation Conditions
area of the camera to help ensure Attention Assist is Attention Assist assesses the driver’s level of fatigue
working properly. or lapses in concentration by taking the following cri-
teria into account:
Safety Information • Driving characteristics, such as remaining in
IMPORTANT: Attention Assist is only an aid. It the lane and active steering.
cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in con-
• Trip related details such as the length of the
centration reliably or in time. Attention Assist is
drive.
not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive
driver. • Use of turn signals.
Attention Assist may not operate as designed under • Use of the engine brake switch.
the following conditions: • Uncharacteristic changes in the accelerator
• low visibility due to insufficient road illumination pedal position.
or due to snow, rain, fog, or heavy spray; If Attention Assist detects typical indicators of fatigue
• if the windshield is dirty in the area of the cam- or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of
era, misted up, damaged, or covered by some- the driver:
thing such as a sticker; • a warning tone sounds;
• no lane markings or several ambiguous lane • the instrument panel display screen shows an
markings are present for a lane (near construc- attention assist caution warning, see Fig. 6.25
tion sites for example); and Fig. 6.26;
• the lane markings are worn, dark, or covered • Active Lane Assist (ALA), if deactivated, is au-
by dirt or snow; tomatically reactivated.
• there is glare due to oncoming traffic, direct Take regular breaks during long journeys.
sunlight or reflections (from wet road surfaces
for example); If the driver doesn’t take a break when prompted, the
soonest Attention Assist can issue another warning is
• on winding roads; 15 minutes.
• when the distance to the vehicle in front is too When the engine is turned off or the vehicle is sta-
small for the lane markings to be detected; tionary for some time, Attention Assist will reset its
detection sequence.
6.19
08/08/2019 f611542
Fig. 6.25, Attention Assist Warning Lamp - ICUC
08/08/2019 f611542a
Fig. 6.26, Attention Assist Warning Lamp - ICUC
Activating or Deactivating
After starting the engine, Attention Assist is al-
ways activated.
To deactivate Attention Assist in the ICUC instrument
panel, press the center button in either of the steer-
ing wheel pods and go to Safety System Settings,
then Attention Assist and select Off. Select On to ac-
tivate Attention Assist.
To deactivate Attention Assist in the ICC5 instrument
panel, press the center button in either of the steer-
ing wheel pods and go to the Settings menu, then
Driving Assistance, then Attention Assist and select
Off. Select On to activate Attention Assist.
6.20
7
Driver Assistance Features
Touch Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Navigation System: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Standard Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15
Enhanced Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
AutoVue® Lane Departure Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
OnGuardACTIVE™ Collision Mitigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
Zonar® 2020 Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26
Touch Screen Operation Navigation System: ICC5

Tapping Safety Information
IMPORTANT: All keyboard entries are locked
when the parking brake is disengaged. Other WARNING
touch screen options still function.
There is a risk of distraction from operating inte-
Tap the touch screen to: grated communication equipment while the ve-
• Select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol hicle is in motion.
or an entry. The driver can be distracted from the traffic situation
• Increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with if operating communication equipment integrated in
one finger. the vehicle when driving, possibly causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
• Reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers.
Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation
• Enter characters with the keyboard: tap on a permits. Otherwise, stop the vehicle while paying at-
button. tention to road and traffic conditions and operate the
equipment while the vehicle is stationary.
Single-Finger Swipe The driver must observe the legal requirements of
Use a single-finger swipe to: the country when operating the system.
• Navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or The navigation system calculates the route to the
right. destination without taking some of the below condi-
tions into account:
• Move the digital map: swipe in any direction.
• Traffic lights
Two-Finger Swipe • Stop signs and right-of-way signs
Use a two-finger swipe to: • Parking lot and stopping restrictions
• Zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers • Road narrowing
together or apart. • Other road, traffic controls, and regulations
• Turn the map: turn counterclockwise or clock-
The navigation system may provide incorrect naviga-
wise using two fingers. tion announcements if the surroundings do not corre-
spond to the data on the digital map, for example: a
Touching, Holding and Moving route may have been diverted or the direction of a
Touch, hold, and move the finger to: one-way street may have changed.
• Move the map: touch the touchscreen and General information

move the finger in any direction.
The navigation system calculates the route to the
• Set the volume on a scale: touch the touch- destination and provides navigation announcements.
screen and move the finger to the left or right.
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Touching and Holding
Reception
Touch and hold to:
Position finding and route guidance take place using
• Call up a global menu in the applications: the Global Positioning System (GPS). Correct func-
touch the touchscreen and hold until the OP- tioning of the navigation system depends, among
TIONS menu appears. other things, on GPS reception. In certain situations,
GPS reception may be impaired due to interference
or there may be no reception at all, for example in
some places like tunnels or multistory parking lots.
7.1
Navigation Menu and Settings 7

3 4 5 6
Open Navigation and Select ····Menu. See Fig. 7.1 1 2
for a map and see Fig. 7.2 for the navigation menu. 8
NOTE: The route view appears on the screen

as soon as the vehicle is moving.
9
14 13 12 11 10
16
15
08/14/2019 f611560a
2 3 1. Search for Address or
POI
2. Drive Home
1
3. Drive to Work
4. Drive to Recent Destination
5. Change Current Route
08/02/2019 f611559 6. Display Saved Locations
1. ····Menu 3. Current Location 7. Live Traffic On**
2. Address Input Line 8. Display Saved Routes
Fig. 7.1, Pre-Trip Planning Navigation Map - ICC5 9. Edit ····Menu
10. System Information
The basic navigation map shows the current vehi- 11. Settings
cle’s location, presents a navigation address entry 12. Record Current Route
bar, and a ····Menu button. A known destination ad- 13. Display Gas Stations
dress may be entered here or the ····Menu button 14. Display Parking Lots
selected. 15. Voice On/Off
16. Night Mode On/Off
The ····Menu button will bring up the first of three ** An X appears on the bottom right of this icon when
screen of Navigation Menu Icons. Access the Set- the vehicle can’t connect to the traffic system.
tings menu to create a vehicle profile.
Fig. 7.2, Navigation Menu Icons - ICC5
Creating a Vehicle Profile
Whenever possible, the vehicle profile will be taken
into account during route calculation. When a chosen
destination is not reachable via a route that takes
your vehicle profile into account, the system will in-
form you that the route is calculated based on differ-
ent vehicle profile.
Depending on local conditions, the navigation system
may not always be able to include all selected set-
tings for route calculation, avoiding toll roads for ex-
07/30/2019 f611772
ample.
1. Select ····Menu. Fig. 7.3, My Vehicle Profile Screen - ICC5
2. Select Settings. ner of the screen. The current settings of

3.
the type of vehicle appears.
Select My Vehicle.
• If needed, select the values and adjust
4. Select Vehicle type. A list of possible types of
them to match the actual vehicle.
vehicle appears.
• If you are transporting hazardous materi-
• Select a vehicle type from the list then
als, add these to your vehicle profile.
press the back arrow in the upper left cor-
7.2
Adding Hazardous Dangerous Goods to 2. Select Settings.

the Vehicle Profile 3. Select Appearance.
Hazardous materials includes, in part, explosives, 4. Select Route bar.
gases, flammable liquids, flammable solids, oxidizers
and organic peroxides, toxic and infectious sub- 5. Select Arrival information.
stances, radioactive substances, and corrosive sub- 6. Select a setting; the active setting is indicated by
stances. a dot highlighted in color.
NOTE: The value 0 equals No Hazardous Mate-
rials and causes the system not to check for Adjusting Route Information on the Route
route restrictions. Bar
The driver can set the route information to display on
1. Select My Vehicle
the route bar, such as gas stations, parking lots, rest
2. Select HAZMAT. A list of possible dangerous areas, toll zones, and ferries.
goods settings appears. 1. Select ····Menu.
3. Select a class or classes of hazardous material 2. Select Settings.
by sliding the radio button to the right. The active
radio button(s) will be highlighted in color. 3. Select Appearance.
4. Press the back arrow next to the Setup Hazard- 4. Select Route bar.
ous Materials title on the screen. Check that the
5. Select Route information.
appropriate hazardous material icons have ap-
peared on the My Vehicle screen. 6. Select desired setting(s); active settings are high-
lighted in color.
Adjusting the Display
Turning On Automatic Switching to Night Displaying the Time
View When this function is active, the current time appears
at the bottom of the route bar.
NOTE: Night View can be turned on or off by
pressing the Night View icon located at the bot- 1. Select ····Menu.
tom right of the ····Menu screens. 2. Select Settings.
When the setting is active, the display automatically 3. Select Appearance.
switches to night view when dark.
4. Select Route bar.
1. Select ····Menu.
5. Select or Deselect Show Current Time. If Show
2. Select Settings. Current Time is on, the option is highlighted in
3. Select Appearance. color.
4. Select Display. Displaying a Wider Route Bar

5. Select Switch To Night Colors When Dark. The NOTE: Both map and route bar views can be
radio button is highlighted in color when the set- enlarged to show more detail or zoomed out on
ting is active. to show less by using a two-finger swipe.
Adjusting Arrival Information on the Route When Show Wide Route Bar If Possible is on, a
Bar wider route bar appears. The wider route bar con-
tains additional route information, e.g. journey time
The driver can set the type of arrival information to and distance from a traffic jam.
display on the route bar and whether the information
is displayed for the final destination or for the next 1. Select ····Menu.
intermediate destination. 2. Select Settings.
1. Select ····Menu. 3. Select Appearance.
7.3
4. Select Route Bar. Selecting a Voice for Spoken Messages

5. Select Show Wide Route Bar If Possible. If Show NOTE: If you choose a voice incompatible with
Wide Route Bar If Possible is on, the option is the units of measurement selected, the system
highlighted in color. will ask you to verify your choice. In addition,
Adjusting the Route View certain voices may be unable to read warnings
out loud, in which case the option to turn on that
The following settings are available for adjusting the feature will be disabled until you select a com-
route view: patible voice.
• Display current street names: when this setting
The default short voice list includes the following
is active, the name of the road the driver is
English and Spanish variations: New Zealand Eng-
currently driving on appears on the route bar.
lish, Irish English, Australian English, United States
• Route display style: set whether the route view English, British English, Spanish, and Mexican Span-
is displayed in 2D (in direction of travel) or 3D. ish.
1. Select ····Menu. The system also includes voices speaking the
world’s major languages outside of English and
2. Select Settings. Spanish. They can be accessed by selected the All
3. Select Appearance. Voices button in the bottom right of the Choose a
Voice screen.
4. Select Guidance view.
5. Select if the current street name should be dis-
played. If this setting is on, the radio button will 2. Select Settings.
be highlighted in color. 3. Select Voices.
6. Select your guidance view style: 3D or 2D (in 4. Select Choose a voice.
direction of travel). The selected mode will be
highlighted in color. 5. Select a voice with the desired language and
accent; the active setting is indicated by a col-
Adjusting the Automatic Zoom ored dot.
The following settings are available for Automatic
Zoom:
Voice Instruction Settings
• Zoom In To Next Turn. When this setting is ac- Two instruction settings are available under the
Voices menu: Read Arrival Time Out Loud and Read
tive, all turns and intersections on the route will
Early Instructions Out Loud.
be zoomed in on along the route.
• Based On Road Type. When this setting is ac- When Read Arrival Time Out Loud is active, the pro-
tive, all turns and intersections on the route jected arrival time is read by the selected voice.
may or may not be zoomed in on, depending When Read Early Instructions Out Loud is active,
on the type of street. instructions to exit or turn are given in advance such
as "Ahead, turn left," and "After one mile take the
• None. When this setting is active, turns and right exit."
intersections are not zoomed in on.
1. Select Settings.
2. Select Voices.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Choose a voice.
3. Select Appearance.
4. Select if you would like either or both of the
4. Select Automatic Zoom. vocal instruction settings turned on; an active
setting is indicated by a radio switch highlighted
5. Select a zoom option. The active setting will be
in color.
highlighted in color.
7.4
Setting the Route Planning Type and Sounds and Warnings

Method Some voices are not compatible with reading
The following settings are available under route plan- warnings out loud. If this if the case with the
ning type: selected voice, notification will appear on the
• Fastest Route. The navigation calculates a screen and the option to have warnings read
route with the shortest possible journey time. out loud will not be available until you choose a
different compatible voice.
• Shortest Route. The navigation calculates a
route with the shortest possible distance. The following settings are available to choose warn-
ing types:
The following settings are available for choosing a
faster route when travel is underway: • Read Out Loud. When this setting is active,
spoken warnings and warning sounds are is-
• Always Take the Fastest Route. When a faster
sued during the journey.
route is available, navigation automatically re-
calculates the route. • Sounds. When this setting is active, only warn-
ing sounds are issued during the journey.
• Ask Me So That I Can Choose. When a faster
route is available, navigation asks whether the • Visual Only. When this setting is active, no
faster route should be used. spoken warnings or warning sounds are issued
during the journey.
• Don’t Ask Me. The navigation system does not
look for faster routes. 1. Select ····Menu.
1. Select ····Menu. 2. Select Settings.
2. Select Settings. 3. Select Sounds & Warnings.
3. Select Route Planning. 4. Select Warning Type.
4. Select a route planning method; the active set- 5. Select the desired warning type; the active set-
ting is indicated by a colored dot. ting is indicated by a colored dot.
5. Select a route planning type (fastest or shortest). Settings for Spoken Warnings
The active choice is highlighted in color.
The navigation system can issue vocal warnings
Route Options, Avoiding Areas about traffic jams and other traffic issues as well as
say when the vehicle has exceeded the speed limit.
Avoiding Ferries, Toll Roads, Carpool
Lanes, Unpaved Roads, and Tunnels 1. Select ····Menu.
1. Select ····Menu. 2. Select Settings.
2. Select Settings. 3. Select Sounds & Warnings.
3. Select Route Planning. 4. Swipe down to the bottom of the page. The fol-
lowing options are listed: Traffic Jam Ahead,
4. Swipe down to select the Avoid On Every Route When Speeding, and Read Traffic Warnings Out
option. Loud. Move the radio button to the right for those
5. Select what features to avoid. The radio button is warnings you want read aloud. An active choice
highlighted in color when a feature is selected. will have the radio button highlighted in color.
NOTE: These route options are not available in Setting the Units
every country. Also, the selected route options Unit settings include: Kilometers (km), miles & yards
cannot always be taken into account. Therefore, (mi/yd), miles & feet (mi/ft), and automatic.
a route may include a ferry, for instance, even
though the avoid ferries option is active.
2. Select Settings.
3. swipe Select Units.
7.5
4. Select the desired units; the active setting is indi- Selecting a Destination From the
cated by a dot highlighted in color. Address
Reordering Menu Options NOTE: The farther away the destination is from
the current vehicle position, the longer it will
The top level menu options—My Places, My Routes,
Parking Lot, Gas Station, Report Safety Camera, take for the route to be calculated.
Start Recording, and Settings—can be reordered to 1. Open the navigation system.
move the most used options to the first screen.
2. Tap next to the magnifying glass Search icon.
Reordering the Menu 3. Enter the desired address, see Fig. 7.4.
1. Swipe right until you reach the end of the icon
list. 1 2 3 4 5 6
2. Select the pencil icon. Each menu item with its
corresponding icon will now outlined as if they
have been turned into illustrations on a playing
card.
3. Select the menu item and icon you want to
move. It will be highlighted in color and two ar-
rows will appear at the bottom.
4. Press either the right or left arrow to move the
card over to the left or right until it’s in the de-
sired position.
5. If desired, select and move other cards. 8 7
08/05/2019 f611562
6. Press the Done button when finished. 1. Address Input Line
2. Address Results List
Navigation Menu 3. POI Results List
Destination Entry 4. Scroll Bar
5. Selected Search Area
NOTE: All the keyboard entries are locked when the 6. Switch to Map or Route View (Cancel Search)
parking brake is disengaged. 7. Keyboard
Enter a destination into the navigation system using 8. Switch Between List (Lines) and Map (Circles) View
the following options:
Fig. 7.4, Entering a Destination - ICC5
• Enter a named location.
4. Select the desired location from the results lists.
• Enter a street address on the search line at the
top of the map. 5. Select Drive.
• Enter the longitude and latitude. 6. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
appears; verify the information by selecting the
• Enter map codes. arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
• Zoom in on the map to find the desired loca- the information and then select the arrow at the
tion and press and hold to select. bottom right to verify it.
Results matching the characters entered using 7. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance.
the keyboard will appear on the address results
list and the Point of Interest (POI) categories or Selecting a Destination From Points of
POI results list. Interest (POI)
2. Select Search option for input menu.
7.6
3. Enter a saved POI such as Home or a type of 3. Select the destination on the map by pressing
POI such as Gas Station or Zoo. and holding. The address nearest to the selected
point appears.
4 5 4. Select Drive.
3 5. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
2 appears; verify the information by selecting the
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
the information and then select the arrow at the
1 bottom right to verify it.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance.
08/05/2019 f611775
Selecting a Destination from Geo-
1. Map View 4. POI Category List
Coordinates
2. Address Results 5. POI List 1. Open the navigation system.
3. Address Input Line
2. Either select the search bar at the top of the map
Fig. 7.5, POI Results Lists - ICC5 or select the Search option under ····Menu.
4. Select POI or a POI type from the results list; the 3. Select the button to the right of the search input
destination appears. line to define the search area.
5. Select Drive. 4. Select Latitude Longitude. An input menu ap-
pears.
6. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
appears; verify the information by selecting the 5. Enter the geo-coordinates. The results appear in
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update the results list.
6. Select a destination from the results list; a menu
bottom right to verify it.
appears.
7. Select Drive.
Selecting a Destination From the Recent 8. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
Destinations appears; verify the information by selecting the
1. Select ····Menu. the information and then select the arrow at the
2. Select Recent Destinations to display a list of bottom right to verify it.
previous destinations. 9. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance.
3. Select a destination from the list.
Selecting a Destination from a Map Code
4. Select Drive.
1. Open the navigation system.
appears; verify the information by selecting the 2. Select the search bar at the top of the map.
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update Make sure the correct search area is defined for
the information and then select the arrow at the your map code.
bottom right to verify it. 3. Enter a map code; the results are displayed in
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start navigation guidance. the results list.
4. Select a destination from the results list; a menu
Selecting a Destination on the Map appears.
1. Open the navigation system. 5. Select Drive.
2. Search for a destination on the map by swiping 6. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen
and zooming. appears; verify the information by selecting the
7.7
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update 5. The route appears on the map. Select Drive to
the information and then select the arrow at the calculate the route.
bottom right to verify it.
Searching for a Parking Lot Area
The following are the examples of map code entries:
• Edinburgh Castle, international map code -
WH6SL. TR10
• Edinburgh Castle, country specific map code -
GBR 8MH.51
• The Field Museum of Natural History, country
specific map code - T821.1BFF
• The Field Museum of Natural History, state
specific map code - WM.GO (Must have Illinois 08/01/2019 f611773
selected as search area for this code to re-
solve correctly.) Fig. 7.6, Parking Lots Displayed - ICC5
• The Field Museum of Natural History, alterna- NOTE: Navigation shows gas stations, parking
tives - SY.FRQ or 9Q9.VOP lots, and other locations that may not be suit-
able for your vehicle’s size and weight. Use
Selecting a Destination from Saved caution when selecting locations and routes.
Destinations
2. Select Parking Lot.
2. Select My Places a list of saved destinations ap-
pears. 2.1 If a route is active, the map appears with
parking lots near the destination.
3. Select a destination from the list; the destination
appears on the map. 2.2 If a route is not active, the map appears
with parking lots near the current vehicle
4. Select Drive. location.
5. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen 3. Select a parking lot area; the name of the park-
appears; verify the information by selecting the ing lot area appears on the map.
the information and then select the arrow at the 4. Select Drive to recalculate the route to end at the
bottom right to verify it. chosen parking lot; the route to the destination
appears.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start route guidance.
Selecting a Destination from Saved appears; verify the information by selecting the
Routes arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
1. Select ····Menu. bottom right to verify it.
2. Select My Routes. If you have saved routes, a 6. Select Let’s Go··· to start the navigation guid-
list of saved routes appears. ance.
3. Select a route from the list.
Searching for Gas Stations
appears; verify the information by selecting the NOTE: Navigation shows gas stations, parking
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update lots, and other locations that may not be suit-
the information and then select the arrow at the able for your vehicle’s size and weight. Use
bottom right to verify it. caution when selecting locations and routes.
7.8
4. Select a destination on the map or select Search

and put in an address.
5. Select from the results list; the destination ap-
pears on the map.
6. Select Add to My Places to save the destination.
7. Give the destination a unique name or keep it as
an address. Select the blue check mark to save
the destination.
08/01/2019 f611774 8. The destination is saved under My Places and
marked with a star on the map.
Fig. 7.7, Gas Stations Displayed - ICC5
Saving an Address as Home
Saving a second location and calling it Home
2. Select Gas station.
will replace the original Home location with the
2.1 When the route is active, the map appears second location address.
with gas stations along the route.
2.2 When the route is not active, gas stations
appear on the map near the current ve- 2. Select My Places.
hicle location. 3. Select Add Home if no home address has been
3. Select a gas station; the name of the gas station saved; if a home address has been saved, follow
appears on the map. the directions above for Saving a Destination
Under My Places to add a second home ad-
4. Select Drive. dress. In either case, the map with the search
5. The My Vehicle type and configuration screen bar appears.
appears; verify the information by selecting the 4. Select home on the map or select Search and
arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update enter an address.
bottom right to verify it. 5. Select Set if choosing a point on the map; select
from the results list if an address was entered
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start the navigation guid- then select Set Home Location.
ance.
NOTE: Home is marked with a house symbol on
Saving a Destination the list and on the map.
My Places 6. The home appears on the map and is saved as
Home.
In addition to saved destinations, My Places contains
the following information: Saving an Address as a Workplace
• Home Saving a second location and calling it Work will
• Recent destinations replace the original work location with the sec-
ond location address.
• Work
• Marked locations
2. Select My Places.
Saving a Destination Under My Places 3. Select Add Work. The map appears.
1. Select ····Menu. 4. Select the workplace on the map or select
2. Select My Places. Search and enter an address.
3. Select Add.
7.9
5. Select Set if choosing a point on the map; select

from the results list if an address was entered,
then select Set Work Location.
6. The workplace appears on the map and is saved
as Work.
Deleting a Destination
Deleting a Destination from the List of
Recent Destinations
08/05/2019 f611776
Fig. 7.9, Navigation Submenu Displayed - ICC5
2. Select My Places.
3. Select Recent Destinations. 4. Select Use as a Starting Point. The location ap-
pears on the map.
4. Select Edit List.
5. Select a destination; a minus sign appears next
Specifying a Destination
to the destination. 1. Open the navigation system.
6. Select Delete. The destination is deleted from 2. Press and hold a fingertip on an area of the
the list of recent destinations. map, or enter an address and select from the
results lists.
NOTE: You can delete multiple destinations at
the same time. 3. Select Drive.
Planning a Route appears; verify the information by selecting the
Specifying a Starting Point arrow at the bottom right. If necessary, update
NOTE: For accurate results when selecting an bottom right to verify it.
address from the map, zoom in.
5. The route is calculated and appears on the map.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start the navigation guid-
ance.
Select the Current Position as the

Starting Point in the Middle of a Route
1. Select the starting point of the route.
1 2. Select the circle with the three vertical dots next
to the address name to access the submenu.
3. Select Remove Starting Point. The route is recal-
08/05/2019 f611561 culated with the current vehicle position as the
1. Navigation Submenu Icon starting point.
Fig. 7.8, Navigation Submenu - ICC5 Specify an Intermediate Destination
1. Open the navigation system. Using the Route Map
2. Press and hold a fingertip on an area of the Add to Current Route adds an address to the
map, or enter an address and select from the route. Search Near Here accesses the point of
results lists. interest (POI) menu.
3. Select the circle with the three vertical dots next 1. Create a route map to the final destination.
to the address name to access the submenu.
7.10
2. Zoom in on that part of the route that contains 3. Select the circle with the three vertical dots next
the intermediate destination. to the address name to access the submenu.
3. Press and hold a fingertip on the intermediate 4. Select Delete This Stop. The route is recalcu-
destination on the map. lated without the intermediate destination.
4. An address will appear. Select the circle with Deleting a Saved Route
three vertical dots to access the submenu.
Choose Add to Currrent Route or continue 1. Select ····. or ····Menu.
searching by choosing Search Near Here.
2. Select My Routes. The list of saved routes ap-
4.1 Choose the icon for a POI (a meal, a gas pears.
station) and select from the list of options.
3. Select Edit List.
4.2 The address appears. Select the circle
4. Select a route; a minus sign appears next to the
with the three vertical dots next to the ad-
dress name to access the submenu and route.
add the location to the route 5. Select Delete the route is deleted.
5. When all intermediate destinations are added to NOTE: you can delete more than one saved
the route, select Drive. The route is calculated. route at a time.
6. Select Let’s Go···
Current Route
Saving a Route Cancelling the Active Route
Saving the Current Route NOTE: To exit the active route screen, select
1. Select ····. or ····Menu. the arrow with the line through it.
2. Select Current Route. 1. Select ····. or ····Menu.
3. Select Add to My Routes. An input menu ap- 2. Select Current Route.
pears. 3. Select Clear Route. The active route is deleted
4. Change the name of the route if desired. and the map view appears.
5. Select the blue checkmark to save the route; the Changing the Route Options
route is saved under My Routes.
Changing the Order of Intermediate
Saving Changes to a Route Destinations
Options under Current Route include Skip Next Stop, 1. Open the saved route with intermediate destina-
Find Alternative, Avoid Blocked Road, Avoid Toll tions.
Roads and More, Show Instructions, Add Stop to
2. Select ····. or ····Menu.
Route, Add to My Routes and Change Route Type.
3. Select Current Route.
1. Create a route.
4. Select Reorder Stops; the starting point, destina-
tion and all intermediate destinations appear on
3. Select Current Route. the map.
4. Select the desired type of change to the route. 5. Select the starting point.
Deleting Intermediate Destinations 6. Select the intermediate destinations one by one

in the desired order; flags appear at the interme-
1. Select the route map view. Zoom in on the inter- diate destinations.
mediate destination to be deleted.
7. Select the destination last; the new route is cal-
2. Select the intermediate destination to be deleted. culated.
7.11
Displaying Alternative Routes

1. Create a route.
4. Select Find Alternative. A maximum of three al-
ternative routes appear on the map. The differ-
ence between the driving time or distance com-
pared to the original route is displayed for each
route. 08/05/2019 f611777
5. Select an alternative route by selecting the route Fig. 7.10, Navigation Instructions - ICC5
shown on the map or selecting the icon display-
ing the difference in driving time or distance. • The road number of the road you are currently
driving on is displayed.
The route view appears. Driving to the Starting Point of a Route
Avoiding Closed Roads The driver can use this function to drive from the cur-
rent vehicle position to the starting point of a saved
1. Create a route. route. The starting point is changed to an intermedi-
2. Select ····. for ····Menu. ate destination.
3. Select Current Route. 1. Select ····. for ····Menu.
4. Select Avoid Blocked Road. If an alternative 2. Select Current Route.
route excluding the closed road is available, the 3. Select Drive to Route.
alternative route appears on the map. The differ-
ence between the driving time or distance com- 4. Select Let’s Go··· Route navigation begins.
pared to the original route is displayed for the
route. Current Route
5. To select the alternative route select the route Changing the Route Planning Type.
shown on the map or select the icon displaying Route types consist of Fastest and Shortest.
the difference in driving time or distance.
1. Create or open a route.
6. Select Let’s Go··· to start route guidance. The
route view appears. 2. Select ····. for ····Menu.
Displaying Navigation Instructions
4. Select Change Route Type.
1. Create a route.
5. Select a route type: fastest route or shortest
2. Select ····. or ····Menu. route. The route is recalculated with the selected
3. Select Current Route. route type.
4. Select Show Instructions. A list of directions is Avoiding Toll Roads and More Along the
shown starting with the current location. Current Route
The current vehicle position is shown NOTE: If there are no toll roads or other fea-
with the following information: tures (unpaved roads, carpool lanes) along the
calculated route, these options will not be avail-
• The symbol for the current vehicle position is
able to be selected.
displayed.
1. Create or open a route.
• The name of the road you are currently driving
on is displayed. 2. Select ····. for ····Menu.
7.12
3. Select Current Route. 1 2 3 4

4. Select Avoid Toll Roads and More. The menu of
features to avoid opens.
5. Select an option or options to avoid. Then select
OK. The main navigation screen willl load.
12
During Route Guidance 11
Route Restrictions
When the vehicle type is set to Bus or Truck in the
vehicle profile, route restrictions will be displayed in
the route view during the journey. Streets with re-
stricted access are marked in color on the route 10 9 8 7 6 5
view. Streets with restricted access on the route ap- 08/05/2019 f611778
pear as a dotted line on the map.
1. Vehicle
NOTE: Observe all the traffic signs at all times. 2. Planned Route
Pay particular attention to signs with restrictions 3. Saved Location
that refer to the dimensions and weight of the 4. Route Bar
vehicle. 5. Cancel Route
6. Slow Traffic
Route Overview 7. Destination
When a route has been calculated, the complete 8. Work
route appears on the map. 9. Home
10. ....Menu
Overview of the Complete Route and 11. Map Zoom
12. 2D to 3D Switch
Route Bar
Fig. 7.11, Route Overview - ICC5
When the vehicle is moving, the 3D display will show
the vehicle’s speed and the name of the road the
vehicle is currently on at the bottom of the screen.
Touching the vehicle icon will bring up a menu that
allows for reporting of a blocked road or a safety 1 4
2 3
camera.
The wide progress bar shows a simplified view of the 5
vehicle’s current location on the route.
6
The progress bar can also show intermediate desti-
nations and traffic messages on the route. Only the
08/06/2019 f611564
next 31 miles (50 km) will be displayed. For stretches
longer than 31 miles (50 km), the progress bar can 1. 2D to 3D View Switch
be moved by swiping up or down. 2. Distance to Change of Direction
3. Next Road Name
The progress bar can be zoomed in on by selecting
any of the route features, e.g. gas stations, traffic 4. Route Overview
delays. 5. Current Vehicle Position
6. ....Menu
Overview of Lane Recommendations Fig. 7.12, Overview of 3D Display- ICC5
If the digital map contains the corresponding data,
lane recommendations for upcoming changes of di- Quick-Access
rection can be displayed before freeway exits and in- With quick access, you can mark the location, avoid
tersections. closed roads or display the current vehicle position
7.13
1 2 3 Live Traffic Information is not available in all coun-

tries or regions. Further information can be found at
TomTom Traffic North America.
Activating Live Traffic Information

When first starting the navigation system, a popup
4 window will appear asking if Live Traffic Information
should be turned on. As soon as it is turned on the
5 traffic situation will be shown on the Navigation Map
and will be taken into account when the navigation
6 7 system is asked to calculate a route.
08/07/2019 f611565
Showing Traffic Information on the Map
1. Distance to
Destination
2. Arrival Time
3. Journey Time
4. Traffic Disruption
5. Gas Station
6. Route Bar
7. Distance to Next Destination/POI
Fig. 7.13, Example of a Wide Route Bar - ICC5
12/05/2018 f611566
08/07/2019 f611567
1. Recommended lane (marked with colored arrows)
2. Lane not recommended (grey) Fig. 7.15, Traffic Information Key - ICC5
Fig. 7.14, Lane Recommendation NOTE: The traffic disruption symbols display the
type of traffic disruption, length, and delay in
and the longitude and latitude. To open the quick ac-
minutes. The colors display the speed of the
cess menu, select the symbol for the current vehicle
position or the speed display. traffic in relation to the speed limit. Red indi-
cates stopped traffic, a mix of red and orange
Traffic indicates backed-up traffic, and mix of yellow
and orange indicates slow traffic. Red and white
Live Traffic Information indicates a closed road.
Live Traffic Information is a subscription service
which shows real-time traffic information. This service To Display Information About the Traffic
is available free of charge for three years upon acti- Disruption;
vation of Live Traffic Information. Subsequently, the Select the traffic disruption on the map or route bar.
service may be extended for a fee.
7.14
The following information about the traffic disruption In the ICUC, standard cruise control is operated by
is displayed: three switches mounted in the right-hand switch pod
of the steering wheel. See Fig. 7.16.
• Type of traffic disruption, e.g. accident
• Severity of the traffic disruption: slow, heavily
8
congested or stopped traffic
7
• Length of the traffic disruption
6
• Duration of delay 1
The system will also give the option of Avoid to recal- 5
culate the route to avoid the delay.
4
1. Select Avoid. An alternative route is calculated. 2
3
2. Select the new route on the map on by selecting
the button showing the change in distance or 08/14/2019 f611352e
time. 1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume
3. The route on the map and the bar update. Let’s 2. Quick Access System Settings
3. Cruise Decelerate/Set
Go··· appears. 4. Phone Hang-Up/Reject
5. Marker Interrupt**
Standard Cruise Control 6. Phone Pick-Up
WARNING ** Not available in all markets
Do not use the cruise control system when driv- Fig. 7.16, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Right-Hand Switch
ing conditions do not permit maintaining a con- Pod - ICUC
stant speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads
In the ICC5, standard cruise control is operated by
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
three buttons mounted in the left-hand pod of the
roads with a loose driving surface. Failure to fol-
steering wheel. See Fig. 7.17.
low this precaution could cause a collision or
loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in per- • Cruise Decelerate/SET Button—Press to set
sonal injury or property damage. the cruise speed while the vehicle is traveling
at the desired speed. Press and hold to de-
NOTICE crease the set cruise speed by 5 mph incre-
ments (Detroit Diesel engines only). Single
When the cruise control is engaged, do not at- press decreases cruise speed by 1 mph. When
tempt to shift gears without using the clutch cruise control has been set, the driver display
pedal. Failure to follow this precaution will result static menu in the ICUC shows relevant cruise
in a temporarily uncontrolled increase in engine control icons and the set speed. See Fig. 7.18.
speed. Transmission damage and gear stripping The speed memory will be retained until the
could result. ignition is turned off.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with a Detroit • CNCL Button —Press to pause the cruise con-
automated transmission, setting the cruise control, while retaining the speed setting in
memory. The cruise control can also be disen-
trol with the engine brake on will activate De-
gaged, while retaining the speed memory, by
scent Control Mode. Moving the transmission depressing the brake or clutch pedals.
shift lever to the top position will resume the set
cruise speed. Moving the lever down to engage • Cruise Accelerate/RES Button—Press to re-
the engine brake after the cruise control has sume the set speed. Press and hold to in-
been set will activate Deceleration Mode. See crease the set cruise speed by 5 mph incre-
ments (Detroit Diesel engines only). Single
"Descent Control and Deceleration Modes, De-
press increases cruise speed by 1 mph. If no
troit™ Automated Transmissions" in this chapter.
7.15
previous set speed is stored, pressing the but-

3 ton sets the cruise speed.
2
1. To cruise at a particular speed:
1 1.1 Depress the accelerator pedal until the
speedometer reaches the desired speed.
NOTE: Cruise control is cancelled if the
brake or clutch pedal is depressed, or ve-
hicle speed drops below the minimum cruise
control speed.
1.2 Press the cruise decelerate/SET button to
set the desired speed.
NOTE: The speed memory is lost whenever the
A
ignition switch is turned to OFF.
6 5 4
2. To disengage the cruise control, do one of the
10/25/2018 f611531a
following:
A. Menu Button—Press the button to access
instrument panel menus. When the button is • In the ICUC system, press the CNCL but-
pressed, information appears on the driver display ton in the center of the right-hand steering-
screen. wheel-mounted switch pod. A single press
1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume disengages the cruise control, but retains
2. Back Button the set speed. Press and hold to clear the
3. Quick Access System Settings set speed (Detroit Diesel engines only).
4. Marker Interrupt
5. Cruise Cancel • In the ICC5 system, press the CNCL but-
6. Cruise Decelerate/Set ton at the bottom of the left-hand control
pod. A single press disengages the cruise
Fig. 7.17, Steering-Wheel-Mounted Left-Hand Switch control, but retains the set speed. Press
Pod - ICC5 and hold to clear the set speed (Detroit
Diesel engines only).
7 8 9
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Depress the clutch pedal (on a manual
6 1 transmission only).
2 3. To resume a preselected cruise speed, press the
5
cruise accelerate/RES button. Cruise will return
3 to the last set speed.
4 NOTE: If vehicle speed drops below the mini-

06/13/2016 f611364 mum cruise control speed, cruise control will
1. Gear Indicator disengage. To resume to the preselected cruise
2. Gear Mode speed, increase vehicle speed to above mini-
3. Clock mum cruise control speed and press the cruise
4. Soft Telltales accelerate/RES button.
5. Adaptive Cruise Control and Tracked Vehicle
Distance 4. To increase cruise speed, press the cruise
6. Cruise Control Symbol (adaptive cruise control accelerate/RES button until the desired set
shown) speed is displayed.
7. Cruise Control Set Speed
8. Cruise Control Overspeed 5. To decrease cruise speed, press the cruise
9. Cruise Control Underspeed decelerate/SET button until the desired set
speed is displayed.
Fig. 7.18, Static Menu - ICUC
7.16
The cruise speed hysterisis (maximum speed above

and below the set speed) can be set in the ICU set-
tings menu.
On vehicles with adaptive cruise control, the leading
vehicle following distance can be set in the Quick
Access menus.
PasSmart
On vehicles equipped with PasSmart, the driver can
exceed predetermined road limit speed temporarily.
The PasSmart function is initiated by double-pumping
the accelerator pedal. When the predetermined road
limit speed is exceeded, the driver display shows the
status and time remaining until the vehicle deceler-
ates. See Fig. 7.19.
1. IPM Active Indicator

Fig. 7.20, IPM Active on the Driver Display - ICUC
The 3D digital map database contains profile infor-

mation for over 200,000 highway miles (322,000 km)
in the 48 contiguous United States, the Trans-
Canada Highway, and most major Canadian high-
ways. IPM will vary the cruise speed, depending on
the approaching road grade. For a New Cascadia
equipped with the Economy Package, the default
variance is +5/–4 mph (+8/–6 km/h). If the engine
brake is enabled, IPM may automatically engage the
engine brake at speeds higher than the cruise set
speed.
Key predictive features of IPM are:
06/13/2016 f611410 • Steep Mountain Mode — applies if the vehicle
will not maintain cruise set speed while climb-
Fig. 7.19, PasSmart Alert Screen - ICUC
ing. To balance travel time while saving fuel,
the vehicle will first predictively accelerate be-
Intelligent Powertrain Management fore starting the climb, and may slow down as
(IPM) it approaches the crest of the hill. In this sce-
nario the speed is allowed to fall below the
NOTE: IPM isn’t an option with a DT12 trans- cruise control underspeed.
mission.
• Crest Coasting — reduces speed before crest-
IPM is an optional fuel savings application that func- ing a hill
tions as a predictive cruise control. Using 3D digital
map technology and GPS, IPM evaluates the upcom- • Dip Coasting — increases speed before a dip
ing road grade about a mile in advance to determine • Predictive Shifting — selects a gear shifting
the best use case for most fuel-efficient vehicle strategy for upcoming terrain
speed and gear selection.
• Load Balancing — maintains most efficient
An indicator on the driver display illuminates when
power for near zero road grades; small fluctua-
one of the IPM modes is activated. See Fig. 7.20.
tion in road speed may be seen from cruise set
speed by ±1 or 2 mph
7.17
• Predictive Adaptive Cruise Control — if Using the accelerator pedal will abort the current IPM
equipped with adaptive cruise control (ACC), use case. Disengaging the cruise control will also
allows IPM to increase following distance disengage IPM.
IMPORTANT: IPM behavior is different from that of
conventional cruise control. The system incorporates Descent Control and Deceleration
features to improve the overall driver experience. Modes, Detroit™ Engines
Some key points to remember are:
On vehicles equipped with a Detroit engine, the func-
• IPM is active only when cruise control is en- tions of the engine brake controls change, depending
gaged. on which specialty braking mode is being utilized.
• IPM only controls speed within the upper and Two distinct modes can be activated:
lower bounds of the cruise set speed. The • Descent Control Mode—engine braking at-
upper and lower set limits may be exceeded tempts to maintain a set speed; accelerator
up to 2 mph (3 km/h) for a limited time during pedal is not automatically applied.
dip coasts, as IPM predicts the terrain de-
mands for the most fuel-efficient performance. • Deceleration Mode—engine braking activates
The driver is responsible for setting a speed to reduce vehicle speed (with no lower limit) at
appropriate for the conditions and grade. If a constant rate.
equipped, IPM upper and lower bounds can be
adjusted by selecting the quick access button Descent Control Mode
on the steering wheel. Descent Control Mode attempts to keep the vehicle
• IPM can engage eCoast sooner, later, or not at speed at the set speed on a downhill, using all avail-
all compared to conventional cruise control. able engine brake stages.
• IPM may automatically engage the engine To activate Descent Control Mode, exit cruise control,
brake at a higher speed than the cruise set remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, set the
speed. engine brake in any of the 3 "on" positions (positions
1, 2, or 3 in Fig. 7.21), and use the set or resume
• If IPM becomes unavailable, conventional buttons to set the vehicle speed. In this mode, all
cruise control can still function. three levels of engine braking will be employed to
keep the speed below the set speed. This mode will
WARNING not keep the speed above the lower limit of the set
speed, so it is possible to eventually coast to a stop,
Apply the brakes and downshift as necessary unless the lever is moved to "engine brake off" (posi-
when driving on downhill grades. IPM does not tion 0), or the accelerator pedal is applied. After ac-
adequately control vehicle speed on steep down- celerator pedal application, the Descent Control
hill grades. Failure to use normal braking tech- Mode is resumed. In the case of very steep road
niques when IPM is active could result in per- grades, the engine brake may not be able to main-
sonal injury and vehicle damage. tain the vehicle speed. The driver may apply the ser-
vice brakes without dropping out of descent mode to
IMPORTANT: IPM adjusts the vehicle set speed slow the vehicle speed down slower than their set
to achieve maximum fuel economy, but it does speed. After releasing the service brakes, a new
not account for traffic flows or surrounding ve- cruise set speed lower than the original set speed
hicles. will be set. A message in the instrument panel will
inform the driver a new set speed was captured.
For best fuel-savings, use cruise control whenever
possible. Driver interaction with IPM is the same as Decreasing the lever to the 0 position deactivates
conventional cruise control, using the standard cruise Descent Control Mode and resumes cruise control,
control buttons. In the event of a problem with IPM, using the Descent Control set speed as the cruise
or when driving on a road with no profile information control set speed. To reactivate Descent Control
available, the system reverts to conventional cruise Mode, reset the control speed with the lever in posi-
control. tion 1, 2, or 3.
An indicator on the driver display illuminates when
descent control mode is active. See Fig. 7.22.
7.18
eration, or the lever is moved to "engine brake off"

(position 0).
0 Moving the lever to position 0 resumes the previously
set cruise control speed.
0
2
02/17/2017 f270164a
2
0. Resume cruise control set speed.

1, 2, 3. Descent Control maintains set speed.
Fig. 7.21, Descent Control Mode Positions, Automated/ 3
Automatic Transmission Multifunction Control
02/17/2017 f270164a
0. Resume cruise control 2. Medium
set speed. 3. High
1. Low
Fig. 7.23, Deceleration Mode Positions, Automated/
Automatic Transmission Multifunction Control
Enhanced Stability Control

(ESC)
1
WARNING
Enhanced Stability Control is intended only as an
aid for a conscientious and alert driver. Carefully
read the information in this manual to understand
this system and its limitations. ESC is not a sub-
stitute for safe driving procedures. Failure to
06/14/2016 f611425
drive safely, and use the system properly, could
1. Descent Control Mode Indicator result in personal injury and/or death and prop-
erty damage.
Fig. 7.22, Descent Control Mode on the Driver Display -
ICUC An amber-colored dash indicator light (Fig. 7.24),
indicate that the vehicle is equipped with roll stability
Deceleration Mode system components.
Deceleration Mode reduces the vehicle speed at a The roll stability system uses a lateral-acceleration
constant rate. sensor that monitors rollover risk. Shortly after a
While in cruise control, activate Deceleration Mode curve, lane change, or other driving maneuver that
by turning on the engine brake ( Fig. 7.23, lever po- results in a rollover-risk detection, a dash warning
sition 1, 2, or 3). The vehicle will decelerate at a con- light illuminates and an audible tone sounds. The
stant rate until the vehicle comes to a stop, unless purpose is to advise the driver that the previous ma-
the accelerator pedal is applied to override the decel- neuver produced a rollover risk.
7.19
Overview
AutoVue is a camera-based warning system that
helps a driver avoid unintentional lane departure.
A camera mounted near the top center of the vehicle
windshield tracks visible lane markings to monitor the
vehicle’s position within the lane. When the vehicle
crosses lane markings without the turn signal being
activated, AutoVue gives an audible warning.
06/16/2016 f611337a
Fig. 7.24, ATC/Stability Indicator Lamp WARNING

The roll stability control system, within ESC, auto- The AutoVue Lane Departure Warning (LDW) sys-
matically reduces engine power, applies the engine tem is intended only as an aid for a conscien-
brake, and/or applies the tractor and trailer brakes tious and alert driver. It may not warn of unin-
when the acceleration sensor detects that the vehicle tended lane departures under certain conditions.
is at risk of rolling over. It does not warn of all possible hazards. Do not
rely solely on the system to safely operate the
ESC also has the capability of complete directional
vehicle.
stability (yaw control) in oversteer and understeer
conditions to reduce the likelihood of drift-out or jack- The system cannot help prevent an accident if
knife. The system determines where the driver is at- the driver is impaired or not driving safely.
tempting to steer the vehicle and how much brake
demand is required in order to more precisely control Ultimate responsibility for the safe operation of
the vehicle in an emergency situation. the vehicle remains with the driver at all times.
ESC works by constantly comparing the driver’s in- System Startup

tention with the vehicle’s actual behavior. The system
does this by monitoring systems such as wheel AutoVue activates when the ignition is turned on.
speed, steering angle, yaw rate, lateral acceleration, Lane departure warnings are active only when the
throttle position, and brake application. A central mi- vehicle is traveling at or above 37 mph (60 kph).
crocomputer analyzes the collected data and triggers At start-up the system performs a self-test. It then
a response to keep the vehicle on course when an plays a brief clip of the "rumble strip" alert sound,
unstable condition is detected. first through the left speaker, then the right. The
When the system detects that the vehicle is at risk of amber ’enabled’ lamp on the ’LDW OFF’ switch and
oversteering or understeering, it applies individual the lane searching dash indicator then illuminate.
tractor wheel end brakes and trailer brakes, activates See Fig. 7.25 and Fig. 7.26.
the engine retarder (if equipped), and/or cuts engine
power, depending on the severity. As a result, the
driver has full control over the vehicle until the sys-
tem detects a potential risk and intervenes accord-
ingly. ESC operates automatically; the driver does
not monitor or activate the system.
The dash indicator light illuminates whenever the roll LDW
stability control system intervenes. OFF
AutoVue® Lane Departure 06/02/2021 f611413a
Warning System Fig. 7.25, AutoVue LDW OFF Switch

NOTE: The Bendix AutoVue LDW system option
The amber ’enabled’ lamp on the LDW switch will go
became available in June 2021. OFF under the following conditions:
• the driver temporarily disables the system;
7.20
• an active diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is It is always the responsibility of the driver to re-
present. main vigilant and change driving practices to suit
traffic and road conditions.
Intentional Lane Changes

At or above 37 mph (60 kph), the AutoVue LDW sys-
tem tracks both solid and dashed shoulder lines,
center lines, and the lines between lanes. For a rep-
resentation of the camera’s field of view, see
Fig. 7.27.
The system identifies intentional lane changes by
03/10/2022 f611394 monitoring the turn signal. When a lane change is
made with the turn signal on, no warnings are made.
Fig. 7.26, AutoVue Lane Searching Dash Indicator
The lane searching dash indicator will remain ON Unintentional Lane Departure
under the following conditions: When a lane change takes place without the turn
• vehicle speed is below 37 mph (60 kph); signal being activated, the system alerts the driver to
make a correction. The alert will come from the side
• an active diagnostic trouble code (DTC) is of the vehicle crossing the lane markings.
present.
Alert Warnings
WARNING
The AutoVue LDW system uses speakers that emit a
If the system cannot discover right or left lane distinctive "rumble strip" sound on the appropriate
markings, the AutoVue Lane Departure Warning side of the cab to alert a driver of an unintentional
system may not deliver expected alerts or errone- lane departure. Audible alert volume levels are set at
ous alerts may occur. the factory and cannot be adjusted.
Missed and false alerts may occur in the follow- SafetyDirect
ing situations:
When triggered by a truck safety event, the AutoVue
• Lane markings are difficult to distinguish due to LDW system records ten seconds of video and trans-
standing water, snow, ice, mud, sand, dirt, or mits it to the SafetyDirect portal. Fleet managers can
other debris on the road. use the video along with vehicle sensor information
• Lane markings are hidden or obscured by to enhance driver training and road safety.
heavy rain, fog, falling snow or sleet, or blow-
ing smoke. Cleaning the Windshield in the Area
• Lane markings are missing or faded. of the Camera
• Sun glare or other light sources blind the cam- Make sure that the windshield is always kept clean
era, obscuring lane markings or making other and unobstructed in the area of the camera.
road markings (e.g. tar strips) look like lane The driver should switch on the windshield wiper to
markings. clean the windshield and remove snow and ice to
• The camera’s view through the windshield avoid incorrect lane detection.
glass is blocked or obscured by dirt, chips, If this area of the windshield is damaged, the Auto-
cracks, or some other distortion. Vue LDW system may not work as intended. If this
• The camera is mis-installed. happens, the windshield must be replaced.
• Headlights are not operating or are mis- Temporarily Disabling the System
aligned.
The system can be temporarily disabled by pressing
the LDW OFF switch; when the system is disabled,
7.21
1 2 3 4
5 3
04/05/2021 f547486
A. Camera Field of View 2. Windshield Mounted Camera 4. Painted Road Stripes
1. Equipped Vehicle 3. Lane Measurement Zones 5. Lane Position Evaluation Zone
Fig. 7.27, Camera Field of View
the ambered ’enabled’ lamp will go OFF. See OnGuard equipped vehicles have antilock brakes
Fig. 7.25. The system will re-enable itself after 15 (ABS) and automatic traction control (ATC), and ei-
minutes. Warnings can be enabled sooner by press- ther roll stability control (RSC) or electronic stability
ing the switch again. control (ESC). These systems work together to en-
hance control of the vehicle. Depending on the situa-
System Offline Indicators tion, any of these features may apply throttle control,
engine brakes, and/or service brakes, as needed.
If the AutoVue LDW system goes offline while vehicle
speed is at or above 37 mph (60 kph), the lane The front-looking antenna assembly transmits radar
searching dash indicator will appear and the amber signals to, and receives them back from, objects
light in the LDW OFF switch will go out. Conditions ahead of the vehicle. To be detected, vehicles must
that may cause this include: be within the radar field of view and provide a sur-
face area that can reflect the radar. The distance,
• undetectable lane markings; speed, and angle of the vehicle ahead is calculated,
• an obscured camera lens; and the driver is warned of potentially dangerous
situations. The system also warns of stationary ob-
• a system diagnostic trouble code (DTC). jects to alert the driver of potential obstructions
If the lane searching dash indicator stays ON for a ahead in their lane.
long period of time with the vehicle speed at or
above 37 mph (60 kph) and the amber enabled lamp WARNING
on the LDW OFF switch remains ON despite de-
pressing the switch, the system requires calibration The WABCO OnGuardACTIVE™ Collision Mitiga-
services at an authorised dealer. tion System is intended solely as an aid for an
alert and conscientious professional driver. It is
OnGuardACTIVE™ Collision not intended to be relied upon to operate a ve-
hicle. Use the system in conjunction with rear-
Mitigation System view mirrors and other instruments to safely op-
erate the vehicle. Operate a vehicle equipped
WABCO OnGuardACTIVE CMS is a forward-looking with OnGuardACTIVE in the same safe manner as
radar-based safety system. The system includes for- if the CMS were not present.
ward collision warning, adaptive cruise control (ACC),
and collision mitigation.
7.22
The OnGuardACTIVE Collision Safety System is 2

not a substitute for safe, normal driving proce- 1
dures, nor will it compensate for any driver im-
pairment such as drugs, alcohol, or fatigue.
3
System Limitations
The OnGuardACTIVE Collision Mitigation System
may provide little or no warning of hazards such as
4
pedestrians, animals, oncoming vehicles, or cross
02/17/2017 f611277
traffic.
1. Mode 3. Up
The OnGuardACTIVE CMS only brakes for lead ve- 2. Day/Night Mode 4. Down
hicles located directly in front of your vehicle, and
does not operate when vehicle speed is less than 15 Fig. 7.28, OnGuard Display Unit
mph (25 km/h).
Due to these limitations, the system: Collision Warning System (CWS)
• will not react and alert the operator to objects The CWS generates audible, visual, and vibrational
crossing in front of the vehicle or oncoming alerts when the following distance may result in a
traffic; collision. The OnGuard display unit shows a graphic
of the condition, enhanced by a screen color relevant
• should not be relied on to track lead vehicles to the intensity of the situation. See Table 7.1.
when traveling through a severe curve in the
road. Because of this, ACC is not recom- OnGuard Display Screen Background Colors
mended for use on winding roads; Screen Color Description
• should not be relied upon to track narrow ob- General operation; no lead vehicles
Blue
jects like motorcycles, mopeds, bicycles, or detected.
pedestrians; Green Lead vehicle detected.
Following distance alert, accompanied
• should not be relied on to alert drivers to ve- Yellow
by an audible alert.
hicles in an adjacent lane.
Collision warning, stationary object
Red warning. Accompanied with audible
OnGuard Display Unit alert.
The OnGuardACTIVE CMS controls are located in Amber Data Error
the display unit. The display provides visual and au- Table 7.1, OnGuard Display Screen Background
dible warnings and messages, as well as verification Colors
of correct system operation and faults. Menu selec-
tions are made by pressing the up and down arrows, If a potential collision is developing and the driver
and the MODE button. See Fig. 7.28. does not take action to slow the vehicle, OnGuar-
The display unit includes: dACTIVE’s active braking feature issues a short
brake pulse and de-throttles the engine.
• an internal speaker
If the driver does not take the appropriate action and
• a graphic display a potential collision still exists, OnGuardACTIVE re-
• buttons to scroll and select options duces the engine torque and applies the engine and
service brakes to slow the vehicle.
• day/night display mode (second-generation
only) The active braking application is intended only to
provide early braking; the driver is still required to
recognize and react to all driving situations.
7.23
If OnGuardACTIVE detects a stationary object (such

as a disabled car), it will provide an audible alert fol-
lowed by a vibrational alert and then brake to reduce
230FT
the vehicle’s speed.
Again, the active braking application is intended only
to provide early braking; the driver is still required to
recognize and react to all driving situations.
IMPORTANT: the collision mitigation system CMS 55 MPH
(CMS) and active braking are not operational at 07/15/2021 f611143b
vehicle speeds below 15 mph (25 km/h).
Fig. 7.30, CMS Lead Vehicle Detected (green)
The collision warning system (CWS) cannot be dis-
engaged or turned off, and is always active at vehicle
speeds above 15 mph (25 km/h).
15 FT
Standby
When no lead vehicle is detected, the display shows
that the CMS is on and the radar is searching. See
Fig. 7.29.
CMS 15 MPH
07/15/2021 f611144a
Fig. 7.31, CMS Collision Warning (red)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

CMS Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) works in conjunction
with conventional cruise control to maintain a mini-
07/15/2021 f611143c
mum following distance when a lead vehicle is being
Fig. 7.29, CMS Standby (blue) tracked. The minimum following distance is main-
tained by automatically decelerating the vehicle using
A Vehicle is Detected accelerator pedal, engine, and service brakes without
driver intervention.
When a lead vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,
the display shows that the CMS is on and the radar When the lead vehicle is no longer being tracked, the
is tracking a lead vehicle at the speed shown. See set cruise control speed resumes automatically.
Fig. 7.30. Vehicles equipped with the WABCO OnGuard CMS
If the following distance between the vehicle and the and Cummins engines come standard with Adaptive
lead vehicle is too close, the CMS will emit an au- Cruise Control (ACC) and Adaptive Cruise Control
dible alert and the display background will turn yel- Recovery enabled.
low. The alert will end when the vehicle speed drops If ACC is not available, the cancel button must be
below the lead vehicle speed and the following dis- used to engage standard cruise control.
tance is increased.
To obtain cruise control when the adaptive cruise
Collision Warning control function has been interrupted, press the
pause button 2 times (ON-OFF-ON-OFF) and then
When a lead vehicle is detected traveling slower than press the set button once.
your vehicle, or the gap between them becomes too A Set or Resume command on the Set, Resume but-
close, the CMS warns of an impending collision by tons will now engage the standard cruise control fea-
emitting an urgent audible alert and displaying the tures.
collision warning symbol with a red background. See
Fig. 7.31.
7.24
Standby
15 FT
When no lead vehicle is detected, OnGuard ACC
operates similarly to conventional cruise control. The
cruise control set speed is shown on the OnGuard
display unit. See Fig. 7.32.
15 MPH
Set: 60 MPH
02/17/2017 f611147
Fig. 7.34, ACC Collision Warning (red)
brake pulse to warn of an imminent collision. The

Set: 60 MPH driver must also initiate braking.
02/17/2017 f611145 If OnGuardACTIVE detects a stationary object (such
as a disabled car), it will sound an urgent audible
Fig. 7.32, ACC Standby (blue) alert, then a brake pulse, then apply the vehicle’s
brakes to reduce the vehicle’s speed. The driver
Lead Vehicle Detected must also initiate braking.
When a lead vehicle is detected in the lane ahead,
the display shows that ACC is on and the radar is Error Screens
tracking it. See Fig. 7.33.
IMPORTANT: The OnGuard collision mitigation
system is not operational when an error screen
230 FT is displayed. If a fault occurs or OnGuard fails to
properly track a vehicle, take the vehicle in for
service as soon as possible. Standard cruise
control will not function with an active OnGuard
system fault.
Set: 60 MPH 55 MPH If a system fault is detected, the OnGuard display
02/17/2017 f611146
unit will immediately display an error screen as
Fig. 7.33, ACC Lead Vehicle Detected (green) shown in Fig. 7.35. The first error code transmitted
will be displayed first; additional faults (if any) can be
If the driver uses the accelerator pedal to override viewed using the up or down buttons. The display
the cruise control and approach a vehicle too closely, does not show stored fault codes.
the ACC will emit an audible alert and the display
background will turn yellow. The alert will end when
vehicle speed drops below the lead vehicle’s speed DATA ERROR
and the following distance is increased.
NOTE: The following distance alert does not
ACC1 Link Error
operate at speeds below 15 mph (25 km/h) or
above 77 mph (124 km/h).
Collision Warning 02/17/2017 f611148
If the lead vehicle is traveling slower than the driver’s Fig. 7.35, OnGuard Error Screen (amber)
vehicle, the CMS warns of an impending collision by
emitting an urgent audible alert and displaying the Refer to the OnGuard™ and OnGuardActive™ Colli-
collision warning symbol with a red background. See sion Mitigation Systems Maintenance Manual for a
Fig. 7.34. full list of error screens and messages. (www.meri-
torwabco.com).
If the system determines a rear end collision is immi-
nent, it will automatically apply the brakes to reduce
the vehicle’s speed. The driver may also feel a short
7.25
Additional Features • accelerator pedal position
Press the MODE button to access the OnGuard dis- • driveline engaged
play unit additional features from the CMS or ACC • cruise control enable
main operating screen. Press the up and down ar-
rows to scroll through each menu, then press the • cruise control set speed switch
MODE button to select the value to be changed. In • cruise control coast switch
edit mode, press the up or down arrows to change a
value setting, then press the MODE button to save • cruise control resume switch
the setting. Pressing MODE in each feature screen • cruise control accelerate switch
advances the display to the next feature.
• cruise control pause switch
The Display Control menu allows adjustment of the
alarm volume, LCD brightness, LCD contrast, and
U.S./metric unit conversion. See Fig. 7.36. Zonar® 2020 Tablet
The Zonar 2020 on-board tablet is an optional fea-
DISPLAY CONTROL ture that tracks hours of service, posts driver alerts,
documents pre- and post-trip vehicle inspections, and
Alarm Volume 10 provides advanced navigation. See Fig. 7.38.
Alarm Tone 4
LCD Intensity 9
02/17/2017 f611149
Fig. 7.36, Display Control Menu
The component test menu provides verification of

system component operation and acts as a valuable
OnGuard system diagnostic tool. The header will dis-
play either COMPONENT TEST or ACC FUNCTION,
depending on the software release version of the On-
Guard system. The component test screen shown in
Fig. 7.37 provides access to the following compo-
nents (press the up or down arrows to scroll through 11/19/2014 f546116
the menu):
• brake pedal position Fig. 7.38, Detroit Connect Tablet
The tablet operates in conjunction with the connectiv-

COMPONENT TEST ity onboard platform to provide communication be-
tween drivers and fleet managers.
Brake Pedal Position 37% Refer to Zonar user documentation for more informa-
tion.
EBS Brake Switch ON
CCVS Brake Switch ON
02/17/2017 f611151
Fig. 7.37, Component Test Menu
• EBS brake switch

• CCVS brake switch
• clutch switch
• park brake switch
7.26
8
Climate Controls
Cab Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Sleeper Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Accessory Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3
Dual HVAC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5
Climate Controls
Cab Climate Controls reach high speed. The blower motor performs a self-
test immediately after the engine is started, which
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with the ICC5 instru- causes the delay. If the vehicle has Optimized Idle,
ment panel, the fan speed, temperature, and mode the fan will not operate with the key in accessory
temporarily appear on the 10-inch infotainment mode. Optimized Idle may also turn the fan off to
screen when these items are adjusted. reduce stress on the batteries. Refer to Chapter 13
for more information.
The standard cab climate controls include a fan knob
with a recirculation button, temperature control knob Recirculation
with an A/C button, and a mode control knob. See
Fig. 8.1. The mode control knob in sleeper cabs is Recirculation mode limits the amount of outside air
equipped with a bunk override button. entering the cab. Press the recirculation button to
prevent dusty or smoky air from entering the cab.
1 2 3 See Fig. 8.2. Recirculation mode can also decrease
the time required to cool or heat the cab interior dur-
ing extreme outside temperature conditions. An
amber indicator on the recirculation button will illumi-
nate when the recirculation mode is activated.
The recirculation button will not work when the mode
control switch is in either defog or defrost modes.
09/09/2016 f611324
1. Fan Knob NOTE: To prevent the buildup of odors or oxy-
2. Temperature Control Knob gen depletion inside the cab, the system
3. Mode Control Knob switches from full recirculation mode to partial
Fig. 8.1, Cab Climate Controls recirculation mode after 20 minutes. In ex-
tremely dusty or smoky conditions, the partial
Fan Knob recirculation mode can be overridden by press-
ing the recirculation button twice to obtain full
The fan knob activates the fan, which forces outside recirculation mode. This resets the 20-minute
air or recirculated air through the air outlets. The fan
knob has ten fan speed settings and an OFF posi-
timer.
tion. See Fig. 8.2.
Temperature Control Knob
The temperature control knob is used to select the
desired temperature in the cab. Turn the knob coun-
terclockwise for cool air, or clockwise for hot air. See
Fig. 8.3.
09/09/2016 f611325
1
1. Recirculation Button
Fig. 8.2, Fan Knob
To operate the fan, turn the fan knob clockwise to

increase airflow; turn the fan knob counterclockwise 01/15/2016 f611326
to decrease airflow. 1. Air Conditioning Button
There is a two-second delay between the time the Fig. 8.3, Temperature Control Knob
engine is started and the blower is operational. It can
take an additional four seconds for the blower to
8.1
Climate Controls
Air Conditioning Button 3
The air conditioner (A/C) cools and dehumidifies the

air inside the cab. Press the A/C button, located in 4
the center of the temperature control knob, to turn 2
the air conditioner on and off. See Fig. 8.3. The A/C
has three modes:
• Off
• Economy (ECO); green LED
• Full A/C (maximum cooling); blue LED 1 5
The ECO mode does not cool the air temperature as

low as the full A/C mode, and can provide fuel sav- 7 6
ings. 01/15/2016 f611327
NOTE: There are intermediate modes between each
When using the climate control in full A/C mode (blue knob position.
LED illuminated), after 45 minutes the system will
1. Face Mode 5. Defrost Mode
automatically switch to ECO mode (green LED illumi-
2. Bi-Level Mode 6. All Mode
nated) to improve fuel economy. Full A/C can be 3. Floor Mode 7. Bunk Override Button
reset by pushing the A/C button again. 4. Floor/Defrost Mode (on sleeper-cabs only)
Mode Control Knob Fig. 8.4, Mode Control Knob With Bunk Override
Button
The mode control knob allows the driver to control
the flow of air through the face outlets, the floor out- indicator will illuminate when bunk override mode is
lets, the defrost (windshield) outlets, or a combination activated. When in override mode, the sleeper cli-
of these outlets. See Fig. 8.4. mate control panel automatically conforms to the fan
speed and temperature settings on the cab climate
• Face Mode: Directs all airflow through the face panel at the time the override mode is activated. Fur-
or instrument panel outlets. ther changes of the cab climate control settings will
• Bi-Level Mode: Directs the airflow equally to not alter the settings of the sleeper climate control
the face outlets and the floor outlets. panel.
• Floor Mode: Directs all airflow through the floor The override mode is disabled when the fan or tem-
outlets. perature control knob on the sleeper climate control
panel is manually set to a different setting. The over-
• Floor/Defrost Mode: Directs the airflow equally ride mode is also disabled when the bunk override
to the floor outlets and the defrost outlets. button is pressed to the off position in the cab.
• Defrost Mode: Directs all airflow through the
defrost outlets. Sleeper Climate Control Panel
• All Mode: Directs the airflow equally to the The standard sleeper climate control panel has a fan
face, floor, and defrost outlets. knob and a temperature control knob with an A/C
NOTE: There are intermediate modes between button.
each knob position. If the bunk override button has been activated, the
override mode can be canceled by changing the
Bunk Override Button sleeper fan speed or temperature setting. The cli-
The bunk override button, equipped on sleeper cabs mate control system will then operate from the
only, copies the temperature and fan settings from sleeper controls.
the cab to the sleeper. See Fig. 8.4.
Pressing the bunk override button in either the cab or
the sleeper will copy the current cab HVAC tempera-
ture and fan settings to the sleeper HVAC. An amber
8.2
Climate Controls
Fan Switch true, if the rear unit is off and the front unit is set
such that AC is requested, in order to prevent the
The fan knob activates the fan, which forces air bunk evaporator from freezing up.
through the air outlets. The fan knob has ten fan
speeds and an OFF position. See Fig. 8.5. Temperature Control Knob
To operate the fan knob, turn the knob clockwise to The temperature control knob is used to select the
increase airflow; turn the fan knob counterclockwise desired temperature in the sleeper. Turn the switch
to decrease airflow. If the vehicle has Optimized Idle, counterclockwise for cool air, or clockwise for hot air.
the fan will not operate with the key in accessory
mode. Optimized Idle may also turn the fan off to Air Conditioning Button
reduce stress on the batteries. Refer to Chapter 13
for more information. The A/C cools and dehumidifies the air inside the
sleeper. Press the air conditioning button, located in
1 2 the center of the temperature control knob to turn the
A/C on and off.
Smartway Certified Parked Heater

Operation
All vehicles equipped with diesel operated coolant
heaters are "Smartway Certified". The coolant heater
3 will keep the engine coolant between approximately
09/09/2016 f611328 150 and 180°F (65 and 82°C). Heated coolant is
1. Fan Knob routed through the auxiliary HVAC heater core to
2. Temperature Control Knob allow heater-only function of the auxiliary HVAC sys-
3. Air Conditioning Button tem.
Fig. 8.5, Sleeper Climate Control Panel
System Operation
When the cab air conditioner (A/C) is on, it is normal 1. Turn the block heater on.
for the sleeper fan to operate at low speed even if
the sleeper fan knob is in the off position. This is 2. Set the temperature dial to the desired heat set-
necessary to protect the evaporator in the sleeper ting.
heater and air conditioner system from freezing. At 3. Turn the HVAC blower on.
lower fan speed settings, a slight increase in airflow
levels may appear at times, as the control acts to
regulate the evaporator temperature. Accessory Heaters
When the park brake is set, any temperature or Optional accessary heaters are available from the
blower speed setting changes on the bunk HVAC factory in several configurations. Familiarize yourself
unit control panel will be mimicked by the front HVAC with the equipment on your specific vehicle, and fol-
unit. For example, if you set bunk blower speed to HI low the manufacturer’s operating and maintenance
and the temperature to COLD, the front unit will also instructions.
operate on HI/COLD.
When the park brake is not set, the front and rear WARNING
HVAC settings function independently, unless the
bunk override button is pressed, or "minimum AC Do not operate fuel-operated heaters in an area
support" is required. where flammable vapors, including gasoline or
diesel fumes, are present, such as at filling sta-
Minimum AC support is when the front unit is off and tions and oil depots. Turn off a fuel-operated
the bunk unit is set such that AC is requested (needs heater and allow it shut down completely before
the AC compressor to run). In this case, the front unit entering an area where flammable gases or liq-
will go into minimum AC support mode by operating uids are present. Heaters continue to operate for
the front blower at minimum speed to prevent the up to three minutes after being turned off.
front unit evaporator from freezing up. This is also
8.3
Climate Controls
Failure to observe these precautions could cause 2

an explosion or fire, resulting in serious property
damage, and personal injury or death. 1 3
NOTICE
Always ensure that air inlet and outlet grilles are
not restricted. Restriction of any air inlet or outlet
ports could result in damage to the auxiliary
heater.
IMPORTANT: To maintain reliable performance,
run the accessory heater for at least 15 minutes
every month to prevent fuel from degrading.
On vehicles without Optimized Idle, accessory heat- 6 5 4
ers function when the ignition switch is in the OFF 10/17/2016 f611463
position and the cab load disconnect switch (if 1. Heater Enabled LED (green)
equipped) is in the ON position. 2. LCD Display
3. Maintenance Required LED (red)
On vehicles with Optimized Idle, accessory heaters 4. Temperature UP Button (right arrow)
function when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC 5. Power Button
position, the cab load disconnect switch (if equipped) 6. Temperature DOWN Button (left arrow)
is in the ON position, and the parking brake is en-
gaged. The heater may run briefly after the ignition Fig. 8.6, Eberspaecher Digi-Max D1000 Controller
key has been turned to the OFF position.
IMPORTANT: Wait eight minutes after shutting 1 2
down an accessory heater before turning the
cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) to OFF. 10/17/2016 f611462
1. Remaining Runtime
NOTE: The low voltage disconnect (LVD) control 2. Set Temperature
prevents a heater from draining the batteries
below starting voltage. Fig. 8.7, Controller LCD
To turn the heater off, press the POWER button

Eberspaecher (Espar) Heater again. The heater will initiate a 5- to 8-minute cooling
Refer to the Eberspaecher website, cycle.
www.eberspaecher-na.com, for additional informa- The controller has a real-time diagnostic feature, and
tion. will automatically display fault codes as they happen
(e.g. 48—Check Fuel Pump). The red LED will illumi-
Eberspaecher Digi-Max D1000 Controller nate, indicating that maintenance is required.
To turn the heater on, press the POWER button. See The controller has a programmable run timer that will
Fig. 8.6. The display will indicate that heater is en- display a maintenance message on the LCD after the
abled and show the remaining runtime and the set set time limit when the heater is off. See Fig. 8.8.
temperature. See Fig. 8.7. The green LED indicates The fault codes and maintenance messages will not
that the heater is on. prevent the heater from operating, but they reflect
To adjust the desired temperature, press the left or conditions that should be addressed promptly.
right arrow buttons. The left arrow button lowers the
desired temperature, and the right arrow button
raises it. The adjustment range is from 48 to 93°F (8
to 34°C).
10/17/2016 f611464
Fig. 8.8, Maintenance Required Message
8.4
Climate Controls
Webasto Heater Setting the Temperature and Heater

Runtime
Webasto heaters have a heat mode and a vent
mode. The fan speed is adjustable in the vent mode. 1. Press the selection button.
The control also has a timer function, allowing a start
2. Using the rotary knob, select Options > Duration
time and/or duration to be set.
> Timed > Adjust Runtime to xx Hours. Confirm
To turn the heater on, push the ON/OFF button. See the adjustment by pressing the selection button.
Fig. 8.9. The LCD screen displays the mode, ambi-
ent temperature, set temperature, timer, and fan 3. Using the rotary knob, adjust the control to the
speed. See Fig. 8.10. desired temperature. Confirm the adjustment by
pressing the selection button.
Refer to the Webasto website, techwebasto.com,
for additional information. NOTE: The temperature can be adjusted while
the heater is running.
1 2
Setting the Timer
1. Press the selection button.
2. Using the rotary knob, select Timer.
3
3 3. Press the selection button. Select Edit from the
sub-menu.
4. Using the rotary knob, select the day. To confirm,
press the selection button.
5. Using the rotary knob, select the start time. To
confirm, press the selection button.
6. Using the rotary knob, select the run time. To
4 confirm, press the selection button.
10/21/2016 f611465
1. Rotary Knob 3. Indicator Light Dual HVAC System
2. ON/OFF Button 4. Selection Button
The Dual HVAC system replaces the standard
Fig. 8.9, Webasto Temperature Control sleeper HVAC when optioned. Vehicles with a Dual
HVAC system have a larger alternator, additional bat-
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 2 3 4 7 teries, and premium insulation. The Dual HVAC sys-
tem operates both when the engine is running and
when the engine is off.
The Dual HVAC system controls temperature differ-
ently than the standard sleeper HVAC system. The
standard sleeper HVAC (without Optimized Idle) at-
tempts to maintain vent discharge temperature at the
sleeper vents, much like the main HVAC in the dash.
A B C The Dual HVAC system is a zone control system
10/21/2016 f611466 which attempts to hold the bunk at a constant tem-
A. Standby Mode C. Vent Mode perature.
B. Heat Mode
1. Set Temperature 5. Heat ON Indicator
The Dual HVAC system has two evaporators for
2. Ambient Temperature 6. Fan Speed Indicator cooling, one supported by the engine-driven A/C sys-
3. Mode 7. Vent ON Indicator tem, and the other on a separate battery-powered
4. Timed Duration A/C loop with a back wall-mounted condenser. When
the engine is running, the Dual HVAC system uses
Fig. 8.10, Webasto Temperature Control Display the traditional engine-supported systems for heating
Screens
8.5
Climate Controls
and cooling. When the engine is turned off, the ve- the temperature control knob to the desired tempera-
hicle batteries power the separate electric air condi- ture.
tioner loop or support a fuel-operated heater. The fan switch has ten fan speeds. Zero (0) is the
Operation of the Dual HVAC system is regulated by OFF position. Turn the switch clockwise to increase
the cab Progressive Low Voltage Disconnect (PLVD). airflow, and counterclockwise to decrease airflow.
The PLVD must be enabled for the Dual HVAC sys- The temperature control knob controls the tempera-
tem to be started. The PLVD will stop operation of ture from 65°F to 85°F (18°C to 29°C). At the mini-
the Dual HVAC system when the voltage gets below mum setting of 65°F the unit will attempt to cool the
a pre-determined threshold. Before operating the bunk to 65°F and will not allow the coolant heater to
Dual HVAC system, bring the sleeper interior tem- operate. At the maximum setting of 85°F the unit will
perature to the desired temperature with the engine attempt to heat the bunk to 85°F and will not allow
running and the bunk curtain open. The Dual HVAC the A/C cooling to operate. In between the two ex-
system is designed to maintain an established com- tremes the unit will operate in either the heating or
fortable bunk temperature in parked mode for up to cooling mode to achieve the set point.
12 hours with the bunk curtain closed.
On vehicles with Optimized Idle, interior comfort
NOTE: The condition and charge of the vehicle mode with Dual HVAC system operates with the fol-
batteries will directly affect the run time of the lowing parameters regarding the set point and com-
Dual HVAC system. If the vehicle run time be- fort zone:
tween discharges is less than eight hours, or if • If the bunk area reaches more than 10°F (5.5
additional loads are added to the vehicle batter- °C) above the set point the Dual HVAC system
ies, the Dual HVAC system run time will be less immediately requests the engine to start for
than expected. bunk cooling.
Dual HVAC Control Panel • Bunk area temperature 5 to 10°F (2.8 to 5.5°C)
above the set point for over twenty minutes will
The Dual HVAC system control panel replaces the cause the Dual HVAC system to request the
standard sleeper control panel in Dual HVAC- engine to start for bunk cooling.
equipped sleeper cabs. See Fig. 8.11. The Dual
• When the sleeper area drops to more than
HVAC system is designed to maintain a comfortable
10°F (5.5 °C) below the set point, the comfort
temperature inside the sleeper, and can operate in
zone is exceeded and the Dual HVAC system
combination with the cab climate control system
immediately requests the engine to start for
when the vehicle is running, or independently when
bunk heating.
the vehicle is parked.
• Bunk area temperatures 5 to 10°F (2.8 to 5.5
°C) below the set point for over twenty minutes
will cause the Dual HVAC system to request
the engine to start for bunk heating.
The mid-point position on the Dual HVAC system
temperature control knob is a set point of 73°F
(23°C). In most conditions the mid-set point for tem-
perature and mid-set point for fan speed will assure
a stable environment. Mid-point for both controls is
suggested as the initial position, with subsequent ad-
justment for personal preference.
1. Fan Knob 3. PARK Button
2. Temperature Control IMPORTANT: Wait three minutes after shutting
Knob down the Dual HVAC system before turning the
cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) to OFF.
Fig. 8.11, Dual HVAC System Control Panel
To operate Dual HVAC system, select a fan speed

(other than off) and push the PARK button. Adjust
8.6
9
Seats and Restraints
Seats, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1
High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Sears Atlas Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
Sleeper Compartment Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Steering Wheel Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
RollTek Rollover Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Seats, General Information 2. Lumbar Support: Lumbar support changes the

shape of the seat back to give more or less sup-
Unless otherwise noted, all seat adjustments should port to the occupant’s lumbar (lower back) area.
be made while seated and before the engine is This adjustment is either mechanical or air con-
started. trolled, depending on make and model of the
seat.
Due to the maximum adjustability of mid- and high-
back air suspension seats, it is possible to combine 3. Isolator: This feature reduces the amount of road
the seat back recline adjustment and the seat slide shock by isolating the occupant from the motion
adjustment so that the seat back contacts the back- of the vehicle, and allowing the upper seat to
wall. It is the responsibility of the driver to adjust the move in a simple pendulum motion. A lockout
seat to prevent damage to the seat and the cab feature is used whenever the isolator is not de-
interior. sired.
4. Height Adjustment: This adjustment moves the
WARNING entire seat up or down. The adjustment is either
manual or air-controlled, depending on the make
Keep hands, tools, and other objects away from of the seat.
the scissor points under the seats. Failure to do
so could cause personal injury. 5. Bottom Cushion Angle, or Fore-and-Aft Bottom
Cushion Height: This adjustment enables the oc-
The following is a description of adjustments that can cupant to raise or lower the front or back of the
be made to various Freightliner-installed seats. Not bottom cushion. This adjustment is easier to per-
all seats have all of the adjustments listed below. form when all weight is removed from the seat.
See Fig. 9.1.
1
3 4
2
8
6 7
5
02/03/2017 f910149a
1. Backrest Tilt 5. Bottom Cushion Angle (fore-and- 7. Seat Tilt
2. Lumbar Support aft cushion height) 8. Headrest Adjustment
3. Isolator Feature 6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide (seat
4. Height Adjustment track adjustment)
Fig. 9.1, General Seat Adjustments
1. Backrest Tilt: This adjustment enables the back- 6. Fore-and-Aft Seat Slide, or Seat Track Adjust-
rest to pivot forward or backward. ment: This adjustment moves the entire seat for-
ward or backward on its track.
9.1
7. Seat Tilt: This adjustment allows the seat assem-

bly (back and bottom cushions) to tilt forward or NOTICE
backward.
Do not install seat covers on seats with heating
8. Headrest Adjustment: This adjustment changes and ventilation. Do not cover the seat with blan-
the angle of the upper part of the backrest to kets, clothing, or pillows. Blocking the air flow
provide head and upper back support. through the cushions can overheat and damage
the seat.
High Back Seat 1. Backrest Tilt: Pull the recline handle to adjust the
See Fig. 9.2 for seat adjustment controls. Not all backrest tilt.
models of High Back seat have all the adjustments 2. Heat/Ventilation: Use the forward switch to turn
listed below. the seat heater and ventilation ON or OFF. To
turn on the heat, push the top of the switch. To
turn on the ventilation, push the bottom of the
switch. To turn off the heat or ventilation, move
the switch to the middle position. To adjust the
heat or ventilation, Use the rear button to adjust
seat heating or ventilation. Three settings are
available: low, medium, and high. See Fig. 9.3.
4 5
3
H
2
M
1 L
12/02/2021 f910683
1. Ventilation ON
2. Heat/Ventilation OFF
3. Heat ON
4. Heat/Ventilation ON/OFF Switch
5. Heat/Ventilation Adjustment Switch
1 Fig. 9.3, High Back Seat Heat/Ventilation Controls
2
9 IMPORTANT: Turn off seat heating/ventilation
8 3
4 when the seat is unoccupied.
7
5 3.
01/14/2016
6
f910682b
Lumbar and Side Support: Press the forward but-
1. Backrest Tilt Handle ton to adjust lower lumbar support, the middle
2. Heat/Ventilation Switches button to adjust upper lumbar support, and the
3. Lumbar and Side Support Switches rear button to adjust side support.
4. Height Adjustment Lever
5. Shock Absorber Adjustment Lever 4. Height Adjustment: Pull or push the lever to ad-
6. Fore/Aft Isolator Lever just seat height.
7. Bottom Cushion Extension Lever 5. Shock Absorber Adjustment: Move the lever
8. Seat Fore/Aft Slide Lever
9. Seat Tilt Lever
down to increase damping on rough roads, or up
to decrease damping on flat roads.
Fig. 9.2, High Back Seat
9.2
6. Fore/Aft Isolator: Rotate the isolator knob to the

left to lock the isolator, or to the right to allow
movement.
7. Bottom Cushion Extension: Pull the lever to
move the seat cushion forwards or backwards.
The cushion moves 2-3/8 inches (60 mm) in 3/8-
inch (10-mm) increments.
8. Seat Fore/Aft Slide: Lift the lever to slide the seat
forward or backward. Release the lever to lock
the seat in position.
9. Seat Tilt: Pull the lever and lean back to tilt the
seat backwards. Three positions are available.
Armrest Tilt: To adjust the armrest angle, tilt the arm-
rest to the highest position, then down to the lowest
position, then to the desired position.
Sears Atlas Seat

See Fig. 9.4 for seat adjustment controls.
1. Isolator: Position the handle to the left to allow 5
isolation movement. Position the handle to the
right to lock-out isolation movement.
2. Fore/Aft Seat Slide: To adjust the fore-and-aft 4 6
position of the entire seat, squeeze the fore/aft 3
2
slide lock against the adjustment bail, and lift the 1
bail up. See Fig. 9.5. Slide the seat forward or
backward to the desired position. Release the
bail and fore/aft slide lock, to its original position, 7
to lock the seat in place.
3. Bottom Cushion Tilt: Lift the handle upward and 10/15/2007 f910597
move the seat cushion to the desired position. 1. Isolator Lever 5. Backrest Tilt Lever
Three positions are available. 2. Fore/Aft Seat Slide 6. Lumbar Support
Lever Switches
4. Seat Extension: Rotate the handle upward to dis- 3. Bottom Cushion Tilt 7. Suspension Inflation/
engage, then move the seat cushion to the de- Handle Deflation Switch
sired position and release the lever. Three posi- 4. Seat Extension Lever
tions are available.
Fig. 9.4, Sears Atlas Seat
5. Backrest Tilt: Pull upward on the recliner handle,
move the backrest to the desired position and Armrest Angle: Rotate the control knob, located on
release the handle. the underside of the armrest, to set the desired angle
6. of the armrest.
Lumbar Support: Rear rocker switch: Push for-
ward to inflate the lower lumbar bag; push rear-
ward to deflate the bag. Center rocker switch: Seat Belts and Tether Belts
Push forward to inflate the upper lumbar bag;
push rearward to deflate the bag. Seat belt assemblies are designed to secure persons
in the vehicle to help reduce the chance of injury, or
7. Suspension Inflation/Deflation: Push forward on the amount of injury, resulting from accidents or sud-
the gray rocker switch to inflate and raise the den stops. For this reason, Daimler Truck North
suspension; push rearward to deflate and lower America LLC (DTNA) urges that the driver and all
the suspension.
9.3
Seat Belt Inspection

WARNING
A
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
B the entire vehicle seat belt system must be re-
10/15/2007 f910599
placed before operating the vehicle. Do not at-
A. Squeeze the fore-and-aft slide lock against the tempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
adjustment bail. could change the effectiveness of the system.
B. Lift up the adjustment bail.
Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
Fig. 9.5, Fore/Aft Slide Adjustment, Sears Atlas Seat making any modifications to the system, may re-
sult in personal injury or death.
passengers, regardless of age or physical condition,
Inspect the seat belts and tether belts (if so
use seat belts when riding in the vehicle.
equipped).
WARNING 1. Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme dirt and
dust, or for severe fading from exposure to sun-
Always use the vehicle’s seat belt system when light, especially near the buckle latch plate and in
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so can result the D-loop guide area.
in severe personal injury or death. 2. Check operation of the buckle, latch, Komfort
Seat belt assemblies in DTNA vehicles meet Federal Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if equipped), web
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 209, "Type 1" and retractor, and upper seat belt mount on the door
"Type 2" requirements. pillar. Check all visible components for wear or
damage.
When transporting a child, always use a child re-
straint system or the vehicle seat belts as appropri- 3. Check the seat belt and tether belt connection
ate. To determine whether a child restraint system is points and tighten any that are loose.
required, review and comply with applicable state
and local laws. Any child restraint used must comply Seat Belt Operation
with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213, When engaged and used properly, the Komfort Latch
"Child Restraint Systems." When providing a child (Fig. 9.6) and the Sliding Komfort Latch (Fig. 9.7)
restraint system, always carefully read and follow all introduce a small amount of slack into the seat belt,
instructions pertaining to installation and usage for resulting in a more comfortable ride.
the child. Make certain the child remains in the re-
straint system at all times when the vehicle is in 1. Slowly pull the link end of the seat belt out of the
motion. retractor and pull it across your lap (from out-
board to inboard) far enough to engage the
In addition to seat belt assemblies, tether belts are buckle. If the retractor locks too soon, allow the
installed on suspension-type seats. Tether belts help belt to retract slightly, then slowly pull it out
secure the seat to the floor and are intended to re- again. See Fig. 9.8.
strain the seat and seat belt in case of an accident or
sudden stop. 2. Fasten the seat belt by pushing the latch into the
buckle. Listen for an audible click.
IMPORTANT: Seat belts have a finite life which
may be much shorter than the life of the vehicle. 3. Tug on the seat belt to make sure it is securely
Regular inspections and replacement as needed fastened. If the buckle unlatches, repeat this
are the only assurance of adequate seat belt step. If the problem continues, replace the seat
security over the life of the vehicle. belt.
4. Snug the seat belt to your waist.
9.4
A B
1
03/11/2010 f910620
A. Disengaged B. Engaged
2
Fig. 9.6, Komfort Latch
07/02/2007 f910578
1. Latch 2. Buckle
Fig. 9.8, Three-Point Seat Belt Operation
duces the effectiveness of the seat belt, and in-

creases the risk of injury or death in an accident.
5. Position the shoulder strap diagonally across
your chest with the adjustable D-loop bracket (if
equipped). The shoulder strap must be centered
on your shoulder and chest, away from your face
and neck. See Fig. 9.9. If desired, engage the
Komfort Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch as fol-
lows.
If equipped with a Sliding Komfort Latch, make
11/18/2010 f910621a
sure that the shoulder strap is snug against your
Fig. 9.7, Sliding Komfort Latch chest. Without loosening the shoulder strap,
push the Sliding Komfort Latch switch to the
"ON" position. See Fig. 9.7. To activate the latch
WARNING lean forward until you hear a click. This will allow
for approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm) of slack be-
Before activating the Komfort Latch or the Slid- tween your chest and the shoulder harness.
ing Komfort Latch, make sure the amount of Once engaged, the latch will allow you to lean
slack in the shoulder strap is set as described forward about 5 inches (13 cm) without having to
below. Excess slack in the shoulder strap re- reset the latch. Leaning forward more than 5
9.5
inches (13 cm) will disengage the Sliding Kom-

fort Latch, requiring it to be reset.
If equipped with a Komfort Latch, pull on the
shoulder strap to lessen the pressure of the strap
on your shoulder and chest. Allow no more than
1 inch (2.5 cm) of slack between your chest and
the shoulder harness. More slack can signifi-
cantly reduce the seat belt effectiveness in an
accident or a sudden stop. While holding the belt
slack, press the Komfort Latch lever up, clamp-
ing the seat belt webbing (Fig. 9.10 and
Fig. 9.11).
02/03/2017 f910144
Fig. 9.11, Locking the Komfort Latch
If equipped with a Sliding Komfort Latch, un-

buckle the seat belt, then tug on the shoulder
belt to release the Sliding Komfort Latch, or
A B C press the Sliding Komfort latch to the "OFF" po-
02/03/2017 f910634
sition, then unbuckle the seat belt.
A. Correct—Belt is centered on your shoulder and If equipped with a Komfort Latch, unbuckle the
chest, away from your face and neck. seat belt, then release the Komfort Latch by giv-
B. Wrong—Belt must not rub against face or neck. ing the shoulder belt a quick tug. If you lean for-
C. Wrong—Belt must not hang off shoulder. ward against the shoulder belt, the Komfort Latch
will automatically release, and will need to be
Fig. 9.9, Proper Shoulder Strap Fit
reset.
NOTE: Neither the Komfort Latch nor the Sliding
Komfort Latch need to be manually released in
an emergency situation. Each will release by
itself under rough road or other abnormal condi-
tions. Make sure the seat belt is completely re-
A
tracted when it is not in use.
Sleeper Compartment
Restraints
WARNING
Keep the upper bunk folded up and locked, and
do not use the sleeper compartment while the
02/03/2017 f910048a
vehicle is in motion unless a bunk restraint is
A. 1 Inch (2.5 cm) Maximum installed and used. Not using the bunk restraint
Fig. 9.10, Adjusting Shoulder Harness Clearance,
increases the chance of injury, or the degree of
Komfort Latch injury, to all occupants of the vehicle from acci-
dents or sudden stops.
6. Unbuckle the seat belt and release the Komfort
Latch or the Sliding Komfort Latch as follows.
9.6
Bunk Restraint Adjustment 1

1. Make sure the belt is attached to the bunk sup-
port and sleeper wall.
2. To lengthen the belt, tip the link end downward
and pull the link until it connects with the buckle.
2
3. After the belt is connected, shorten it by pulling 3
on the loose end until the belt is snug, but com-
fortable. Be sure the belts are not twisted. See
Fig. 9.12.
4
5
A
1
6
3
09/09/2016 f910766
NOTE: Mattresses not shown for clarity. Upper bunk
pan cutaway shown for clarity.
02/17/2017 f910068a
1. Upper Bunk Restraint 4. Lower Bunk Restraint
A. Pull on the loose end to shorten the belt. 2. Upper Bunk 5. Lower Bunk
1. Buckle 3. Link 3. Upper Bunk Buckle 6. Lower Bunk Buckle
2. Belt Release Button
Fig. 9.13, Bunk Restraints
Fig. 9.12, Bunk Restraint Adjustment
Bunk Restraint Operation

Steering Wheel Air Bag
1. Starting at the foot of the bunk, pull the link end
Operation
of the belt up far enough to engage the buckle. NOTE: Only vehicles with the letters "SRS"
See Fig. 9.13. molded into the steering wheel center pad are
2. Fasten the belt by pushing the link end into the equipped with a steering wheel air bag.
buckle until it latches. Make sure that the belt is The air bag, when used with seat belts, provides ad-
not twisted. Check the engagement by trying to ditional protection to the driver in severe frontal colli-
pull the link out of the buckle. If they come apart, sions. Steering wheel air bags are designed to inflate
repeat this step. If the problem continues, re- only in severe frontal collisions. The driver and the
place the belt. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the passenger should always wear seat belts. The steer-
other two belts located in the middle and upper ing wheel air bag will activate during a collision even
portion of the bunk to lock the restraint in place. if the seat belts are not fastened, but the system is
3. To release the bunk restraint, push the release designed to provide protection to the occupant only
button on the buckle at the head of the bunk and when the seat belts are fastened.
pull the link from the buckle.
Repeat this step for the other two buckles to
WARNING
completely release the bunk restraint. Keep all heavy objects in the cab secured. Do not
place objects on the steering wheel or between
you and the steering wheel. Any such objects
may cause harm during an accident. Keep your
hands on the sides and lower portion of the
9.7
steering wheel. Failure to follow these instruc-

tions may result in death or personal injury.
RollTek Rollover Protection
For maximum protection in a collision, always be in a
System
normal seated position with your back against the Identification
seat back and your head upright. Fasten your seat
belt and ensure that it is properly positioned on your Only seats with the RollTek module under the seat
body as described under the "Seat Belt Operation" and the molded side-roll air bag cover on the upper
heading. Since the air bag inflates with considerable side of the seat back are equipped with the RollTek
speed and force, a proper seat position will help rollover protection system; see Fig. 9.14. RollTek
keep you a safe distance from the inflating air bag. may be installed in one of the following configura-
tions:
Inspection and Service • driver seat only or driver and passenger seats
• driver seat only, with an optional steering
WARNING wheel frontal air bag
Do not attempt to service or modify the air bag • driver and passenger seats, with an optional
system. Unintentional or improper air bag deploy- steering wheel frontal air bag
ment could cause severe bodily injury or death.
Contact an authorized Freightliner service facility Operation
for all service and maintenance.
The RollTek system, when used with seat belts, pro-
The air bag system contains components that vides additional protection to the driver and passen-
use combustible chemicals. Do not cut, drill, ger (if equipped with a passenger-side system) in
braze, solder, weld, strike, or probe the air bag rollover accidents. The RollTek system provides a
components. Keep all liquids and chemicals significant increase in seat stability during a rollover.
away from air bag components. Vehicles equipped with RollTek rollover protection
The surface of the deployed air bag may contain have a sensor mounted in the seat base that acti-
small amounts of sodium hydroxide (which is a vates the side-roll air bag and seat pull-down device
by-product of the gas generant combustion) and during a rollover.
metallic sodium. Sodium hydroxide may be irri- When the RollTek module senses a rollover, the
tating to the skin and eyes. Immediately wash module triggers gas cylinders mounted in the base of
your hands and exposed skin areas with a mild the seat. The gas cylinders activate the power
soap and water. Flush your eyes immediately if cinches that then tighten the lap and shoulder belts
exposed to sodium hydroxide. against the occupant of the seat and lower the seat
The operational readiness of the air bag system is suspension, moving the occupant down and away
indicated by the supplemental restraint system (SRS) from the steering wheel and ceiling. The side-roll air
indicator on the dash. The SRS indicator illuminates bag deploys from the outboard side of the seat as
for several seconds when the ignition is turned on, the seat is pulled down to its lowest position. See
and then it goes off. The indicator will remain on if Fig. 9.15.
there is a problem with the air bag system. The ve-
hicle should be serviced if the SRS indicator does WARNING
not illuminate when the ignition is turned on, or if the
SRS indicator remains on. Always use the seat belts when operating the ve-
hicle. Failure to do so can result in severe per-
The air bag module may contain perchlorate mate-
sonal injury or death. Do not place infants and
rial; for information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Special handling may children in seats equipped with the RollTek sys-
apply; follow appropriate rules and regulations when tem. The RollTek system is designed for adults
disposing of materials. only. Doing so could result in severe bodily in-
jury or death. Keep all heavy objects in the cab
For all service and maintenance, contact an autho- secured. Do not place objects on the seat back
rized Freightliner service facility. or block the side-roll air bag. Objects that block
the side-roll air bag may prevent proper inflation
and could result in serious injury or death.
9.8
07/03/2007 f910579
1 A. Side-roll air bag contained in seat.
10/15/2007 f910598
B. Side-roll air bag deployed.
1. RollTek Module
2. Side-Roll Air Bag Cover Fig. 9.15, Side-Roll Air Bag
Fig. 9.14, RollTek Protection System Components • Rollover Crash—occupant seat belt pretension-
The RollTek system will activate during a rollover ing, seat pretensioning, and side-roll air bag at
even if the seat belts are not fastened, but the the proper time
RollTek system is only designed to provide protection • Frontal Crash—steering wheel air bag, occu-
to the occupant when the seat belts are fastened. pant seat belt pretensioning, seat pretension-
For vehicles with the RollTek system(s) only, de- ing, and the side-roll air bag at the proper time
vice(s) deploy as follows:
Inspection and Service
• Rollover Crash—occupant seat belt pretension-
ing, seat pretensioning, and side-roll air bag at
the proper time WARNING
• Frontal Crash—no devices deployed Keep hands and tools away from the scissor
For vehicles with the RollTek system(s) and frontal points under the seats.
steering wheel air bag, device(s) deploy as follows: The RollTek system contains components that
use combustible chemicals. Do not cut, drill,
braze, solder, weld, strike, or probe any part of
9.9
the RollTek system. Keep all liquids and chemi-

cals away from the RollTek components.
Do not attempt to service or modify the RollTek
system. Unintentional or improper deployment of
the RollTek system could cause severe bodily
injury or death. Contact an authorized Freight-
liner service facility for all service and mainte-
nance.
IMPORTANT: The RollTek system must be re-
placed after being activated. Damaged seat
belts and tethers, or seat belts and tethers that
were worn in an accident, must be replaced,
and their anchoring points must be checked.
The operational readiness of the RollTek system is
indicated by the supplemental restraint system (SRS)
indicator on the dash. The SRS indicator illuminates
for several seconds when the ignition is turned on,
and then it goes off. The indicator will remain on if
there is a problem with the air bag or RollTek sys-
tem. The vehicle must be serviced if the SRS indica-
tor does not illuminate when the ignition is turned on,
or if the SRS indicator remains on.
The air bag module may contain perchlorate mate-
rial; for information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Special handling may
apply; follow appropriate rules and regulations when
disposing of materials.
For all service and maintenance, contact an autho-
rized Freightliner service facility.
9.10
10
Cab and Sleeper Features
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Sleeper Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Windows Mirrors
Power windows are standard on New Cascadia™ ve- The standard outside mirrors are mounted on the
hicles. The driver’s door has two switches mounted door frame. The power mirrors are controlled with a
in the top of the door, that control the driver and pas- left-hand or right-hand mirror selector switch, and a
senger windows separately. See Fig. 10.1. The pas- directional switch. Select the left (driver) mirror, or
senger door has a switch mounted in the top of the the right (passenger) mirror using the selector switch.
door that controls the passenger-side power window. The mirror can then be adjusted by pressing the di-
rectional switch arrow for the direction the mirror
should be adjusted.
The outside door mirrors can be heated to keep
1 them clear of fog, frost, and ice. To heat the mirrors,
press the outboard part of the mirror heat switch on
2 the door. See Fig. 10.1. When the mirror heat switch
is on, an amber indicator light illuminates inside the
switch. If the vehicle has Optimized Idle, mirror heat-
3 ing will not operate with the key in accessory mode,
or if the Optimized Idle feature turns mirror heating
off to reduce stress on the batteries. Refer to Chap-
ter 13 for more information.
4
Cab Amenities
5
New Cascadia vehicles are available with many op-
tional features. The following are some of those
6
options.
Cup Holders
Three cup holders and a map pocket are molded into
02/23/2016 f611331 the center dash. See Fig. 10.2. A removable ash cup
1. Mirror Selector Switch is located in one of the cup holders.
2. Mirror Directional Switch
3. Mirror Heat Switch Lighting
4. Passenger-Side Window Switch
5. Driver-Side Window Switch See Chapter 4 for detailed information regarding
6. Door Lock Switch lighting controls.
Fig. 10.1, Door Switches (driver-side shown)
Power Outlets
CAUTION Two power outlets that supply 12V power for acces-
sories are located on the dash switch panel. Option-
There is no anti-pinch protection when the win- ally, three power outlets, or two power outlets and a
dow is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects cigarette lighter, are offered.
from the window before closing.
Radio and CB
The window switches have three positions: lower
window, neutral, and raise window. Press forward on The radio is mounted in the center dash panel. The
the switch to lower the window. Hold the switch down CB is typically installed in the overhead console. An
in the forward position for approximately one second optional hot mount may be installed on top of the
to activate the express function; the window will con- dash for fleet CB radios.
tinue to roll down after the switch is released. Press
the switch in the rearward position (bump) to raise
the window.
10.1
5
11/29/2018 f611580
1. CB Tray 3. Power Outlets 5. Cup Holders
2. USB Outlets 4. Map Pocket 6. Storage Tray
Fig. 10.2, Dash Amenities
Storage Sleeper Bunks

Storage pockets are molded into the lower portion of NOTE: Make sure bunks are locked in place
the driver and passenger doors. A map pocket is lo- before sleeping or driving the vehicle.
cated on the passenger side of the center dash. See
Fig. 10.2. Sleeper cabs can come with a lower bunk, an upper
bunk, or both.
Storage compartments are located in the overhead
console, above the windshield and the cab doors. Lower bunk configurations include a bed with a stor-
See Fig. 10.3. For compartments with doors, open age compartment or, in 72 inch sleepers, a pull-down
the door by pulling outward on the latch. The doors bed with two foldable seats and a table.
are hinged at the top, and will swing upwards. The release lever to unlock the storage bed is cen-
tered under the bunk. Press the lever to the right and
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Outlets pull up on the bunk to access the storage compart-
ment. Pushing the bunk back into its original horizon-
Two USB outlets are located on the dash switch tal position will cause the bed latches to lock.
panel.
Setting up the pull-down bed (see Fig. 10.4) consists
of the following steps.
Sleeper Amenities
NOTE: To avoid damaging the upholstery, un-
Sleepers are available with a number of optional fea- latch and move the seatbelts to the side before
tures. The following are some of those options.
folding the chairs closed.
NOTE: See Chapter 8 for detailed information 1. Pull forward on the seat latch while lowering the
regarding sleeper climate controls. chair back toward the seat, and fold it down.
10.2
1
2
09/09/2016 f611449
1. Storage Compartment 2. CB Compartment
Fig. 10.3, Overhead Console
2. Pull the table t-pull handle forward, then push doesn’t happen, reach under the raised table and
down on the top of the table until it is at the push the t-pull handle in. Then gently push down
same level as the folded seats. to make sure the table is locked in the upright
position.
3. Pull out the bed release latch until you feel a re-
lease of tension. See item 2 in Fig. 10.4. 4. To unfold each chair, push down on the seat
latch while lifting the chair back.
4. Grasping the edge of the bed, pull it down until
the lower latch pins engage in the lower bunk Upper bunks fold up against and lock onto the cab
locks. back wall. To unlock and fold down an upper bunk,
grasp the bunk release handle (see Fig. 10.5) and
Setting up the lounge area consists of the following turn it to either the left or right and pull. To fold up
steps: and lock an upper bunk, turn the bunk release
1. Pull out the bed release latch until you feel a re- handle to the left or right and push up and back.
lease. See item 2 in Fig. 10.4.
2. Holding the front edge, push the bed up toward
Sleeper Curtain
the back wall until you hear or feel the upper Sleeper curtains are included with all sleepers and
latch pins lock into place. work to block out light and help regulate tempera-
3. Pull the t-handle and lift up on the table. As the tures in the sleeper compartment.
table nears the correct height, the t-pull handle
will be pulled back and lock into position. If this
10.3
7
6
6
5 5
4
4
3
1
2
10/31/2019 f602720
1. Table T-Pull Handle 4. Seatbelts 7. Upper Bunk Latch Pins Engaged
2. Pull-Down Bed Release Latch 5. Seat Latches in Upper Locks
3. Lower Bunk Locks 6. Lower Bunk Latch Pins
Fig. 10.4, Pull-Down Bed With Lounge
IMPORTANT: The baggage compartment doors

have two-stage latching. When closing the
doors, ensure that they are completely latched
to prevent wind noise and water intrusion.
Lighting
See Chapter 4 for detailed information regarding
lighting controls.
Lighting controls in the sleeper control panel will con-
trol lights in the bunk area.
10/30/2019 f602722 Power Outlets

Fig. 10.5, Upper Bunk Release Handle Power outlets are located underneath the lower bunk
and/or the sleeper control panel. See Fig. 10.6 for a
Baggage Compartment Doors typical sleeper panel with power outlets.
The baggage compartment doors are intended as a Sleeper Access Door

convenient means to stow or remove items under the
bunk. The baggage compartment doors can be The sleeper access door is not intended for entry or
opened from the inside by using the pull cable lo- exit. The door is intended only as a convenient
cated near the rear edge of the cab door opening. means to stow or remove personal belongings in the
Pull the cable handle labeled BAGGAGE forward to sleeper area. The sleeper access door can be
open the door. opened from inside the cab using two different meth-
ods. The primary method is the pull cable located
near the lower-rear edge of the cab door opening.
10.4
tabs toward the center of the glass and move the

sliding section to the desired height. Release the
tabs to lock the sliding section.
11/15/2019 f611450
1. Inverter/Charger 3. Power Outlet
Display Panel 4. Clock
2. Sleeper Climate
Control Panel
Fig. 10.6, Sleeper Control Panel
Pull the cable handle labeled ACCESS forward to

open the sleeper door. The secondary method is the
black knob located at the upper rear edge of the
sleeper door opening. Pull this knob down to open
the sleeper door.
IMPORTANT: The sleeper access doors have
two-stage latching. When closing the doors, en-
sure that they are completely latched to prevent
wind noise and water intrusion.
Sliding Side Window

The lower section of the sliding side window moves
vertically and may be locked in multiple positions to
suit. Two spring-loaded tabs are located at the top of
the sliding section. To adjust the window, pull both
10.5
11
Electrical System
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Vehicle Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Cab Load Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
Emergency Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
Powernet Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
Optional Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
Electrical System
System Overview
The New Cascadia has a multiplex electrical system.
By transmitting multiple electronic messages through
the same wire, a multiplex system reduces the num-
ber of interconnected wires, allows for more precise
control of the electrical system, and makes it easer
and quicker to diagnose electrical faults and add op-
tional equipment.
In addition, the wiring harnesses are developed for
the maximum number of options, meaning that space
for additional wires is available within the wiring har-
ness regardless of the number of optional features
on the vehicle. This design provides a cleaner main
harness and is meant to eliminate the need for wiring
overlays
Traditional power distribution devices are replaced
with electronic control modules (ECUs). These coor- 08/25/2016 f611438
dinate power to outputs such as lighting, displays,
gauges, and indicators and control power distribution Fig. 11.1, ICUC Active Faults Alert Screen
by monitoring inputs such as sensors and switches.
Power is supplied by the vehicle power distribution
module (VPDM).
The ECUs also continuously monitor the status of all
input devices and transmit messages over multiple
control area networks (CANs), reducing the number
of sensors required for operation.
The Instrumentation Control Unit

(ICU) and Fault Codes
NOTE: Some non-critical faults may be sup-
pressed and will not appear during an instru-
mentation control unit (ICU) self-check.
The majority of electrical and electronic issues on the
vehicle will have an associated fault code, which will
be displayed on the ICU.
If the ICU receives active fault codes during the ICU 08/25/2016 f611439
self-check, it displays them one after the other until
the parking brake is released or the ignition is turned Fig. 11.2, Electronic Control Unite (ECU) List in the
off. Once the parking brake is completely released, ICUC
the ICU displays alerts until acknowledged. See
Fig. 11.1. If there are no active faults, the ICU dis- 2. ECUs with active faults will have an exclamation
plays the home screen after the self-check com- point next to them. Use the down arrow to select
pletes. the affected ECU from the list, then press OK.
When there is an active vehicle fault code, a popup Refer to the ECU acronyms list for the full names
will appear on the ICU message screen. of acronyms on the ICU screen. See Table 11.1.
To access fault codes in the ICU: 3. Locate the code to troubleshoot from the list of
active fault codes, then press OK to access the
1. Use the buttons on the left-hand steering wheel information screen. See Fig. 11.3.
to navigate to the wrench icon and press OK.
11.1
Electrical System
08/26/2016 f611442a
08/26/2016 f611443
Fig. 11.3, Information Screen for an Active Fault Code
Fig. 11.4, Additional Information for the Fault
4. Press OK again to access additional information.
See Fig. 11.4.
ICU Electronic Control Unit Acronyms

ABS Antilock Brake System ICU Instrumentation Control Unit
ACM Aftertreatment Control Module MCM Motor Control Module
CGW Central Gateway RDF Radar Front End
CPC Common Powertrain Controller SAS Steering Angle Sensor
DCMD Door Control Module, Driver SSAM Single Signal Detect and Actuation Module
DCMP Door Control Module, Passenger TCM Transmission Control Module
HVCF Heating/Ventilation/AC Front (HVAC) TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring System
HVCP Heating/Ventilation/AC, Auxiliary (HVAC) VRDU Video Radar Decision Unit
Table 11.1, ICU Electronic Control Unit Acronyms
Vehicle Power Distribution to the inside. It is located on the passenger side of

the engine compartment front wall. See Fig. 11.5.
The vehicle power distribution system provides bat-
On vehicles equipped with an optional high current
tery power to the electrical and electronic systems.
receptacle and/or optional inverter, the BCA will have
The following components make up the vehicle circuit protection and power cables supplying those
power distribution system: devices. Fuse locations will depend on the vehicle
and will be outlined on a label on the BCA cover. For
• Battery Cable Access (BCA) an example see Fig. 11.6.
• Vehicle Power Distribution Module (VPDM) The power supplied by the batteries goes to the ve-
• Optional Cab Load Disconnect Switch (CLDS) hicle power distribution module (VPDM) and the
single signal detect and actuation (sSAM) module.
Vehicle power is supplied by the batteries to the bat-
tery cable access (BCA) box. The BCA front wall The VPDM is a fuse and relay power distribution
pass-through is the primary interface through which box. It provides power and circuit protection for pow-
battery power gets transferred from outside the cab ertrain needs, cab functions, and various stand alone
modules. It also supplies power to the emergency
11.2
Electrical System
3
7 6 5
9 4
11 10
08/12/2020 f547299a
1. Vehicle Power Distribution Module (VPDM) 7. sSAM Power
2. Electronics Bay 8. Single Signal Detect and Actuation Module (sSAM)
3. VPDM Ground 9. Front Wall Cab Ground Pass-Through Stud
4. Battery Cable Access (BCA) Front Wall Pass-Through 10. Front Wall Interior Ground Stud
5. VPDM Power 11. Pass-Through Bulkhead Connector
6. sSAM Ground
Fig. 11.5, Cab Power Distribution and Component Location Overview
11.3
Electrical System
08/14/2020 f547312
08/14/2020 f547313 Fig. 11.7, VPDM Inside Cover Map of Fuses and Relays
Fig. 11.6, Example Fuse Labeling on BCA Cover harness. This provides a disconnect point for har-
ness service, testing, and replacement. It is located
power supply circuits in the event of a module failure. on the driver-side front wall of the truck. See
The VPDM is located in the vehicle electronics bay, Fig. 11.5.
behind the passenger-side dash panel. See
Fig. 11.5. Single Signal Detect and Actuation
Depending on a vehicle’s specifications, the fuses Module (sSAM)
and relays installed and their locations can vary. The single signal detect and actuation module
Each VPDM cover is illustrated with an image of the (sSAM) is the primary module in the electrical sys-
fuse and relay layout for that vehicle. See Fig. 11.7 tem, combining chassis power distribution, cab power
for an example of VPDM cover map of fuses and distribution, and modular switch functions into a
relays. single ECU. The sSAM does not contain fuses or
Both the VPDM and the sSAM are grounded at the relays.
cab-side front wall. See Fig. 11.5. The sSAM reads input information from sensors,
On vehicles equipped with a cab load disconnect switches, and databus messages, and drives output
switch (CLDS), the BCA houses a contacting device and controller area network (CAN) messages. The
that can open to shut off power to high current loads. sSAM is located near the center of the cab behind
the lower dash panel. See Fig. 11.5
The cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) is an op-
tional switch that can be used to open (turn OFF) or Electronics Bay
close (turn ON) circuits between the battery and the
battery cable access box (BCA). It is described more The electronics bay contains the electronic control
fully later in this chapter. units that control different vehicle features. It is lo-
cated on the passenger-side of the cab behind the
Cab Electrical and Electronic dash panel. See Fig. 11.5 for its location in the cab
and Fig. 11.8 for the location of ECUs in the bay.
Components
Pass-Through Bulkhead Connector
The pass-through bulkhead connector is where the
interior dash harness connects to the exterior chassis
11.4
Electrical System
IMPORTANT: The ignition should be turned off

before turning the cab load disconnect switch on
2 or off.
1 NOTE: If parking the vehicle for more than two
3 days, turn the cab load disconnect switch
(CLDS) to the OFF position.
4
If parking the vehicle for more than two days
and the vehicle is not equipped with a CLDS, or
5
if parking the vehicle for more than five days,
disconnect the batteries.
6
Even with the CLDS off, the vehicle draws a
7 small amount of battery power.
14
Disconnecting the batteries when parking the
8
vehicle for extended periods prevents battery
9 discharge and helps prolong battery life.
13 10 The cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) is an op-
12
tional switch that can be used to open (turn OFF) or
close (turn ON) circuits between the battery and the
11 battery cable access box (BCA).
A vehicle in daily use would have the CLDS turned
07/25/2016 f546313 ON. When the CLDS is set to ON, a red LED indica-
NOTE: This figure shows almost all slots filled. In a typi- tor at the base of the switch selector illuminates. See
cal vehicle, more electronics bay slots would be free. Fig. 11.9.
1. Truck Data Connect Antenna
2. Chassis CAN Starpoint Connector
3. Common Telematics Platform
4. Expansion Module
5. Expansion Module 1
6. Electronically Controlled Air Suspension (ECAS)
ECU
7. Integrative Predicative Powertrain Control (IPPC)
Module
8. Common Powertrain Controller ECU
9. Antilock Braking System (ABS) ECU
10. Cabin CAN Starpoint Connector
11. Central Gateway
12. Video Radar Decision Unit (VRDU) ECU
13. Expansion Module
08/14/2020 f545527a
14. Powertrain CAN Starpoint Connector
1. LED Indicator Light
Fig. 11.8, Electronics Bay
Fig. 11.9, Cab Load Disconnect Switch
Cab Load Disconnect Switch The CLDS should be set to OFF if the vehicle is
going to be parked for more than two days. Turning
WARNING the CLDS to OFF minimizes the power draw on the
battery, preserving battery life and the ability of the
Turning the cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) to vehicle to start after being parked for an extended
the off position does not disconnect power to all period of time.
electrical components (e.g. the starter and
sSAM). To work on the vehicle safely, the nega- The CLDS may be mounted in a variety of location,
tive leads must be disconnected from the battery. including:
11.5
Electrical System
battery cable access box (see Fig. 11.6.)

• inside the cab on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat;
• behind the cab on the driver’s side; 1
• at the battery box;
• outside of the cab.
If the CLDS is turned to the off position while the ve-
hicle is running, the emergency power system will
activate. The powertrain power distribution module
will receive power from the emergency power feed,
but the batteries will not be charging. See the Emer-
gency Power for details about vehicle behavior
under these conditions.
Battery Contactor Control Board

The optional battery contactor control board (CCB) is
designed to cut power to high-current components
08/19/2016 f546354
when the cab load disconnect switch is in the OFF
position. The battery contactor control board has an 1. Cab Load Disconnect Switch Status LED
LED that reports the status of the cab load discon- Fig. 11.10, Battery Cable Access Box (engine side)
nect switch. See Fig. 11.10. Refer to Table 11.2 for
LED status message explanations; this information
will also posted on a label inside the cover of the
CLDS LED Status Messages

Description LED Status Message
Solid red ON CLDS ON (normal operation)
Slow flashing red ON CLDS disconnected (error)
Flashing red ON CLDS ON/circuits OFF (error)
Fast flashing red ON CLDS OFF/circuits ON (error)
OFF OFF Power OFF
Table 11.2, CLDS LED Status Messages
Emergency Power When the emergency power circuit is active, the ve-
hicle will display varying behaviors depending on the
cause of the loss of power:
WARNING • Windshield wipers may activate in vehicles
If emergency power is activated, do not shut built in or after 2018.
down the engine until the vehicle is out of traffic • Windshield wipers may activate in vehicles
and in a safe place. The engine will not be able to built before 2018 if the sSAM module and/or
be restarted until the cause of the loss of power software has been upgraded.
is corrected.
• Gauges may become unresponsive or freeze.
The emergency power circuit, formerly called ’Limp
Home Mode,’ allows a vehicle to be moved out of • Switches may become inoperative.
traffic and off the road in the event of a loss of • Warning lamps may display indicating low volt-
power. age and/or ECU faults.
The emergency power circuit is live even when the • Different lamps on both or one side of the ve-
cab load disconnect switch (CLDS) is turned off. hicle will come on and stay on.
11.6
Electrical System
• Different lamps on both or one side of the ve- No alarm sounds before basic loads are turned off.
hicle will start flashing.
A time delay is implemented for the shutdown and
Causes and their specific symptoms are detailed in reactivation of loads to avoid unnecessary cycling
the New Cascadia Electrical Systems and when battery voltage is close to shutdown thresh-
Troubleshooting Manual. olds.
No matter the cause, the following lamps will remain Loads disconnected by the PLVD will reconnect
constantly on: when all of the following conditions are met:
• headlamps, low beams (either the left, right, or • ignition ON;
both)
• engine at 450 rpm or above;
No matter the cause, the following lamps will flash:
• batteries reach and maintain 12.7 volts for one
• front turn signals, left and right minute.
Turning the ignition switch to OFF when in emer-
gency power mode shuts down the exterior lighting, Optional Power Systems
windshield wipers, and the engine. The engine will
A 48" sleeper may be equipped with shore power; a
not start if the ignition switch is turned back to the
60" and 72" sleeper may be equipped with shore
ON position.
power and/or an optional inverter/charger.
Powernet Management Shore Power
The powernet management feature protects the bat- Shore power provides the ability to connect to an
teries from excessive discharge by disconnecting external power source when parked by providing ex-
certain loads—features that draw power—from the terior power inlets. The 120 volts of alternating cur-
battery power supply. This allows the batteries to rent provided can be used to power small appliances
maintain enough of a charge to restart the vehicle. and electrical equipment without idling the engine.
Features that draw power are prioritized into different A shore power system consists of one or two 120
categories: volt power inlets on the exterior of the cab and, de-
1. House loads: this includes the majority of dash pending on the cab height, one to two power recep-
and sleeper power outlets, sleeper reading and tacles inside the cab. Sixty-inch and seventy-two inch
spot lamps, and sleeper auxiliary fans. raised roof sleeper cabs have two power receptacles;
the forty-eight raised roof sleeper cab has one power
2. Basic loads: this includes power for fleet man- receptacle.
agement systems and third party telematics as
An optional 120 volt indicator illuminates on the ICU
well as critical dash and sleeper power outlets.
when the shore power system is in use.
By making noncritical features that draw power tem-
porarily unavailable, powernet management allows Inverter/Charger
the driver to continue using critical features.
An optional 1500- or 1800-watt inverter/charger is
Progressive low voltage disconnect (PLVD) is used available on 60" and 72" sleepers. An inverter co-
to implement the powernet management feature. verts the vehicle’s battery power to 120 volts to pro-
vide electricity for small appliances and electrical
PLVD calculates disconnecting loads based on bat-
equipment. It is located in the driver-side luggage
tery voltage, ignition switch status, and engine rpm.
compartment. See Fig. 11.11. The unit has one
When battery voltage drops below a predetermined
three-pin GFIC OUT connector, one three-pin GFIC
value, house loads are turned off. One minute before
IN connector, and two AC power outlets.
house loads are turned off, a pop-up message will
display in the ICU and an audible alarm will sound.
The front reading lamp, spot lamp, and sleeper
DANGER
lamps—designated as house loads—can be turned Do not store gasoline, flammable material, or any
back on after being shutdown by PLVD by pressing component with a connection to the fuel system
on the light or light switch. in the storage compartment with the inverter/
11.7
Electrical System
1 2
FREEDOM HF
STATUS
7
Utility Input Voltage (V)
Battery Select Input Current (A)
Fault Output Power (kW)
3 4 5 6
09/09/2016 f546067a
1. Power Button 4. Input Voltage LED
2. LED Display 5. Input Current LED
3. Select Status Display 6. Output Power LED
Button 7. Status LED
Fig. 11.12, Inverter/Charger Display Panel (Xantrex
Freedom)
1 2 3
True Sine Wave

Inverter
SELECT
Status
02/17/2017 f546066 Utility Input Voltage (V)
7 Battery
Input Current (A)
Fig. 11.11, Inverter/Charger Fault

Output power (KW)
charger. The unit contains equipment that may

produce sparks. Storing flammable or electrical
equipment in proximity to the unit could result in
fire or explosion hazards, which could result in 6 5 4
08/12/2020 f546642
serious injury or death.
1. Power Button 4. Input Voltage LED
The display on the sleeper control panel provides 2. LED Display 5. Input Current LED
information about the operation of the unit. See 3. Select Status Display 6. Output Power LED
Fig. 11.12 (Xantrex Freedom) or Fig. 11.13 (Eaton). Button 7. Status LED
Refer to Table 11.3 for general control panel details.
Fig. 11.13, Inverter/Charger Display Panel (Eaton)
Display Panel Functions

Number Name Function
Press the power button for one second to turn the unit ON or OFF (when AC shore
power is not present).
1 Power Button
Press and hold the button for five seconds to enter the Settings mode.
Refer to the owner’s manual for more information.
2 LED Display The three digit LED display screen shows status information and fault codes.
11.8
Electrical System
Display Panel Functions

Number Name Function
The Select status display button changes the display or settings.
Press the Select button to cycle through the setting options. Refer to the owner’s
manual for more information.
• With the inverter mode ON, press the button to choose what appears on the
Select Status Display LED display screen: Input Voltage, Input Current, or Output Power. An LED will
3
Button illuminate next to the chosen mode. Details are provided below.
NOTE: The unit is in "Inverter Mode" when shore power is not present and the
unit is using the battery to power the appliances connected to it.
• In an alarm condition, press and hold the button for two seconds to disable or
enable the audible alarm.
In inverter mode, when Input Voltage is selected, the corresponding LED will light up
4 Input Voltage LED
and the display will show the input voltage.
In inverter mode, when Input Current is selected, the corresponding LED will light up
5 Input Current LED
and the display will show the input current.
In inverter mode, when Output Power is selected, the corresponding LED will light up
6 Output Power LED
and the display will show the output power.
The Status LED indicates the unit’s mode of operation through the display of one of
three colored lights that
• Green: Utility (Shore Power Mode)
A solid green light indicates that the battery is fully charged.
A flashing green light indicates that the unit is charging the battery.
• Yellow: Battery (Inverter Mode)
7 Status LED A solid yellow light indicates that the unit is using the battery to supply AC
power.
A flashing yellow light indicates that the unit is in inverter mode, but AC shore
power is detected and the unit is transferring to shore power mode within 20
seconds.
• Red: Fault Condition.
Refer to the owner’s manual for fault code information and troubleshooting
procedures.
Table 11.3, Display Panel Functions
For more information about troubleshooting, settings,

and other features, refer to the owners manual in-
cluded with the inverter/charger.
11.9
12
Engine Starting, Operation,
and Shutdown
Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
Engine Protection—Warning and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
Engine Starting, Operation, and Shutdown
Engine Starting may not be equipped with the STARTER

BLOCKED function.
This engine chapter is to serve as a guide for best
practices only. Each engine model may have operat- 4. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and
ing characteristics that are unique to that particular allow the self-check to complete. See Fig. 12.1.
engine, and will be documented in the engine manu-
facturer’s literature. Always refer to specific instruc-
tions and recommendations from the engine manu-
facturer.
NOTE: Before starting the engine, read Chap-
ter 3, Instruments, and Chapter 4, Driver
Controls. Read the engine manufacturer’s oper-
ating instructions before starting the engine.
WARNING
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
air inlet opening in the air intake in an attempt to 02/03/2017 f610805
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury or property Fig. 12.1, Ignition Switch
damage.
NOTE: The driver display screen may present a
IMPORTANT: The New Cascadia vehicle is STARTER BLOCKED message if the gauge
equipped with starter interlocks to enhance reli- sweep is not completed, the transmission is in
ability and safety. Anti-grinding, starter pinion, gear, or the starter has overheated.
and thermal protection logic limit the amount of
time and conditions for starter engagement. 5. Once the gauge sweep has completed, turn the
Cranking may be limited from 5 to 15 seconds, ignition key to the START position. Release the
key the moment the engine starts.
with a 30-second cool-down period, as deter-
mined by the protection logic. If the engine is If the vehicle is equipped with an engine start
turning, the starter will not engage. Depending switch (see Fig. 12.2), hold the switch down
on the transmission option, the starter will not while turning the ignition key to the START posi-
engage if the clutch is not fully depressed, or if tion. Release the switch and the key the moment
the engine starts.
the transmission is not in neutral.
IMPORTANT: The starter can not be used for
priming the fuel system. If the fuel/water separa-
tor filter is replaced, and the fuel system needs
to be primed, see the engine manufacturer’s
operating instructions.
1. Before engine start-up, complete the pre- and ENGINE
post-trip inspections and maintenance proce- START
dures in Chapter 25.
2. Set the parking brake. 09/15/2016 f611456
3. Place the transmission in neutral. On vehicles Fig. 12.2, Engine Start Switch
with manual transmissions, fully depress the
clutch pedal.
NOTICE
NOTE: Depending on local jurisdictional emis-
sions regulations, vehicles and/or engines that Do not rev the engine if the oil pressure gauge
are domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada indicates no oil pressure. Shut down the engine
12.1
if oil pressure does not build within approxi- are present. Shut off the engine when in an area
mately ten seconds. Check to determine the where flammable liquids or gases are being
cause of the problem. Operating the engine with handled. Failure to observe these precautions
no oil pressure will damage the engine. could result in serious injury or death.
6. It is not necessary to idle the engine before en- All engines on Freightliner vehicles comply with the
gaging or starting the operation, but load should requirements of the Federal (U.S.) Clean Air Act.
be applied gradually during the warm-up period Once an engine is placed in service, the responsibil-
until the oil temperature reaches 140°F (60°C). ity for meeting both state and local regulations is with
the owner/operator.
7. Apply load gradually during the warm-up period.
IMPORTANT: Depending upon local jurisdic-
NOTICE tional emissions guidelines, vehicles that are
domiciled outside of the U.S. and Canada may
If the oil pressure gauge indicates no oil pres- not have engines and/or emissions aftertreat-
sure, shut down the engine within approximately ment systems that are compliant with EPA10 or
ten seconds to avoid engine damage. GHG21 regulations.
8. Check the oil pressure gauge for any drop in lu-
bricating oil pressure or mechanical malfunction NOTICE
in the lubricating oil system. Minimum oil pres-
sure at idle is 7 psi (50 kPa). It is extremely important that the following guide-
lines be followed for engines that comply with
Cold-Weather Starting EPA07 or newer regulations, or damage may
occur to the aftertreatment device, and the war-
See the engine manufacturer’s operation manual for ranty may be compromised.
starting aids that are approved for specific engines.
• Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul-
Starting After Extended Shutdown fur content or less.
• Do not use fuel blended with used engine
Before engine start-up, complete the engine pretrip
inspections in Chapter 25. lube oil or kerosene.
• Use only engine lube oil with a sulfated ash
NOTICE level less than 1.0 wt%; API CJ-4, CK-4, and
FA-4 oils meet this requirement.
Failure to eliminate water-diluted lubricating oil A Top Tier™ compliant fuel is recommended. Look for
may lead to serious engine damage at startup. the symbol that denotes a Top Tier compliant fuel;
An engine in storage for an extended period of time see Fig. 12.3.
(over winter, for example) may accumulate water in
the oil pan through normal condensation of moisture
on the internal surfaces of the engine. Oil diluted by
water cannot provide adequate bearing protection at
start-up. For this reason, change the engine oil and
filters after extended storage.
04/27/2017 f470698
Engine Operation Fig. 12.3, Top Tier Fuel Symbol
Safety and Environmental Adequate maintenance of the engine and the diesel
Considerations particulate filter (DPF) are the responsibility of the
owner/operator, and are essential to keep the emis-
sion levels low. Good operating practices, regular
WARNING maintenance, and correct adjustments are factors
that will help keep emissions within the regulations.
Do not operate the engine in an area where flam-
mable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning
system in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if
12.2
the engine malfunctions. If the driver doesn’t under- the engine, surrounding equipment, operating prac-
stand how the warning system works, an engine tices, and maintenance procedures. The lower the
shutdown could occur, causing a safety hazard. See temperature, the greater the amount of modification
Chapter 13 for more information. required. For service products approved for use in
cold weather for your engine, see the engine manu-
Engine Break-In facturer’s engine operation manual.
Each engine must pass a full-load operating test on If satisfactory engine temperature is not maintained,
a dynamometer before shipment, thereby eliminating maintenance costs will increase due to greater en-
the need for a break-in. Before running the engine gine wear. If the engine coolant gets too cold, raw
for the first time, follow the instructions in the manu- fuel will wash the lubricating oil off the cylinder walls
facturer’s engine operation manual. and dilute the crankcase oil, causing all moving parts
of the engine to suffer from poor lubrication.
Normal Operation If the engine is in good mechanical condition and the
precautions necessary for cold-weather operation are
WARNING taken, ordinary cold weather will not cause difficulty
in starting or loss of efficiency.
Do not operate the engine in an area where flam- The following points are important to observe when
mable vapors such as gasoline or diesel fumes operating in cold weather.
are present. Shut off the engine when in an area
where flammable liquids or gases are being • Check for cracks in the battery cases, for cor-
handled. Failure to observe these precautions rosion of the terminals, and for tightness of the
could result in serious injury or death. cable clamps at the terminals.
Every engine has an operating range in which it per- • Charge the batteries to full capacity. Replace
forms most efficiently. The operating range extends damaged batteries.
from maximum torque rpm at the low end, to engine • If equipped, turn off the load disconnect switch
rated speed at the high end. Most engines deliver after the engine is shut down to prevent battery
best fuel economy when operated in the low- and discharge.
mid-speed segments of the efficiency range and pro-
duce maximum horsepower at rated speed, which is • Have the alternator output checked at an au-
also the recommended maximum speed of the en- thorized Freightliner service provider.
gine. For further engine-specific information, refer to • Check the condition and tension of the drive
the engine manufacturer’s operation manual. belts.
Prolonged idling of engines is not recommended, and
• Refer to the engine manufacturer’s operation
is illegal in some states. Idling produces sulfuric acid
manual for recommended heaters, low-
that is absorbed by the lubricating oil, and eats into
viscosity lubricating oils, winter-grade fuels,
bearings, rings, valve stems, and engine surfaces. If
and approved coolants.
you must idle the engine for cab heating or cooling,
use the high idle function of the cruise control • Periodically check the coolant mixing ratio
switches. An idle speed of 900 rpm should be (concentration of antifreeze in the coolant). Add
enough to provide cab heat in ambient temperatures more if necessary.
that are above freezing.
• At outside temperatures below -4°F (-20°C), a
If the engine is programmed with an idle shutdown coolant preheater is recommended.
timer, 90 seconds before the preset shutdown time,
the CHECK engine light will begin to flash at a rapid
rate. If the position of the clutch pedal or service
NOTICE
brake changes during this final 90 seconds the idle For Detroit engines (EPA07 and newer), use of a
shutdown timer will be disabled until reset. winterfront is not recommended, as it can cause
false fault codes with the engine and aftertreat-
Cold-Weather Operation ment system, and possible emission component
Satisfactory performance of a diesel engine operating failures.
in low ambient temperatures requires modification of
12.3
If using a winterfront, leave at least 25% of the grille Disconnecting the batteries when parking the
opening exposed in sectioned stripes that run per- vehicle for extended periods prevents battery
pendicular to the charge-air-cooler tube-flow direc- discharge and helps prolong battery life.
tion. This assures even cooling across each tube,
and reduces header-to-tube stress, and possible 1. With the vehicle stopped, set the parking brake
chance of component failure. For engine-specific and place the transmission in neutral.
guidelines, see below:
Cummins engines: A winterfront may be used to im- NOTICE
prove cab heating while idling, and only when the
ambient temperature remains below 10°F (-12°C). Idle the engine one to two minutes before shut-
ting it down. After hard operation, shutting down
Detroit engines: Use of a winterfront is not recom- the engine without idling may cause damage to
mended. Using a winterfront can cause excessive the turbocharger.
fan run time, increased fuel consumption, and failure
of the DEF system heaters to operate correctly, re- 2. Allow the engine to idle one to two minutes be-
sulting in fault codes, poor performance, and power fore shutting it down. This allows the lubricating
reduction. A winterfront should only be used tempo- oil and the coolant to carry heat away from the
rarily in the following situations: combustion chambers, bearings, shafts, and
seals.
• To improve cab heating while idling in an ex-
tremely cold ambient temperature; 3. Turn off the ignition switch and shut down the
engine.
• When the ambient temperature remains below
-22°F (-30°C) and the engine is unable to
maintain a running coolant temperature of Engine Protection—Warning
175°F (80°C) during normal over-the-road and Shutdown
operation.
The driver should be familiar with the vehicle warning
High-Altitude Operation system in order to bring the vehicle to a safe stop if
necessary. If the driver doesn’t understand how the
Engines lose horsepower when operated at high alti- warning system works, the driver may not be able to
tude because the air is too thin to burn as much fuel utilize the advantage of the advance warning system
as at sea level. This loss equals about three percent to pull over appropriately.
for each 1000 ft (300 m) altitude above sea level for
a naturally aspirated engine. The engine will begin a warning and derate and/or
shutdown process if the engine coolant temperature,
All engines used on Freightliner vehicles are altitude- coolant level, engine oil pressure, or exhaust after-
compensated by the use of a turbocharger. This re- treatment system (ATS) reach preset levels. On
duces smoky exhaust at high altitudes, requires less some engines, the warning process will begin when
downshifting, and allows the engine to make better the engine oil temperature, engine coolant tempera-
use of its fuel. Nevertheless, shift gears as needed to ture, or the intake air temperature reach preset lev-
avoid excessive exhaust smoke. els. Detroit™ engines may also begin the warning
and shutdown process if water is detected in the fuel.
Engine Shutdown See the engine manufacturer’s operation manual for
NOTE: If parking the vehicle for more than two specific details for your vehicle. See Chapter 14 for
days, turn the cab load disconnect switch the warning and shutdown modes associated with
(CLDS) to the OFF position. the ATS.
Electronic engine protection can be specified as ei-
If parking the vehicle for more than two days
ther SHUTDOWN or WARNING and DERATE.
and the vehicle is not equipped with a CLDS, or
if parking the vehicle for more than five days,
disconnect the batteries. WARNING
Even with the CLDS off, the vehicle draws a When the STOP engine or CHECK engine lamp
small amount of battery power. illuminates, most engines are programmed to
shut down automatically within 30 seconds. The
12.4
driver must immediately move the vehicle to a

safe location at the side of the road to prevent
causing a hazardous situation that could cause
bodily injury, property damage, or severe damage
to the engine.
In SHUTDOWN mode, the red STOP engine lamp
will illuminate when the problem is serious enough to
reduce power or speed. See Fig. 12.4. Engine power
will ramp down, then the engine will shut down if the
problem continues while in derate mode. The driver
has 30 or 60 seconds (depending on the critical fault
type) after the STOP engine lamp illuminates to
move the vehicle safely off the road. If the vehicle
cannot be moved to a safe location within that time, 09/9/2016 f611451
turn the ignition switch to OFF for at least five sec- NOTE: On vehicles with Detroit engines only, the time
onds, then restart the engine. Repeat this action until remaining before shutdown is displayed.
the vehicle is safely off the road.
Fig. 12.5, Shutdown Alert
NOTE: In addition to the warning lamp, the
driver display screen will present a warning
message when the engine is in SHUTDOWN OVER
mode. See Fig. 12.5. For vehicles with Detroit RIDE
engines only, the time remaining before shut-
down is displayed.
ENG
SHDN
CHECK STOP
03/29/2016 f611345
Fig. 12.6, Shutdown Override Switch
07/09/2009
1 2 3 f611036 Detroit engines may begin a warning and derate pro-
1. Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
cess if water is detected in the fuel, or for high en-
2. CHECK Engine Lamp gine coolant temperature. In WARNING and DER-
3. STOP Engine Lamp ATE mode, the CHECK engine, STOP engine, or MIL
lamp will illuminate to indicate an engine problem
Fig. 12.4, Engine Warning Lamps that requires service and the engine controls will
begin a derate of engine output. Continuing to run
Do not operate the vehicle further until the problem the engine while it is in derate mode could cause
causing the shutdown has been corrected. severe damage to the engine.
Some vehicles may have a shutdown override
switch, which can be used to momentarily override
the shutdown sequence. This switch resets the shut-
down timer, restoring power to the level before the
derate. The switch must be pressed again after five
seconds to obtain a subsequent override. See
Fig. 12.6.
NOTICE
When the derate process begins, immediately get
the vehicle serviced in order to prevent severe
damage to the engine.
12.5
13
Optional Engine Systems
Engine Idle Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Optimized Idle® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3
Engine Idle Limiting grammable preset lower limit. The engine is shut
down when engine oil temperature reaches a pro-
Idle Shutdown Timer grammable upper limit, unless the requirements of
other active modes require the engine to keep run-
This feature is an optional 1- to 100-minute idle shut- ning.
down system with a timer on the driver display
screen. Its purpose is to conserve fuel by eliminating In battery mode, the engine runs for 2 hours before
excessive idling. Idle shutdown timing and param- shutting down. On vehicles without a Dual HVAC
eters are programmable. See the engine manufactur- system, the engine will run an additional 2 hours in
er’s operation manual for specific details for your ve- extended mode if necessary, and continuously in
hicle. continuous mode. When in continuous mode, the
driver display will indicate Optimized Idle status as
"continuous battery mode." Continuous mode may
Optimized Idle® indicate a problem, such as a bad battery.
Optimized Idle is an optional feature on vehicles Interior comfort mode controls the temperature set
equipped with Detroit engines. Optimized Idle re- point, which is the desired temperature of the cab
duces engine idle time by running the engine only as and sleeper, and the comfort zone, which is the al-
required when the vehicle is parked. lowed temperature deviation from the set point be-
Optimized Idle automatically shuts down and restarts fore the engine starts.
the engine as needed to: Interior comfort mode with a Dual HVAC system op-
• keep the engine oil temperature between pro- erates with the following parameters regarding the
grammed limits; set point and comfort zone:
• maintain battery voltage; • If the bunk area temperature reaches more

than 10°F (5.5 °C) above the set point the
• keep the cab and sleeper areas at the thermo- comfort zone is exceeded and the Dual HVAC
stat setting; and system immediately requests the engine to
• in coordination with the Dual HVAC system (if start for comfort support cooling.
equipped), maintain the battery and assist in • Bunk area temperatures 5 to 10°F (2.8 to
HVAC. 5.5°C) above the set point for over twenty min-
utes will cause the Dual HVAC system to re-
The benefits of the system include reduced engine
quest the engine to start for comfort support
idle time, fuel savings, reduction of exhaust emis-
cooling.
sions and noise, increased starter and engine life,
and a reduced chance of dead batteries. • If the bunk area temperature drops to more
than 10°F (5.5 °C) below the set point, the
Optimized Idle operates in the following modes:
comfort zone is exceeded and the Dual HVAC
• Cold startability mode and battery mode: both system immediately requests the engine to
modes keep the battery charged and engine oil start for comfort support heating.
temperature between programmed limits.
• Temperatures 5 to 10°F (2.8 to 5.5 °C) below
• Interior comfort mode (for sleeper cabs without the set point for over twenty minutes will cause
a Dual HVAC system): keeps the cab and the Dual HVAC system to request the engine
sleeper at a constant preset temperature, in to start for comfort support for heating.
addition to all functions available in cold start-
ability and battery modes. Extended and con- In extreme ambient conditions, comfort mode may
tinuous run modes allow the engine to keep stay on continuously.
running longer if necessary. NOTE: If the mode settings are changed while
• Interior comfort mode with a Dual HVAC sys- in one mode, the system may continue running
tem: keeps the cab and sleeper at a constant in another mode.
preset temperature, in addition to all functions When Optimized Idle is on, it may turn off these
available in cold startability and battery modes. functions to reduce stress on the batteries:
In cold startability mode, Optimized Idle starts the • Cab climate control fan
engine when engine oil temperature drops to a pro-
13.1
• Sleeper climate control fan

• Mirror heat
• Fuel/water separator heat
• Seat heat
• Advertising light
• Auxiliary circulation fan (windshield)
• Air dryer
Activating Optimized Idle

The vehicle must be in neutral gear, the hood
05/20/2016 f611420
latched, and the park brake set for Optimized Idle to
work. Failure to meet these conditions will result in a Fig. 13.2, Optimized Idle Start Screen
checklist pop-up screen showing both the met and
unmet conditions. See Fig 13.1. 7. Select OK to enable Optimized Idle, and, if de-
sired, turn on the interior comfort mode (sleeper
cabs only). The current Optimized Idle state is
displayed. See Fig. 13.4.
When Optimized Idle is active, the Optimized Idle
telltale illuminates at the bottom of the driver dis-
play. See Fig. 13.5.
If Optimized Idle fails to start, see the driver dis-
play for information.
05/06/2020 f611816
Fig. 13.1, Optimized Idle Activation Conditions Pop-Up
Dismiss the pop-up screen, fix the issue(s), and re-

start Optimized Idle.
NOTE: Turning the sleeper HVAC fan off will
turn off the interior comfort mode until the fan is
turned back on.
09/09/2016 f611421
1. Set the parking brake.
Fig. 13.3, Optimized Idle Mode Selection Screen
2. If open, close and secure the hood.
8. If the interior comfort mode is activated (sleeper
3. Allow the engine to idle if it is running. If the en-
cabs only), set the desired temperature and fan
gine is not running, turn the key to the ON posi-
speed on the sleeper HVAC controls.
tion.
The allowable temperature range for Optimized
4. Put the transmission in neutral.
Idle operation is 65 to 80°F (18 to 27°C).
5. Navigate to the Optimized Idle screen on the Optimized Idle will operate the engine, starting
driver display. See Fig. 13.2. and turning it off as needed to maintain battery
6. Press OK on the steering wheel switch pod to charge, engine oil temperature, and cab/sleeper
view the mode option screen. See Fig. 13.3. temperature.
13.2
09/9/2016 f611422 05/06/2020 f611815
Fig. 13.4, Optimized Idle State Screen Fig. 13.6, Safety Loop Pop-Up
gear (automated/automatic transmissions), or

depress the clutch (manual transmissions).
2. Let the engine return to base idle. The telltale will
turn off. Optimized Idle is now disabled.
Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor
09/09/2016 f611428a
WARNING
Fig. 13.5, Optimized Idle Telltale To avoid injury, do not install a PTO that is not
Detroit Diesel approved onto a Detroit™ Trans-
Reactivating Optimized Idle mission. Use of a non-Detroit Diesel approved
PTO with a Detroit Transmission could result in
If the hood is opened or the vehicle is put into gear unintended operation which could lead to severe
while Optimized Idle is running, the system will enter personal injury.
a safety loop and a pop-up will appear. See
Engine power takeoffs (PTO) tap into engine power
Fig. 13.6. Restoring operating conditions (e.g. clos-
to run auxiliary devices, such as hydraulic pumps
ing the hood or setting the transmission in neutral)
that power additional equipment. The following are
and performing a key cycle will allow you to reacti-
general guidelines for operating a PTO.
vate Optimized Idle.
1. Set the parking brake and put the transmission in
Deactivating Optimized Idle neutral.
Optimized Idle can be shut down by: 2. Press the dash PTO switch. Release the switch
when the light begins to blink.
• using the Optimized Idle menu screens on the
driver display; When the light illuminates steadily, the PTO is
engaged and ready to operate. In stationary
• turning off the ignition; mode, the vehicle must remain in neutral with the
• using the drive-away feature, as follows. parking brake set.
1. If the engine is running: Release the parking 3. To activate mobile mode, shift from neutral to
brakes, put the transmission in gear (automated/ reverse, 1st, or 2nd gear. The clutch will open
automatic transmissions), or depress the clutch and the PTO will disengage for a moment.
(manual transmissions). 4. Touch the accelerator pedal to close the clutch
If the engine is not running: Start the engine. Re- and engage the PTO in mobile mode. The PTO
lease the parking brakes, put the transmission in
13.3
may be operated with the transmission in neutral

or reverse, and 1st and 2nd gears only.
NOTE: Do not attempt to change gears while
the vehicle is moving. The transmission will ig-
nore the request.
5. To deactivate mobile mode, bring the vehicle to a
stop. The clutch will open and shut down power
to the PTO.
6. To resume stationary mode, shift to neutral. The
PTO will engage.
7. To deactivate PTO, press the PTO switch again.
When the light in the switch goes out, power to
the PTO is shut off.
13.4
14
Emissions and Fuel
Efficiency
Greenhouse Gas Emissions and Fuel Consumption Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
EPA-Regulated Emissions Aftertreatment Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7
Emissions and Fuel Efficiency
Greenhouse Gas Emissions U.S. (Federal) Environmental Protection Agency

(EPA), the National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
and Fuel Consumption tration (NHTSA), Emission Regulations under the
Standards Canada Motor Vehicle Safety Act in Canada, and the
California Air Resources Board (CARB) effective as
Model year 2007 and later vehicles and/or engines per the applicable emission model year. To determine
domiciled in the U.S. or Canada are designed to an engine’s or vehicle’s emission model year, refer to
meet Emission and Fuel Efficiency Standards of the the respective EPA/CARB certification label.
EPA Regulations
Regulation Emissions Components
EPA07 (Reduction of nitrogen
oxides (NOx) emissions to 1.1 Aftertreatment device (ATD) containing a diesel particulate filter that traps soot and
g/bhp-hr, and particulate matter ash.*
emissions to 0.01 g/bhp-hr)
EPA10 (Reduction of NOx EPA07-type ATD, with additional selective catalyst reduction (SCR) technology that
emissions to 0.2 g/bhp-hr) utilizes diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) to convert NOx to nitrogen and water vapor.
GHG14 (Reduction of greenhouse
components, vehicle speed limiters, and idle reduction timers specifically designed to
gas emissions)
GHG17 components, vehicle speed limiters, and idle reduction timers specifically designed to
GHG14/17 components plus additional components including, but not limited to,
GHG21 transmissions, axles, predictive technologies, idle reduction technologies for
vocational vehicles, tire pressure monitoring systems.
* Cummins and Detroit ATD’s are also equipped with a diesel oxidation catalyst to break down pollutants.
Table 14.1, EPA Regulations
Emission Regulations by Model Year

Model Year Engine Regulation GHG Regulation
2007–2009 EPA07 N/A
2010–2012 EPA10 N/A
2013–2015 EPA10, GHG14 GHG14
2016 EPA10, GHG17 GHG14
2017–2020 EPA10, GHG17 GHG17
2021–and later EPA10, GHG21 GHG21
Table 14.2, Emission Regulations by Model Year
EPA-Regulated Emissions • Do not use fuel blended with used engine

lube oil or kerosene.
Aftertreatment Systems • Engine lube oil must have a sulfated ash
level less than 1.0 wt %; API CJ-4, CK-4,
NOTICE and FA-4 oils meet this requirement.
Follow these guidelines for engines that comply IMPORTANT: Using non-specification fuels or
with EPA07 or newer regulations, or damage may oils can lead to shortened diesel particulate filter
occur to the aftertreatment device (ATD) and the (DPF) cleaning or replacement intervals. For
warranty may be compromised. example, using CI-4 Plus oil with 1.3% sulfated
• Use ultralow-sulfur diesel with 15 ppm sul- ash (30% more ash content) may result in the
fur content or less.
14.1
need for DPF cleaning or replacement 20 to particulate filter (DPF), which traps soot particles.
30% sooner than would normally be required. The soot is burned to ash during a process called
regeneration (regen). A Selective Catalytic Reduction
IMPORTANT: See the engine manufacturer’s (SCR) device is used to reduce NOx downstream of
operation manual for complete details and op- the engine. After exhaust gases leave the DPF, a
eration of the ATS. controlled quantity of diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is
injected into the exhaust stream. In the presence of
Euro V Emission Compliant Engines heat, DEF is converted to ammonia gas, which re-
for Export acts with NOx in the selective catalyst chamber to
yield nitrogen and water vapor, which exit through
IMPORTANT: Depending on local jurisdictional the tailpipe.
guidelines, vehicles that are domiciled outside of
the U.S. and Canada may not have emissions Regeneration
aftertreatment systems (ATS) that are compliant The harder an engine works, the better it disposes of
with EPA regulations. soot. If the exhaust temperature is high enough, a
Vehicles sold with Euro V engines for export are process called passive regeneration (regen) occurs
as the vehicle is driven normally. However, if the en-
required to use diesel with a maximum sulfur
gine isn’t running hot enough, the electronic controls
content as follows: may initiate an active regen, whereby extra fuel is
• Cummins Engines 50 ppm (tolerant to 500 injected into the exhaust stream to superheat and
ppm) reduce the soot trapped in the DPF to ash. Active
regen happens only when the vehicle is moving
• Detroit Engines 50 ppm above a certain speed, determined by the engine
See Fig. 14.1 for an example of the label. manufacturer. See your engine operation manual for
complete details. Both active and passive regen hap-
pen automatically, without driver input.
USA DIÉSEL CON WARNING
50 PPM MÁXIMO Active regeneration can occur automatically any-

time the vehicle is moving. The exhaust gas tem-
perature could reach 1500°F (800°C), which is hot
DE AZUFRE enough to cause a fire, heat damage to objects
or materials, or personal injury to persons near
24-01472-002
the exhaust outlet. The exhaust temperature can
remain high even after the vehicle has stopped.
06/11/2018 f080203
When stopping the vehicle shortly after an auto-
(Use diesel with a maximum sulfur content of 50 ppm) matic regen, ensure the exhaust outlets are di-
Fig. 14.1, Euro V Engine Label (Detroit engine label rected away from structures, vegetation, flam-
shown) mable materials, and anything else that may be
harmed by exposure to high heat.
EPA10 and Newer Engines See Regen Switches, below, for instructions on
The EPA mandates that all engines built after De- preventing automatic regen if necessary.
cember 31, 2009 must reduce the level of emissions When operating conditions do not allow for ATD filter
exhausted by the engine to the following levels: cleaning by active or passive regen, the vehicle may
• Nitrogen Oxides (NOx) – 0.2 g/bhp-hr require a driver-activated parked regen. When this
occurs, the driver display screen presents a message
• Particulate Matter (PM) – .01 g/bhp-hr indicating that a regen is required. See Fig. 14.2.
To meet EPA guidelines, engines that are compliant The driver must either bring the vehicle up to high-
with EPA10 and newer regulations use an ATS way speed to increase the load (thus starting an ac-
where the exhaust first passes over the diesel oxida- tive regen), or park the vehicle and initiate a parked
tion catalyst (DOC), then passes through the diesel
14.2
regen. See Regen Operations, below, for instructions Before initiating a parked regeneration, make cer-
on initiating a parked regen. tain the exhaust outlets are directed away from
A B
06/10/2016 f611396
A. Start Regen Message Screen B. Stop Regen Message Screen

Fig. 14.2, Parked Regen Message Screens
Regen Operations
Parked regen is initiated by selecting OK when the
driver display screen shows "Parked Regen Re-
quired." See Fig. 14.2. If the vehicle is equipped with
the optional digital STOP REGEN switch, parked
regen can be stopped by selecting OK while the
regen is in progress. See Fig. 14.2. REGEN
OFF
Some vehicles may be equipped with a regen inhibit
switch. See Fig. 14.3. To stop a regen in progress or
04/18/2016 f611395
prevent the start of a regen, press the lower half of
the switch. Regen is then delayed until the switch is Fig. 14.3, Regen Inhibit Switch
no longer active.
NOTE: Parked regen can be initiated only when structures, vegetation, flammable materials, and
anything else that may be harmed by prolonged
the DPF lamp is illuminated. exposure to high heat.
WARNING To initiate a parked regen, perform the following

steps.
During parked regen, exhaust temperatures are 1. Park the vehicle away from all flammable materi-
very high and could cause a fire, heat damage to als, put the transmission in neutral, and set the
objects or materials, or personal injury to per- parking brake.
sons near the exhaust outlet.
14.3
2. Start and warm the engine until the coolant tem- parked regen or service the DPF, or of an engine
perature is at least 150°F (66°C). fault that affects emissions. A decal attached to the
driver’s sun visor explains the ATS warning lamps.
3. Select OK when the DPF screen is displayed on
the driver display screen. See Fig. 14.2. Select Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
OK again to confirm regen. As the regen process
is initiated, engine rpm increases and the HEST A steadily illuminated yellow malfunction indicator
lamp illuminates to indicate extremely high ex- lamp (MIL) indicates an engine fault that affects
haust temperatures. emissions. See Fig. 14.4.
IMPORTANT: The driver is responsible for DPF Status Lamp and Messages
ensuring, during the entire regen cycle, that
anything that could be harmed by exposure to When soot accumulates in the DPF, the driver dis-
high heat does not come in contact with the play screen presents a DPF status bar. As the soot
exhaust gases flowing from the outlets. level in the DPF reaches 60%, the DPF status lamp
illuminates. See Fig. 14.5. Perform a parked regen
4. The regen cycle will finish after 20 to 60 minutes, or bring the vehicle up to highway speed to increase
at which time engine idle speed drops to normal the load (thus starting an active regen). After the soot
and the vehicle can be driven normally. The level in the DPF reaches 80%, a parked regen is
HEST lamp is extinguished when vehicle speed necessary.
exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h) or the system has
cooled to normal operating temperature. For an explanation of DPF zones, message screens,
warning lamps, and available regen modes, see
5. To stop a parked regen at any time during the Table 14.3 (Detroit engines) or Table 14.4 (Cummins
process: engines).
• depress the clutch pedal, brake pedal, or If the DPF status lamp blinks and the driver display
accelerator pedal; screen shows a red status bar (90% full), initiate a
parked regen immediately in order to prevent an en-
• select OK on the parked regen screen
gine derate.
while the regen is active, then select OK
again to confirm; If the DPF status lamp blinks, and the driver display
screen shows a DPF status bar that is fully red
• press and hold the regen inhibit switch until
(100% full), begin a parked regen in order to prevent
idle returns to normal;
an engine shutdown. Park the vehicle and perform a
• shut down the engine. parked regen.
ATS Warning Lamps and Messages

There are three warning lamps that alert the driver of
high exhaust temperature, the need to perform a
DPF Zones, Detroit Engines

DPF Zone DPF Status Bar Warning Lamps Regen Mode Available
0 — • passive
06/10/2016 f611398
0–10% Green
14.4

1 — • over-the-road
06/10/2016 f611399
10–60% Green
DPF solid yellow • over-the-road

2
• parked
06/10/2016 f611400 HEST solid yellow*

60–70% Yellow
DPF flashing yellow • over-the-road

3
• parked

70–80% Yellow
DPF flashing yellow

4 • parked

80–90% Red
14.5

DPF flashing yellow

5 • parked

90–100% Red
* Illuminates if exhaust temperature is above a preset limit.
Table 14.3, DPF Zones, Detroit Engines
DPF Zones, Cummins Engines

1 — • over-the-road
06/10/2016 f611399
0–60% Green
DPF flashing yellow • over-the-road

3
• parked

60–80% Yellow
14.6
DPF Zones, Cummins Engines

DPF flashing yellow

5 • parked

80–100% Red
* Illuminates if exhaust temperature is above a preset limit.
Table 14.4, DPF Zones, Cummins Engines
idle speed is being controlled by the engine software,

not the vehicle driver.
Steady illumination of the HEST lamp alerts the
driver of high exhaust temperature during the regen
process if the vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/
h), or during a parked regen. See Fig. 14.6.
09/25/2006 f610814a
Fig. 14.4, Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
09/09/2016 f611430a
Fig. 14.6, HEST Lamp
Maintenance
Authorized service facilities must perform any DPF
service. For warranty purposes, maintain a record
that includes:
09/25/2006 f610815a
• date of cleaning or replacement;
• vehicle mileage;
Fig. 14.5, DPF Status Lamp
• particulate filter part number and serial number.
High Exhaust System Temperature
(HEST) Lamp Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank
Slow (10-second) flashing of the high exhaust sys-
tem temperature (HEST) lamp indicates that a
Diesel Exhaust Fluid
parked regen is in progress, and the engine’s high Diesel exhaust fluid (DEF) is used in the ATS to
lower NOx in the exhaust stream. DEF is colorless
14.7
and close to odorless (it may have a slightly pungent

odor similar to ammonia). It is nontoxic, nonflam-
1
mable, and biodegradable. It is mildly corrosive to
aluminum, but does not affect the strength or struc-
ture of the aluminum.
White crystals may be noticeable around compo-
nents that come into contact with DEF. The crystals
are easily removed with water. 2
DEF consumption varies depending on ambient con-

ditions and vehicle application.
Freezing Conditions
3 4
DEF freezes to slush at around 12°F (-11°C). It is not
damaged or destroyed if frozen, and is fully usable
when thawed. The DEF in the tank is allowed to
freeze while a vehicle is non-operational. At start-up, 06/28/2016 f611409
normal operation of the vehicle is not inhibited if the
DEF is frozen; an immersion heater with engine cool- 1. Fuel Gauge Pointer
2. DEF Gauge Pointer
ant flowing through it warms the DEF once the en-
3. Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
gine is running, allowing the SCR system to operate. 4. Low DEF Level Warning Lamp
DEF Tank Fig. 14.7, Fuel/DEF Gauge
Engines that are compliant with EPA10 and newer DEF Empty
regulations are equipped with a DEF tank located on
the driver’s side of the vehicle behind the battery box When the DEF level reads empty, the following
or forward of the fuel tank. The DEF tank has a 19 lamps and messages notify the driver.
mm filler neck inlet that prevents the hose from a • The DEF warning lamp flashes amber.
diesel outlet from being inserted, and has a blue cap
for easy identification. • The MIL lamp illuminates.
• The driver display screen presents the warn-
Fuel/DEF Gauge ing, "DEF Tank Empty." See Fig. 14.8.
The diesel fuel and DEF levels are measured in a Power is limited with progressively harsher engine
dual-purpose gauge. Below the gauge, a low fuel power limits applied.
warning lamp illuminates amber when the fuel level
drops below 1/8th of the capacity. See Fig. 14.7. DEF Tank Empty and Ignored
A DEF warning lamp illuminates amber when the If the empty warning is ignored and the DEF tank is
DEF tank is near empty. not refilled, the red STOP engine lamp illuminates in
addition to the MIL lamp and CHECK engine lamp
DEF Warnings and Engine Limits (on vehicles with a Cummins ISB or ISC/L engine).
IMPORTANT: Ignoring the DEF low level warn- If the DEF is not refilled, a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed
ings results in limited engine power, with the limit is applied after the next engine shutdown, while
application of a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit. parked and idling, or if a fuel refill is detected.
DEF Level Low—Initial Warning DEF Contamination or SCR Tampering

When the DEF level is low, the DEF warning lamp
illuminates solid amber, and the driver display screen NOTICE
presents an alert. See Fig. 14.8. Refill the DEF tank
in order to cancel the warning sequence. Once contaminated DEF or tampering has been
detected, the vehicle must be taken to an autho-
rized service facility to check the SCR system for
14.8
A B
05/15/2017 f611397
A. DEF Level Low B. DEF Tank Empty

Fig. 14.8, DEF Level Messages
damage and to deactivate the warning lights and

engine limits.
If contaminated DEF or tampering with the ATS is
detected, the DEF warning light flashes and the MIL
lamp illuminates to warn the driver. The CHECK en-
gine lamp also illuminates on vehicles with a Cum-
mins ISB or ISC/L engine.
• Detroit engines: Engine power is limited with
progressively harsher limits applied. If the fault
is not corrected, the STOP engine light illumi-
nates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit is ap-
plied after the next engine shutdown, while
parked and idling, or if a fuel refill is detected.
• Cummins engines: Engine power is limited with
progressively harsher limits applied. If the fault
is not corrected, the STOP engine light illumi-
nates and a 5 mph (8 km/h) speed limit is ap-
plied after the next engine shutdown, or while
parked and idling.
14.9
15
Brake Systems
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1
Meritor WABCO® Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4
Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Brake Systems
Air Brake System If air pressure drops below approximately 70 psi (483
kPa) in either system, a warning telltale illuminates
Brake System General Information and the driver display shows a warning pop-up. See
the first line of Table 15.1 for examples of the telltale
A dual air brake system consists of two independent and ICU warning.
air systems that use a single set of brake controls.
Each system has its own reservoirs, plumbing, and NOTE: An audible alert also sounds if the park
brake chambers. The primary system operates the brake is not set.
service brakes on the rear axle; the secondary sys- If the low air pressure warning is activated, check the
tem operates the service brakes on the front axle. air pressure gauges to determine which system has
Service brake signals from both systems are sent to low air pressure. Although the vehicle’s speed can be
the trailer. reduced using the foot brake control pedal, either the
front or rear service brakes will not be operating at
WARNING full capacity, causing a longer stopping distance.
Bring the vehicle to a safe stop and have the air sys-
Do not operate the vehicle with the front brakes tem repaired before continuing.
backed off or disconnected. Backing off or dis-
connecting the front brakes will not improve ve- NOTE: The warning buzzer for low air pressure
hicle handling and may lead to loss of vehicle is suppressed on some vehicles when the ve-
control, resulting in property damage or personal hicle is stationary.
injury.
Brake System Warnings, Indicators, and Messages

Telltale Color Description Driver Display
Indicates air pressure in the primary or

secondary reservoir has dropped below
Low Air Pressure approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
Red (EPA10 and
Newer) A buzzer will also sound if the park brake is
released or if the vehicle is moving--depending
on vehicle options.
06/30/2016 f611429
Parking Brake
P
Red (EPA10 and Indicates the parking brake is engaged. N/A
PARK
Newer)
Momentary illumination indicates the vehicle
ABS is engaged.
Amber Vehicle ABS Solid illumination indicates a problem with the N/A
vehicle ABS. Repair the ABS immediately to
ensure full braking capability.
Momentary illumination indicates the trailer
ABS is engaged.
Amber Trailer ABS Solid illumination indicates a problem with the N/A
trailer ABS. Repair the ABS immediately to
ensure full braking capability.
15.1
Brake Systems
Brake System Warnings, Indicators, and Messages

Telltale Color Description Driver Display
Flashing indicates a stability event has been
detected, and the ESC system is active. Solid
illumination indicates a problem with the
Amber Stability Event stability system. Repair the ESC system N/A
immediately to ensure full stability capability.
For more information on the ESC system, see
Chapter 7.
Flashing indicates a wheel spin event has

Amber Wheel Spin Event N/A
been detected, and the ATC system is active.
Indicates the ATC SPIN button has been

ATC Deactivated
pressed to allow wheel slip.
Green Engine Brake Indicates the engine brake is enabled. N/A
Table 15.1, Brake System Warnings, Indicators, and Messages
IMPORTANT: In the event of a total loss of ser- Loss of air pressure in the primary air system causes
vice brakes with full system air pressure, use the rear service brakes to become inoperative. The
the parking brake control valve (yellow knob) to secondary air system will continue to operate the
bring the vehicle to a complete stop in the saf- front brakes and, if equipped, the trailer brakes.
est location possible. Loss of air pressure in the secondary air system
causes the front axle brakes to become inoperative.
Before a vehicle with insufficient system air pressure
The primary air system will continue to operate the
can be moved, the spring parking brakes must be
rear service brakes and, if equipped, the trailer
released by applying an external air source at the
brakes.
gladhands, or by manually caging the parking brake
springs.
Brake System Operation
WARNING Before driving your vehicle, allow time for the air
compressor to build up a minimum of 100 psi (690
Do not release the spring parking brakes and kPa) pressure in both the primary and secondary
then drive the vehicle. There would be no means systems. Monitor the air pressure system by observ-
of stopping the vehicle, which could result in se- ing the air pressure gauges and the low-air-pressure
rious personal injury or vehicle damage. Before warning light and buzzer. The warning telltale or
releasing the spring parking brakes, make the buzzer shut off when air pressure in both systems
connection to a towing vehicle or chock the tires. reaches approximately 70 psi (483 kPa).
After correcting the brake system problem, uncage NOTE: The buzzer is suppressed on some ve-
the spring parking brakes before resuming normal hicles when the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle operation.
IMPORTANT: Before driving the vehicle, secure
all loose items in the cab so that they will not fly
15.2
Brake Systems
forward during a full brake application. Make

sure all passengers are wearing seat belts. WARNING
During normal brake stops, depress the foot brake Do not use the trailer service brakes for parking;
control pedal until braking action slows down the ve- they are not designed for this purpose. If air
hicle. Increase or decrease the pressure on the bleeds out of the trailer air tank during parking,
pedal so that the vehicle comes to a smooth, safe the vehicle could roll, causing serious personal
stop. Apply the spring parking brakes by pulling the injury or property damage.
yellow parking brake knob if the vehicle is to be
parked.
IMPORTANT: An air brake proportioning system
may be used in tractor air brake systems when
the vehicle is not equipped with antilock braking
system (ABS). When operating in bobtail mode,
the rear brake chambers (on which the axle
load has been greatly reduced) receive reduced
(proportional) air pressure, while the front axle
brake chambers receive full (normal) air pres-
sure. This results in a different brake pedal
"feel," as the pedal seems to require more travel
and/or effort to slow or stop the vehicle. How- 02/03/2017 f610591
ever, the air brake proportioning system actually
improves vehicle control when the tractor is in Fig. 15.1, Trailer Brake Lever
bobtail mode. When the tractor is towing a The red octagonal-shaped knob in the control panel
trailer, the rear brake chambers will receive full actuates the trailer air supply valve. See Fig. 15.2.
(normal) application air pressure. After the vehicle’s air hoses are connected to a
When parking a vehicle attached to a trailer that trailer and the pressure in both air systems is at least
does not have spring parking brakes, apply the trac- 100 psi (690 kPa), the trailer air supply valve must
tor parking brakes. Chock the trailer tires before dis- be pushed in prior to driving the vehicle. It should
connecting the vehicle from the trailer. stay in to charge the trailer air supply system and to
release the trailer spring parking brakes.
WARNING Pull the trailer air supply valve out before disconnect-
ing a trailer or when operating a vehicle without a
If a trailer or combination vehicle is not equipped trailer.
with spring parking brakes, do not park it by pull- If pressure in both air systems drops to 20 to 45 psi
ing out only the trailer air supply valve knob. (138 to 310 kPa), the red trailer air supply valve and
This would apply only the trailer service brakes. yellow parking brake valve automatically pop out,
If air were to bleed from the trailer brake system, applying both the tractor and trailer spring parking
the trailer brakes would release, possibly causing brakes. If the trailer is not equipped with spring park-
an unattended runaway vehicle. ing brakes, the trailer service brakes are applied.
Brake Controls The yellow diamond-shaped knob in the control
panel actuates the parking brake valve. See
The trailer brake lever (hand control valve) is used Fig. 15.2. Pulling out the parking brake valve applies
for applying the trailer brakes without applying the both the tractor and trailer spring parking brakes and
truck or tractor service brakes. It is usually mounted automatically causes the trailer air supply valve to
on the right-hand control panel. See Fig. 15.1. The pop out. Pushing in the parking brake valve releases
valve can be partially or fully applied, but in any par- the tractor parking brakes.
tially on position it will be overridden by a full applica-
tion of the service brake pedal. Moving the lever
down applies the trailer brakes, while moving it up
releases the trailer brakes. The lever will automati-
cally return to the up position when it is released.
15.3
Brake Systems
1
2 WARNING
Manually adjusting an automatic slack adjuster to
bring the pushrod stroke within legal limits is
likely masking a mechanical problem. Adjustment
is not a repair. Before adjusting an automatic
slack adjuster, troubleshoot the foundation brake
system and inspect it for worn or damaged com-
02/02/2017 f610291
ponents. Improperly maintaining the vehicle brak-
1. Trailer Air-Supply-Valve Knob ing system may lead to brake failure, resulting in
2. Parking-Brake-Valve Knob property damage, personal injury, or death.
Fig. 15.2, Brake Valve Knobs
Meritor WABCO® Antilock
NOTICE Braking System
Do not use the spring parking brakes if the ser- The Meritor WABCO Antilock Braking System (ABS)
vice brakes are hot, such as after descending a is an electronic wheel speed monitoring and control
steep grade. To do so could damage the brakes. system that works with the standard air brake sys-
Allow hot brakes to cool before using the spring tem. ABS passively monitors vehicle wheel speed at
parking brakes. all times, and controls wheel speed during emer-
gency stops.
Do not use the spring parking brakes during
freezing temperatures if the service brakes are IMPORTANT: For proper ABS system operation,
wet. To do so could cause them to freeze. If the do not change tire sizes. The sizes of the tires
brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in low gear and installed during production are programmed into
lightly apply the brakes to heat and dry them. the electronic control unit. Installing different-
sized tires could result in a reduced braking
If the trailer is not equipped with spring parking
brakes, pulling out the parking brake valve applies force, leading to longer stopping distances.
the tractor spring parking brakes and the trailer ser- ABS includes signal-generating tone wheels and sen-
vice brakes. When the tractor and trailer parking sors located in the wheel hubs of each sensed
brakes (or trailer service brakes) are both applied, wheel. The sensors transmit vehicle wheel speed
the trailer brakes are released by pushing in the information to an electronic control unit, located in
trailer air supply valve, leaving the tractor parking the vehicle electronics bay. The control unit’s main
brakes applied. Air pressure in the primary or sec- circuit interprets the speed sensor signals and calcu-
ondary reservoir must be at least 65 psi (447 kPa) lates wheel speed, wheel retardation, and a vehicle
before the tractor spring parking brakes, or the trailer reference speed. If the calculations indicate wheel
service or spring parking brakes, can be released. lockup, the main circuit signals the appropriate
modulator valve to reduce braking pressure. During
Automatic Slack Adjusters emergency braking, the modulator valve alternately
reduces, increases, or maintains air pressure supply
Automatic slack adjusters should never be manually
in the brake chamber to prevent front and rear wheel
adjusted except during routine maintenance of the
lockup.
foundation brakes (e.g., replacing shoes), during
slack adjuster installation, or in an emergency situa- The electronic control unit (ECU) also has a safety
tion. circuit that constantly monitors the wheel sensors,
When the brake pushrod stroke exceeds the legal traction control valve (if equipped), modulator valves,
brake adjustment limit on a vehicle, there is likely a and the electrical circuitry.
mechanical problem with the foundation brake com- The Meritor WABCO ABS combines one front-axle
ponents or the adjuster is improperly installed. control channel with one rear-axle control channel to
Visit a repair facility as soon as possible when form one control circuit. For example, the sensor and
brakes equipped with automatic slack adjusters are modulator valve on the left-front axle form a control
determined to be out of adjustment. circuit with the sensor and modulator valve on the
15.4
Brake Systems
right-rear axle. If, during vehicle operation, the safety Automatic Traction Control
circuit senses a failure in any part of the ABS, the
driver display presents an ABS warning, the tractor Vehicles with electronic engines and ABS may have
warning lamp (TRACTOR ABS) illuminates, and the Automatic Traction Control (ATC). On these vehicles,
control circuit where the failure occurred is switched the ATC system automatically limits wheel spin dur-
to normal braking action. See Table 15.1. The re- ing reduced-traction situations. In normal braking ap-
maining control circuit will retain the ABS effect. Even plications, the standard air brake system is in effect.
if the ABS is completely inoperative, normal braking An additional solenoid valve is installed. During
ability is maintained. An exception would be if a reduced-traction situations, the ATC solenoid valve
modulator valve (or combination modulator valve) is controls air pressure to the modulator valves and
damaged and inoperative. As these components are they in turn increase, hold, or reduce pressure to the
an integral part of the air brake system, normal brak- appropriate brake chambers to provide better traction
ing may be impaired or inoperative. whenever wheel spin occurs.
During emergency or reduced-traction stops, fully When the ATC system is in the NORMAL mode, it
depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a will apply gentle braking to the spinning wheel, to
safe stop. Do not pump the brake pedal. With the feed power to the wheel(s) with better traction. If
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will control all both wheels are spinning, the system will signal the
wheels to provide steering control and a reduced engine to reduce power.
braking distance.
If the system detects wheel spin or a stability event,
Although the ABS improves vehicle control during the wheel spin/stability telltale illuminates and an
emergency braking situations, the driver still has the alert is shown on the driver display. See Table 15.1.
responsibility to change driving styles depending on
existing traffic and road conditions. For example, the Pressing the ATC SPIN switch (Fig. 15.3) shuts ATC
ABS cannot prevent an accident if the driver is off and allows drive wheel spin. An alert is shown on
speeding or following too closely. the driver display. Pressing the switch again, or cy-
cling the ignition key, will cycle the system back to
Trailer ABS Compatibility normal operation.
The Meritor WABCO ABS is designed to communi-

cate with a trailer ABS, if they are compatible. Com-
patibility will result in the illumination of the TRAILER
ABS lamp during vehicle start-up and fault detection.
See Table 15.1.
The TRAILER ABS lamp will not illuminate unless a ATC
compatible trailer is connected to the tractor. The SPIN
dash-mounted lamp will operate as follows when a
compatible trailer is properly connected to the tractor:
03/02/2016 f611333
• When the ignition key is turned to the ON posi-
Fig. 15.3, ATC SPIN Switch
tion, the TRAILER ABS lamp will illuminate mo-
mentarily, then turn off.
• If the lamp illuminates momentarily during ve- NOTICE
hicle operation, then shuts off, a fault was de- The ATC spin feature is intended to be used
tected and corrected. under specific slippery conditions that require
• If the lamp illuminates and stays on during ve- momentary increased wheel spin. Using this op-
hicle operation, there is a fault with the trailer tion for an extended period of time may damage
ABS. Repair the trailer ABS system immedi- the vehicle brake system.
ately to ensure full antilock braking capability. After the ignition switch is turned on, the TRACTOR
IMPORTANT: If a compatible trailer is con- ABS lamp comes on for about three seconds. After
nected, and the lamp is not illuminating momen- three seconds, the warning light goes out if all of the
tarily when the ignition key is turned to the ON tractor’s ABS components are working.
position, it is possible that the lamp is burnt out.
15.5
Brake Systems
IMPORTANT: If the ABS warning light does not

work as described above, or comes on while WARNING
driving, repair the ABS immediately to ensure
To avoid injury from loss of vehicle control, do
full antilock braking capability. not activate the engine brake system under the
following conditions:
ECAS Automatic Load Transfer
• on wet or slippery pavement, unless the
(ECAS only) vehicle is equipped with antilock braking
On vehicles equipped with Electronically Controlled system (ABS) and you have had prior expe-
Air Suspension (ECAS), ECAS works in conjunction rience driving under these conditions;
with ABS. When wheel slippage is detected by the • when driving without a trailer or pulling an
ABS, the ECAS system transfers weight from the tag empty trailer;
axle to the drive axle by changing air pressures in
the suspension air bellows, increasing drive wheel • if the tractor drive wheels begin to lock, or
traction. there is fishtail motion after the engine
brake is activated.
The ECAS load transfer feature is optimized to apply
the maximum available vehicle load on the drive NOTE: When the engine brake is enabled, the
axle, up to the maximum allowable limit, determined engine brake lamp illuminates in the ICU. See
by the gross axle weight rating (GAWR). In bobtail or Table 15.1.
with a loaded trailer less than the GAWR, the tag
axle supports a negligible load while the drive axle Whenever vehicle braking is required on good road
supports nearly the full weight. Above the GAWR, the conditions, the engine brake may be used in con-
drive axle is loaded with approximately the maximum junction with the service brakes. There is no time
allowable load and the tag supports the remainder. limit for operation of the engine brake. However, an
engine brake does not provide the precise control of,
On vehicles equipped with the ICUC, when load and is not a substitute for, service brakes.
transfer mode is active, "Load Transfer" will display
in the message field of the driver display. See Figure
15.4. WARNING
Usage of the engine brake as the primary braking
system can cause unpredictable stopping dis-
tances, that could result in personal injury or
property damage. Service brakes are the primary
vehicle braking system.
Since the engine brake is most effective at rated en-
gine speed, gear selection is very important. Gearing
down the vehicle within the limits of the rated engine
11/09/2016 f611472
speed makes the engine brake more effective. Rec-
Fig. 15.4, Load Transfer Notification, ICUC ommended engine braking speed is above 1800 rpm
and below the rated speed.
Load transfer mode will automatically deactivate
when the vehicle reaches 45 mph (72 kmh). "Control speed" is the speed at which the engine
brake performs 100 percent of the required downhill
braking, resulting in a constant speed of descent.
Engine Brake The control speed varies, depending on vehicle
Each engine manufacturer uses a specific engine weight and the downhill grade.
brake for their engine. Regardless of the manufac- For faster descent, select a higher gear than that
turer, the engine brake is operated with the principles used for control speed. Service brakes must then be
outlined in here. Refer to the engine manufacturer’s used intermittently to prevent engine overspeed and
operation manual for details of their particular engine to maintain desired vehicle speed.
brake product.
15.6
Brake Systems
For slower descent, select a lower gear, being care-

ful not to overspeed the engine. Occasional deactiva-
tion of the engine brake may be necessary to main- 0
tain the designated road speed under these
conditions.
If the engine is equipped with both cruise control and 1
an engine brake, the engine brake can operate auto-
matically while cruise control is activated. The maxi-
mum amount of braking is selected with the engine 2
brake control. When the vehicle returns to the set
cruise speed, the engine brake will turn off.
The engine brake will only operate when the accel- 3
erator and clutch pedals are fully released.
ABS has the ability to turn the engine brake off if 02/17/2017 f270164a
wheel slip is detected. The engine brake will auto- 0. Off 2. Medium
matically turn back on once wheel slip is no longer 1. Low 3. High
detected.
Fig. 15.5, Engine Brake Positions, Right-Hand Steering
Column Lever
Engine Brake Operation
NOTICE
Do not allow the engine to exceed its governed
speed, or serious engine damage could result.
NOTE: Depending on the brake type, the engine
brake may be disabled when engine tempera-
ture falls below a set level.
The engine brake control is located on the right-hand
steering column lever. At the top position, the engine
brake is off, and at the three lower positions, the en-
gine brake is on and the intensity (low, medium,
high) increases with each step down. See Fig. 15.5.
NOTE: The cruise control system and safety
systems may activate the engine brake regard-
less of the lever position.
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with a Detroit au-
tomated transmission, setting the engine brake
with the cruise control set activates Deceleration
Mode. Setting the cruise control while the en-
gine brake is on activates Descent Control
Mode. For information on these modes, see
"Cruise Control" in Chapter 7.
15.7
16
Steering System
Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Steering System
Power Steering System

The power steering system includes the power steer-
ing gear, hydraulic hoses, power steering pump, res-
ervoir, steering wheel and column, and other compo-
nents.
The power steering pump, driven by the engine, pro-
vides the power assist for the steering system. If the
engine is not running, there is no power assist.
WARNING
Driving the vehicle without the power-assist fea-
ture of the steering system requires much greater
effort, especially in sharp turns or at low speeds,
which could result in an accident and possible
injury.
If the power-assist feature does not work due to hy-
draulic fluid loss, steering pump damage, or another
cause, bring the vehicle to a safe stop. Do not drive
the vehicle until the cause of the problem has been
corrected.
NOTICE
Never steam clean or high-pressure wash the
steering gear. Internal damage to gear seals, and
ultimately the steering gear, can result.
Drivers should carefully use the power available with
a power steering system. If the front tires become
lodged in a deep hole or rut, drive the vehicle out
instead of using the steering system to lift the tires
out of the hole.
NOTICE
Avoid turning the tires when they are against a
curb, as this places a heavy load on steering
components and could damage them.
16.1
17
Automated and Automatic
Transmissions
Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1
Detroit™ Automated Transmissions (DT12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3
Eaton Automated Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.9
Allison Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12
Automated and Automatic Transmissions
Automated/Automatic
Transmission Shift Control
Vehicles with automated or automatic transmissions B
use the multifunction stalk switch control shown in A
Fig. 17.1 and Fig. 17.2. This control can be used to
request manual shifts, change driving mode, and set C
engine brake levels. See Table 17.1 for an overview
of control functionality.
Direction Switch
Use the direction switch to request drive (D), neutral
(N), or reverse (R). See Fig. 17.1, Ref. A.
Mode Switch
E
The driving mode can be changed using the Mode
switch on the shift control. See Fig. 17.1, Ref. B and
C. (−)
Gear Switch D (+)

For automated and automatic transmissions, gear 06/30/2017 f270163b
shifts can be requested manually; push the lever
away to request a downshift, or pull the lever toward See Table 17.1 for a description of control functionality.
you to request an upshift (Fig. 17.1, Ref. D and E). A. Rotate for drive (D), neutral (N), or reverse (R).
See Table 17.1 for more information about upshift B. Short press for automatic mode or switch between
available modes.
and downshift requests.
C. Long press for manual mode.
D. Pull for upshift (+) request.
E. Push for downshift (-) request.
Fig. 17.1, Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift
Control
Functionality, Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift Control

Function/Switch Action/Position Request
Direction All Transmissions
D Forward gears
N Neutral
R Reverse gears
Mode Short press Detroit and Eaton: Activate the automatic drive
mode, or switch between available modes
Allison: Switch between available shift modes.
Long press Detroit and Eaton: Activate the manual drive mode
(if available)
Allison: Switch between automatic and manual drive
mode.
17.1
Functionality, Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift Control

Function/Switch Action/Position Request
Gear(Detroit Detroit Automated Transmissions
Automated Short pull on the lever Upshift, single gear
Transmissions) Pull on the lever in quick repetitions Upshift, multiple gears
Short push on the lever Downshift, single gear
Push on the lever in quick repetitions Downshift, multiple gears
Gear (Eaton Eaton Automated Transmissions
Automated Short pull on the lever Upshift, single gear
While in automatic drive mode, long push on Downshift to low mode
the lever
While in low mode, pull on the lever Exits low mode and returns to automatic drive mode
While in reverse mode, push on the lever Selects deep reverse gear
While in deep reverse gear, pull on the lever Upshifts to standard reverse gear
Gear (Allison Allison Automatic Transmissions
Automatic Short pull on the lever Upshift, single gear
While in automatic drive mode, long push on Downshift to low mode
the lever
While in low mode, pull on the lever Exits low mode and returns to automatic drive mode
While in reverse mode, push on the lever Selects deep reverse gear (only on 7-speed 4000
Series transmissions)
While in deep reverse gear (only on 7-speed Upshifts to standard reverse gear
4000 Series transmissions), pull on the lever
Engine Brake * Engine Brake Functions
Lever at position 0 (top) Engine brake off
Lever at position 1 Low intensity
Lever at position 2 Medium intensity
Lever at position 3 (bottom) High intensity
* For functions with cruise control active, see Chapter 7.
Table 17.1, Functionality, Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift Control
Engine Brake Power Up and Shift into Gear

The engine brake is controlled by the lever position 1. With the parking brake set and Neutral (N) se-
(as shown in Fig. 17.2). At the top position, the en- lected on the shift control, turn the ignition switch
gine brake is off, and at the three lower positions, the to the ON position.
engine brake is on and the intensity (low, medium,
2. Start the engine.
high) increases with each step down. For more infor-
mation about using the engine brake, see 3. Apply the service brake.
Chapter 15.
4. Select the desired starting gear.
NOTE: Using the engine brake with cruise con-
5. Release the parking brake.
trol can be used to activate Descent Control
Mode or Deceleration Mode. For more informa- 6. Release the service brake and apply the accel-
tion, see "Cruise Control" in Chapter 7. erator.
17.2
Suggested Shift (Detroit and Eaton

0
Transmissions)
In Manual mode only (if available), a suggested shift
is displayed to indicate the most economical gear
1 available. The suggested shift is the number of up or
down arrows from the current gear with a maximum
of three up or down arrows.
2
Detroit™ Automated
Transmissions (DT12)
3 Detroit transmissions have twelve forward gears and
up to four reverse gears that can be shifted automati-
02/17/2017 f270164a
cally or manually. Shifting and clutch actuation are
0. Off 2. Medium computer controlled, and there is no clutch pedal
1. Low 3. High needed to operate the vehicle. Automatic shifts are
Fig. 17.2, Engine Brake Positions selected for fuel economy or engine power. Manual
shifts can be requested with the shift control and the
Gear Display transmission ECU grants them when conditions per-
mit. In all cases, shifts depend on the following fac-
The current transmission gear and driving mode are tors: engine speed, accelerator pedal position, ser-
displayed in the static menu at the bottom of the vice brake usage, engine brake operation, vehicle
driver display screen. See Fig. 17.3. load status, and road conditions.
1 2 NOTE: To avoid potential engine stall risk or un-

expected shifting, use the interaxle differential
lock when the vehicle is operated in slippery
conditions. See Chapter 19 for information
about the interaxle differential lock.
3 Driving Modes
f611348
There are three driving modes: Manual, Automatic
06/13/2016
Economy, and Automatic Performance. To activate
1. Suggested Shift 3. Driving Mode the manual drive mode, press and hold the mode
2. Current Gear switch briefly. Press the switch quickly to activate the
Fig. 17.3, Typical Gear Display (Detroit and Eaton) automatic drive mode or change between modes.
See Fig. 17.4.
Selected Gear (Detroit and Eaton In Automatic Economy mode, gear shifts are de-
Transmissions) signed for saving fuel. In Automatic Performance
mode, gear shifts are designed for higher perfor-
If the selected gear is different than the current gear mance and are made at higher engine speeds. In
for longer than a half second, the current gear dis- manual mode, gear shifts are requested manually.
play will flash and the selected gear value will be
shown. Once the current gear and selected gear NOTE: In Automatic Performance mode, the
match, the selected gear display disappears and the transmission will automatically change to Auto-
current gear display stops flashing. matic Economy mode if it hasn’t received a re-
quest for more power in several minutes, unless
current road conditions require higher engine
performance.
17.3
B
A
(−)
D (+) 03/20/2017 f611350

06/30/2017 f270163b NOTE: Upshift and downshift arrows are not shown
See Table 17.1 for a description of control functionality. when "E" is shown in the gear display.
A. Rotate for drive (D), neutral (N), or reverse (R). Fig. 17.5, eCoast Display
B. Short press for automatic mode or switch between
available modes. • cruise control brakes or accelerates.
C. Long press for manual mode.
D. Pull for upshift (+) request. • vehicle speed exceeds the cruise control set
E. Push for downshift (-) request. speed by more than approximately 4 mph (6
km/h).
Fig. 17.4, Automated/Automatic Transmission Shift
Control • the speed limiter is active and the maximum
speed set is exceeded.
eCoast • diesel particulate filter (DPF) regeneration oc-
The eCoast feature can improve driving economy. curs.
When conditions permit, the transmission control au- NOTE: eCoast availability and the On/Off screen
tomatically shifts the transmission to neutral to coast
are customer-selectable parameters. To enable
at speeds of approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) and
above. However, the vehicle can coast down to 45 or disable eCoast, see an authorized Freight-
mph (72 km/h). An "E" shows in the gear display liner service facility.
when eCoast is in effect. See Fig. 17.5.
Creep Mode
To turn eCoast on or off, navigate to the transmission
settings screen. See Fig. 17.6. Creep mode allows the vehicle to be maneuvered at
The eCoast function is not active when any of the very slow speeds. To activate Creep mode for the
following occur: first time within the current driving cycle, press the
accelerator pedal to launch the vehicle, thereby
• the accelerator pedal is pressed. modulating the clutch and allowing it to slip. Follow-
ing this and for the duration of the current driving
• vehicle acceleration rate is exceeded.
cycle, Creep mode is active.
• the service brake pedal is pressed.
• the engine brake is in use.
17.4
Hill Start Aid (HSA)

Detroit transmissions are equipped with a Hill Start
Aid (HSA) feature to prevent rolling backward when
launching the vehicle on an uphill grade. The system
delays the release of service brakes until enough
torque is available to begin moving the vehicle for-
ward. The system will hold the brakes for a maxi-
mum of 3 seconds. If driveline torque is not detected,
the system will audibly alert the driver and release
the brakes.
Clutch Abuse Protection

A vehicle equipped with a Detroit transmission does
not have a clutch pedal, but still has a clutch that is
operated automatically and can be damaged by abu-
sive driver actions. To protect the clutch, the vehicle
has a clutch abuse protection system that alerts the
driver and restricts functionality when needed. Ex-
tended periods in Creep Mode, slipping the clutch
(using the accelerator pedal to hold the vehicle on a
hill, for example), and high clutch temperatures can
03/20/2017 f611349
activate the clutch abuse protection system. A display
Fig. 17.6, eCoast and Creep Mode On/Off Screen message notifies the operator when the protections
are needed.
Once the vehicle is stopped via the service brakes,
the vehicle will begin to creep again, without the ac- NOTICE
celerator pedal actuation, as soon as the service
brakes are released. To hold the vehicle stationary on an uphill slope,
To begin using Creep mode (once active) from a use the service brakes, not the accelerator pedal.
parked position, shift from neutral to either drive or Using the accelerator pedal can overheat and
reverse, release the service brakes, and briefly de- damage the clutch. To start moving, use the ac-
press the accelerator pedal. The vehicle’s urge to celerator pedal and release the brakes as the ve-
move can then be felt. hicle begins to move.
If creep is active and no acceleration is achieved, There are three clutch abuse protection levels. At
then Creep mode will abort. A display message noti- each, the driver is alerted and functionality is modi-
fies the operator when Creep mode is about to be fied; see Table 17.2.
aborted. To avoid clutch overheating, follow these tips:
IMPORTANT: When slowing down from higher • To hold the vehicle stationary on an uphill
speeds in drive or reverse, remember that slope, use the service brakes, not the accel-
Creep mode will be in effect at lower speeds. erator pedal.
Use the service brakes to stop the vehicle. • To start moving on an uphill slope, use the ac-
To turn Creep Mode on or off, navigate to the trans- celerator pedal and release the brakes as the
mission settings screen (if available). See Fig. 17.6. vehicle begins to move.
NOTE: Creep mode availability and the On/Off • When hooking up to a trailer, ensure the trailer
screen are customer-selectable parameters. To is high enough to back under, and use first
enable or disable creep mode, see an autho- gear reverse.
rized Freightliner service facility. • Avoid starting in higher gears, and start in first
gear when a trailer is attached.
17.5
• Ensure trailer brakes have had time to com- The driver should be ready to intervene by applying
pletely release prior to starting. the service brakes if the grade is too steep and the
vehicle is traveling too fast. Applying the service
• Do not use Creep mode for an extended pe-
brake to slow the vehicle will not cancel cruise con-
riod. Stop or adjust the vehicle speed when trol. Once the service brake is released, the vehicle
warned to deactivate Creep mode. speed becomes the new Descent Control set speed.
A pop-up will appear on the instrument cluster screen
Engine Overspeed Alerts to notify the driver of the new speed. See Fig. 17.8.
To help protect the engine, the system has display
messages to notify the operator when the engine has
exceeded certain thresholds and needs to be slowed
down before significant engine damage occurs.
There are two warnings, one at about 2300 rpm and
another at 2500 rpm, indicated with messages and a
fault code.
Descent Control Mode

Descent Control mode helps control the vehicle and
engine speed when descending a grade.
NOTE: Before engaging Descent Control mode,
determine an appropriate speed for the vehicle
05/07/2020 f611818
load and grade of the road.
To activate Descent Control mode, manually set the Fig. 17.8, New Descent Control Mode Set Speed
engine brakes with the shifter stalk and, while the Pop-Up
engine brakes are actively working, set cruise to the When the vehicle’s descent is complete, return the
desired descent speed. A Descent Control mode en- engine brake stalk to the OFF/Auto position. At this
gaged icon will appear on the ICUC screen showing point the Descent Control set speed will become the
it is active. See Fig. 17.7 new cruise speed.
Hill Descent Upshift Feature

NOTE: It is critical that the driver maintains
complete control over the vehicle at all times.
The proper speed, and gear if in manual mode,
should be selected before the crest of any hill to
ensure a safe descent. The driver should apply
engine and service brakes appropriately during
any descent.
The Detroit™ Automated Transmission (DT12) is ca-
pable of upshifting automatically when descending
grades. When the vehicle is descending without en-
1 gine or service brake application, the DT12 will up-
05/07/2020 f611817 shift at 2000 rpm. If the engine or service brake is
1. Icon Showing Descent Control Mode Engaged applied during descent, the DT12 will upshift at 2400
rpm.
Fig. 17.7, Descent Control Mode Active
The Descent Control mode will attempt to manage

the vehicle’s speed by varying the engine brake
level.
17.6
Transmission Low Air Warning

CAUTION
If the yellow "Caution: Transmission Air Supply
Low" popup appears while the vehicle is in op-
eration, slow down, safely pull the vehicle off the
road, then correct the problem.
Pneumatic controls are used to shift the transmis-
sion. If there is inadequate air pressure, a yellow
caution pop-up will appear and the quality of gear
shifts may be degraded. See Fig. 17.9. Wait for air
pressure to build before operating the vehicle.
10/21/2019 f611802
Fig. 17.10, No Transmission Air Pressure Pop-up
10/21/2019 f611801
Fig. 17.9, Low Transmission Air Pressure Pop-up
CAUTION
If the red "Warning: Transmission Will Not Shift"
popup appears while the vehicle is in operation,
choose the safest location available to pull the
vehicle off the road. Prepare for the vehicle to be
immobile if the problem cannot be resolved.
If a severe loss of air pressure occurs, a red warning
pop-up will appear and the transmission will not shift.
See Fig. 17.10.
Clutch Abuse Alerts and Protections

Protections
Alert Level Alert
Highest Start Gear Creep Mode Clutch Function
1 Heavy clutch load message 1 No restriction Normal function
2 Heavy clutch load message 1 Disabled Normal function
17.7

Protections
Alert Level Alert
Highest Start Gear Creep Mode Clutch Function
3 Disabled If the accelerator pedal is
depressed, the clutch closes
Clutch overload message and at fixed rate.
1
buzzer If the accelerator pedal is
released, the clutch opens at
fixed rate.
Table 17.2, Clutch Abuse Alerts and Protections
Auto Neutral rection switch into neutral, and back into the
desired position.
WARNING Additionally for vehicles equipped with CPC3Evo, if
the engine is shutdown without the drive direction
Do not leave the driver’s seat without placing the switch in the ’N’ position, the warning buzzer will pro-
shift stalk lever in the neutral position and apply- vide a long duration activation, and a pop-up will
ing the parking brake, failure to do so could prompt the driver to place the shifter into the neutral
cause property damage and personal injury. position.
General Information, Auto Neutral WARNING

Feature
The auto neutral feature will shift the Detroit trans- If the transmission doesn’t achieve neutral before
mission into neutral if the drive direction switch is left shutdown, it will not restart until it can complete
in drive or reverse for an extended period of time. the shift to neutral.
The driver is warned of a pending shift with a flash- If neutral gear is not achieved, a pop-up encourages
ing "N" in the gear position display of the instrument the driver to start the engine to allow the transmis-
cluster. A brief warning buzzer will sound when the sion to achieve neutral gear.
transmission shifts into neutral. See Table 17.3 for all
the conditions and indicators that are possible.
Note: If the auto neutral feature is activated,
apply the service brake and cycle the gear di-
Direction Switch "D" or "R"

CPC model All CPC4 CPC3Evo
Key Position ON with Engine Idling Ignition OFF Ignition OFF
Parking brake ON or
Brake Position Parking brake ON Parking brake OFF Parking brake ON or OFF
OFF
Flashing “N” (short Flashing “N” (long
Gear Display — Shift into neutral
duration) duration)
Short duration Short duration
Warning Buzzer — Long duration activation
activation activation
Neutral, when the Neutral, when the
Gear Position In gear or neutral In gear or neutral
buzzer sounds buzzer sounds
Table 17.3, Direction Switch "D" or "R"
17.8
Eaton Automated fall outside of the acceptable range to perform a

shift. If the shift is denied, a tone will sound.
Transmissions
Eaton automated transmissions use shift selection Manual Mode (M)
software and electric clutch actuation; a clutch pedal In manual mode, the driver requests upshifts and
is not needed to operate the vehicle. These transmis- downshifts instead of letting the Eaton transmission
sions use the multi-function stalk switch shown in select them automatically. Manual shifting may be
Fig. 17.1 to select mode, direction, neutral, low, and helpful when traversing a work site, railroad tracks,
to make manual shifts. To know what gear the trans- or steep grades, for example.
mission is in, see the driver display. Forward shifts
can be made either manually or automatically. Use the mode switch on the shift control to select the
manual mode (M). To drive forward, rotate the D/N/R
Automatic Mode (A) switch to Drive (D), and press down on the throttle
pedal. To shift up, pull the lever up (towards you); to
In automatic drive mode, upshifts and downshifts are shift down, push the lever down (away from you).
made by the transmission without driver intervention. The system holds the current gear unless a shift is
Use the mode switch on the shift control to select the requested or if the system initiates a manual mode
automatic mode (A). Rotate the D/N/R switch to override.
Drive (D), and press down on the throttle pedal. The NOTE: The transmission may deny a shift while
transmission will shift automatically. ascending or descending a grade if the load of
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral the vehicle and grade of the terrain in combina-
mode without applying the service brakes, the tion with the drivetrain ratio and engine torque
transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into fall outside of the acceptable range to perform a
gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes, shift. If the shift is denied, a tone will sound.
and select the desired mode again. NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral
In Drive, the start gear is automatically selected. The mode without applying the service brakes, the
selected start gear can vary depending on several transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into
vehicle inputs such as load, grade, and axle/ gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes,
transmission ratio. The start gear can be changed and select the desired mode again.
using the shift control, provided the selected gear
would allow the vehicle to launch without damaging Manual Mode Override
the transmission. If the start gear is changed using
the shift control, it will be the default until the vehicle The system is equipped with a manual mode over-
is powered down or the selection is changed again ride function. If the vehicle is being "back driven" (for
manually. example, descending a grade and the engine speed
is excessively high), the system will upshift automati-
IMPORTANT: Prior to ascending a steep grade, cally. Also, if the start gear is changed and it causes
either reduce the default start gear by one the engine to lug at takeoff, the system will override
(using the shift control) or apply full throttle for the current position and select the best available
the duration of the grade so the vehicle main- gear.
tains the proper engine and vehicle speed dur-
ing the entire grade. Low (L)
In Drive, the transmission automatically performs up- Use Low when wanting to maximize engine braking
shifts and downshifts. However, when the transmis- and minimize the use of the brake pedal—for ex-
sion is near the shift point, the shift can be forced ample, when driving down long grades or when com-
using the upshift or downshift function of the shift ing to a stop. To select Low, push down on the multi-
control. function stalk switch, and hold in the down-shift
position for half a second or more. The lowest avail-
NOTE: The transmission may deny a shift while able start gear will be selected (the starting gear can-
ascending or descending a grade if the load of not be changed in Low).
the vehicle and grade of the terrain in combina-
tion with the drivetrain ratio and engine torque
17.9
If Low is selected while moving, the transmission will • Do not continually start and stop, especially
not upshift (unless the system initiates a Low over- when loaded; use a lower gear or Creep Mode.
ride). The system will downshift at the earliest oppor-
tunity to provide maximum engine braking. Creep Mode
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral The Creep Mode function allows the vehicle to main-
mode without applying the service brakes, the tain a constant speed at engine idle without the
transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into driver holding the throttle pedal position. This mode
gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes, is useful for very low-speed maneuvering and appli-
and select the desired mode again. cations where steady vehicle speed is required. The
vehicle speed is determined by the selected gear
Low Override ratio operating at governed low engine idle speed.
Any available gear may be selected, though the
The system is equipped with a Low override function. transmission will downshift or exit Creep Mode to
If the vehicle is being "back driven" (for example, de- prevent stalling if the engine lugs due to load condi-
scending a grade and the engine speed is exces- tions.
sively high), the system will upshift automatically.
Also, if the start gear is changed and it causes the By default, Creep Mode can be activated while in
engine to lug at takeoff, the system will override the Manual Mode or Low. Eaton’s ServiceRanger diag-
current position and downshift. nostic software can be used to enable Creep Mode
in Automatic Mode and/or Reverse.
Clutch Abuse Protection Engaging Creep Mode
Although a vehicle equipped with an Eaton auto- To engage Creep Mode:
mated transmission uses an automated clutch, the
clutch can still overheat and slip with improper use. 1. Select Low, Manual, or Automatic Mode, and the
The clutch abuse protection feature helps protect the desired gear (while stopped or moving).
clutch if the automated clutch starts to overheat.
2. Apply the throttle pedal to accelerate the vehicle
When the clutch abuse protection feature initiates
until the clutch is closed (engaged).
and sounds a warning tone, full clutch actuation must
be completed quickly. If it is not completed quickly 3. Release the throttle pedal. The vehicle will con-
enough, the system will either open the clutch (if the tinue moving at governed low engine idle speed.
throttle pedal is not being pressed) or close the
clutch (if the throttle pedal is being pressed). If the Exiting Creep Mode
abuse continues, the system will open the clutch and
take away throttle control briefly to allow the clutch to To exit Creep Mode, apply the throttle pedal to accel-
cool down. erate temporarily, or select a higher gear in Manual
Mode. (Creep Mode can be resumed in the selected
To protect the clutch: gear by releasing the throttle pedal.)
• Select the lowest possible start gear for the NOTE: The transmission will exit Creep Mode if
application. the engine lugs 150 rpm below the governed
• Use Creep Mode when appropriate. low engine idle speed. In this case, a lower gear
should be selected if available.
• Use the service brakes and the Hill Start Aid
when launching on a grade.
Hill Start Aid
• Minimize the time it takes to engage the clutch
from rest. Eaton transmissions are equipped with a Hill Start
Aid (HSA) feature to prevent the vehicle from rolling
• Do not use the throttle to hold the vehicle on a while on grades steeper than 3% and allow for a
grade; use the service brakes. controlled launch. A grade sensor is used to deter-
• Do not use the throttle to stop roll back on an mine when to engage the feature.
incline after Hill Start Aid disengages; use the HSA is "on" by default. It can be turned off by press-
service brakes, and then relaunch. ing and releasing the override switch on the dash
17.10
(see Chapter 4). HSA will turn back on after the first With the ATC enabled, the system will engage the
successful launch. brakes on the wheel or side that the wheel slip is
occurring to help the vehicle gain traction. The point
When the vehicle is stopped on a grade greater than
at which the traction control will actuate the braking
3% and in a forward mode or reverse, depress the
system increases with throttle: low throttle allows the
service brakes then release them. The vehicle will
system to brake the wheels earlier; heavy/full throttle
begin to move after 3 seconds, and the clutch will
raises the point of the acceptable wheel slip.
perform partial engagements to slow the vehicle mo-
tion. Either step on the brake or apply the throttle to Adhere to the following points when driving with ATC
continue negotiating the grade. enabled:
• If using Automatic mode in soft soil and/or
Engine Overspeed Protection sand, maintain the engine speed between
The system will upshift if necessary to prevent en- 1000 and 1300 rpm to prevent unnecessary
gine overspeed in Drive, Manual, and Low. upshifting.
• If using Manual mode in soft soil and/or sand,
Shuttle Shifting do not attempt an upshift and try to maintain
Shuttle shifting from reverse to any forward mode is the current gear.
only allowed if the vehicle speed is approximately • If the vehicle comes to a stop in the sand it
zero. may be necessary to back up prior to attempt-
ing forward movement.
Auto Start Gear Selection and To disable the ATC, depress the ATC switch (see
Override Chapter 4). This mode allows for the drive axle
wheels to spin.
The transmission uses various inputs to automatically
select the best start gear in Drive and Manual. This
selection can be changed using the shift control; Load-Based Shifting
however, if the selection requested could cause dam- An Eaton automated transmission system is adaptive
age or engine lugging, the request will be denied and and will change the shift points based on grade, en-
a tone will sound. gine RPM, throttle position, and vehicle load. After
changing loads or powering up, the system needs to
Skip Shifting relearn these inputs for the first few shifts to make
When appropriate, the transmission may skip shift in the proper adjustments.
Drive. When prevailing conditions like load and grade
allow, skip shifts can be performed in Manual mode Coasting
using the SmartShift control. When coasting to a stop on level terrain, the trans-
mission system may not downshift into the lower
Auto Neutral gears. It will select a gear after the throttle is applied.
An Eaton automated transmission system will auto-
matically shift to neutral if the vehicle is left in Drive Transmission Low Air Warning
and the parking brake is set. "AN" will show on the
gear display. To re-engage the transmission, select CAUTION
Neutral and then either Drive or Reverse on the shift
control (it will re-engage regardless of whether the If the yellow "Caution: Transmission Air Supply
parking brake is released). Low" popup appears while the vehicle is in op-
eration, slow down, safely pull the vehicle off the
Automatic Traction Control road, then correct the problem.
An Eaton automated transmission system requires Pneumatic controls are used to shift the transmis-
the Automatic Traction Control (ATC) option to be sion. If there is inadequate air pressure, a yellow
enabled when driving in soft soil/sand to prevent caution pop-up will appear and the quality of gear
wheel slippage and shifting issues. shifts may be degraded. See Fig. 17.9. Wait for air
pressure to build before operating the vehicle.
17.11
CAUTION General Information, Allison

Transmissions
If the red "Warning: Transmission Will Not Shift"
Allison transmissions have electronic shift controls
popup appears while the vehicle is in operation,
that can be programmed to allow the use of different
choose the safest location available to pull the
numbers of geared speeds. For instance, the trans-
vehicle off the road. Prepare for the vehicle to be
mission can be programmed to operate as a
immobile if the problem cannot be resolved.
4-speed, 5-speed, or 6-speed unit in the "primary"
If a severe loss of air pressure occurs, a red warning shift mode. If needed, a "secondary" shift mode can
pop-up will appear and the transmission will not shift. be programmed to provide another shift configuration
See Fig. 17.10. to optimize vehicle use under different operating con-
ditions. To activate a secondary shift mode, or other
Transmission Prognostics special functions programmed into the electronic con-
trol unit (ECU), briefly depress the mode switch on
The Eaton Ultrashift clutch requires the application of the multi-function stalk switch control; see Fig. 17.1,
grease for maintenance. item 3.
The Eaton transmission prognostics display can be These transmissions use the multi-function stalk
found by navigating to the maintenance screens in switch to select mode, direction, neutral, low, and to
the driver display. The screen will state if the Grease preselect lower ranges. The current gear, highest
Interval is OK or if grease needs to be added. See available gear, and mode are shown in the driver dis-
Fig. 17.11. play; see Fig. 17.12. Forward shifts can be made
either automatically or by using Manual mode.
1. Current Gear 3. Mode

2. Highest Gear
Available
Fig. 17.12, Allison Gear Display in Automatic Mode
10/21/2019 f611803 Operation Tips, Allison Transmissions

Fig. 17.11, Eaton Transmission Prognostics
WARNING
If the system status cannot be read, the message
"SNA" displays. Never shift from neutral (N) to drive (D) or re-
verse (R) at engine speeds above idle. The ve-
hicle will lurch forward or backward, which could
Allison Automatic cause property damage and personal injury.
Transmissions
Refer to the Allison website for additional information:
NOTICE
www.allisontransmission.com. The engine should never be operated for more
than thirty seconds at full throttle with the trans-
mission in gear and the output stalled. Prolonged
17.12
operation of this type will overheat the transmis- throttle pedal. The transmission will shift automati-
sion fluid and will result in severe damage to the cally.
transmission.
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral
mode without applying the service brakes, the
NOTICE transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into
Do not allow the vehicle to coast in neutral. This gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes,
can result in severe transmission damage. Also, and select the desired mode again.
no engine braking is available. In Drive, the start gear is automatically selected. The
The following tips highlight important operation prin- transmission automatically performs upshifts and
ciples. downshifts.
• Use reverse (R) to back the vehicle. Com- Manual Mode (M)
pletely stop the vehicle before shifting from a
forward gear to reverse, or from reverse to for- In manual mode, the driver selects the maximum al-
ward. lowed range. This may be helpful when traversing a
work site, railroad tracks, or steep grades, for ex-
• Select drive (D) for all normal driving condi- ample.
tions. The vehicle will start out in 1st gear (un-
less the transmission is programmed with 2nd When in automatic mode and with the D/N/R switch
gear start), and as speed increases, the trans- set to Drive (D), a long push on the shift control
mission will upshift through each gear auto- mode switch activates the manual mode (M). To in-
matically. As the vehicle slows down, the trans- crease selected range, pull the lever up (towards
mission will downshift to the correct gear you); to decrease the selected range, push the lever
automatically. down (away from you). The transmission will not up-
shift above the selected range unless the hold over-
• The pressure of your foot on the accelerator ride upshift speed is exceeded.
pedal influences the automatic shifting. When
the pedal is fully depressed, the transmission See Fig. 17.13 for an example of the driver display
will automatically upshift at higher engine with the transmission in manual mode.
speeds. A partially-depressed position of the
pedal will cause the upshifts to occur at a 2 1
lower engine speed.
• Occasionally the road, load, or traffic conditions
make it desirable to restrict the automatic shift-
ing to a lower range. The lower the gear range,
the greater the engine braking power. When in
Manual mode, push or pull on the multifunction
stalk switch to reach the desired gear. In the
lower gear ranges, the transmission will not 07/12/2017 f611482
upshift above the highest gear selected unless 1. Current Gear 2. Selected Gear
the hold override upshift speed is exceeded.
Fig. 17.13, Allison Gear Display in Manual Mode
• Use neutral and apply the parking brake when
the vehicle is parked with the engine running. NOTE: The transmission may deny a downshift
if the engine speed would fall outside of the ac-
Automatic Mode (A) ceptable range.
In automatic drive mode, upshifts and downshifts are NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral
made by the transmission without driver intervention. mode without applying the service brakes, the
Automatic mode is the default start mode. If in transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into
manual mode, a short push on the shift control mode gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes,
switch activates the automatic mode (A). Rotate the and select the desired mode again.
D/N/R switch to Drive (D), and press down on the
17.13
Low (L)
Use Low when wanting to maximize engine braking
and minimize the use of the brake pedal—for ex-
ample, when driving down long grades or when com-
ing to a stop. To select Low, push down on the multi-
function stalk switch, and hold in the down-shift
position for half a second or more. The lowest avail-
able start gear will be selected (the starting gear can-
not be changed in Low).
If Low is selected while moving, the transmission will
not upshift (unless the system initiates a Low over-
ride). The system will downshift at the earliest oppor-
tunity to provide maximum engine braking.
In the driver display, the low gear is shown as "1."
See Fig. 17.14.
10/21/2019 f611483a
Fig. 17.15, Allison Transmission Prognostics
1. Low (displayed as "1")

2. Highest Gear
Available in Low
Fig. 17.14, Allison Gear Display in Low Gear
NOTE: If attempting to select a non-Neutral

mode without applying the service brakes, the
transmission will not shift into gear. To shift into
gear, select Neutral, apply the service brakes,
and select the desired mode again.
Transmission Prognostics
The Allison transmission prognostics display can be
found by navigating to the maintenance screens in
the driver display. The prognostics screen displays
information on the transmission health status (oil filter
status, oil level, and oil life). See Fig. 17.15. If trans-
mission health falls below acceptable limits, a mes-
sage will be shown on the driver display.
NOTE: For a valid oil level measurement, the
vehicle must be stopped on a level surface with
the transmission in neutral (N).
17.14
18
Manual Transmissions and
Clutch
Eaton® Fuller® Manual Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
Eaton® Fuller® Manual • Never make a range shift or a splitter shift

while the vehicle is in reverse.
Transmissions • Never move the range-preselection lever with
General Information the transmission in neutral while the vehicle is
moving.
A Freightliner New Cascadia vehicle may be
equipped with an Eaton 10-, 13-, or 18-speed • Skip ratios while shifting only when operating
manual transmission. Vehicles with Eaton manual conditions permit, depending on the load,
transmissions have clutch brakes and a hydraulic grade, and road speed.
clutch actuation system. • Never coast with the transmission in neutral.
The transmission shift pattern is printed on a decal
attached to the driver-side sun visor or to the dash Clutch
below the center dash panel. The shift pattern may
also be printed on the shift knob. General Information
NOTE: For additional information, refer to the The hydraulic clutch control system consists of a
Eaton website, www.roadranger.com. pedal unit and a slave cylinder connected by a hy-
draulic hose. The components of the system have
Transmission Operation Tips been specially designed to use DOT 4 brake fluid.
The hydraulic system is self-adjusting.
Follow these important operation principles:
Typical operation will not break down the clutch fric-
• For all conditions, use the highest gear that is tion surfaces. Heat and wear are almost nonexistent
still low enough to start the vehicle moving with when a clutch is fully engaged. However, during the
the engine at or near idle speed, and without moment of engagement, when the clutch is picking
slipping the clutch excessively. up the load, considerable heat is generated. If a
When operating on-highway with no load or clutch slips excessively, high temperatures develop
under ideal conditions, use 1st gear to start the quickly between the flywheel, driven discs, and pres-
vehicle moving forward. sure plates. An improperly adjusted or slipping clutch
can generate temperatures high enough to cause the
When operating off-road or under adverse con- friction-facing material to char and burn, destroying
ditions, use LOW gear to start the vehicle mov- the clutch.
ing forward.
To ensure long service life of the clutch, start in the
• Use the clutch brake to stop gear rotation right gear and be alert to clutch malfunctions.
when shifting into LOW or reverse while the
vehicle is stationary. The clutch brake is actu- Clutch Operation
ated by depressing the clutch pedal all the way
to the floor. Clutch Break-In
• Partially disengage the clutch to break engine With a new or newly installed clutch, the clutch may
torque during normal gear shifts. slip for a short time while the friction surfaces break-
in. However, allowing the clutch to slip for more than
• Double-clutch between all upshifts and down- two seconds can severely damage the clutch disc,
shifts that require movement of the shift knob. pressure plate, and the flywheel.
Splitting of gears does not require movement
of the shift knob. During initial operation of a new vehicle or a vehicle
with a new clutch, check for clutch slippage during
• Never push the range-preselection lever down acceleration. If the clutch slips, decelerate until the
into low range while operating in high range, clutch does not slip. Allow the clutch to cool 15 to 30
except when downshifting from 5th gear to 4th seconds, and then gradually accelerate again. If the
gear. clutch continues to slip, repeat the procedure. If nec-
• Do not shift from high range to low range at essary, repeat the procedure up to five times. If the
high vehicle speeds. clutch slips after five attempts, stop the vehicle. Allow
the clutch to cool for at least one hour. Notify your
Freightliner dealer of the problem.
18.1
Manual Transmissions and Clutch
NOTICE WARNING
Do not allow sustained slippage of the clutch; Always shift into the gear that is correct for the
this could severely damage the clutch disc, pres- traveling speed of the vehicle and engage the
sure plate, or flywheel. Damage caused by clutch clutch. Coasting with the clutch disengaged can
slippage due to improper break-in is not warrant- prevent engagement of the correct transmission
able. gear which can cause loss of vehicle control,
possibly resulting in personal injury or property
Using the Clutch Brake damage.
The clutch brake is applied by depressing the clutch High clutch disc speeds while coasting can also
pedal past the fully released clutch position, almost cause the clutch facing to be thrown off the disc.
to the floor plate. The last part of the clutch pedal Flying debris from the clutch can cause injury to
travel will compress the clutch brake plates together, persons in the cab.
stopping the transmission input shaft. The purpose of
the clutch brake is to stop the transmission gears Clutch Adjustment
from rotating in order to quickly engage a transmis-
sion gear after idling in neutral. Eaton Fuller Solo clutches are adjustment-free. As
the clutch wears, its wear-adjusting technology moni-
tors clutch components and makes any necessary
NOTICE adjustments. The wear adjusting technology comes
from two sliding cams, which rotate to maintain the
Never apply the clutch brake when the vehicle is proper adjustment. Atop the upper cam, a wear indi-
moving. If the clutch brake is applied when the cating tab mirrors the cam’s movement, letting you
vehicle is moving, the clutch brake will try to know when it’s time to replace the clutch.
stop or decelerate the vehicle, causing rapid
wear of the clutch brake friction discs. Consider-
able heat will be generated, causing damage to
the release bearings and the transmission front
bearings.
Holding the Vehicle on an Incline

Always use the vehicle service brakes to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards while stopped on a
hill. Slipping the clutch on a hill to maintain the ve-
hicle position will quickly damage the clutch assem-
bly.
Coasting
Coasting with the clutch pedal depressed and the
transmission in a low gear can cause high driven
disc speed. The clutch speed can be much higher
under these conditions than when the engine is driv-
ing the clutch. This condition creates a hazardous
situation due to the lack of vehicle control and due to
the high clutch disc speed. Engaging the clutch
under these conditions can cause component dam-
age because of the shock loads to the clutch and
drivetrain.
18.2
19
Drive Axles
Interaxle Lock, Tandem Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Driver-Controlled Differential Lock (DCDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2
Drive Axles
Interaxle Lock, Tandem Axles 1 2 3

LOCK LOCK LOCK
The interaxle lock (axle lock, interaxle differential
lockout) feature causes the drive axle shafts to rotate
together, and is recommended for use under adverse
road conditions where greater traction is needed.
When engaged, the interaxle lock essentially makes
INTR FWD REAR
the driveshaft a solid connection between the drive AXLE DIFF DIFF
axles. Power entering the forward axle is transmitted
straight through to the rearmost axle(s). Driveline UNLOCK UNLOCK UNLOCK
torque is now delivered equally and the drive axles,
and wheels, turn together at the same speed. The LOCK LOCK LOWER
interaxle lock increases drivetrain and tire wear and

should be used only when improved traction is
required.
A status screen showing engaged locks is found in
the vehicle operations menus on the driver display. DIFF DIFF LIFT
LOCK LOCK AXLE
See Fig. 19.1.
UNLOCK UNLOCK RAISE
4 5 6
09/15/2016 f611344
1. Interaxle Lock Switch
2. Forward Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch
3. Rear Drive Axle Differential Lock Switch
4. Differential Lock Switch, 6X4
5. Differential Lock Switch, 4X2
6. Lift Axle Switch
Fig. 19.2, Axle Switches
Interaxle Lock Operation

NOTICE
The interaxle lock should not be engaged on a
vehicle with obviously spinning wheels. Engage-
ment at high speed or power can damage the
axle(s).
NOTE: If the interaxle lock is engaged when the
engine is turned off, the interaxle lock will disen-
04/30/2020 f611458 gage.
Fig. 19.1, Interaxle and Differential Locks Status Screen Do not wait until traction is lost and the tires are
spinning before engaging the interaxle lock.
Interaxle Lock Switch 1. With the engine running, press the upper half of
The interaxle lock switch, shown in Fig. 19.2, allows the interaxle lock switch to engage the interaxle
the driver to lock the drive axles together. If the ve- lock. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the
hicle is equipped with Detroit axles, the switch illumi- accelerator until the interaxle lock engages.
nation indicates the lock is engaged. If the vehicle is equipped with Detroit axles, the
illumination of the switch indicates the lock is en-
gaged. Depending on the vehicle configuration, a
buzzer may also sound.
19.1
Drive Axles
NOTE: On some vehicles, the differential lock

NOTICE system is connected through the low speed
range of the transmission. If this system is used,
Do not operate the vehicle continuously with the
interaxle locked during extended good road con- the transmission must be in the low speed
ditions. To do so could result in damage to the range for the wheels to fully lock. In addition,
axle gearing and excessive driveline and tire shifting out of low speed range will also disen-
wear. gage the differential lock.
2. Proceed over poor road conditions with caution. NOTE: If the DCDL is engaged when the engine
3.
is shut down, the DCDL will disengage.
After leaving poor road conditions, press the
lower half of the interaxle lock switch to disen- 1. With the engine running, press the upper half of
gage the interaxle lock. If the vehicle is moving, the differential lock switch to engage the DCDL.
briefly let up on the accelerator to allow the inter-
2. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac-
axle lock to disengage.
celerator to relieve torque on the gearing, allow-
If the vehicle is equipped with Detroit axles, the ing the differential to fully lock. An indicator light
deactivation of the indicator light on the switch on the differential lock switch illuminates when
indicates disengagement. the lock is engaged. Depending on the vehicle
4. Resume driving at normal speed. configuration, a buzzer may also sound.
Driver-Controlled Differential WARNING

Lock (DCDL) Be especially careful when driving under slippery
conditions with the differential locked. Though
The driver-controlled differential lock (DCDL) feature forward traction is improved, the vehicle can still
(side-to-side wheel lock, traction control, or traction slip sideways, causing possible loss of vehicle
equalizer) is available on vehicles with single- or control, personal injury, and property damage.
tandem-drive axles.
3. Drive cautiously and do not exceed 25 mph (40
The DCDL provides maximum traction for slippery km/h). When the differential is fully locked, the
conditions by forcing the wheels on each drive axle turning radius will increase because the vehicle
governed by the switch to rotate together. When the understeers. See Fig. 19.3.
DCDL is engaged, the clutch collar completely locks
the differential case, gearing, and axle shafts to- A
gether, maximizing the traction of both wheels. Use
the DCDL if the interaxle lock does not provide suffi-
cient traction.
A status screen showing engaged locks is found in
the vehicle operations menus on the driver display. B
See Fig. 19.1.
Differential Lock Switch

Each differential lock is controlled by a switch on the 02/03/2017 f350079a
dash. See Fig. 19.2. A. Turning Radius When the DCDL is Engaged
(understeer condition)
DCDL Operation B. Turning Radius When the DCDL is Disengaged
Fig. 19.3, Turning Radii

NOTICE
4. Press the lower half of the differential lock switch
Engage the DCDL only when the vehicle is to disengage the DCDL after leaving poor road
stopped or moving at less than 5 mph (8 km/h). conditions.
Engaging the DCDL at speeds above 5 mph (8
km/h) can cause internal axle damage.
19.2
Drive Axles
5. If the vehicle is moving, briefly let up on the ac-

celerator to allow the wheels to fully unlock, then
resume driving at normal speed.
Single Drive Axles with Traction

Equalizer
Some single drive axles are equipped with a traction
equalizer that is a load-sensing, self-actuating fea-
ture. A traction equalizer provides normal differential
action where traction is good. When one wheel be-
gins to spin faster than the other, clutch plates in the
differential housing automatically engage, delivering
power to both wheels. There is no operator control
with this feature.
NOTICE
Tire sizes on both rear wheels should be the
same on axles equipped with a traction equalizer.
If not, excessive wear may occur in the traction
equalizer.
19.3
20
Fifth Wheels
Fifth Wheels, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.4
Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.6
Fifth Wheels
Fifth Wheels, General Fontaine and Holland Fifth Wheels

Information Coupling
1. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to
WARNING prevent the trailer from moving.
2. Ensure the fifth wheel jaw is fully open and the
Do not use any fifth wheel that fails to operate operating rod is in the unlocked position. See
properly. Doing so may cause loss of vehicle Fig. 20.1 or Fig. 20.2.
control, possibly resulting in severe personal in-
jury or death.
Fifth Wheel Lubrication

1
WARNING
A standard fifth wheel plate must be kept lubri-
cated to prevent binding between the tractor and A
trailer. A binding fifth wheel could cause erratic
steering and loss of vehicle control, possibly re- 2
sulting in personal injury or death.
The standard fifth wheel plate must be kept well lu-
bricated with chassis grease to prevent friction and
1
binding between the tractor fifth wheel plate and the
trailer.
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, inspect the condition
of the low-lube pads. There should be no damaged
or missing pieces. Slight puckering at the outside B
edges is normal. 2
For lubrication instructions, see Group 31 of the ve- 04/06/2017 f310110a

hicle Maintenance Manual. NOTE: Make sure the safety latch is down when the
control handle is locked.
Fifth Wheel Coupling A. Unlocked B. Locked
1. Safety Latch 2. Lock Control Handle
Fifth wheel coupling is activated with the lock control
handle located on either the right side or left side of Fig. 20.1, Fontaine Locking Mechanism
the fifth wheel. Coupling has successfully occurred
when the kingpin has been forced into the jaws and 3. Make sure the fifth wheel top plate is tilted so the
the lock control handle has moved to the locked ramps are as low as possible.
position. 4. Position the tractor so that the center of the fifth
wheel is in line with the trailer kingpin. The king-
NOTICE pin should be in a position to enter the throat of
the locking mechanism.
Some fifth wheels may be mounted on sliding
rails. Before attempting to couple a trailer to a
sliding fifth wheel, the slide feature must be
NOTICE
locked to prevent the top plate from sliding rap- Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
idly forward or rearward, causing damage to the cause improper coupling, which could result in
fifth wheel or kingpin. damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
5. Adjust the trailer height if required.
20.1
Fifth Wheels
B
1
04/28/2017 f311125
A. Adjust trailer height B. Ramps tilted down
1 Fig. 20.4, Trailer Connection Point, Low-Lube Fifth
3 Wheel
6. With the fifth wheel lock opening aligned with the

trailer kingpin, back the tractor slowly toward the
trailer. After sliding under the trailer, STOP to
prevent from hitting the kingpin too hard, then
resume backing slowly until the fifth wheel locks.
04/19/2017 f310447
On a standard fifth wheel, the fifth wheel must lift
1. Safety Latch the trailer.
2. Operating Rod (locked)
3. Operating Rod (unlocked) On a low-lube fifth wheel, do not lift the trailer as
this may damage the fifth wheel plate.
Fig. 20.2, Holland Simplex SE Locking Mechanism
7. Apply the tractor parking brakes.
For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to WARNING
8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the fifth wheel
pivot. See Fig. 20.3. A visual inspection is required by law. Some im-
For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel proper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incor-
should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See rect coupling could cause the trailer to discon-
Fig. 20.4. nect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury
or death.
D 8. Perform a coupling inspection, checking that
A
there is no gap between the bottom of the trailer
C and the fifth wheel, and that the kingpin is se-
curely locked. See Fig. 20.5
When lockup has occurred, the fifth wheel con-
trol handle moves to the locked position. Make
sure that the safety latch is down over the lock
B control handle to hold the control handle in the
locked position. (The safety latch will only rotate
04/28/2017 f311124
down if the operating rod is fully retracted in the
locked position.) See Fig. 20.1 for Fontaine fifth
A. Fifth wheel must lift C. Ramps tilted down wheels. See Fig. 20.2 for Holland fifth wheels.
trailer D. 4 to 8 inches
B. Adjust trailer height 9. Release the tractor parking brakes. Test for king-
pin lockup slowly inching the tractor forward, pull-
Fig. 20.3, Trailer Connection Point, Standard Fifth ing on the trailer against the chocks.
Wheel
20.2
Fifth Wheels
A B
04/28/2017 f311126
A. No gap between trailer B. Kingpin inside lock
and fifth wheel
Fig. 20.5, Coupling Inspection
10. After lockup is completed, connect the tractor-to- 04/28/2017 f311128

trailer air system lines and the electrical cable to A. Lock held open by catch mechanism
the trailer. Take care to prevent dirt or foreign
material from entering the air system lines. Fig. 20.6, Jost Release Handle Unlocked
brakes are set. See Chapter 4 in this manual for

NOTICE operation of the dash-mounted brake controls.
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables posi- NOTICE
tioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rub-
bing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting Attempting to couple at the wrong height may
in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, poten- cause improper coupling, which could result in
tially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems. damage to the fifth wheel or kingpin.
11. Charge the air brake system with air, checking 7. Adjust the trailer height (if required).
that the air connections do not leak. For a standard fifth wheel plate, the trailer
should contact the fifth wheel approximately 4 to
WARNING 8 inches (10 to 20 cm) behind the pivot. See
Fig. 20.3.
Incorrect fifth wheel lock adjustment could cause For a low-lube fifth wheel plate, the fifth wheel
the trailer to disconnect, possibly resulting in se- must slide freely under the trailer, and the trailer
rious personal injury or death. should contact the fifth wheel at the pivot. See
12. With the trailer wheels chocked and the brakes Fig. 20.4.
set, check for clearance between the kingpin and 8. Back the tractor under the trailer.
the fifth wheel jaws by moving the tractor forward
and backward against the locked kingpin. If slack On a standard fifth wheel, the fifth wheel must lift
is present, uncouple the trailer and have the fifth the trailer.
wheel inspected and adjusted by a certified On a low-lube fifth wheel, do not lift the trailer as
technician. this may damage the fifth wheel plate.
Jost Fifth Wheel Coupling 9. After sliding under the trailer, STOP to prevent
from hitting the kingpin too hard, then resume
1. Tilt the ramp down. backing slowly until the fifth wheel locks.
2. Open the kingpin locks. See Fig. 20.6.
3. Back the vehicle close to the trailer, centering the
WARNING
kingpin on the fifth wheel. A visual inspection is required by law. Some im-
4. Chock the trailer wheels. proper couplings can pass a pull test. Sound is
not reliable. Get out of the cab and look. Incor-
5. Connect the air lines and electrical cable. rect coupling could cause the trailer to discon-
6. Ensure that the red trailer air supply valve (trailer nect, possibly resulting in serious personal injury
brake) is pulled out, and that the trailer parking or death.
20.3
Fifth Wheels
10. Apply the tractor parking brake, then perform a 6.1 Fontaine: Lift the safety latch and pull the
physical check for positive kingpin lockup, and lock control handle to the unlocked posi-
that there is no gap between the trailer and the tion. See Fig. 20.1.
fifth wheel. See Fig. 20.5.
6.2 Holland: In the locked position the safety
11. Ensure that the release handle is in the locked indicator swings freely over the operating
position adjacent to the casting. See Fig. 20.7. rod. See Fig. 20.8, View A.
OK OK
04/28/2017 f311127
Fig. 20.7, Jost Release Handle Locked
12. Release the tractor parking brakes and test for To unlock the mechanism, manually rotate
kingpin lockup by slowly moving the tractor for- the safety indicator toward the rear of the
ward, pulling on the trailer against the chocks. fifth wheel. See Fig. 20.8, View B.
Pull the operating rod out. When the
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling upper operating rod shoulder is outside
the slot, raise the handle and place the
Manual Uncoupling shoulder of the upper rod against the plate
1. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes. casting, above the slot. See Fig. 20.8,
View C.
2. Chock the trailer rear wheels.
The fifth wheel is now in the lockset posi-
3. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is tion and is ready for uncoupling. As the
removed from the fifth wheel. tractor pulls away from the trailer the king-
pin forces the jaw to rotate, contacting the
4. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air system lines
lock. Continued rotation of the jaw forces
and electrical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent
the lock to move outward, and drops the
dirt or foreign material from entering the lines.
upper rod back into the slot. See Fig. 20.8
5. Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red View D. The wheel is now ready for
trailer-air-supply knobs are out, the tractor and coupling.
trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer 6.3 Jost: Pull the retractable handle out, then
is prepared for uncoupling. secure it in the open position with the
6. Release the kingpin locking mechanism following catch. See Fig. 20.6.
the instructions for each manufacturer below. 7. Release the tractor parking brake then drive out
slowly, allowing the trailer to slide down the fifth
wheel and pick-up ramps.
20.4
Fifth Wheels
1
4
A 2 C
B D
11/02/2010 f311133
A. Locked Position C. Lockset Position (upper rod resting against casting
B. Unlatched Position (safety indicator rotated towards the above slot)
rear of the fifth wheel) D. Open Position (ready for recoupling)
1. Safety Indicator 3. Upper Rod
2. Operating Rod 4. Plate Casting
Fig. 20.8, Holland Kingpin Locking Mechanism
Air-Actuated Uncoupling WARNING

A dash-mounted kingpin release switch (if equipped)
may be used to uncouple the trailer. See Fig. 20.9. Once the kingpin release switch has been
pushed, the kingpin lock is released. The vehicle
NOTE: In the event of an air system failure, air- MUST NOT be driven with the trailer until the
actuated kingpins can be manually released fol- trailer has been uncoupled and coupled again.
lowing the instructions for manual unlocking. Failure to do so may result in separation of the
trailer from the tractor, possibly causing serious
personal injury or death.
20.5
Fifth Wheels
K−PIN
REL
03/09/2016 f611341
06/14/2016 f611426
Fig. 20.9, Kingpin Release Switch
Fig. 20.10, Kingpin Release Alert Screen
Preparing the Trailer for Uncoupling
Before using the air valve to unlock a fifth wheel Fifth Wheel Slide
kingpin, prepare the trailer as follows.
1. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes. WARNING
2. Chock the trailer rear wheels. Adjust the fifth wheel slide correctly, and do not
3. Lower the trailer landing gear until the weight is overload any tractor axle by incorrectly loading
removed from the fifth wheel. the trailer. Incorrect slide adjustment or improper
axle loading could cause erratic steering and
4. Disconnect the tractor-to-trailer air lines and elec- loss of vehicle control, possibly resulting in seri-
trical cable. Plug the air lines to prevent dirt or ous personal injury or death.
foreign material from entering the lines.
On sliding fifth wheel assemblies, the fifth-wheel
Air-Activated Kingpin Unlock plate is attached to rails that allow forward and rear-
ward movement of the fifth wheel to optimally distrib-
1. Verify that both the yellow parking-brake and red ute the load across the axles. Slots are evenly
trailer-air supply knobs are out, the tractor and spaced along the slide rails, and retractable wedges
trailer parking brakes are set, and that the trailer are positioned through the slots to hold the fifth
is prepared for uncoupling. wheel in the desired position.
NOTE: The kingpin release will not actuate if the The amount of load distribution on the front steering
switch is pushed for less than 3 seconds, the axle and rear drive axle(s) will have a direct effect on
vehicle is moving, or the parking brake is not the steering control of the vehicle. Determine the
set. Unless all these conditions are met, the front and rear axle weights by weighing the vehicle
trailer is not uncoupled and an alert is shown on on scales designed for this purpose.
the driver display. The maximum axle weight ratings are shown on the
2. Push and hold the kingpin release switch Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
(Fig. 20.9) for a minimum of 3 seconds. The sys- label or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
tem will apply air for 20 to 30 seconds to ensure (CMVSS) label attached to the left rear door post of
the kingpin unlocks. When the kingpin is un- the tractor. The desired load on the axle is no less
locked, a notification is displayed; see than 80 percent of the maximum axle weight rating,
Fig. 20.10. but in no instances should the axle load exceed the
maximum axle weight rating given on the FMVSS or
3. Release the tractor parking brake. CMVSS label.
4. Drive out from under the trailer.
Manual Slide Operation
The manual slide feature is operated from the fifth
wheel plate with a manual release handle using the
following procedure. See Fig. 20.11.
20.6
Fifth Wheels
05/05/2017 f310050
2
07/25/95 f310190 Fig. 20.12, Releasing the Sliding Fifth Wheel, (Fontaine)
1. Locking Wedge
2. Slide Release Pull Handle
5
Fig. 20.11, Manual Release Sliding Fifth Wheel 4
(Fontaine shown)
6
1. Stop the tractor and trailer in a straight line on 3
level ground. Pull the red trailer air supply knob
to apply the trailer parking brakes. 8
2. Apply the tractor parking brake, then release the 3

2
sliding mechanism using the appropriate method
for the fifth wheel manufacturer. 1 7
2.1 Fontaine: Lift the slide release pull handle
to disengage it from the guide plate. Then,
pull out the handle until it is in the un- 05/05/2017 f310445
locked position and can be positioned
1. Baseplate 5. Slider Saddle Plate
against the guide plate to hold it out. The
2. Bolted Stop 6. Safety Latch
handle will stay in the unlocked position 3. Baseplate Rail 7. Operating Rod
until it is manually disengaged from the 4. Fifth Wheel Mount 8. Operating Lever
guide plate. See Fig. 20.12.
Fig. 20.13, Sliding Fifth Wheel Manual Release,
2.2 Holland: Pull the operating rod out. Make (Holland Simplex)
sure both side plungers have released.
See Fig. 20.13.
3. Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to re-
NOTICE
move the weight from the tractor. When moving the fifth wheel to the desired posi-
4. Chock the front and rear of the trailer tires to tion, be sure the trailer landing gear will not at
prevent the trailer from moving. any time come in contact with the tractor frame
or other components. Make sure that the front of
5. Release the tractor parking brakes, then slowly the trailer will not come in contact with the rear
move the tractor forward or backward until the of the cab or with other components if they ex-
fifth wheel is in the desired location. tend beyond the rear of the cab.
20.7
Fifth Wheels
Ensure the locking plungers have released. See

WARNING Fig. 20.15.
Check that the locking wedges have seated in the For Jost fifth wheels, the mechanism activates as
slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may shown in Fig. 20.16.
allow disengagement of the tractor from the
trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal in- 1
jury or death.
6. Apply the tractor parking brakes, then lock the
sliding member in position using one of the fol-
lowing methods:
6.1 Fontaine: Disengage the slide release
pull handle from the guide plate. The slide
release pull handle is spring-loaded in the
locked position and will seek the locked
position when disengaged from the guide
plate. After the slide release pull handle
returns to the fully locked position, visually
and physically check the locking wedges
to make sure they are fully inserted into
the slots in the slide rails. Make sure the
handle is locked in position against the 2
guide plate. 07/25/95 f310189
1. Locking Wedge 2. Air Cylinder
6.2 Holland: Raise the operating rod so that it
is free to move inward. Make sure that the Fig. 20.15, Air-Operated Sliding Fifth Wheel (Fontaine
lock pins have seated in the base plate shown)
rail holes and the operating rod moves
into the locked position. 2. Lower the trailer landing gear just enough to re-
move the weight from the tractor.
NOTE: The fifth wheel may need to be moved
slightly to enable the locking wedges to enter 3. Pull the red trailer-air-supply knob to set the
the fully locked position. trailer-parking brakes.
4. Slowly move the tractor forward or backward
Air Slide Operation until the fifth wheel is in the desired location.
The slide feature may be operated with an air switch
mounted in the dash, that operates an air cylinder NOTICE
that locks and unlocks the slide. See Fig. 20.14.
Ensure the trailer landing gear does not come in
SLIDE
contact with the tractor frame or other compo-
nents, and that the front of the trailer will not
come in contact with the rear of the cab or other
components if they extend beyond the rear of the
cab.
5. Apply the tractor parking brakes.
AIR
SLIDE
WARNING
LOCK
09/28/2016 f611343 Check that the locking wedges have seated in the
1. Fifth Wheel Air-Slide Switch slots. Failure to achieve complete lockup may
allow disengagement of the tractor from the
Fig. 20.14, Air-Slide Switch trailer, possibly resulting in serious personal in-
jury or death.
1. Set the air-slide switch (Fig. 20.14) to SLIDE.
20.8
Fifth Wheels
09/10/2010 f311131
A. Unlocked B. Locked
Fig. 20.16, Jost Sliding Fifth Wheel
6. Set the air-slide switch to LOCK. Visually inspect

the locking wedges or plungers to make sure
that they are fully inserted in the slide rail slots.
Verify that the plungers have engaged by tugging
the tractor forward while the trailer brakes are
locked and the wheels are chocked.
NOTE: The fifth wheel may need to be moved
slightly to enable the locking wedges to fully
lock.
20.9
21
Trailer Couplings
Holland Trailer Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Trailer Couplings
Holland Trailer Coupling 2

1
General Information
IMPORTANT: Refer to the Holland web site 3
(www.hollandhitch.com) for additional informa-
tion.
The Holland trailer coupling is designed for use with
trailers having a maximum gross weight of 10,000 lb.
(4540 kg) for Holland PH-10RP41 and PH-10RP51,
or 30,000 lb. (13,610 kg) for Holland PH-30RP41 and
PH-30RP51. It is a rigid-type pintle hook, used only
on tractor applications, and is fastened to the rear
closing crossmember of the vehicle. It is a non-air- 4
adjusted coupling. See Fig. 21.1 and Fig. 21.2.
1
02/17/2017 f311176
1. Lock 3. Latch
2. Lock Pin 4. Pintle Hook
2
Fig. 21.2, Holland Trailer Coupling with Lock Pin
bing may wear through hoses or cables, resulting

in air leaks, or exposed or broken wires, poten-
tially affecting trailer brake or electrical systems.
3
6. Connect the trailer electrical and air lines.
Trailer Release
1. Apply the tractor and trailer parking brakes.
01/12/2016 f311187
1. Lock 3. Pintle Hook
2. Latch WARNING
Fig. 21.1, Holland Trailer Coupling with FastLatch Do not use the trailer air supply for parking trail-
ers not equipped with spring parking brakes.
Trailer Hookup This applies the trailer service brakes only. As air
1. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer. bleeds from the trailer brake system, brake appli-
cation is lost. This could allow the unattended
2. Remove the lock pin (if equipped), then lift the vehicle to roll away, possibly resulting in serious
lock handle and raise the latch. personal injury or death.
3. Back up the vehicle until the drawbar eye is over 2. Chock the front and rear tires of the trailer.
the pintle hook.
3. Disconnect the trailer air and electrical lines.
4. Lower the trailer, until the drawbar eye rests on Plug the air lines to keep them free of dirt.
the pintle hook.
4. Take the weight of the trailer drawbar off the
5. Push the latch closed, then insert the lock pin (if pintle hook.
equipped).
5. Open the latch by removing the lock pin (if
equipped), then lift up the lock and raise the
NOTICE latch.
Always make sure the connection hanger keeps 6. Slowly drive the vehicle away from the trailer.
the trailer air hoses and electrical cables posi-
tioned so that they do not rub on anything. Rub-
21.1
22
Headlights
Headlight Aiming, Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Headlight Aim Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Headlight Aim Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Halogen Headlamps Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3
Headlights
Headlight Aiming, Preliminary

Checks A
Before checking or adjusting the headlight aim, do
the following.
• Check that the hood is closed and latched.
• Remove any large amounts of mud or ice from
the underside of the fenders.
• Check the springs for sagging or broken
leaves.
• Check the suspension for proper functioning of
the leveling mechanism. On cabs with air sus-
pensions, make sure that the height is properly 09/21/2016 f546613
adjusted. A. The height adjusting dot is located in front of the
• Check for damage to the hood and hinge as- low-beam lamp on the headlight lens.
sembly. Repair as necessary. Fig. 22.1, Headlight
• With the vehicle unloaded, check that the tires
Table 22.1, adjust the vertical positioning of that
are inflated to the recommended air pressure. headlight.
• Clean the headlight lenses. Use a soft cloth
with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent, and Headlight Aim Adjustment
water.
The adjusting screw is located on the bottom of the
Headlight Aim Check headlight assembly, accessible from inside the wheel
well when the hood is closed. See Fig. 22.4. Re-
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, 25 ft (7.6 m) move the plug. Turn the adjusting screw clockwise to
away from, and perpendicular to, a vertical raise the beam and counterclockwise to lower it, until
screen or wall. Shut down the engine and set the the beam pattern meets the acceptable standard.
parking brake. Chock the tires.
2. Each headlight has a height adjusting dot on the
lens. See Fig. 22.1. Measure the distance from
the ground to the height adjusting dot on each
headlight (Fig. 22.2, Item A). Note those
distances.
3. On the screen or wall, mark the locations of each
headlight bulb center using the distances found
in step 2. See Fig. 22.2, Items 2 and 3.
4. Turn on the low-beam headlights.
5. Check the vertical adjustment of the low beams.
The center of each beam projection should fall
on or near the marks made during step 3. See
Fig. 22.3.
6. Use Table 22.1 to determine the maximum verti-
cal distance allowable between the marks on the
wall and the center of each low-beam projection.
If the distance between either projection center
and the mark made on the wall or screen is
greater than the maximum distance given in
22.1
Headlights
2
3
A A
B
B
7.6 m)
25 ft (
1
02/25/2016 f546264
A. Measure the distance from the ground to the center of each headlight bulb.
B. Mark where the center of each headlight projection should appear.
1. Screen or Wall 3. Center of Left-Hand Headlight Projection
2. Center of Right-Hand Headlight Projection
Fig. 22.2, Headlight Aiming Screen/Wall
1
2
02/25/2016 f546265
A. Measurement: 25 ft (7.6 m)
1. Low-Beam Angle Upper Limit 3. Low-Beam Angle Lower Limit
2. Ideal Low-Beam Projection
Fig. 22.3, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits
22.2
Headlights
02/25/2016 f546266
Fig. 22.4, Headlight Adjusting (shown with the hood

open)
Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits

Distance Between Ground Desired Variation (Fig. 22.3, Upper Limit (Fig. 22.3, Item Lower Limit (Fig. 22.3, Item
and Headlight: inches (mm) Item 2): inches (mm) 1): inches (mm) 3): inches (mm)
22–36 (560–900) 0 3.9 (100) 3.9 (100)
36–48 (900–1200) 2 (50) down 2 (50) 6 (150)
48–54 (1200–1400) 4 (101.6) down 1.6 (40) 6.5 (165)
Table 22.1, Vertical Low-Beam Headlight Variation Limits
Halogen Headlamps Bulb There are three bulbs housed in the headlight bucket
assembly. See Fig. 22.5. Each bulb can be replaced
Replacement using the same procedure.
IMPORTANT: Use only SAE/DOT approved H11 1. Open the hood.
bulbs with a 55 watt rating for the headlamps. 2. Remove the back cover from the headlamp
Use only SAE/DOT approved 4157 NAK LL housing.
lamps for turn signal and marker lamps. Install-
ing higher wattage bulbs may damage the head- NOTE: Remove the bulb from the headlamp
lamp housing or the wiring. assembly before disconnecting the electrical
connector.
22.3
Headlights
1
1
2
01/11/2019 f546929
1. Turn Signal Lamp, 4157NAL LL, 28.5/8.3 Watt (dual
01/11/2019 f546928
element)
2. Low Beam Headlamp, H11, 55 Watt 1. Red Locking Tab
3. High Beam Headlamp, H11, 55 Watt
Fig. 22.6, Halogen Headlamp Electrical Connector
Fig. 22.5, Halogen Headlamp Assembly
See Fig. 22.7 to verify from the front that the
3. Remove the bulb from the headlamp assembly three tabs of the headlamp housing are correctly
by twisting the bulb counterclockwise a quarter oriented.
turn then lifting the bulb out of the headlamp as-
See Fig. 22.8 and Fig. 22.9 to verify the correct
sembly. installation from the back. The lamp is fully
4. Squeeze the connector lock and slide the red seated only when the connector is pointing
locking tab down to disconnect the electrical con- straight down.
nector. See Fig. 22.6. 8. Install the back cover on the headlamp housing.
CAUTION
Ensure that the bulb is installed correctly, and
that it is firmly seated in the headlamp housing.
Improper bulb installation may result in melting
or fire damage to the vehicle.
IMPORTANT: Do not touch the glass of the bulb
during replacement. Any oils or debris that come
in contact with the glass of the bulb may
shorten the life of the lamp.
5. Connect the electrical connector to the new lamp
and slide the red locking tab up.
6. Position the bulb in the headlamp housing, then
twist the bulb clockwise a quarter turn.
7. Visually verify from either the front or back that
the bulb is correctly oriented in the headlamp
housing.
22.4
Headlights
A B C
03/30/2020 f547167
NOTE: The reflective area of the headlamp has been painted white to show details of the assembly.
A. Bulb Positioned in Headlamp Housing C. Bulb Twisted a Quarter Turn, Tabs Against Metal Stops
B. Bulb Twisted an Eighth of a Turn
Fig. 22.7, Proper Bulb Installation, Front View
OK OK OK
A B C
03/17/2020 f547134
A. Bulb Positioned in Headlamp Housing C. Connector Pointing Straight Down
B. Bulb Twisted an Eighth of a Turn
Fig. 22.8, Improper and Proper Bulb Installation, Back View
22.5
Headlights
11/04/2019 f547046
Fig. 22.9, Correct Halogen Headlamp Installation With

Foam Grommet
22.6
23
Vehicle Appearance and
Care
Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Dashboard and Instrument Panel Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3
Vehicle Appearance and Care
Cab Washing and Polishing • To prevent rust, have any nicks or other dam-
age on the finish touched up as soon as pos-
IMPORTANT: Carefully read all instructions be- sible.
fore using or applying any cleaner or product on • Park your vehicle in a sheltered area whenever
the vehicle or components. Failure to follow possible.
manufacturers’ recommendations can result in
damage to the finish. To prevent delamination and deterioration of labels
and stickers on the cab, follow these guidlines care-
fully:
WARNING
• Do not pressure wash the label or sticker or
Do not power wash or steam clean the engine surfaces near it.
bay in the area of vehicle electrical components,
• Do not use strong alkaline soaps on or near
unless specified by vehicle manuals or service
the label or sticker.
literature. Power washing and steam cleaning can
cause corrosion, permanently damaging these
components, which could result in fire, personal Care of Fiberglass Parts
injury, or property damage.
Wash unpainted fiberglass air fairings and shields
To protect the finish of your new vehicle, follow these monthly with a mild detergent, such as dishwashing
guidelines carefully. liquid. Avoid strong alkaline cleansers.
• During the first 30 days, rinse your vehicle fre- Apply a wax specifically designed for fiberglass.
quently with water. If the vehicle is dirty, use a
mild liquid soap. Do not use detergent. Care of Chrome Parts
• During the first 30 days, do not use anything
abrasive on your vehicle. Brushes, chemicals, To prevent rust, keep chrome parts clean and pro-
and cleaners may scratch the finish. tected at all times. This is especially important during
winter driving and in coastal areas where there is
• During the first 120 days, do not wax your exposure to salt air.
vehicle.
When cleaning chrome parts, use clean water and a
To extend the life of your vehicle’s finish, follow these soft cloth or sponge. A mild detergent may also be
guidelines. used.
• Avoid washing your vehicle in the hot sun. Sponge gently, then rinse. If necessary, use a non-
• Always use water. After the cab is completely abrasive chrome cleaner to remove stubborn rust or
other material. Do not use steel wool.
washed, dry it with a towel or chamois.
• Do not dust painted surfaces with a dry cloth, To help protect the chrome after cleaning, apply a
coat of polishing wax to the surface. Never use wax
as this will scratch the paint.
on parts that are exposed to high heat, such as ex-
• Do not remove ice or snow from a painted sur- haust pipes.
face with a scraper of any sort.
• To prevent damage to the finish, wax it regu- Care of Exterior Lights
larly. Before waxing, if the finish has become
Clean the headlight lenses by hand only, using a
dull, remove oxidized paint using a cleaner
flannel cloth with mild, non-caustic soap or detergent,
specifically designed for this purpose. Remove
and water.
all road tar and tree sap before waxing.
Freightliner recommends that a quality brand of
cleaner or cleaner-polish and polishing wax be NOTICE
used.
Do not use a power buffer, paper towels, chemi-
• Do not let diesel fuel or antifreeze stand on a cal solvents, or abrasive cleaners on the head-
painted surface. If either should occur, rinse light lens, all of which can remove the UV coating
the surface off with water. from the surface, and result in yellowing of the
lens.
23.1
Dashboard and Instrument Chewing Gum

Panel Care Harden the gum with an ice cube wrapped in a plas-
tic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Any re-
maining traces of gum can be removed with an all-
NOTICE purpose light oil (peanut butter will also work) and
wiped off.
When cleaning the dashboard, instrument panel,
or gauge lens covers, do not use Armor-All Pro-
tectant®, STP Son-of-a-Gun®, window cleaner, or Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote
other equivalent treatments. These cleaners con- Each of these items stains vinyl after prolonged con-
tain vinyl plasticizers which can cause stress tact. They should be wiped off immediately and the
crazing in the interior plastic panels and can re- area carefully cleaned, using a cloth dampened with
sult in cracking of the panels. Some cleaners can naphtha.
also have an adverse effect on the clear plastic
of instrument panels and gauge lens covers, re- Paint, Shoe Heel Marks
sulting in a foggy or cloudy appearance. This
type of damage is not covered by vehicle war- Paint should be removed immediately. Do not use
ranty. paint remover or liquid-type brush cleaner on vinyl.
An unprinted cloth, dampened with naphtha or tur-
To clean the dashboard, instrument panel, and gauge pentine may be used. Use care to prevent contact
lens covers, use a cloth dampened with warm soapy with parts of the upholstery that are not vinyl.
water. Make certain to wring the cloth out well before
cleaning, as excess water will damage the electrical
components.
Sulfide Stains
Sulfide compounds, such as those found in eggs and
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning some canned goods, can stain after prolonged con-
tact with vinyl. These stains can be removed by plac-
To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brush- ing a clean, unprinted piece of cloth over the spotted
ing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Harsh area and pouring a liberal amount of 6 percent hy-
cleaning agents can cause permanent damage to drogen peroxide onto the cloth. Allow the saturated
vinyl upholstery. To preserve the upholstery and pre- cloth to remain on the spot for 30 to 60 minutes. For
vent damage, carefully review the following sections stubborn spots, allow the hydrogen-peroxide satu-
for recommended cleaning procedures. Waxing or rated cloth to remain on the area overnight. Use cau-
refinishing improves soil resistance and cleanability tion to prevent the solution from seeping into the
for all vinyls. Any hard wax, such as that used on seams, or it will weaken the cotton thread.
automobiles, may be used.
Nail Polish and Nail Polish Remover
Ordinary Dirt
Prolonged contact with these substances causes per-
Wash the upholstery with warm water and mild soap, manent damage to vinyl. Careful blotting immediately
such as saddle or oil soap. Apply soapy water to a after contact minimizes damage. Do not spread the
large area and allow to soak for a few minutes, then liquid during removal.
rub briskly with a cloth to remove the dirt. This can
be repeated several times, as necessary. Shoe Polish
If dirt is deeply imbedded, use a soft bristle brush Most shoe polishes contain dyes which penetrate
after applying the soap. vinyl and stain it permanently. Shoe polish should be
If dirt is extremely difficult to remove, wall-washing wiped off as quickly as possible using naphtha or
preparations normally found around the home can be lighter fluid. If staining occurs, try the procedure used
used. Powdered cleaners, such as those used for for sulfide stains.
sinks and tiles, are abrasive and must be used with
caution as they can scratch the vinyl or give it a per-
manent dull appearance.
23.2
Ball Point Ink Mildew

Ball point ink can sometimes be removed if rubbed Brush the dry fabric with a soft brush. Sponge with
immediately with a damp cloth, using water or rub- detergent, and blot. If the fabric is colorfast, dilute a
bing alcohol. If this does not work, try the procedure teaspoon of bleach in one quart (one liter) of cool
used for sulfide stains. water. Apply with a swab, directly on the mildew
stain. Dab repeatedly with clear, cool water, and blot
Miscellaneous dry.
If stains do not respond to any of the treatments de-
scribed above, it is sometimes helpful to expose the
vinyl to direct sunlight for up to 30 hours. Mustard,
ball point ink, certain shoe polishes, and dyes often
bleach out in direct sunlight, leaving the vinyl undam-
aged.
Velour Upholstery Cleaning

To prevent soiling, frequent vacuuming or light brush-
ing to remove dust and dirt is recommended. Spot
clean with a mild solvent or an upholstery shampoo,
or the foam from a mild detergent. When using a sol-
vent or a dry-cleaning product, follow the instructions
carefully, and clean only in a well-ventilated area.
Avoid any product that contains carbon tetrachloride
or other toxic materials. With either method, pretest a
small area before proceeding. Use a professional
upholstery cleaning service when extensive cleaning
is needed.
Grease and Oil-Based Stains

Dampen a small absorbent cloth with dry-cleaning
solvent or spot remover. Apply the cloth carefully to
the spot from the outer edge to the center. Pat and
blot the spot with a clean, dry cloth. Repeat several
times, as necessary, turning the cloths so that the
stain does not redeposit on the fabric.
Sugar and Water-Based Stains

Apply water-based detergent or cleaner, working in
circular motions. Pat and blot as dry as possible. Re-
peat, if necessary, before drying thoroughly.
Chewing Gum or Wax

Harden the gum or wax with an ice cube wrapped in
a plastic bag, then scrape it off with a dull knife. Ex-
cess wax can be absorbed by placing a thick white
blotter over the wax and heating with a warm (not
hot) iron. Remove the remainder by using the proce-
dure for grease and oil-based stains.
23.3
24
Pre- and Post-Trip
Checklists
Periodic Inspections and Maintenance, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists
Periodic Inspections and Saddle Tank Areas Comp.

Drain air reservoirs (without automatic drain
Maintenance, General 1
valves)
Information 2 Fuel tank(s) secure
3 Frame rails and crossmembers
It is the driver’s responsibility to perform an inspec- 4 Visible exhaust components
tion, and ensure the complete road-worthiness of a
vehicle, before placing it into service. Commercial Engine Compartment Comp.
vehicles may be subject to inspection by authorized
1 Leakage under engine
inspectors, and an unsafe vehicle can be taken "out
2 Air intake system
of service" until the driver or owner repairs it.
3 Engine oil level
Use the following checklists to ensure that vehicle 4 Power steering reservoir level
components are in good working condition before 5 Engine coolant level
each trip. Careful inspections eliminate stops later to 6 Visible engine wiring
fix overlooked or forgotten items.
7 Frame rails
The checklists in this chapter can be copied and kept
as a record that the procedures have been com- Cab Comp.
pleted. For details on how to inspect each item on 1
Reset dash-mounted air intake restriction
the checklists, see the corresponding procedure indicator (if equipped)
(step number) in Chapter 25. 2 Air pressure warning systems
3 Air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures
Checklists 4 Air pressure build-up time
5 Air system leakage
NOTE: Checklists in this chapter correspond 6 Air pressure reserve
with the procedures and steps in Chapter 25, 7 Mirrors, windows, windshield
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Mainte- 8 Horn, windshield wipers, windshield washers
nance. Your vehicle may not be equipped with 9 Heater and defroster
all components listed below. 10 Interior lights
11 Exterior lights
Daily Pretrip Inspection Checklists 12 Seat belts and tether belts
See the following tables for a list of procedures that 13 Fuel level
should be performed daily, before the first trip. Place 14 Mirror adjustment
a check mark in the complete (Comp.) column to 15 Service brakes
indicate a procedure has been performed. 16 Backup alarm
Inspector Date Weekly Post-trip Inspection Checklist

See the following table for procedures that should be
performed weekly, post-trip. Place a check mark in
Suspension and Slack Adjusters Comp. the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a proce-
1 Suspension components dure has been performed.
2 Slack adjusters
Inspector Date
Wheels and Tires Comp.
1 Wheel covers
2 Tire condition
Engine Compartment Comp.
3 Tire inflation
1 Windshield washer reservoir level
4 Rims and wheel components
2 Air intake restriction indicator
5 Wheel bearing oil seals and lubrication levels
3 Water evacuation components
6 Mud Flaps
4 Automatic transmission fluid level
5 Water in fuel/water separator
24.1
Pre- and Post-Trip Checklists
Engine Compartment Comp. Fluids Added During Inspection

6 Steering components Fluid Amount Added
7 Serpentine drive belts Hydraulic Clutch Fluid (DOT
4 brake fluid)
Monthly Post-trip Inspection
Checklists
See the following tables for procedures that should
be performed monthly, post-trip. Place a check mark
in the complete (Comp.) column to indicate a proce-
dure has been performed.
Inspector Date
Brake Components Comp.

1 Brake system components
2 Brake chambers
3 Air brake lines
4 Flex air hoses
5 Brake linings and brake drums
6 Brake lining thickness
Saddle Tank Areas Comp.

Drain air reservoirs (with automatic drain
1
valves)
2 Batteries (location may vary)
3 Aerodynamic components
Engine Compartment Comp.

1 Hood and bumper
2 Hydraulic clutch reservoir
3 Radiator and heater hoses
4 Steering wheel play
Fluids Added
Use the following table to note any fluids that were
added during the inspection and maintenance proce-
dures.
Fluids Added During Inspection

Fluid Amount Added
Wheel Bearing Lubricant
Engine Oil
Power Steering Fluid
Engine Coolant
Windshield Washer Fluid
Automatic Transmission
Fluid
24.2
25
Pre- and Post-Trip
Inspections and
Maintenance
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1
Daily Pretrip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.9
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.12
Pre- and Post-Trip Inspections and Maintenance
Safety Precautions • suspension arms

• suspension brackets
DANGER • axle seats
When working on the vehicle, shut down the en- • bushings

gine, set the parking brake, and chock the tires. 2. Inspect slack adjusters for signs of damage. See
Before working under the vehicle, always place Fig. 25.1, Fig. 25.2, or Fig. 25.3.
jack stands under the frame rails to ensure the
vehicle can not drop. Failure to follow these
steps could result in serious personal injury or
death. 4
5
Daily Pretrip Inspections and 6
Maintenance 3
7
8
Complete the following inspection and maintenance
procedures to ensure that vehicle components are in
good working condition before each trip. A driver who 2 9
is familiar with the vehicle and drives it regularly can
perform the daily inspections, then add the weekly 1
and monthly post-trip inspections as scheduled.
10
If the driver does not operate the vehicle on a con-
sistent basis, all daily, weekly, and monthly inspec-
tion and maintenance procedures should be per-
formed before the trip. 02/03/2017 f421398
1. 7/16-inch Adjusting 6. Clevis
IMPORTANT: The pre- and post-trip checklists, Nut 7. ½-inch Clevis Pin
inspections, and maintenance procedures de- 2. Grease Fitting 8. 1/4-inch Clevis Pin
tailed in this chapter are not all-inclusive. 3. Boot 9. Grease Relief
Refer to other component and body manufactur- 4. Link Opening
ers’ instructions for specific inspection and 5. Brake Chamber Piston 10. Slack Adjuster Spline
Rod
maintenance instructions, as well as local, state,
and federal guidelines. Fig. 25.1, Gunite Automatic Slack Adjuster
NOTE: If any system or component does not • Inspect slack adjuster boots, if equipped,
pass this inspection, it must be corrected before for cuts or tears.
operating the vehicle. Whenever equipment re-
• Inspect anchor straps, if equipped, for
quires adjustment, replacement, and/or repair,
damage.
see the New Cascadia Workshop Manual for
procedures and specifications. • Look for worn clevis pins on brake cham-
ber pushrods.
Suspension and Slack Adjuster • Look for missing or damaged cotter pins
Inspection on the clevis pins.
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect suspen- • Ensure chamber piston rods are in line
sion and slack adjuster components. with the slack adjusters.
1. Inspect the following suspension components for Wheel and Tire Inspection
signs of structural damage, cracks, or wear.
• springs
Walk around the vehicle and visually inspect each
wheel and tire assembly.
• spring hangers
• shocks
25.1
1
2
3
3 4
5
6
7
4 8 9
8
7
6
2
5
A
02/03/2017 f421397
1. Clevis 6. Control-Arm Washers
2. Slack Adjuster and Nut
3. Clevis Pin 7. Anchor Strap Slot
4. Manual Adjusting Nut 8. Anchor Strap
5. Control Arm 9. Brake Chamber
9
Fig. 25.2, Haldex Automatic Slack Adjuster 1 10
05/05/2017 f422530
IMPORTANT: Wheel covers decrease drag force
1. Grease Fitting (if 5. Clevis Pin (large)
as a vehicle moves, thereby improving fuel effi- equipped) 6. Clevis Pin (small)
ciency. If replacement of a wheel cover is nec- 2. Slack Adjuster 7. Actuator Rod
essary, the replacement cover must meet or ex- Housing 8. Boot
ceed the drag reduction performance of the 3. Brake Chamber 9. Manual Adjusting Nut
originally installed cover in order to maintain Pushrod 10. Camshaft Splines
4. Clevis
compliance with greenhouse gas and fuel effi-
ciency regulations. Fig. 25.3, Meritor Automatic Slack Adjuster
1. If the vehicle was originally equipped with wheel tain the detachable view cover is centered on
covers, ensure all wheel covers are present. In- the face cover, and the Velcro strips are
spect wheel covers for damage or wear. Remove pressed firmly in place.
wheel covers from rear drive wheels, if equipped,
prior to inspecting the tires and wheel compo- 2. Inspect each tire for the following:
nents.
• valve stem caps on every tire, screwed on
NOTE: During wheel cover installation, ensure finger-tight
the V-notch in the liner inner retaining ring is • bulges, cracks, cuts, and penetrations
centered on the valve stem. The inner and outer
retaining rings should be uniformly aligned to • oil contamination (petroleum derivatives will
each other and to the wheel rim. The outer re- soften the rubber and destroy the tire)
taining ring of the liner is equipped with two • tread depth—if tread is less than 4/32 inch
canvas flaps. When installing the face cover, (3 mm) on any front tire, or less than 2/32
make sure the cover retaining ring is inserted inch (1.5 mm) on any rear tire, replace the
between the two canvas flaps on the liner outer tire
retaining ring so that the Velcro strips line up • debris lodged between dual tire sets
between the face cover and the liner. Make cer-
25.2
IMPORTANT: Low-rolling resistance (LRR) tires 4.1 Remove all dirt and debris from the as-
minimize wasted energy as a tire rolls, thereby sembly. Rust streaks or metal build-up
decreasing rolling effort and improving fuel effi- around stud holes, or out-of-round or worn
ciency. If tire replacement is necessary, replace- stud holes, may be caused by loose wheel
ment tires must meet or have less rolling resis- nuts.
tance than the originally installed tires in order
to maintain compliance with greenhouse gas WARNING
and fuel efficiency regulations.
Have any worn or damaged wheel components
Contact your tire manufacturer/supplier to deter- replaced by a qualified person using the wheel
mine the rolling resistance of the originally in- manufacturer’s instructions and the wheel indus-
stalled tires. Visit www.epa.gov/smartway for try’s standard safety precautions and equipment.
additional information and resources. Otherwise a vehicle or workshop accident could
occur, possibly resulting in serious personal in-
3. Check tire inflation. jury or death.
For inflation pressures and maximum loads, see 4.2 Inspect for broken, cracked, badly worn,
the tire manufacturer’s guidelines. Inflate the tires bent, rusty, or sprung rings and rims.
to the applicable pressures if needed.
If a tire has been run flat or under-inflated, check NOTICE
the wheel and tire for damage before adding air.
Keep compressed air reservoirs and lines dry Use the recommended torque values and follow
during tire inflation. Use well-maintained inline the proper tightening sequence. Insufficient
moisture traps and service them regularly. wheel nut torque can cause wheel shimmy, re-
sulting in wheel damage, stud breakage, and ex-
treme tire tread wear. Excessive wheel nut torque
WARNING can break studs, damage threads, and crack
discs in the stud hole area.
Do not operate the vehicle with underinflated or
overinflated tires. Incorrect inflation can stress 4.3 Make sure all wheel nuts are tightened. If
the tires and make the tires and rims more sus- tightening is necessary, use the tightening
ceptible to damage, possibly leading to rim or pattern in Fig. 25.4 to initially tighten the
tire failure and loss of vehicle control, resulting flange nuts to 50 to 100 lbf·ft (68 to 136
in serious personal injury or death. N·m). Then tighten the flange nuts to 450
to 500 lbf·ft (610 to 678 N·m).
NOTICE
1
A weekly pressure loss of 4 psi (28 kPa) or more 10 8
in a tire may indicate damage. The tire should be
inspected and, if necessary, repaired or replaced
by a qualified tire service facility.
3 6
IMPORTANT: The load and cold inflation pres-
sure must not exceed the rim or wheel manu-
facturer’s recommendations, even though the
tire may be approved for a higher load inflation.
5 4
Consult the rim or wheel manufacturer for the
correct tire inflation pressure for the vehicle
load.
7 9
4. Examine each rim and wheel component.
2
04/30/2007 f400268
Fig. 25.4, Tightening Pattern, 10-Hole Wheels
25.3
5. Inspect the outboard side of all wheel hubs and Inspect upstream of the aftertreatment device
the hub oil seal area on the inboard side of each (ATD), if equipped, for cracking or signs of leaks,
wheel for signs of oil leakage. If any oil is found such as soot trails. Inspect downstream of the
on wheel and tire or brake components, remove ATD for signs of exhaust leaks, such as blister-
the vehicle from service until the leak has been ing or warping of nearby components.
fixed.
If needed, fill the hubs to the level indicated on Engine Compartment Inspection
the hub cap. See Group 35 of the New Casca- 1. Check the ground underneath the engine for fuel,
dia Maintenance Manual for recommended lubri- oil, or coolant leaks.
cants.
2. Inspect the air intake system for leaks or dam-
6. Check that mud flaps are undamaged and hang age.
10 inches (25.4 cm) or less from the ground.
Saddle Tank Areas Inspection NOTICE

Failure to maintain a sealed air intake system
WARNING could allow the entry of dirt and contaminants
into the engine. This could adversely affect en-
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into gine performance and result in engine damage.
the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
sludge particles may be in the airstream and 2.1 Push the reset button on the air intake
could cause injury. restriction indicator, if equipped.
NOTE: The air intake restriction indicator
NOTICE may be located on the air intake or the
dash.
If the water drained from the air reservoirs is
cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the 2.2 Check the air intake duct from the air
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the cleaner to the engine intake. Make sure
air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air the duct components are secure and air-
brake system, which could adversely affect brak- tight.
ing. 3. Check the engine oil level.
1. Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs
without automatic drain valves only). NOTICE
WARNING Operating the engine with the oil level below the
minimum fill (or "add") mark or above the maxi-
Never operate the engine with the fuel tank shut- mum fill (or "full") mark could result in engine
off valves partially closed. This could damage the damage.
fuel pump, causing sudden loss of engine power, 3.1 Check the oil level with the vehicle parked
possibly resulting in serious personal injury due on a level surface. See the engine manu-
to reduced vehicle control. facturer’s guidelines for engine shutdown
2. Ensure fuel tanks are secured to their mounting time requirements prior to checking the oil
brackets and that the mounting brackets are se- level.
cured to the frame. IMPORTANT: Use CJ-4 engine oil with less
If equipped with fuel tank shutoff valves, be sure than 1% sulfated ash. Failure to use CJ-4 oil
the valves are fully open. may void the warranty on emission after-
3. Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny treatment components.
areas, or rust streaks. Check all visible cross- 3.2 If the oil level is at or below the minimum
members for damage or signs of looseness. fill (or "add") mark on the dipstick, add
4. Inspect visible components of the exhaust sys- enough oil to maintain the level between
tem to ensure connections are tight.
25.4
the minimum and maximum fill marks. See

the engine operation manual for recom-
mended lubricants.
4. Check the power steering reservoir fluid level.
The power steering fluid level should be between 1
the MIN COLD mark and the middle mark just
above it. See Fig. 25.5. If needed, fill the reser-
voir with automatic transmission fluid that meets
Dexron III or TES-389 specifications.
2
3
4
03/14/2016 f200864
1. Pressure Relief Cap 3. COLD MAX Fill Line
2. Filler Cap 4. COLD MIN Fill Line
Fig. 25.6, Coolant Surge Tank
5.1 If the coolant is low, fill the surge tank to

the MAX line with a 50/50 mixture of water
1 and the type of antifreeze currently in-
2 stalled in your vehicle.
3
04/30/2020 f462252a 5.2 If the surge tank was empty, start the en-
NOTE: Typical reservoir shown; configurations may gine after refilling and check the level
vary. again when the engine is at operating
temperature.
1. Filler Cap 3. COLD MIN Fill Line
2. MAX Fill Line 6. Inspect visible engine wiring for damage or
looseness. Check for loose wiring, chafed insula-
Fig. 25.5, Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
tion, and damaged or loose hold-down clamps.
7. Inspect visible frame rails for missing bolts, shiny
NOTICE areas, or rust streaks.
Low coolant could result in engine overheating,
which could cause engine damage.
Cab Inspection
1. Push the reset button on the dash-mounted air
IMPORTANT: The surge tank must be cool to
intake restriction indicator, if equipped.
check the coolant level.
2. With the ignition switch in the OFF position,
5. Check the engine coolant level in the radiator
check the air-pressure warning system.
surge tank. See Fig. 25.6.
NOTE: The low-air warning buzzer only
NOTICE works when the park brake is released. The
low-air warning buzzer is silenced when the
Coolant must be filled to the COLD MAX line of park brake is set.
the surge tank. Low coolant could result in en-
gine overheating, which could cause engine dam-
age.
25.5
2.1 If not previously drained, drain the air res- 5.1 With the parking brake applied, the trans-
ervoirs using moderate brake applications mission out of gear, and the air system
until pressure in both reservoirs is less fully charged, release the service brakes
than 70 psi (483 kPa). and shut down the engine.
2.2 Turn the ignition to the ON position. The 5.2 Wait one minute and note the air pressure
ICU will complete a full gauge sweep and drop in psi (kPa) per minute from the pri-
bulb check, and a low-air warning buzzer mary air reservoir.
will sound. Ensure the low air pressure If the pressure drop exceeds the limits
lamp (BRAKE AIR) remains illuminated
shown in Table 25.1, eliminate any leaks
and a low-air warning buzzer continues to before operating the vehicle.
sound after the gauge sweep is complete.
6. Check the air pressure reserve.
3. Check air governor cut-in and cut-out pressures.
With the engine still off, make one full brake ap-
3.1 Start the engine and ensure the BRAKE plication and observe the pressure drop on the
AIR lamp goes out and the buzzer si- primary air gauge. If pressure drops more than
lences when pressure reaches approxi- 25 psi (172 kPa), eliminate any leaks before op-
mately 70 psi (483 kPa) in both air reser- erating the vehicle.
voirs.
The air governor should cut out at ap- Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
proximately 120 psi (827 kPa). For ve- Pressure Drop:
hicles with an optional dryer reservoir Description psi (kPa) Per Minute
module (DRM), the cut-out pressure is Released Applied
approximately 130 psi (896 kPa). Truck or Tractor Only 2 (14) 3 (21)
3.2 With the engine idling, apply the brake Truck or Tractor w/Single Trailer 3 (21) 4 (28)
pedal several times. The air governor Truck or Tractor w/Two Trailers 5 (35) 6 (42)
should cut in when pressure in the primary Table 25.1, Maximum Allowable Air Leakage
air reservoir (top air gauge) reaches ap-
proximately 100 psi (689 kPa).
4. Check air pressure build-up time. WARNING
4.1 With the air system fully charged, make
When cleaning windshields and windows, always
one full brake application and note the air
stand on the ground or on a secure ladder or
pressure reading on the primary air
platform. Use a long-handled window cleaner. Do
gauge.
not use the cab steps, tires, fenders, fuel tanks,
4.2 Further reduce air pressure using moder- engine, or under-hood components to access the
ate brake applications, then run the en- windshield or windows. Doing so could cause a
gine at governed rpm. fall and result in an injury.
4.3 Note the time that the pressure reaches 7. Inspect the mirrors, window glass, and wind-
the previously noted reading on the pri- shield for cracks or other damage.
mary air gauge, then note the time that 8. Ensure that the horn, windshield wipers, and
the air pressure reaches cut-out pressure.
windshield washers are operating properly.
4.4 If it takes longer than 30 seconds to reach These devices must be in good working order for
cut-out pressure after the primary air safe vehicle operation.
gauge passes the previously noted pres- 9. Ensure the heater and defroster are operating
sure (noted after one full brake applica-
properly.
tion), eliminate any leaks or replace the air
compressor before operating the vehicle. 10. Check the operation of all interior lights.
5. Check air leakage in the system. 10.1 Turn on the headlamps and leave them
on. If equipped, ensure all gauge bulbs
illuminate. If equipped, ensure ICU
screens illuminate.
25.6
10.2 Ensure all equipped driver control 12.3 Activate the high-beam headlamps and
switches illuminate and verify the interior hazard warning lamps.
cab lights controlled by these switches
12.4 Exit the cab and check that all exterior
illuminate.
lamps and reflectors are clean and intact.
10.3 Ensure both turn signal indicators illumi-
12.5 Check that the brake lamps, tail lamps,
nate when the turn signal switch is acti-
headlamps, turn signals, marker lamps,
vated.
identification lamps, and clearance lamps
11. Check the operation of all exterior lamps manu- are working properly.
ally or, if equipped, by using either the LIGHT
13. To check the exterior lamps using the dash
TEST switch on the dash or the Lamp Check
LIGHT TEST switch (see Fig. 25.8) or key fob
button on the key fob.
1
2
3
4
9 5
6
8
7
10/25/2019 f546503a
1. Clearance Lamp 6. Headlamp, High Beam

2. Identification Lamps 7. Fog/Driving Lamp
3. Turn Signal 8. Side Marker Lamp
4. DRL/Accent Lamps 9. Stop Lamps, Tail Lamps, Turn Signals, and Back-Up
5. Headlamp, Low Beam Lamp
Fig. 25.7, Exterior Lights
12. To check exterior lamps manually: Lamp Check button (see Fig. 25.9):
12.1 Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON 13.1 Make sure the parking brake is set.
position.
12.2 Make certain the parking brake is set.
25.7
• Group 5: Front and rear fog lamps

• Group 6: Turn signals and utility
lamps
NOTE: LED accent lighting turns off when
the high beam headlamps turn on.
LIGHT 13.3 Walk around the truck and check that the
TEST lamps are working properly.
13.4 Verify that all exterior lights and reflectors
08/04/2016 f611436
are clean and intact.
Fig. 25.8, Pretrip Light Test Switch 13.5 The pretrip light inspection can be stopped
by:
2 1 • releasing the parking brake;

3
• Pressing either the LIGHT TEST
switch on the dash or the Lamp
Check button on the key fob.
14. Inspect the seat belts and tether belts.
WARNING
Inspect and maintain seat belts. When any part of
a seat belt system needs replacement, the entire
seat belt must be replaced, both retractor and
buckle side. Any time a vehicle is involved in an
accident, and the seat belt system was in use,
the entire vehicle seat belt system must be re-
10/23/2019 f546880a placed before operating the vehicle. Do not at-
1. Door Lock 2. Door Unlock 3. Lamp Check
tempt to modify the seat belt system; doing so
could change the effectiveness of the system.
Fig. 25.9, Key Fob Failure to replace worn or damaged seat belts, or
making any modifications to the system, may re-
NOTE: Factory settings have groups of sult in personal injury or death.
lamps activate sequentially up to 100 times 14.1 Check the web for fraying, cuts, extreme
or until manually stopped. dirt and dust, or for severe fading from
13.2 Press either the LIGHT TEST switch or exposure to sunlight, especially near the
Lamp Check button to begin the pretrip buckle latch plate and in the D-loop guide
light inspection. If equipped, groups of area.
lamps will cycle on and off in the following 14.2 Check operation of the buckle, latch, Kom-
sequence: fort Latch or Sliding Komfort Latch (if
• Group 1: Always ON: marker lamps, equipped), web retractor, and upper seat
clearance lamps, tail lamps, licence belt mount on the door pillar. Check all
plate lamp visible components for wear or damage.
• Group 2: Low beam headlamps 14.3 Check the seat belt and tether belt con-
nection points and tighten any that are
• Group 3: High beam headlamps and loose.
stop lamps
• Group 4: Backup lamps and daytime
running lamps
25.8
WARNING Weekly Post-Trip Inspections

and Maintenance
Never fill fuel tanks to more than 95 percent of
their liquid capacity. This could make them more Engine Compartment Inspection
likely to rupture from impact, possibly causing
fire and resulting in serious personal injury or WARNING
death by burning.
Do not mix gasoline or alcohol with diesel fuel. Washer fluids may be flammable and poisonous.
This mixture could cause an explosion, possibly Do not expose washer fluid to an open flame or
resulting in serious personal injury or death. Do any burning material, such as a cigarette. Always
not fill the fuel tanks in the presence of sparks, comply with the washer fluid manufacturer’s rec-
open flames, or intense heat. These could ignite ommended safety precautions.
the fuel, possibly causing severe burns. 1. Check the windshield washer reservoir fluid level.
IMPORTANT: Use ultralow-sulfur diesel (ULSD) The reservoir is usually located near the right-
with 15 ppm sulfur content or less. Failure to hand frame rail. See Fig. 25.10.
use ULSD fuel may void the warranty on emis-
sion components.
15. Check the fuel level in the fuel tank(s). To keep
condensation to a minimum, fuel tanks should be
filled at the end of each day.
1
16. Adjust the rearview and down view mirrors as
necessary.
17. Test the service brakes.
17.1 With the engine running and air system
fully charged, set the parking brake.
17.2 Put the vehicle in the lowest gear and
gently attempt to move it forward. The ve-
hicle should not move.
If the vehicle moves, the parking brakes
are not operating correctly and must be
repaired before the vehicle is operated.
18. Test the backup alarm.
18.1 Release the parking brake and put the 04/30/2020 f820442
transmission in reverse. 1. Washer Fluid Filler Cap
18.2 Move the vehicle slightly backward to en- Fig. 25.10, Windshield Washer Reservoir
sure that the backup alarm is operating
correctly. 2. After resetting the air intake restriction indicator
during the daily pretrip inspection, check the indi-
cator again with the engine off.
2.1 Check an indicator with graduations to see
if air restriction exceeds the value shown
in Table 25.2.
Check a go/no-go indicator without gradu-
ations to see if the colored bar shows
through the clear window.
25.9
Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values (inH2O)

GHG14, GHG17, and
Engine Make
GHG21 Engines
Cummins 25 1 1
Detroit 18
Table 25.2, Air Intake Maximum Restriction Values
(inH2O)
2.2 If air restriction exceeds the maximum al-

lowable value, operate the vehicle for one
more day, making sure not to run the en-
gine over rated rpm. Refer to the engine
operation manual for more information on
rated rpm for your engine.
2.3 If air restriction exceeds the maximum
value again, replace the air cleaner. For 03/14/2016 f880940
instructions, refer to Group 09 of the New 1. Vacuator Valves
Cascadia Workshop Manual.
Fig. 25.11, Hood Vacuator Valves (hood interior shown)
3. Inspect water evacuation components.
3.1 Inspect the vacuator valve(s) installed on NOTE: A hose may be used to direct water
the hood interior and air cleaner. Make into the container. On older DAVCO models,
sure the lips of each valve are undam- the drain valve has a 1/2-inch (12.7-mm)
aged and pliable, free of debris, and re- pipe with threads. Use a hose with a 1/2-
main closed during inspection. See inch pipe thread to fit correctly and open the
Fig. 25.11. drain valve by turning it one-quarter revolu-
3.2 Inspect the rain tray installed at the base tion. On new DAVCO models, the drain
of the windshield. Ensure that the seal on valve has a 3/4-inch (19-mm) slip-on hose
the forward edge of the rain tray is in connection; pipe threads are no longer used.
good condition. Open the drain valve by turning it one to
one-and-a-half revolutions.
3.3 Inspect the drain hoses installed on the
rain tray. Both hoses should be securely 5.2 If the engine is equipped with a built-in
attached to the rain tray and direct water water separator, loosen the drain valve,
down the aft side of the front fenders. and allow the water to run out. Close the
4.
drain valve, taking care not to overtighten
If the vehicle is equipped with an Allison auto-
it.
matic transmission, check the automatic trans-
mission fluid level. 5.3 Detroit/Racor Models: Turn the drain plug
counterclockwise to open it.
5. Check for water in the fuel/water separator, if
equipped. DAVCO Models: Remove the vent cap
and open the drain. See Fig. 25.12.
IMPORTANT: When draining fluid from a
fuel/water separator, drain the fluid into an 5.4 Stop draining fluid when fuel begins to
appropriate container and dispose of it prop- drain out.
erly. Many jurisdictions now issue fines for Detroit/Racor Models: turn the drain plug
draining fuel/water separators onto the clockwise to close it.
ground. DAVCO Models: close the drain valve.
5.1 Place a suitable container under the fuel/ Install and hand-tighten the vent cap.
water separator. 6. Inspect the steering components.
25.10
6.1 Inspect tie rods, steering arms, and the

drag link for signs of looseness (i.e., shiny
spots or rust tracks).
6.2 Check the steering gear mounting bolts
and pitman arm nut, if equipped, for signs
of looseness. See Fig. 25.13.
6.3 Check the drag link nuts for missing cotter
pins.
10/03/2016 f462304
1. Steering Gear Mounting Bolts
2. Pitman Arm Pinch Bolt Nut
3. Drag Link Nut
Fig. 25.13, Steering Gear Fasteners
6.4 Inspect the steering intermediate shaft and

end yokes for excessive looseness or
other damage.
NOTICE
Do not drive with a drive belt that is visibly worn
1. Lower Housing 8. Spring or damaged. If it fails, the lack of coolant flow
2. Drain Valve 9. Cover O-Ring could rapidly cause damage to engine compo-
3. Inlet Port/Check Valve 10. Clear Cover nents.
4. 12VDC Pre-Heater 11. Vent Cap O-Ring 7. Inspect the serpentine drive belts for signs of
5. 120VAC Pre-Heater 12. Vent Cap
6. Bypass Valve 13. Collar glazing, frayed edges, breaks, cracks, or oil con-
7. Filter Element tamination.
Fig. 25.12, DAVCO Fuel Pro 485
25.11
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections Saddle Tank Areas Inspection

and Maintenance
WARNING
Brake Component Inspection
When draining the air reservoir, do not look into
Walk around the vehicle and inspect brake system the air jets or direct them toward anyone. Dirt or
components for visible damage. sludge particles may be in the airstream and
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with a could cause injury.
brake check valve on the dash, which allows the
driver to set the service brakes and exit the ve- NOTICE
hicle to check the brake system for leaks. The
parking brakes must be applied before the If the water drained from the air reservoirs is
brake check valve will function. cloudy or oily, it may indicate a problem with the
compressor. If oil is allowed to contaminate the
1. Inspect all visible brake system components for air dryer, it will not remove the water from the air
missing fasteners or signs of looseness, such as brake system, which could adversely affect brak-
rust tracks. ing.
1. Drain the brake system air reservoirs (reservoirs
NOTICE with automatic drain valves only).
If the external breather tube or breather cap is NOTE: Battery locations vary between vehicles.
missing or incorrectly installed, road dirt and de- 2. Inspect the batteries.
bris can adversely affect the operation of the
brake chamber. Once inside of the chamber, dirt
and debris can cause the internal parts of the WARNING
chamber to deteriorate faster.
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
2. Inspect the exterior surfaces of brake chambers contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals
for damage. Make sure that breather holes are known to the State of California to cause cancer
open and free of debris. and reproductive harm. To prevent possible per-
NOTE: Do not route air brake lines on top of sonal injury, always wash your hands after han-
dling battery parts and related accessories.
anything likely to be stepped on.
2.1 Remove the battery box cover and inspect
3. Inspect air brake lines for dents, swelling, kinks, all visible battery cables for loose wiring or
twisting, abrasion, and damage, especially near damage.
moving parts.
2.2 Check that the battery hold-down is se-
4. Inspect flex air lines for deterioration or signs of cure.
abrasion.
IMPORTANT: Aerodynamic components de-
5. Inspect for cracked, worn, or oil-contaminated
brake linings and brake drums (or rotors).
crease drag force as a vehicle moves, thereby
improving fuel efficiency. If replacement of an
6. Check the thickness of the brake linings. Re- aerodynamic component is necessary, replace-
place brake linings on all brake assemblies on ment components must meet or exceed the
the axle if any brake linings are worn to less than drag reduction performance of the originally in-
approximately 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) at the thinnest stalled component in order to maintain compli-
point.
ance with greenhouse gas and fuel efficiency
regulations.
3. Inspect the following aerodynamic components, if
equipped, for structural damage, cracks, or wear.
• Chassis fairings
25.12
• Roof fairing/deflector IMPORTANT: When replacing hoses, install

• Side skirts service-type knitted or braided yarn-reinforced
neoprene hose. Extended-service-life silicone
• Cab/sleeper extenders hoses may also be used. See the Alliance Parts
• Battery access cover Catalog at www.alliancebrandparts.com or
contact your Freightliner Dealer.
Engine Compartment Inspection and 4. Check the steering wheel for excessive play.
Adjustments 4.1 Start the engine. With the front tires
IMPORTANT: If replacement of the hood or straight ahead, turn the steering wheel
bumper is necessary, the replacement compo- until motion is observed at the front
nent must meet or exceed the drag reduction wheels.
performance of the originally installed item in 4.2 Align a reference mark on the steering
order to maintain compliance with greenhouse wheel to a rule, then slowly turn the steer-
gas and fuel efficiency regulations. ing wheel in the opposite direction until
motion is again detected at the wheels.
NOTE: Anytime a hood is adjusted, removed, or
reinstalled, the headlamp aim should be 4.3 Measure the lash (free play) at the rim of
checked. the steering wheel. Excessive lash exists
if steering wheel movement exceeds 2-1/4
1. Inspect the bumper and hood for structural dam- inches (57 mm) with an 18-inch (450-mm)
age, cracks, or wear. steering wheel.
2. Check the hydraulic clutch reservoir, if equipped. 4.4 If there is excessive lash, check the steer-
If necessary, add DOT 4 brake fluid. ing system for wear or incorrect adjust-
3. Inspect the radiator and heater hoses, including ment before operating the vehicle.
the clamps and support brackets.
3.1 Inspect the radiator and charge air cooler
for damage and accumulated debris.
Straighten bent or damaged fins to permit
airflow across all areas of the cores.
NOTE: When traveling through areas of high
insect concentration, it may be necessary to
clean the exterior of the radiator or the
charge air cooler core as often as every 200
miles (320 km).
3.2 Make sure the radiator inlet and outlet
hoses are pliable and are not cracking or
ballooning.
3.3 Make sure the heater hoses are pliable
and are not cracking or ballooning.
3.4 Tighten hose clamps as necessary.
IMPORTANT: Do not overtighten hose
clamps, as hose life can be adversely af-
fected.
3.5 Ensure hose support brackets are se-
curely fastened. Make sure hoses are not
located near sources of wear, abrasion, or
high heat.
25.13
26
In An Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Emergency Starting With Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Raising and Lowering a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.9
In An Emergency
Hazard Warning Lights the flares and reflector along the side of the road to
alert other drivers that an emergency situation exists.
The hazard warning light switch is located on the
dash in what is referred to as the master module. Emergency Starting With
See Fig. 26.1. The hazard lights can be activated
regardless of the ignition switch position. Jumper Cables
To activate the hazard lights, push the center of the When using jumper cables, follow the instructions
switch once. The switch will blink at the same rate below.
that the hazard lights flash. Push the switch again to
turn them off. All the turn signal lights on the vehicle WARNING
and trailer, as well as the turn signal indicators in the
ICU, flash simultaneously when the hazard lights are Batteries release explosive gas. Do not smoke
activated. when working around batteries. Put out all flames
and remove all sources of sparks or intense heat
in the vicinity of the battery. Do not allow the ve-
hicles to touch each other. Do not lean over the
batteries when making connections, and keep all
other persons away from the batteries. Failure to
follow these precautions could lead to severe
personal injury as a result of an explosion or
acid burns.
NOTICE
Make sure both electrical systems are the same
voltage. Electronic devices on both vehicles can
be damaged when connected to a vehicle with a
different operating voltage.
03/09/2016 f611340
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with optional un-
Fig. 26.1, Hazard Warning Switch derhood jump start posts, connect to these
posts instead of the batteries.
Fire Extinguisher 1. Apply the parking brakes and turn off the lights
An optional factory-installed fire extinguisher may be and all other electrical devices.
located in the cab, usually by the driver’s door, or in 2. Remove the battery box cover.
the sleeper baggage compartment.
NOTE: The battery box on a New Cascadia may
Emergency Equipment be located in a variety of locations, including
under the passenger seat, behind the side fair-
Emergency equipment and tools may be supplied in ing, or behind the cab. If the battery box is lo-
the cab or sleeper baggage compartment. The equip- cated behind the side fairing, it can be accessed
ment may include: a first aid kit, triangular reflectors, by opening the side fairing kick panel.
flares, tire-changing equipment, and tools.
3. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the
WARNING positive battery post or jump start post on the
vehicle needing the jump start. See callout A in
Use extreme care when placing flares in emer- Fig. 26.2.
gency situations that involve exposure to flam- 4. Then connect the other end of the positive
mable substances such as fuel. An explosion or jumper cable to the positive battery or jump start
fire could occur causing serious personal injury. post of the vehicle providing the jump start.
If there is an emergency while driving, cautiously pull
off the road. Turn on the hazard warning lights. Place
26.1
In An Emergency
1 2 WARNING
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
+
+
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark
− − − − could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
severe personal injury from explosion or acid
burns.
10. Disconnect the negative (grounded) jumper cable
from the vehicle that needed the jump start. See
callout B in Fig. 26.2.
A B
04/22/2020 f545111a 11. Then disconnect the other end of the jumper
1. – Hardline Battery Cable of Vehicle Needing the cable from the vehicle that provided the jump
Jump start.
2. + Hardline Battery Cable of Vehicle Needing the 12. Disconnect the positive jumper cable from the
Jump
A. + Jumper Cable to Connect First and Disconnect
positive battery or jump start post of the vehicle
Last that provided the jump start.
B. – Jumper Cable to Connect Last and Disconnect 13. Then disconnect the other end of the positive
First jumper cable from the positive battery or jump
Fig. 26.2, Jumper Connections on Vehicle Needing start post of the vehicle that received the jump
Jump Start start. See callout A in Fig. 26.2.
14. Install the battery box cover; be sure it is posi-
WARNING tioned properly before fastening the latches.
Do the next step exactly as instructed and do not Raising and Lowering a
allow the clamps of one cable to touch the
clamps of the other cable. Otherwise, a spark Vehicle
could occur near a battery, possibly resulting in
severe personal injury from explosion or acid Raising a Vehicle with Air Suspension
burns.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, set the park-
5. Connect one end of the negative jumper cable to ing brakes, and shut down the engine. Chock the
the negative battery or jump start post of the ve- tires.
hicle providing the jump start.
6. Then connect (ground) the other end of the cable WARNING
to a negative battery or jump start post on the
vehicle needing a jump start. See callout B in Remove the air from the suspension. Failure to
Fig. 26.2. remove the air from the suspension may cause
the vehicle to move or shift on the jack stands as
7. Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump air pressure drains from the system; this could
start and let the engine run a few minutes to cause the vehicle to fall, resulting in damage to
charge the batteries of the other vehicle. the vehicle, serious injury, or death.
8. Attempt to start the engine of the vehicle with the 2. Exhaust all air from the air suspension.
batteries receiving the charge. Do not operate
the starter longer than 30 seconds, and wait at
least two minutes between starting attempts to WARNING
allow the starter to cool.
Do not use bottle jacks to raise the vehicle. Al-
9. When the engine starts, let it idle a few minutes. ways use floor jacks. Bottle jacks can slip, allow-
ing the vehicle to fall, which could result in dam-
age to the vehicle, serious injury, or death.
26.2
In An Emergency
IMPORTANT: Only lift unloaded vehicles and

vehicles disconnected from trailers. Unload ve- WARNING
hicles with bodies (drilling rigs, mixers) as much
as possible. ways use floor jacks. Bottle jacks can slip, allow-
3. Place a floor jack under the axle housing, the ing the vehicle to fall, which could result in dam-
clamp group, or the frame rail. age to the vehicle, serious injury, or death.
IMPORTANT: Only lift unloaded vehicles and
NOTICE vehicles disconnected from trailers. Unload ve-
hicles with bodies (drilling rigs, mixers) as much
NOTICE: Do not place jack stands under any of as possible.
the suspension components; doing so could
cause suspension component damage. Jack 2. Place a floor jack under the axle housing, the
stands can be placed at any point below the axle, clamp group, or the frame rail.
including the differential area.
4. Raise the vehicle. Add additional jack stands, as NOTICE
needed, under the axles to support the vehicle.
NOTICE: Do not place jack stands under any of
Lowering a Vehicle with Air the suspension components; doing so could
cause suspension component damage. Jack
Suspension stands can be placed at any point below the axle,
WARNING 3. Raise the vehicle. Add additional jack stands, as
needed, to support the vehicle.
ways use floor jacks. Bottle jacks can slip, allow-
ing the vehicle to fall, which could result in dam-
Lowering a Vehicle without Air
age to the vehicle, serious injury, or death. Suspension
NOTICE WARNING
NOTICE: Do not place jack stands under any of Do not use bottle jacks to raise the vehicle. Al-
the suspension components; doing so could ways use floor jacks. Bottle jacks can slip, allow-
cause suspension component damage. Jack ing the vehicle to fall, which could result in dam-
stands can be placed at any point below the axle, age to the vehicle, serious injury, or death.
1. Using the floor jack, raise the vehicle to remove NOTICE
any jack stands used to support the vehicle.
NOTICE: Do not place jack stands under any of
2. Slowly lower the vehicle to the ground. the suspension components; doing so could
3. Inflate the air suspension, and check for proper cause suspension component damage. Jack
operation. Refer to Group 32 in the New Casca- stands can be placed at any point below the axle,
dia Workshop Manual for instructions. including the differential area.
1. Using the floor jack, raise the vehicle to remove
Raising a Vehicle without Air any jack stands used to support the vehicle.
Suspension 2. Slowly lower the vehicle to the ground.
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, set the park-
ing brakes, and shut down the engine. Chock the
tires.
26.3
In An Emergency
Towing
WARNING
Do not tow an unbraked vehicle if the combined
weight of both vehicles is more than the sum of
the gross axle weight ratings (GAWR) of the tow-
ing vehicle. Otherwise brake capacity will be in-
adequate, which could result in personal injury or
death.
Use of Tow Hooks

Tow hooks are not designed for on-road towing of
the vehicle, but to recover and move the vehicle to a
position where it can be hooked up properly for front
or rear towing.
NOTICE
When using tow hooks to move the vehicle, do
not pass a sling (for example, a rope or chain)
from one hook to another. Known as reeving, this
practice is not permissible in most industrial ap-
plications of towing and hoisting. Reeving can
overload the hooks and result in damage to the
vehicle. See 26.3.
Front Towing Hookup

1. Disconnect the battery ground cables.
NOTICE
Failure to remove the driveline(s) or the drive
axle shafts when towing the vehicle with the rear IMPORTANT: Do not reeve when towing.
wheels on the ground could result in damage to 1. Tow Hook 2. Chain
the transmission and other parts.
Fig. 26.3, Reeving
2. If required, remove the driveline, the interaxle
driveline (if equipped), and the axle shafts for
each axle that may touch the ground during the NOTICE
towing process.
Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains
3. If the driveline(s) were removed, ensure the
could cause damage, leading to eventual frame
U-joint caps are secure so they will not come off.
failure.
For any axle shaft that has been removed, cover
4. On dual drive axles, if the vehicle is to be lifted
the ends of the hubs with metal plates or ply-
wood cut to fit the axle opening, and drilled to fit and towed, chain the forward rear-axle assembly
the axle shaft studs. This prevents lubricant from to the vehicle frame. Use protection to keep the
leaking out and will keep contaminants from get- chains from damaging the frame.
ting into and damaging the wheel bearings and
axle lubricant.
26.4
In An Emergency
NOTICE NOTICE
Before towing, failure to remove an aerodynamic New or ungreased tow hooks may be hard to in-
bumper equipped with an air dam could result in stall. Tow hooks that are not properly installed
damage to the air dam, which will impact the ve- may be damaged or break.
hicle’s aerodynamic performance.
2. Install the tow hooks onto the tow hook receivers
5. Remove the aerodynamic bumper if it is through the tow hook holes in the bumper, rotat-
equipped with an air dam. ing the hooks so the hook opening faces down.
See Fig. 26.5. Pull the tow hooks to ensure they
6. Attach the towing device.
are securely engaged in the tow hook receivers.
NOTE: Due to the many variables that exist in
towing, positioning the lifting and towing device
is the sole responsibility of the towing-vehicle
operator.
7. Lift the vehicle and secure the safety chains. If
extra towing clearance is needed, remove the
front wheels.
8. Connect the clearance lights, tail lights, and sig-
nal lights. Connect any special towing lights re-
quired by local regulations.
WARNING 06/14/2017 f130146
Failure to chock the tires or connect the tow Fig. 26.4, Tow Hooks
truck’s air brake system before releasing the
spring parking brakes could allow the disabled
vehicle to suddenly roll. This could cause prop-
erty damage or personal injury.
9. Chock the tires on the disabled vehicle and con-
nect the towing vehicle’s air brake system to the
vehicle being towed. Then, release the spring
parking brakes on the disabled vehicle and re-
move the chocks.
Front Towing Hookup With

Removable Tow Hooks
DANGER 06/14/2017 f130147
When working on the vehicle, shut down the en- Fig. 26.5, Tow Hooks Installed, Facing Down
gine, set the parking brake, and chock the tires. 3. Lower the stinger assembly so that it is level and
Before working under the vehicle, always place
approximately 1 inch (0.3 cm) off the ground.
jack stands under the frame rails to ensure the
Back the tow truck so that the crossbar with lift
vehicle can not drop. Failure to follow these
adaptors is within 6 inches (15 cm) of the Aero
steps could result in serious personal injury or
bumper. See Fig. 26.6.
death.
1. Open the hood. Remove the tow hooks, located
behind the driver’s-side bumper. See Fig. 26.4.
Close and latch the hood.
26.5
In An Emergency
06/14/2017 f130149 06/14/2017 f130150
Fig. 26.6, Positioning the Stinger Assembly Fig. 26.7, Tow Cables Connected to the Tow Hooks
NOTICE
When using tow hooks to move the vehicle, do
not pass a sling (for example, a rope or chain)
from one hook to another. Known as reeving, this
practice is not permissible in most industrial ap-
plications of towing and hoisting. Reeving can
overload the hooks and result in damage to the
vehicle. See Fig. 26.3.
4. Pull the tow cables out of the tow truck and con-
nect the tow cable lifting hooks onto the tow
hooks, then extend the recovery boom within 4 06/14/2017 f130151
to 6 inches (10 to 15 cm) of being vertical of the
Fig. 26.8, Moving the Stinger and Crossbar Under the
tow hooks. See Fig. 26.7. Bumper
5. Lift the front of the truck until there is enough
clearance for the stinger and crossbar to pass
under the bumper. See Fig. 26.8.
NOTICE
If enough clearance cannot be gained with a Reference the applicable axle manufacturer’s in-
single lift, jack stands or other means capable of formation to avoid damaging the axle when tow-
supporting the weight on the front axle must be ing the truck.
used while the cables are shortened to allow a
7. Use mid-rise or high-rise forks, or lift adaptors
second lift.
(part number 0200020) on the crossbar to pro-
vide clearance for the aerodynamic bumper. See
WARNING Fig. 26.9 and Fig. 26.10.
Failure to chock the tires or connect the tow 8. Extend the stinger and place the lift adaptors
truck’s air brake system before releasing the under the axle. Make certain the lift adaptors are
spring parking brakes could allow the disabled under the front suspension springs between the
vehicle to suddenly roll. This could cause prop- U-bolts. See Fig. 26.11 and Fig. 26.12.
erty damage or personal injury. 9. Secure the axle to the crossbar with a chain or
6. Chock the rear tires. ratchet strap.
26.6
In An Emergency
06/14/2017 f130152 06/14/2017 f130155
Fig. 26.9, Lift Adaptors Installed on the Crossbar Fig. 26.12, Stinger with Lift Adaptors Under the Axle
(tow truck shown)
wheels on the ground could result in damage to

the transmission and other parts.
10. If required, remove the driveline, the interaxle
driveline (if equipped), and the axle shafts for
each axle that may touch the ground during the
towing process.
11. Remove the tow cables from the tow hooks and
retract the recovery boom. See Fig. 26.13.
06/14/2017 f130153
Fig. 26.10, Backing the Tow Truck with Lift Adaptors on

the Crossbar
06/14/2017 f130156
Fig. 26.13, Retracting the Recovery Boom
12. Remove the tow hooks from the bumper.

13. Connect the air and electrical supply lines from
06/14/2017 f130154 the tow truck to the truck being towed.
Fig. 26.11, Positioning the Stinger with Lift Adaptors IMPORTANT: On trucks equipped with a front
Under the Axle air suspension, either air pressure must be sup-
plied to the secondary air system or the front
NOTICE suspension must be blocked to operating height
with wooden spacers and the axle chained to
Failure to remove the driveline(s) or the drive the frame to prevent damage to the truck.
axle shafts when towing the vehicle with the rear
26.7
In An Emergency
14. Release the park brake and remove the chocks • Hold down the cab with tension straps
from the rear tires. looped over the cab shocks and under the
frame rails. Failure to do so could allow the
15. Use the stinger to pull the truck close to the back
wind load to lift the cab unexpectedly, re-
of the tow truck for final towing position. See
sulting in damage to the air springs and
Fig. 26.14.
other components.
1. If the vehicle is equipped with side extenders,
and reverse towing at speeds above 45 mph (70
kph) is necessary, remove the rubber flex ex-
tenders from the side extenders.
2. If the vehicle is equipped with cab air suspen-
sion, and reverse towing at speeds above 45
mph (70 kph) is necessary, hold down the cab as
follows:
2.1 Drain the air from the cab air springs.
2.2 Loop a 2-inch (5-cm) ratchet-style tension
06/14/2017 f130157 strap (rated 2000 lb [900 kg] minimum
work load) over the top of the cab shock
Fig. 26.14, Final Towing Position and under the frame rail. See Fig. 26.16.
Tighten the strap for a snug fit. If the cab
16. Connect the safety chains. See Fig. 26.15. is equipped with two or more shocks, re-
strain the aft-most shock on each side of
the vehicle.
06/14/2017 f130158
Fig. 26.15, Safety Chains Connected on the Towed

Vehicle
Rear Towing Hookup

NOTICE 05/13/2014 f602527
Using a rear towing hookup on a vehicle Fig. 26.16, Tension Strap Installed to Hold Down the
equipped with a roof fairing could cause damage Cab
to the cab structure. 3. Place the front tires straight forward and secure
If reverse towing at speeds above 45 mph (70 the steering wheel in this position.
kph) is necessary, note the following precau- 4. Disconnect the battery ground cables.
tions:
• Remove the rubber flex extenders from the
side extenders. Failure to do so could re-
sult in the loss of the rubber flex extenders.
26.8
In An Emergency
NOTICE In Case of a Cab Fire

As quickly as possible, bring the vehicle to a safe
Failure to protect the frame rails from the chains stop, apply the parking brake, turn off the ignition,
could cause damage, leading to eventual frame and get out of the vehicle.
failure.
5. On dual drive axles, using protection to keep the
chains from damaging the vehicle frame, chain
the forward-rear drive axle to the frame.
NOTICE
Before towing, failure to remove an aerodynamic
bumper equipped with an air dam could result in
damage to the air dam, which will impact the ve-
hicle’s aerodynamic performance.
6. Remove the aerodynamic bumper if it is
equipped with an air dam.
7. Attach the towing device.
NOTE: Due to the many variables that exist in
towing, positioning the lifting and towing device
is the sole responsibility of the towing-vehicle
operator.
8. Lift the vehicle and secure the safety chains. If
extra clearance is needed, remove the bumper
extension if equipped.
9. Connect the clearance lights, taillights, and sig-
nal lights. Also connect any special towing lights
required by local regulations.
Fire in the Cab

The incidence of fire in heavy- and medium-duty
trucks is rare, according to data from the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard #302 limits the flammability
of specified materials used inside the cab, but de-
spite this, most materials can burn.
WARNING
Do not allow flames, sparks, or any other heat
sources (such as cigarettes or light bulbs) to
contact materials in the cab. Any materials in the
cab in contact with these heat sources could
cause serious personal injury or vehicle damage.
26.9
27
Telematics Data
Telematics Information: Terms of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1
Frequency Bands and Maximum Transmission Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3
Telematics Data
Telematics Information: Terms the performance, use, reliability and safe op-
eration of your Vehicle. These services are en-
of Use abled by the Telematics Information we receive
from your Vehicle and will likely be made more
Your vehicle ("Vehicle") may be equipped with one or effective in the future by the use of that Telem-
more devices that gather information described atics Information and similar information we
below regarding the Vehicle and the environment in receive from other DTNA vehicles.
which it may be operating ("Telematics Information").
The devices may periodically send Telematics Infor- • To make your Vehicle safer and to improve
mation to Daimler Truck North America LLC its performance. Depending on the type of
("DTNA"). Additionally, DTNA and its dealers may device installed on your Vehicle, DTNA may
manually retrieve Telematics Information from the periodically update your Vehicle’s on-board
devices for the purposes described below. software to improve the performance and safe
use of the Vehicle. We may need to obtain cer-
Telematics Information We Collect tain Telematics Information to ensure the effec-
tiveness of these updates.
and Why We Collect It
• To monitor and manage the health and effi-
The Telematics Information we collect may in- ciency of your Vehicle. Telematics Informa-
clude, but is not limited to, the following information from your Vehicle may be used by DTNA
tion about the Vehicle: and its affiliates, dealers and service providers
• performance to diagnose and resolve problems with your
Vehicle more effectively and to help you main-
• operation tain it.
• location • To improve your customer service experi-
• speed ence. Telematics Information may be used by
DTNA and its affiliates, dealers and service
• trips; providers to provide you a more efficient and
• travel history effective customer service experience in con-
junction with Vehicle service, maintenance,
• stop and idle times field service campaigns and recalls.
• fuel consumption • For product development and product im-
• fault codes provement. Telematics Information may be
analyzed and used to identify and resolve per-
• diagnostic information formance and safety issues and to develop
improvements to our products that will benefit
• steering performance
you and our future customers.
• braking performance
• To develop more meaningful product mar-
• air bag deployment keting. Telematics Information may be used to
provide more customized and meaningful infor-
• seatbelt use mation to our customers regarding products
• decelerations and services that best satisfy their operational
requirements and improve the performance of
• other information relating to the performance, their businesses.
operation, health and safety of the Vehicle.
• To help match our customers with the right
DTNA gathers this information to improve the perfor- products. Telematics Information may be used
mance, operation, health and safety of your Vehicle to develop future products and services that
and other DTNA vehicles and products. Information best satisfy the operational requirements of our
is gathered: customers.
• To enable your subscription services. DTNA
and other third party service providers have
developed a variety of applications and ser-
vices that are now available to you to optimize
27.1
Telematics Data
What We Do with Telematics authorized use, access, disclosure, distribution, loss

or alteration.
Information and Who We Share It
With Your Consent
DTNA may use Telematics Information for any pur- By continuing to provide to us, or allowing us to re-
pose allowed by law, including but not limited to ceive or retrieve, Telematics Information through the
using the information for any of the purposes de- devices on your Vehicle, you consent to its collection
scribed in this chapter. DTNA may share Telematics and use as described in this chapter.
Information with its service providers, affiliates, sub-
Although some information may be transferred to and
sidiaries, dealers and distributors, but only for lawful
business purposes. This may include third parties processed in countries without laws providing the
same level of data protection as your country, our
who process information on behalf of DTNA, third
parties who you authorize directly to receive informa- use and disclosure of your information is subject to
these terms of use regardless of where your informa-
tion from us, and law enforcement agencies pursuant
tion is transferred.
to applicable law.
If you have subscribed to a subscription service
DTNA may also combine Telematics Information it
obtains from your Vehicle with data from others, ano- such as Virtual Technician or Detroit Analytics,
the Telematics Terms and Conditions for that ser-
nymize and de-identify that aggregated data ("Aggre-
gated Data"), and use and disclose that Aggregated vice will apply to DTNA’s collection, storage, use
and sharing of the data covered by those Terms
Data and derivatives of it indefinitely and for any pur-
pose whatsoever, including sharing it with third par- and Conditions.
ties for any purpose without restriction. You will not
have any rights in any Aggregated Data or any de- Your Rights
rivatives or proceeds of it. DTNA will be the exclusive You may ask DTNA to discontinue receiving and re-
owner of all rights, title and interests in and to all Ag- trieving Telematics Information from the devices on
gregated Data. DTNA shall not have any obligation to your Vehicle. If you do so, you will be unable to re-
provide any Aggregated Data to you or to compen- ceive telematics subscription services relating to your
sate you for any use or disclosure of any Aggregated Vehicle and unable to remotely receive important Ve-
Data. hicle software updates, among other things. If you
are interested in that option, please contact DTNA at:
Collection Method [email protected].
The Telematics Information may be transmitted auto-
matically or manually from the devices on your Ve- Privacy Statement Changes
hicle to DTNA or Detroit Diesel Corporation (DDC) DTNA reserves the right to amend these terms of
through diagnostic tools, including but not limited to use from time to time. Changes will be reflected in
DDC DiagnosticLink. the online version of this document, which can also
be found at: https://dtnacontent-
Safeguards dtna.prd.freightliner.com/content/public/dtna-
DTNA will use reasonable data security systems and servicelit/TechLit-
procedures in an effort to protect Telematics Informa- Homepage.html?make=freightliner. By continuing
to provide to us, or allowing us to receive or re-
tion from unauthorized use, access, disclosure, distri-
trieve, Telematics Information through the de-
bution, loss or alteration. We do this through physi-
vices on your Vehicle, you consent to and accept
cal, electronic and procedural safeguards that are
those changes.
designed to protect the confidentiality, integrity and
availability of Telematics Information. However, no NOTE: These terms of use do not apply to after-
security system is perfect. DTNA cannot guarantee market telematics devices that may be provided
that Telematics Information will not be hacked, de- by others or configured to send information to
leted, intercepted or altered. someone other than DTNA or its affiliates,
DTNA will also require other parties to whom Telem- dealers or service providers.
atics Information is disclosed to take reasonable
steps to protect the Telematics Information from un-
27.2
Telematics Data
Frequency Bands and

Maximum Transmission Output
Wireless Applications on the Vehicle
Frequency Bands and Maximum Transmission Output
Component Service Frequency Band Transmission Output
LTE FDD Band 2
LTE FDD Band 4
4G
LTE FDD Band 5 0.25 W (Power Class 3)
LTE
LTE FDD Band 7
LTE FDD Band 17
UMTS Band 1
UMTS Band 2
3G
UMTS Band 4 0.25 W (Power Class 3)
CTP2019DTNA UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA
UMTS Band 5
UMTS Band 8
GSM 850 MHz
2 W (Power Class 4)
E-GSM 900 MHz
2G GSM/GPRS/EDGE
DCS 1800 MHz
1 W (Power Class 1)
PCS 1900 MHz
WLAN (IEEE 802.11b) 2.4 GHz band 20 mW
WLAN (IEEE 802.11g/n) 2.4 GHz band 20 mW
Bluetooth 2.4 GHz band 10 mW
GPS / GLONASS 1575 and 1602 MHz Receive only
Table 27.1, Frequency Bands and Maximum Transmission Output
The Common Telematics Platform

The Detroit Connect Platform is the connectivity
module of Daimler Truck North America. It receives
and transmits data in real time and is the interface
for all connectivity-related services. Both the Detroit
Connect Platform and a valid agreement is required
for use of the Detroit Connect services.
Vehicle antennas (WLAN/BT/CellularNetworks) are
located inside and behind the dashboard on the pas-
senger side. In both locations, the shortest possible
distance between the antennas and any human or
animal body part inside the vehicle cabin is greater
than 8 in (20 cm).
Therefore Daimler Truck North America LLC declares
that the radio equipment type CTP2019DTNA is in
compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
27.3
Index
Subject Page Subject Page

A Selected Gear (Detroit and
Eaton Transmissions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3
Accessory Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Suggested Shift (Detroit and
Eberspaecher (Espar) Eaton Transmissions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 AutoVue® Lane Departure
Webasto Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
Adjustable Steering Column Alert Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16 Cleaning the Windshield in
Air Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 the Area of the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
Automatic Slack Adjusters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Intentional Lane Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
Brake System General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1 SafetyDirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
Brake System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 System Offline Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22
Allison Automatic Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12 System Startup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.20
Automatic Mode (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.13 Temporarily Disabling the
General Information, Allison System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12 Unintentional Lane
Low (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.14 Departure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.21
Manual Mode (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.13
Operation Tips, Allison
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12
B
Transmission Prognostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.14 Back-of-Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Analog Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Accessing Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Air Intake Restriction Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20 Exiting Back-of-Cab Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Application Air Pressure
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.20
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21
C
Drive Axle Oil Temperature Cab Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.21 Cup Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.22 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Engine Oil Temperature Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 Radio and CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Fuel/Diesel Exhaust Fluid Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
(DEF) Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Universal Serial Bus (USB)
Primary and Secondary Air Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Pressure Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.23 Cab Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24 Fan Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Suspension Air Pressure Mode Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24 Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1
Transmission Fluid Cab Load Disconnect Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 Battery Contactor Control
Turbocharger Boost Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 Cab Washing and Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25 Cab-to-Sleeper Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
Automated/Automatic Canada Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2
Transmission Shift Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Care of Chrome Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Direction Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Care of Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 Care of Fiberglass Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1
Gear Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Gear Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Daily Pretrip Inspection
Mode Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.1 Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Power Up and Shift into Monthly Post-trip Inspection
Gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.2 Checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2
I-1
Index

Weekly Post-trip Inspection Driver Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1 Tailgate Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16 DA 5.0 Lane Departure Warning
Cab Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16 (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Sleeper Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18 Activating or Deactivating
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 Lane Departure Warning
Clutch Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
Clutch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1 Cleaning the Windshield in
the Area of the Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Functions and Activation
Component GWR Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Conditions for Lane
Component Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9
Customer Assistance Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
Safety Notes on Lane
D Departure Warning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8
DA 5.0 Side Guard Assist
DA 4.0 Collision Mitigation (SGA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
System (CMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Activating or Deactivating
Active Brake Assist (ABA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 Side Guard Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
Adaptive Cruise Control Activation Conditions of Side
(ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Guard Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
Driver Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
Tail Gate Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Monitoring Range of the
DA 4.0 Lane Departure Warning Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
(LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 Right-Turn Warning for
Activating or Deactivating Stationary Obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
Lane Departure Warning Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10
(LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 SGA Indicator Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11
Lane Departure Warning Warning When Changing
(LDW) Functions and Lanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
Activation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Warning When Turning Right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12
Lane Departure Warning DA 5.0 Traffic Sign Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
(LDW) Safety Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9
Activating or Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.14
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8
DA 5.0 Active Lane Assist
(ALA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.15 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
Active Lane Assist (ALA) Traffic Sign Display
Activation Conditions and Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 DA 5.0 Vehicle Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Active Lane Assist (ALA) Driver Facing Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.17 Multipurpose Camera 2
Active Lane Assist Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 (MPC2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Active Lane Assist Safety Rain Light Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.16 Daily Pretrip Inspections and
DA 5.0 Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1
Activating or Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.20 Cab Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5
Function and Activation Engine Compartment
Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 Saddle Tank Areas
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.19 Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4
DA 5.0 Collision Mitigation Suspension and Slack
System (CMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 Adjuster Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1
Active Brake Assist (ABA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Wheel and Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1
Adaptive Cruise Control Dashboard and Instrument
(ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2 Panel Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
Dash-Mounted Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
I-2
Index

Antilock Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 ICC5 B-Panel Chassis
Parking Brake Control Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 Status Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Trailer Air Supply Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 ICC5 B-Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39
Trailer Brake Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 ICC5 Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32
Detroit Assurance 4.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Lift Axle Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
Multipurpose Camera 1 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.41
(MPC1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38
Detroit™ Automated Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Transmissions (DT12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 Optimized Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Auto Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.8 Primary and Secondary Air
Clutch Abuse Alerts and Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36
Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.40
Clutch Abuse Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5 Speedometer and
Creep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Descent Control Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 Suspension Air Pressure
Driving Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.3 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
eCoast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.4 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Engine Overspeed Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37
Hill Descent Upshift Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.6 Trailer Application Air
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Hill Start Aid (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.5
Trailer Suspension Air
Transmission Low Air Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.7
Transmission Oil
Diesel Exhaust Fluid and Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7 Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34
DEF Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 Turbo Boost Pressure
DEF Warnings and Engine Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 Digital Gauges and System
Diesel Exhaust Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7 Monitors: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Fuel/DEF Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.8 Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Digital Gauges and System Application Air Pressure
Monitors: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.32 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Active Driver Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Application Air Pressure Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.38 DEF and Diesel Particulate
Base ICC5 A-Panel Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 Filter Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Climate Control Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42 Drive Axle Oil Temperature
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33 Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 Eco Driver Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Engine Idle Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 Engine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Digital Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.39 Engine Oil Temperature
DPF Soot Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Drive Axle Oil Temperature ICUC Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 ICUC Vehicle Operations:
Eco Driver Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.37 Vehicle Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Engine Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.33 Maintenance System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Engine Oil Temperature Optimized Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.34 Other ICUC Gauges and
Floating ICC5 A-Panel Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15
Gauges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.36 Suspension Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
Fuel Level Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35 Tire Pressure Monitoring
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
I-3
Index

Transmission Oil Emergency Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 Emergency Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6
Transmission Prognostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16 Emergency Starting With
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 Jumper Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1
Turbocharger Boost Emissions Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 Aftertreatment System
Door Locks and Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 Indicators Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
Driver Display Overview: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29 Certified Clean Idle Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7
Basic ICC5 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30 Noise Emission Control
ICC5 Driver Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
ICC5 Steering Wheel Vehicle Emission Control
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.30 Information Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5
Driver Display Overview: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Engine Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
ICUC Alert Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 Engine Brake Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.7
ICUC Driver Display Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 Engine Idle Limiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
ICUC Time and Alarm Idle Shutdown Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Engine Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Driver-Controlled Differential Cold-Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Lock (DCDL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2 Engine Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
DCDL Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2 High-Altitude Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
Differential Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2 Normal Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3
Single Drive Axles with Safety and Environmental
Traction Equalizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3 Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Dual HVAC System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Engine Protection—Warning
Dual HVAC Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 and Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
Engine Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4
E Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1
Cold-Weather Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Eaton Automated Starting After Extended
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.9 Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2
Auto Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11 Enhanced Stability Control
Auto Start Gear Selection (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.19
and Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11 EPA-Regulated Emissions
Automatic Mode (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.9 Aftertreatment Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1
Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11 ATS Warning Lamps and
Clutch Abuse Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.10 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
Coasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11 EPA10 and Newer Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2
Creep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.10 Euro V Emission Compliant
Engines for Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2
Engine Overspeed
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.7
Hill Start Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.10 Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.2
Load-Based Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11 External Cab Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Low (L) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.9 A-Pillar Turning Vane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Manual Mode (M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.9
Shuttle Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11 F
Skip Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Transmission Low Air Standard Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.11
Fifth Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Transmission Prognostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.12
Fifth Wheel Slide Control
Eaton® Fuller® Manual Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
Trailer Auxiliary Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.15
Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1
Transmission Operation Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1
I-4
Index

Fontaine and Holland Fifth Horn Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Wheels Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1 Air Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Jost Fifth Wheel Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3 Electric Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Fifth Wheel Slide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.6
Air Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Slide Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20.8
20.6
I
Fifth Wheel Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.4 Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Air-Actuated Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.5 Infotainment: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Manual Uncoupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.4 Connecting and
Fifth Wheels, General Disconnecting a Phone
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1 Using Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.43
Fifth Wheel Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.1 Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1 General ICC5 Infotainment
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Fire in the Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.9
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.51
In Case of a Cab Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.9
Phone Contacts and Call List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.47
Fluids Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.49
Frequency Bands and
Maximum Transmission Smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3 Sound System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.50
The Common Telematics System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.42
Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3 Using a Mobile Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.45
Wireless Applications on the Infotainment: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3 General ICUC Infotainment
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
G ICUC Audio Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
ICUC Telephone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
Grab Handles and Access Navigation and Infotainment
Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............... 2.2 Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Entering the Driver Side . . . ............... 2.3 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.18
Entering the Passenger Side ............... 2.3 Instrumentation Control Unit:
Exiting the Driver Side . . . . ............... 2.3 ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.25
Exiting the Passenger Side . ............... 2.3 ICC5 Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.27
Greenhouse Gas Emissions ICC5 Steering Wheel
and Fuel Consumption Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1 ICC5 Touch Screen
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
H Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.29
Halogen Headlamps Bulb Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.28
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3
Instrumentation Control Unit:
Hazard Warning Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.1 ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Headlight Aim Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1 ICUC Screen Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Headlight Aim Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1 Ignition Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Headlight Aiming, Preliminary Software Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1
Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
High Back Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2
Interaxle Lock, Tandem Axles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Holland Trailer Coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Interaxle Lock Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Interaxle Lock Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1
Trailer Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Trailer Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1
Hood Opening and Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 L
Closing the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
Opening the Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Exterior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1
I-5
Index

Interior Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Optimized Idle® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.1
Activating Optimized Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2
M Deactivating Optimized Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reactivating Optimized Idle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3
13.3
Meritor WABCO® Antilock Optional Power Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
Braking System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.4 Inverter/Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
Automatic Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 Shore Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
ECAS Automatic Load
Transfer (ECAS only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.6
Trailer ABS Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5 P
Mexico Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Periodic Inspections and
Mexico Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Maintenance, General
Spanish Weights and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1
Measures Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 Power Steering System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 Power Takeoff (PTO) Governor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3
Monthly Post-Trip Inspections Powernet Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7
and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.12 Powertrain Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Brake Component Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.12 Aftertreatment System
Engine Compartment Regen Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7
Inspection and Axle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.13
Engine Brake Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Saddle Tank Areas
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.12 Engine Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8
Hill Start Aid Override Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Power Take-Off (PTO)
N Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Navigation System: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Transmission Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9
Current Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11
Deleting a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 R
During Route Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13
Radio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.16
General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Raising and Lowering a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2
Global Positioning System
(GPS) Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Lowering a Vehicle with Air
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3
Navigation Menu and
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Lowering a Vehicle without
Air Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3
Navigation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6
Raising a Vehicle with Air
Planning a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.10 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Raising a Vehicle without Air
Saving a Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.9 Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3
Saving a Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.11 Remote Keyless Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.14 Key Fob Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Key Fob Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
O Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
RollTek Rollover Protection
OnGuardACTIVE™ Collision System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Mitigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.22 Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Adaptive Cruise Control Inspection and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9
(ACC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.24
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Additional Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26
Collision Warning System
(CWS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23 S
Error Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.25
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1
OnGuard Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
Sears Atlas Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3
System Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.23
I-6
Index

Seat Belts and Tether Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 Telematics Information We
Seat Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Collect and Why We
Seat Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 Collect It . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1
Seat Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.18 What We Do with Telematics
Information and Who We
Seats, General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.1 Share It With . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2
Sleeper Amenities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Your Consent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2
Baggage Compartment Your Rights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Touch Screen Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Single-Finger Swipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Sleeper Access Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4
Touching and Holding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Sleeper Bunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2
Touching, Holding and
Sleeper Curtain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Moving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Sliding Side Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 Two-Finger Swipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1
Sleeper Climate Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4
Fan Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Front Towing Hookup With
Smartway Certified Parked Removable Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.5
Heater Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Front Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4
Temperature Control Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 Rear Towing Hookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.8
Sleeper Compartment Use of Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.6
Bunk Restraint Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
Bunk Restraint Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7 V
Sleeper Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Vehicle Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2
Sleeper Luggage Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Cab Electrical and Electronic
Standard Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.15 Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4
Descent Control and Velour Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3
Deceleration Modes, Chewing Gum or Wax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3
Detroit™ Engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.18
Grease and Oil-Based Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3
Intelligent Powertrain
Management (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17 Mildew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3
PasSmart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.17 Sugar and Water-Based
Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3
Steering Wheel Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
Vinyl Upholstery Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
Inspection and Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.8
Ball Point Ink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7
Chewing Gum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
Suspension Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.3
Aerodynamic Height Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Nail Polish and Nail Polish
Air Suspension Height Remover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
Control Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Ordinary Dirt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
ECAS Dash Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13
Paint, Shoe Heel Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
ECAS Remote Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.14
Shoe Polish . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1
Sulfide Stains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
The Instrumentation Control
Unit (ICU) and Fault Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.1 Tars, Asphalts, and Creosote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.2
T W
Telematics Information: Terms Warnings, Indicators, and
of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Collection Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 Audible Alerts: ICC5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Privacy Statement Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 Audible Alerts: ICUC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.52
Safeguards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 Engine Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.66
I-7
Index
Subject Page
Warnings, Indicators, and
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.53
Weekly Post-Trip Inspections
and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.9
Engine Compartment
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.9
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1
Windshield Wiper and Washer
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Wiper Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11
Wipers and the Rain/Light
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12
Z
Zonar® 2020 Tablet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.26
I-8

Foreword: Warranty Information For North America Booklet, and

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Foreword: Warranty Information For North America Booklet, and

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Foreword: Warranty Information For North America Booklet, and

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What information is contained in the owner's manual?

What information is contained in the owner's manual?

What components are customized for each vehicle?

What components are customized for each vehicle?

Foreword

Introduction The type and amount of data recorded varies de-

Customer Assistance Center Vehicles domiciled in Canada thought to have a

For more information about motor vehicle safety, French: www.tc.gc.ca/fr/services/routier

Component Information Label

09/29/2020 f080196s Fig. 1.3, Component Information Label Location

AXLES: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 CHASSIS:

Fig. 1.4, Component GWR Label (English)

EJE: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 LARGUERO:

Fig. 1.5, Component GWR Label (Spanish)

AXLES: ( 5443) 12000 ( 9072) 20000 ( 9072) 20000 CHASSIS:

Fig. 1.7, Component GWR Label

Fig. 1.8, FMVSS Vehicle Certification Label (complete vehicle)

Fig. 1.9, Spanish Weights and Measures Label

VIN/NIV: XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX CANADA CERTIFICATION DATE OF MFR: 01/20

Fig. 1.10, Canada Certification Label

INFORMACION CONTROL DE ESPECIFICACIONES DE SEGURIDAD DEL VEHICULO

Table 1.1, EPA Regulations

Emission Regulations by Model Year

A Vehicle Emission Control Information Label is lo-

Fig. 1.12, ATS Indicators, EPA10 and Newer

INFORMACION CONTROL DE EMISION DE RUIDO DEL VEHICULO

noise emission control information label. See

10/17/2016 f080201a 09/29/2020 f080207s

Certified Clean Idle Label FOR CUSTOMER

The California Air Resources Board (CARB) requires ASSISTANCE CENTER:

gines to meet CARB’s Heavy-Duty Diesel Engine 1-800-385-4357

Idling Requirement in order to limit emissions of par- 24 HRS/DAY

Certified vehicles are equipped with a label placed

Customer Assistance Label

Door Locks and Handles 1 2 3 4

Fig. 2.3, Key Fob

Entering the Passenger Side

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to exit the cab CAUTION

would going down a flight of stairs. It is easier to

Cab-to-Sleeper Access Sleeper Luggage Door

Always follow safety procedures for back-of-cab

Carrier Safety Regulations require commercial carri-

Accessing Back-of-Cab Area 1

Closing the Hood

Instrumentation Control Unit: The driver display screen provides information on

1. Speedometer 5. Engine Oil Pressure Gauge C. Vehicle Operations

Fig. 3.1, Instrument Cluster Overview - ICUC

• Speedometer and tachometer complete a full

If the ICUC receives active fault codes, it displays

7 8 9 The correct time and date is required for the follow-

1. Cruise Accelerate/Resume 7. Headlamp Interrupt** 13. Back Button

Fig. 3.4, ICUC Steering-Wheel-Mounted Switches

If a software update is interrupted, the system will

Driver Display Overview: ICUC

ICUC Alert Messages

ICUC Watch for Ice Popup

Fig. 3.6, Sample Alert Messages

Basic Information Screens

Fig. 3.8, ICUC Alarm Clock Screens